Manual Celdas 257

Rev.
12 G-F5100
1-2006 TABLE OF CONTENTS 12342
MCN2006-0001
GENERAL INFORMATION Page No.
Foreword ..........................................................................................................................................1
A. GENERAL INFORMATION..................................................................................................................2
1. Receiving and inspection.................................................................................................2
2. Packing boxes and covers...............................................................................................2
3. Shipping braces and bars ................................................................................................2
4. Maintenance and start-up services .................................................................................2
5. Parts and repair orders ....................................................................................................3
6. Storage .............................................................................................................................3
7. Storage of rubber products ..............................................................................................4
8. Field painting and welding ...............................................................................................5
B. SAFETY PROCEDURES...............................................................................................................7
INSTALLATION
A. FLOTATION CELL INSTALLATION....................................................................................................9

1. Foundation........................................................................................................................9
2. Tank and component lifting .............................................................................................10
3. Cell tank field assembly ...................................................................................................11
4. Feed box installation ........................................................................................................14
5. Connection box and discharge box installation ..............................................................14
6. Dart valve adjustment ......................................................................................................15
7. Draft tube and false bottom installation ...........................................................................16
8. Draft tube collar assembly installation ............................................................................17
9. Vertical baffle and radial launder assembly installation..................................................17
10. Mechanism assembly installation....................................................................................17
11. Belt guard installation.......................................................................................................20
12. Shave installation and alignment.....................................................................................20
13. Drive belt installation ........................................................................................................21
14. Level float assembly installation ......................................................................................22
15. Froth level sensor.............................................................................................................23
16. Electrical power and controls installation ........................................................................24
17. Final inspection before start-up .......................................................................................25
B. FINAL MECHANICAL CHECK ............................................................................................................27
LUBRICATION
A. LUBRICATION................................................................................................................................28
B. SAFETY PROCEDURES...............................................................................................................29
Rev. 12 G-F5100
MCN2006-0001
MAINTENANCE Page No.
Safety Procedures......................................................................................................................................29
A. INSPECTION AND GENERAL MAINTENANCE..........................................................................31
1. General cleaning .............................................................................................................31
2. Drive V-belt tension..........................................................................................................31
3. Lubrication ........................................................................................................................33
4. Air control assembly ........................................................................................................33
5. Dart valves and actuator assemblies ..............................................................................33
6. Regularly scheduled shutdown for inspection and maintenance...................................34
B. MECHANISM REMOVAL...............................................................................................................36
C. COMPONENT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ........................................................................39
1. The motor .........................................................................................................................39
2. Draft tuve collar assembly................................................................................................40
3. Air control assembly.........................................................................................................40
4. Hood sectors ....................................................................................................................41
5. Disperser ..........................................................................................................................41
6. Star rotor...........................................................................................................................42
7. Fasteners torque specifications.......................................................................................44
OPERATION
A. WEMCO SMARTCELL FLOTATION MACHINES .......................................................................46

1. The flotation machine - general description ....................................................................46
2. The mechanism................................................................................................................47
3. The tank and control boxes .............................................................................................48
B. SMARTCELL LEVEL CONTROLS................................................................................................49
1. Ultrasonic level sensor system ........................................................................................50
2. Dart valves........................................................................................................................50
3. Embedded expert control.................................................................................................51
C. START-UP AND OPERATION ......................................................................................................51
D. SHUT DOWN..................................................................................................................................53
1. Planned shut down...........................................................................................................53
2. Unplanned shut down ......................................................................................................54
Rev. 12 G-F5100
MCN2006-0001
Page No
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................................................55
OFFICES ......................................................................................................................................................59
MECHANICAL WARRANTY ......................................................................................................................60
DATA SHEET …………………………………………………………………………………………………..61
PARTS LIST
PL-12342-257 Rev. E
DRAWINGS
12342ME01DG001 (rev D) General Arrangement

12342ME01DG003 (rev E) General Arrangement
BAP2080-1025 (rev B) Tank Complete
BAP2080-1010 (rev B) Tank Complete
12342ME01EN05 (rev 2) Assembly Draft Tube 257m3 Cell
12342ME01DG002 (rev D) General Arrangement Roughers
12342ME01DG005 (rev C) Feed Box Arrangement
12342ME01DG006 (rev C) General Arrangement Circular Connection Box
12342ME01DG007 (rev B) Platform Arrangement
12342ME01DG008 (rev C) Platform Arrangement
12342ME01EN001 (rev A) General Assembly
12342ME01EN013 (rev A) Mechanism Assembly
SP1123394 (rev 0) Radial Launder Assy
12342ME01EN007 (rev D) Circular Box Assembly Details
12342ME01EN002 (rev D) Mechanism Assy, 18” Dart Valve
12342ME01EN014 (rev B) Drive Assembly
1108838 (rev B) Crowder and Standpipe Assembly
1193075 (rev A) Air Inlet Assembly
1121187 (rev 2) Level Float Assembly
12342ME01EN004 (rev C) Platform Assembly
12342ME01EN003 (rev C) Platform Assembly
12342ME01EN006 (rev 1) Plano de Ensamble Guarda Correas
12342ME01EN008 (rev C) Feed Box Arrangement
12342ME01EN010 (rev A) Cable Tray Assembly
12342ME01EN011 (rev A) Cable Tray Assembly
12342IN00PD001 (rev D) P&ID
Rev. 12 G-F5100
MCN2006-0001
ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT
Motor: Reliance ..................................................................................................................... TAB 1

(Part No. 1193036-01)
Reliance A-C Induction Motor Test Reports
Reliance A-C Induction Motor Data Transmittal and Certification
Reliance A-C Induction Motor Performance Data and Curves
Reliance A-C Induction Motor Dimension Diagram
Reliance A-C Induction Motor Connecting Diagram
Reliance A-C Induction Motor Service Bulletin
Reliance A-C Induction Motor Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual
Reducer: Flender .................................................................................................................. TAB 2

(Part No. 1191775-01)
Flender Reducer Operating Instructions
Flender Reducer Lubrication Instructions
Actuator: SMC Pneumatics................................................................................................... TAB 3

(Part No. 12342-ILIST)
SMC Pneumatics Air Cylinder Data Sheets
Fisher Digital Valve Controller Instruction Manual
Filter Regulator: Fisher Controls ........................................................................................... TAB 4

(Part No. W182169)
Fisher Controls Filter Regulator Instruction Manual
Ultra-Sonic Sensor: Endress & Hauser ................................................................................ TAB 5

(Part No. W8017722A1)
Endress & Hauser Sensor Technical Information

Endress & Hauser Sensor Operating Instructions
FINAL MECHANICAL CHECKLIST

Rev. 12 G-F5100
1-2006 GENERAL INFORMATION 12342
MCN2006-0001 1
FOREWORD
In keeping with the FLSmidth Minerals S.A. commitment to provide the latest technology and
improvements in its products, FLSmidth Minerals S.A. is also committed to providing the
highest level of service and helping you solve your process problems.
Accordingly, if FLSmidth Minerals S.A. can help in the operation of your flotation equipment,
feel free to contact us at (801) 526-2000, FAX (801) 526-2001. If you have any suggestions or
comments that will help us serve you better, please forward them to us.
To ensure you receive the full benefits of proper installation, maintenance and operation of the
WEMCO Flotation Machines, we ask you to thoroughly read and familiarize yourself with the
instructions in this manual. Refer to the Table of Contents at the front of the manual.
The equipment, including the accessory equipment furnished but not built by FLSmidth Minerals
S.A., must be stored, installed, operated, and maintained according to the manufacturer's
instructions to ensure warranty coverage.
The instructions in this manual are based on information available at the time of issue of this
manual. The right is reserved to make subsequent changes to the instructions without obligation
to replace existing copies.
Documents, drawings, technical manuals and all other information contained in this manual,
provided in conjunction with the purchase of FLSmidth Minerals S.A. products and services, are
the property of FLSmidth Minerals S.A. and are confidential and may not be made public or
copied.
FLSmidth Minerals S.A. will not furnish editable electronic copies of any data and/or drawings
at any time.
FLSmidth Minerals S.A. accepts no liability whatsoever for unauthorized changes and/or
alterations to the data provided.
English is the governing language. When manuals are provided in both English and any
language other than English, THE NON-ENGLISH TRANSLATION IS PROVIDED ONLY
AS A CONVENIENCE. FLSmidth Minerals S.A. shall not be liable for damages caused
by errors in translation. The English translation will govern in case of minor discrepancies. In
the event of major discrepancies, notify your FLSmidth Minerals S.A. representative
immediately. Refer to the Offices page in this manual for applicable address and telephone
number.
Copyright
For confidential use only, not for circulation, distribution or reproduction without prior permission in
writing. Copyright 2006 by GL&V. All Rights Reserved.
Rev. 12 G-F5100
MCN2006-0001 2
A. General Information
1. Receiving and Inspection
Although all possible precautions are taken to protect the equipment against
damage or losses during shipment, before accepting delivery, check all items
against the packing list. In case of shortages or evidence of physical damage,
immediately notify the carrier.
Notify FLSmidth Minerals S.A. within 7 days (maximum) in case of shortages or

discrepancies, according to the packing list. If not notified, FLSmidth Minerals
S.A. cannot be responsible for replacing those items. Keep a record of all claims
and correspondence. Photographs are recommended.
2. Packing Boxes and Covers
Do not remove protective covers unless there are indications of damage. Boxes
opened for inspection and inventory should be carefully repacked to ensure
protection of the contents or else the parts should be packaged and stored in a safe
place. Examine all packing boxes, wrappings and covers for items attached to
them, especially if they are to be discarded. Refer to the Storage Instructions.
3. Shipping Braces and Bars
Support braces, bars, banding, etc., used for shipping, should not be removed
until necessary. Shipping braces are normally, but not always, marked or painted
to show they are only temporary shipping supports.
4. Maintenance and Start-up Services
Experienced FLSmidth Minerals S.A. Engineers and service personnel are

available to advise in the operation and maintenance of this equipment. They
offer the benefits of their technical know-how and firsthand knowledge of the
equipment, plus the backing of FLSmidth Minerals S.A.’s entire engineering and
research facilities.
They can instruct on proper operating and maintenance, advice on trouble

shooting, or solve your process problems. If you should want such assistance,
contact us at (801) 526-2000 [USA] or FAX (801) 526-2001 or call your
FLSmidth Minerals S.A. representative, referring to the Offices page.
Copyright
Rev. 12 G-F5100
MCN2006-0001 3
5. Parts and Repair Orders
To make sure you receive the right replacement parts for your equipment and
avoid delay, it is important to give the following information with each order:
a. Size and type of unit: These are found on the cover page of the manual
and in the Parts List.
b. Customer SO number: This is found on the Parts List Index and

throughout the Parts List.
c. Part number and description: These are listed in the Parts List for each
item.
Send your parts orders to FLSmidth Minerals S.A., referring to the offices page in
this manual.
6. Storage
When the equipment is not to be installed immediately, proper storage is

important to ensure warranty protection.
a. Store motors, if shipped separately, in a dry, ventilated building if

possible. Refer to the Motor Manufacturer's Instructions. If stored out
doors, cover with a tarpaulin to protect against rain, moisture and dust.
b. Store the drive mechanisms by elevating them on blocks, etc., above the
ground level and cover with tarpaulins.
c. A suitable corrosion inhibitive agent should be applied to all surfaces

subject to rust or corrosion, if the storage will be more than 2 months or
under adverse conditions.
d. Check for the formation of rust, especially on bright or unpainted steel

surfaces. Remove rust or corrosion and apply a suitable corrosion
inhibitor.
e. Refer to Storage Of Rubber Products below.
Copyright
Rev. 12 G-F5100
MCN2006-0001 4
7. Storage of Rubber Products
Rubber products in storage can be adversely affected by the following:

temperature, humidity, ozone, sunlight, oils, solvents, corrosive liquids and
fumes, insects and rodents, and radiation.
a. Rubber parts should be protected from the sun and from physical damage
by objects that can cut or tear.
b. The warehousing area should be relatively cool, dark, and free from
dampness and mildew. All rubber products should be on a first-in, first-
out basis since even under these conditions an unusual length of time in
storage can result in the deterioration of certain products.
c. Rubber products should not be stored under conditions of high or low

humidity.
d. The ideal storage temperature for rubber products is 50 to 70qF (10 to

21qC) with a maximum limit of 100qF (38qC). If stored below 32qF
(0qC), some products may become stiff and should be warmed before
being placed in service. Rubber products should not be stored near
sources of heat, such as radiators and base heaters.
e. To protect against the adverse effects of ozone, rubber products should

not be stored near electrical equipment that may generate ozone and
should not be stored for any lengthy period in geographical areas of
known high ozone concentrations. Exposure to direct and reflected
sunlight should also be avoided.
f. Whenever feasible, rubber products should be stored in their original

shipping containers, especially when such containers are wooden crates or
cardboard cartons, since this will provide protection against the
deteriorating effects of oils, solvents, and corrosive liquids and will also
afford some protection against ozone and sunlight.
g. Since certain rodents and insects thrive on rubber products, adequate

protection should be provided against them.
Copyright
Rev. 12 G-F5100
MCN2006-0001 5
8. Field Painting and Welding
If a protective coating (paint, rubber, etc.) is to be field applied to the mechanism,

it may need to be applied to some parts before they are installed. Parts that must
be coated before installation are those that would be inaccessible after installation.
Hold back paint 3” from all field welds. Study Assembly and Erection drawings
carefully and determine field welded areas in question before painting.
WARNING: The fumes given off during welding and cutting can be injurious
to the operator's health. Some fumes, such as those produced
when working with Zinc, Cadmium and painted surfaces can be
toxic
Copyright
Rev. 12 G-F5100
MCN2006-0001 6
B. Safety Procedures
Refer to "Safety Procedures" on a following page.
Copyright
Rev. A G1-D19
11-96 SAFETY PROCEDURES 12342
MCN96-0704 7
SAFETY STATEMENT
No personnel, authorized or unauthorized, should depend wholly on safety devices to prevent

accidents. Safety features and devices are meant only to supplement proper, careful, and safe
practices on the part of the individual.
WARNING: If the safety procedures given in this manual are compromised or

ignored, severe personal injury or death may occur. Safety
practices accepted by the industry, as well as those dictated by the
responsible regulatory agencies must be followed.
PERSONNEL SAFETY WARNINGS
WARNING: Use extreme care when working around rotating or other moving parts, to prevent
injuries to yourself or others. Anyone entering the area of this equipment must be
wearing adequate safety equipment such as safety glasses, safety shoes, hard hat,
etc.
WARNING: Keep foreign objects, hands, etc. away from moving parts (belts, sheaves). Do
not operate equipment if guards, electrical covers or other safety devices have
been removed.
WARNING: Lock out power from electrical equipment using a manual breaker; disconnect
switch or lockout key before starting any work or maintenance on the equipment.
Lock and tag a disconnect switch so it cannot be closed.
WARNING: Experience with, or understanding of, this equipment is essential for the safe
disassembly and repair of the equipment. Therefore, in case of a question on how
to safely proceed, contact FLSmidth Minerals S.A. immediately.
Copyright
Rev. A G1-D19
MCN96-0704 8
WARNING: The fumes given off during welding and cutting can be injurious to the operator’s
health. Some fumes, such as those produced when working with Zinc, Cadmium
and painted surfaces can be toxic.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D319
1-2006 INSTALLATION 12342
MCN2006-0039 9
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS AND SUPPLIES (not by FLSmidth Minerals S.A.)

x Belt Tension Measurement Tool
x Transit
x Torque Wrench
x Alignment String
x 4 Small Alignment Blocks
x Machinist Level
x “Never Seize” Type Compound
x Welding Equipment
x Lifting Equipment
FLOTATION CELL INSTALLATION
The tanks will be field installed in position, according to the orientation on the General
Arrangement drawings. The connection boxes will be installed in sequence with the cells.
Note: Refer to the General Arrangement drawings located in the drawings section of
this manual for required tank cell and connection box orientation and assembly
sequence. It is very important to match component tag numbers with the
assembly drawing and parts list.
Note: The installation must be done in accordance with the assembly drawings and
parts lists, copies of which are contained in this manual. In the event of
discrepancies between the drawings and instructions, the drawings govern in all
cases. Major discrepancies or any questions should be referred to your FLSmidth
Minerals S.A. representative or the FLSmidth Minerals S.A. Customer Service
Department, Salt Lake City, Utah, U.S.A.
1. Foundation
Refer to the Anchor Arrangement and General Arrangement drawings for anchor
bolt pattern details, supported tank bottom details, elevations and spacing
requirements.
a. The foundation must support the full operating weight and overturning
moment of the equipment according to the "Design/Load Data" Table on
the General Arrangement drawing.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D319
MCN2006-0039 10
b. The foundation tank must be level within ±3 mm (±1/8") overall. A level

mounting surface will save leveling time later when the tanks are
installed.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D319
MCN2006-0039 11
2. Tank and Component Lifting
WARNING: Use extreme care when lifting structural components, to prevent

injuries to yourself or others. Anyone entering the area of this
equipment must be wearing adequate safety equipment such as
safety glasses, safety shoes, hard hat, etc.
WARNING: STAND CLEAR AS THE EQUIPMENT IS LIFTED
CAUTION: All rigging and lifting must be done by experienced personnel

who are fully trained in the proper procedures for rigging and
lifting of large structural components.
CAUTION: Make sure the rigging and hoist equipment are of adequate
capacity.
a. The tank cells, internal components, feed box, connection boxes,

discharge box and mechanism components will be shipped separately for
field assembly.
b. Check the crane and rigging capacities to be sure they are capable of
supporting the weight of the equipment as given on the parts list.
c. Before each component or assembly is removed from the carrier, check to

be sure the blocking, bracing and banding securing it to the carrier have
been removed and it is ready for moving.
WARNING: Do not remove the internal blocking, bracing or any other

supporting or protecting materials until the tank installation
is completed.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D319
MCN2006-0039 12
d. Use multiple point lifting whenever possible.
e. When lifting structural members of this equipment, avoid twisting or

bending the members. Use spreader beams, as necessary, to fully support
the pieces as they are lifted.
f. Make sure the equipment being lifted or the lifting equipment cannot
come into contact with overhead power lines, etc.
g. Lift the equipment an inch or two off the carrier to be sure it is free to be
moved and balanced correctly. Keep it level at all times during the lifting.
It may be necessary to use additional snubber cable to stabilize the unit.
h. Do not bounce the equipment or move it in jerks and never allow it to

strike the ground, foundation or other objects.
3. Cell Tank Field Assembly
a. Referring to the above lifting procedures, position the tank bottom

segments on sufficient blocking or a support fixture (not by FLSmidth
Minerals S.A.) that will allow enough room for field assembly and
welding from below.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D319
MCN2006-0039 13
Figure 1.
b. Install the support beams on the tank rim, as shown on the Tank
Assemblies drawing. Secure the fasteners.
c. Using multiple points lifting techniques, lift the tank off the temporary
support structure by the support beams, and set it into its final position.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D319
MCN2006-0039 14
d. Install the rubber hoses over the draft tube support pipes (part of tank
bottom) and mount it to the tank bottom, as required.
e. Check tank level in two directions (90o) side to side. The tank must be
level within ±10 mm (±3/8") overall. Contact FLSmidth Minerals S.A. if
the launders do not meet these tolerances. Refer to Figure 2.
f. Check level of the top of the support beams above the tank connection.
The four locations should be level within ±1/16 (1.6mm). If the four
locations are out tolerance, adjust with shims. Secure the beam-to-tank
fasteners.
5
3
Figure 2
1 - Radial launder 3 – Weir 5 – Level

2 – Peripheral launder 4 - Tank wall
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D319
MCN2006-0039 15
4. Feed Box Installation
a. Referring to the Final Assembly drawing, apply a 6mm bead of specified

urethane sealant to the surface of the feed box-to-tank connection flange
on the first tank cell.
b. When the sealant becomes tacky, install the gasket on the tank flange. It
must run the full length of a flange, inside the bolt holes on the sides, and
outside the bolt holes on the top and bottom, as shown on the Final
Assembly drawing. No gaps, wrinkles, or overlaps are allowed.
c. Run a 6mm” bead of sealant over the feed box surface of the gasket
installed in Step B.
d. Bring the feed box into contact with the first tank cell. The surfaces will
bond on contact. Bolt the flanges of the feed box and first tank cell
together with the specified capscrews, nuts and washers.
e. Snug tighten all capscrews and nuts initially, then final tighten all
fasteners equally. If the flanged surfaces do not contact when placed
together, they must be drawn together with the capscrews and nuts.
Note: During initial start-up, small leaks at the flanges and connections may be
found. Normally, these will quickly be sealed as they fill with fines after
start-up.
5. Connection Box and Discharge Box Installation
WARNING: Use extreme care when lifting structural components, to prevent

injuries to yourself or others. Anyone entering the area of this
equipment must be wearing adequate safety equipment such as
safety glasses, safety shoes, hard hat, etc.
CAUTION: All rigging and lifting must be done by experienced personnel

who are fully trained in the proper procedures for rigging and
lifting of large structural components.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D319
MCN2006-0039 16
WARNING: STAND CLEAR AS THE EQUIPMENT IS LIFTED
CAUTION: Make sure the rigging and hoist equipment are of adequate
capacity.
a. Lift the connection box using lifting lugs on the circular box upper
housing.
b. Set the connection box in position orienting as shown on the drawings.

Each box has two connections. The lower connection is made with a
flange, and the upper connection is flanged with an expansion joint.
Temporarily position the adjustable leveling legs to align the lower
connection to the flange on the third tank cell.
c. Make the lower connection. Make sure that each of the leveling legs is in
contact with the foundation and adjust if necessary. Orient the upper
housing as shown on the General Arrangement drawing. Connect the
adjustable upper flanged connection, using the circular expansion joint, as
shown on the Final Assembly drawing. Tighten the flange bolts evenly in
a cross diameter sequence, making sure the flange faces are in square
alignment and the sealing surfaces are evenly compressed to provide a
positive seal.
d. Install the discharge box, referring to the above procedures.
6. Dart Valve Adjustment
The valve assemblies will be shipped in place in the connection and discharge boxes, but
the actuator assemblies may require field installation.
a. Referring to the General Assembly drawings and actuator manufacturer’s

instructions, mount the actuator to the actuator support on the connection
or discharge box.
b. Install the bellows assembly around the dart valve upper shaft section, as
shown on the Assembly drawing.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D319
MCN2006-0039 17
c. Connect the clevis to the top of the valve rod.
d. Connect the actuator arm to the clevis.
WARNING: If the mechanism is installed, the

electrical power to the rotor must be shut off and locked out
before proceeding with this procedure.
e. Connect the control air and electrical wiring to the actuator, referring to
the manufacturer's instructions and the Assembly Drawings.
f. Extend the valve rod with the actuator to check the dart valves extension
and centering in the grommet plate (surrounding the bottom openings).
g. Check the dart valves as they slowly go down, to be sure they enter and
seat concentrically in the grommets.
h. The valve rods must be perpendicular and centered over the grommet. If
the dart valve is off center, adjust the rod for plumb by adjusting the valve
rod guide assembly in its slotted holes. Make sure the fasteners are secure
after adjustment.
i. Recheck the valve for seating. Also, make sure the conical dart valve lock
nuts are secure against the valve and valve plate.
7. Draft Tube and False Bottom Installation
a. Referring to the part numbers on the Tank Assemblies drawing, place the
hose sections in position over the draft tube support pipes (part of tank
bottom).
b. Set the nylon washers on top of the draft tube support pipes, using a small
amount of silicone adhesive to hold the washers in position. Referring to
the above lifting procedures, place the draft tube and false bottom in place
in the tank, orienting as shown on the Tank Assembly drawing.
c. Mount the draft tube on top of the false bottom and to the draft tube
support pipes, using the specified capscrews and washers.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D319
MCN2006-0039 18
d. Mount the false bottom tabs in in a similar manner, as shown on the Tank
Assembly drawing.
e. Check the draft tube for centering in the tank and adjust, as necessary.
Secure all mounting capscrews.
8. Draft Tube Collar Assembly Installation
a. Referring to the Tank Assemblies drawing, mount the split draft tube
collar assembly in position on the draft tube, using the specified fasteners.
b. Center the fasteners on the slots for initial operation.
9. Vertical Baffle and Radial Launder Assembly Installation
a. Install the weirs, referring to the Radial Launders, Weirs and Baffle
Assembly drawing.
b. Mount the baffles to the tank wall, as specified on the Radial Launders,
Weirs and Baffle Assembly drawing.
c. Mount the launder supports to the baffles, as shown on the Radial

Launders, Weirs and Baffle Assembly drawing.
d. Mount the vertical baffles to the baffles supports, and the launders to the
launder supports, as shown on the Radial Launder, Weirs and Baffle
Assembly drawing.
e. Install the Fernco coupling on the launder as shown on the drawings.

Connect external piping (not by FLSmidth Minerals S.A.) as required.
f. Install the radial launders, mounting them to the vertical baffles with the
specified fasteners. Refer to the Radial Launder Assembly drawing.
g. Check all launders and weirs for elevation and level. Check the radial
launders and clearance with the lip of the peripheral tank launder. Adjust,
as necessary, and secure all fasteners.
10. Mechanism Assembly Installation
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D319
MCN2006-0039 19
The mechanism will be fully assembled on a temporary support fixture, (not by

FLSmidth Minerals S.A.), and then lifted and place into the tank’s support beams
as a single item.
a. Place the mechanism support on the support fixture or blocking high

enough to allow field assembly of the mechanism.
b. Mount the motor mounting plate, reducer mounting plate and retainer
plates to the support beams, as shown on the Drive Assembly and
Mechanism Assembly drawings, and referring to the Parts List for the
specified fasteners.
c. Mount the motor to the motor mounting plate, using the specified
fasteners.
d. If the coupling was shipped separately from the reducer, install it at this
time. Be sure that the mating flange surfaces are clean, and then mount
the #450 WEMCO Flotation shaft to the reducer coupling, using the
capscrews, washers and nuts specified on the Mechanism Assembly
drawing.
e. Lower the reducer with shaft assembly through the top of the mechanism
support, and mount it to the reducer mounting plate using the specified
capscrews. Be sure that the mating surfaces are completely clean.
f. Mount the adapter flange to the star rotor, as shown on the Mechanism
Assembly drawing. Be sure that the mating surfaces are completely
clean.
g. Using a lifting truck or forklift, raise the star rotor into position from
below, and attach adapter shaft to the flotation shaft, using the specified
capscrews. Install the rotor cap as shown on the drawings.
Note: Paint the fasteners or cover with sealant after assembly to prevent
corrosion.
h. Assemble the standpipe and crowder on the floor underneath the

supported mechanism. Then, using multipoint lifting, raise the crowder
and standpipe into position, and mount it to the mechanism.
i. Lift the disperser up to the standpipe and run the studs through the
horizontal ring in the standpipe.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D319
MCN2006-0039 20
j. Apply an anti-seize compound to the threads of the studs, and then install
the washers and nuts and snug tighten.
k. Tighten all nuts equally in half turns to draw the disperser up evenly, until
all nuts are tightened to 150-ft. lbs. (200 N-m) torque.
l. The nuts must be retorqued to 150-ft. lbs. (200 N-m) torque, after one
month of operation of the flotation unit.
m. Install the 12 disperser hood sectors one at a time, mounting them to the
crowder and standpipe, using the hood sector pipe bosses and clamps.
Leave the fasteners loose until all hood sectors have been installed and
fastened together.
n. Connect the disperser hood sectors to each other, using the fasteners
specified on the Mechanism Assembly drawing. Secure the fasteners, but
do not torque at this time.
o. Secure all other fasteners, referring to the Torque Values drawing in the
Drawings section of this manual.
p. Using multi-point lifting techniques and slings underneath the ends of the
mechanism support beams, lift the mechanism assembly with the crane
just enough to check it for level and balance. Check the rigging, and to
make sure it's free to move.
q. Center the mechanism assembly carefully over the tank before lowering it
into position. If caught or bumped, the stator sectors may be damaged
and require replacement.
r. Lower the mechanism assembly to about 12” (300 mm) above the tank
support beams, orienting it as shown on the Mechanism Assembly
drawing. Slowly and carefully, lower the mechanism assembly into
place, while checking the stator sectors for clearance with the mechanism
support beams and radial launder assembly. Check the rotor for clearance
with the collar assembly. Shim any gaps between the mechanism and the
tank beam, as shown on the Final Assembly drawing. Shim any gaps
between the mechanism beams and the tank beams, as shown on the Final
Assembly drawing. Referring to the Final Assembly drawing, attach the
mechanism beams to the tank beams using the specified fasteners.
Torque per the Torque Values drawing.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D319
MCN2006-0039 21
s. Install the platform beams, stair stringers, and handrails, as required,

referring to the Platform Assembly drawing.
t. Install the platform and walkway gratings.
u. Install the belt guard and cover after installation of the sheaves.
11. Belt Guard Installation
a. Install the belt guard assembly, referring to the Mechanism Assembly

drawings. The belt guard must be installed after the grating has been
installed.
WARNING: All belt guards must be installed before any drives are operated.
Unguarded belts and sheaves can cause serious injury.
12. Sheave Installation and Alignment
Note: Apply “Never Seize” type compound to the motor shaft and rotor sheave
bores prior to sheave installation.
a. Install the drive sheave split tapered bushing onto the motor shaft,
including the key. Place the drive sheave on the bushing. Install fasteners,
but leave loose for subsequent adjustment.
b. Install the driven sheave split tapered bushing, including the key, with the
flange against the mechanism shaft shoulder of the reducer. Set the driven
sheave in place on the bushing. Tighten the bushing capscrews in a cross
diameter sequence according to the values on the Torque Values drawing.
c. Check the horizontal run out of the sheave by rotating the sheave by hand.
If the run out is greater than ±1/32” (±1 mm), break the sheave loose from
the split-tapered bushing. Repeat the procedure until the run-out is within
tolerance. Tighten the fasteners.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D319
MCN2006-0039 22
d. Drive sheave final adjustment. Using a laser transit or string line, adjust
the end of the drive sheave to bring the end surface into the plane of the
end of the driven sheave. The end surface of the driven sheave and the
end surface of the drive sheave should be within ±1/32” (±1 mm) across
the sheave centerline. Refer to the Drive Assembly drawing. Tighten the
fasteners.
Do not loosen the motor mounting bolts or adjusting bolt nuts to align the
motor sheave.
13. Drive Belt Installation
a. Adjust for belt slack. Adjust the position of the motor, using the adjusting
screws under the motor mounting plate. Allow just enough slack for the
V-belts to drop over the motor sheave and remain in place.
b. Install the V-belts on each mechanism. Place the V-belts over the sheaves
and in the grooves. (See the Mechanism Assembly Parts List for the
required number of belts). There may be conditions where the sheaves
provided will have more grooves than the number of belts provided. If
this is the case, install the belts in parallel grooves.
c. Tension the V-belts, using the adjusting screws underneath the motor
mounting plate, to take up the slack in the belts. Proper alignment
distributes the load equally to each V-Belt.
d. For proper belt tensioning, refer to the belt tension plate on the belt guard,
and as shown in Figure 2, for the required tension and deflection per belt.
A V-belt drive will successfully transmit its rated horsepower if the belts
are properly tensioned. Do not exceed the specified belt tension.
Note: Excessive belt tension will cause excessive belt wear, reducing
bearing life and may result in possible shaft failure.
e. After tensioning the V-Belts, tighten down tighten the jacking bolt jam
nuts and secure the motor bracket mounting bolts.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D319
MCN2006-0039 23
3 2
Figure 2
1- CAUTION: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN V-BELTS
2- 18 Lbs./Kg. Max. Per Belt / Band 3- 11/16” Deflection
f. After a few days operation, the belts will seat themselves in the sheave
grooves, and it may become necessary to readjust them. If the belts
squeal, other than during start-up, repeat the procedure for proper belt
tensioning.
14. Level Float Assembly Installation
Note: Walkways and platforms must be installed before the level float assembly
can be installed.
a. Referring to the Level Float Assembly drawing, assemble the level float
assembly (if not shop assembled).
b. Referring to the Level Sensor Assembly drawing, locate and mount the
level float support to the walkway beams, field match drilling the
mounting holes and using the specified fasteners. Mount the level float
assembly to the level float support, using the specified U-bolt and nuts.
15. Froth Level Sensor
Note: Walkways and platforms must be installed before the froth sensor
assembly can be installed.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D319
MCN2006-0039 24
a. Referring to the Froth Sensor Assembly drawing, locate and mount the
froth sensor bracket to the tank beams, field locating and match drilling
the mounting holes, using the bracket as a template.
b. Mount the sensor assembly to the tank beam, using the fasteners
specified on the Froth Sensor Assembly drawing.
16. Electrical Power and Controls Installation
FLSmidth Minerals S.A. does not furnish, locate or install the interconnecting
wiring, pneumatic piping, etc. However, note that all interconnecting wiring and
wiring connections must be in compliance with local electrical codes.
Be aware:
a. All wiring must be installed in heavy-current conduit that is securely

anchored. Heavy flexible conduit must be used for all motor wiring. Bare
conductors and wires are prohibited.
b. Whenever aluminum to copper or other dissimilar wiring materials

connect, special splicer/spacers must be used to prevent contact of the
materials. An anti-oxidant is recommended at the connections. These
prevent galvanic corrosion that can lead to electrical fire and dangerous
breaks in the connections.
c. All electrical boxes and panels must be covered during operation or when
the power is on to the equipment. Observe all warnings on the electrical
panels and boxes.
d. Connect the motors to power according to the manufacturer's instructions

and be sure motors are grounded. Rotor direction is a customer choice.
However, FLSmidth Minerals S.A. recommends that the direction of
rotation alternates from tank to tank (i.e.: every other rotor has the
opposite, or reverse, direction of rotation of the rotor in the previous
tank).
WARNING: Do not operate equipment with open electrical boxes or fittings.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D319
MCN2006-0039 25
WARNING: All guards and protective devices must be installed before the
machine is started. Contact with belts, sheaves, or couplings
can result in injury.
e. To ensure safe maintenance and repairs, the motors should have separate
lockouts and keys. And to prevent accidental restarting in the event of a
power outage or overload, the wiring must have a reset or device that will
not allow automatic starting of the motors when power is restored.
f. Install the pneumatic piping to the actuator and positioner, referring to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
g. For instructions on the controls, refer to the Operation instructions in this

manual.
17. Final Inspection Before Start-up
a. Inspect the mechanisms, tanks, and boxes for any loose nuts and bolts, for
tools, debris and any other loose items. Make sure all guards, protective
devices and covers are in place.
b. Water-test the tank and check for leakage. Minor tank leakage may occur
at the bolted connections, but it will stop when sealed off by fine solids in
the feed slurry. Adjust or make corrections, as required.
c. Check the controls for automatic operation.
WARNING: Study these instructions carefully before putting the machines

into service to ensure safe, satisfactory start-up and operation.
All operating personnel must read and understand these
instructions.
WARNING: If the machines will be out of service for a period of time, the
electrical service must be locked out with an approved lockout
and key to prevent accidental start-up and electrical dangers.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D319
MCN2006-0039 26
Air Inlet Assembly Installation
1. Install the air inlet assembly, using the specified fasteners, referring to the Air Inlet
Assembly drawing.
2. Torque all fasteners, referring to the Torque Values drawing in the Drawing section of
this manual.
Copyright
Rev. 1 G-X104
5-2002 FINAL MECHANICAL CHECK 12342
MCN2002-0256 27
Final Mechanical Check
At the completion of erection or installation of the equipment, a FLSmidth Minerals S.A. Service
Representative must complete a final field mechanical check of the equipment. Unless accepted
and signed-off by the Service Representative at the completion, the warranty will not be in effect.
Previous inspections will not count towards final acceptance unless a sign-off is obtained, in
writing, from the Service Representative. Also, depending on any previous inspections, this final
check may be an additional paid service call.
Arrangements for Service
The "Final Mechanical Checklist", included at the back of this manual, must be completed for
each mechanism furnished before contacting your FLSmidth Minerals S.A. representative to
arrange for the final field mechanical check.
Arrangements for field mechanical check should be made at least two weeks in advance with
your FLSmidth Minerals S.A. representative. Refer to the Offices page to contact him.
Do Not Fill the Tank with Water
The mechanical check cannot be done if the tank is filled with water. If the check cannot be
performed, an additional paid service day will be charged.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D411
2-2006 LUBRICATION 12342
MCN2006-0039 28
The three parts of the flotation cell that require lubrication are the motor, reducer and dart valve
stuffing box.
1. For lubrication of the motor and reducer, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations, in the Accessories section of this manual.
2. Lubricate the dart valve shaft stuffing box at installation, (using a grease gun), with
approximately 4 cubic centimeters (0.135 oz.) of the recommended grease. (see the
Lubrication Schedule below). Re-lubricate the dart valve shaft stuffing box every six
months with approximately 1 cubic centimeter (0.03 oz.) of the recommended grease.
Do not over-lubricate.
COMPONENT LUBE RECOMMENDED SERVICE

METHOD LUBRICANT INTERVAL
Dart Valve Shaft Stuffing Box Grease Gun Shell Alvania Grease or Every 6 months
(not shown) equivalent NLGI Grade 2
grease
Copyright
Rev. A G1-D19
MCN96-0704 29
SAFETY STATEMENT
No personnel, authorized or unauthorized, should depend wholly on safety devices to prevent

accidents. Safety features and devices are meant only to supplement proper, careful, and safe
practices on the part of the individual.
WARNING: If the safety procedures given in this manual are compromised or

ignored, severe personal injury or death may occur. Safety
practices accepted by the industry, as well as those dictated by the
responsible regulatory agencies must be followed.
PERSONNEL SAFETY WARNINGS
WARNING: Use extreme care when working around rotating or other moving parts, to prevent
injuries to yourself or others. Anyone entering the area of this equipment must be
wearing adequate safety equipment such as safety glasses, safety shoes, hard hat,
etc.
WARNING: Keep foreign objects, hands, etc. away from moving parts (belts, sheaves). Do
Not operate equipment if guards, electrical covers or other safety devices have
been removed.
WARNING: Lock out power from electrical equipment using a manual breaker, disconnect
switch or lockout key before starting any work or maintenance on the equipment.
Lock and tag a disconnect switch so it cannot be closed.
WARNING: Experience with, or understanding of, this equipment is essential for the safe
disassembly and repair of the equipment. Therefore, in case of a question on how
to safely proceed, contact FLSmidth Minerals S.A. immediately.
Copyright
Rev. A G1-D19
MCN96-0704 30
WARNING: The fumes given off during welding and cutting can be injurious to the operator’s
health. Some fumes, such as those produced when working with Zinc, Cadmium
and painted surfaces can be toxic.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D408
MAINTENANCE
2-2006 12342
MCN2006-0039 31
A. Inspection and General Maintenance
WARNING: Refer to the PERSONNEL SAFETY WARNINGS page in this

manual before starting any inspections, maintenance or repairs.
Lock out means the equipment electrical service must be locked out
with a lockout and key.
General cleaning, inspection and preventive maintenance of the WEMCO Flotation machine
should be performed on a regular basis according to the recommended schedules and whenever
the machines are shut down.
1. General Cleaning
Keep platforms, stairs and the general work area free of obstacles, such as tools,
rags, boxes, etc. Clean up lube spills, water, the general area, etc. Periodically
remove solids accumulations by flushing down the mechanism below the motor
drive, including the tank, and fully inspect the equipment. Leave drains open until
the cleaning is complete.
2. Drive V-Belt Tension
WARNING: Lockout the power to the drive.
Check the belts every 6 months for tension (or sooner if the belt is squealing).
Tension the belts if required.
a. Remove the upper belt guard.
Check the belts for cracking, wear or glazed inner surface, which are
conditions requiring belt replacement. If one belt is damaged, all belts
should be replaced. New V-Belts must be installed as a matched set.
b. Check the belts for tension, referring to the V-Belt Caution plate on the
Belt Guard Assembly for the required tension and deflection per belt.
Refer to Figure 3 for a copy of that plate.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D408
MAINTENANCE
2-2006 12342
MCN2006-0039 32
c. To tension the V-belts, use the adjusting screws under the motor
mounting plate to move the motor and sheaves back and forth, and then
secure the nuts.
d. Recheck tension, referring to the V-Belt Caution plate to ensure proper

tension. A V-belt drive will successfully transmit its rated capacity
horsepower, if its belts are properly tensioned. Excessive tension will
cause excessive belt wear, reduce motor and reducer life, and result in
possible shaft assembly failure.
Figure 3
1- CAUTION: Do not over tighten V-belts

2- Lbs./ Kg Max. Per Belt / Band 3- Deflection
e. Reinstall the belt cover guard.
WARNING: The guard must be installed before the drive is operated.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D408
MAINTENANCE
2-2006 12342
MCN2006-0039 33
3. Lubrication
Refer to the Lubrication Instructions for the recommended lubrication and

schedule.
4. Air Control Assembly
This air duct assembly, located on the motor mounting plate and over the crowder
and standpipe, allows the flow of air between the crowder and standpipe and the
atmosphere. Airflow is controlled by means of an air control gate. It should be
clear for free flow of air generated by the rotor, for maximum froth formation
with minimum consumption of frothing agent.
Check for accumulations of froth and solids around the assembly and in the duct
and remove with a water spray for an unobstructed flow of air.
5. Dart Valves and Actuator Assemblies
WARNING: Lock out the power to the drive whenever entering the tank.
a. Scale can reduce the effectiveness of the valves. Check them monthly or
periodically as experience dictates for shaft movement during cylinder
actuation, for leakage, etc. Check for adequate air pressure and clean air.
Refer below to items b through d for valve adjustments.
b. During plant shut downs, the valve darts and seats should be checked for
wear and cracking. The steel and rubber seats are subject to high abrasion
and will require periodic replacement.
Replace the seat by pushing the valve down to its maximum open
position. Disconnect the existing valve adapter plate and seat, and replace
with a new plate and seat assembly. Raise the valve to center the seat and
then secure the adapter plate.
c. If a dart valve does not seat closed when the actuator lever arm is stroked
to the full up position, a mechanical adjustment can be made. Do not
make a valve adjustment with the level control.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D408
MAINTENANCE
2-2006 12342
MCN2006-0039 34
1) Retract the valve rods so the dart valves top out in the seats
(surrounding the bottom openings).
2) Watch as the dart valves ascend to see if they enter and seat
concentrically in the seats.
3) The valve shafts should be perpendicular to and centered over the

seats. If a dart valve is off center, adjust it by adjusting the valve
rod bearing in its slotted holes. Make sure it is secure after
adjustment. It may also be necessary to adjust the actuator
/cylinder assembly for plumb or replace a worn valve rod bearing
[bushing].
4) The dart valves must also seat in the seat plates when fully
retracted. If a valve does not, adjust the valve actuator, referring
to the manufacturer’s instructions, until the valve seats in the seat
plate opening. In some cases, the valve is worn and the only
option is replacement. Make sure the fasteners are secure.
d. If a valve pneumatic actuator cylinder fails to actuate, check for a broken

air line, connection or a blocked line. Check for a damaged diaphragm
caused by excessive air pressure. The air supply pressure to the actuator
should not exceed the maximum specified by the manufacturer to avoid
damage the actuator.
e. Level control problems may cause valve malfunctions of various kinds.

Refer to the level control system controller and Sensor Manufacturer's
Instructions.
6. Regularly Scheduled Shutdown for Inspection and Maintenance
During a regularly scheduled shut down of the plant, the following inspections
and maintenance are recommended.
Drain and flush down the tank so the star rotor, collar, hood, disperser and
standpipe can be inspected.
WARNING: Lockout the power.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D408
MAINTENANCE
2-2006 12342
MCN2006-0039 35
a. Star Rotor and Draft Tube Collar
Check the vanes of the rotor for excessive wear or damage. Look for
severe uneven wear, deep grooves, etc. Uneven wear would indicate a
failure to reverse rotor rotation with sufficient frequency. The rotor can be
reversed in direction of rotation and inverted (180o) for additional use.
Replace the rotor if it is severely worn.
Check the draft tube collar for severe wear affecting its concentricity
with the rotor. It must be concentric with the rotor within ±1/8" (±3 mm)
all around to provide optimum slurry circulation and solids suspension.
Concentricity can only be made by adjusting either the mechanism or
false bottom, if needed, as the collar clamps to the draft tube and cannot
be adjusted.
b. Hood Sectors and Disperser
Note: Retaining nuts must be torqued at first maintenance cycle (about

one month). Refer to "C. 5. Disperser."
Check the sectors for wear down to the reinforcing fabric. Replace all
sectors if any one sector shows this amount of wear. Replace the
disperser if it is ripped, separated or damaged.
c. Standpipe
Check the lining for wear down to the metal, for damage or for proper
positioning.
e. Connection Boxes Valves and Actuators
During each shutdown, flush the connection and discharge box and
inspect the dart valves, seats, rods and sleeves for wear. Replace any parts
that show excessive wear.
Check the valves for centering in the seats by actuating the valves or
applying air. At the same time check for free movement of the rods.
Check shafts for perpendicular alignment with the seat plate to ensure
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D408
MAINTENANCE
2-2006 12342
MCN2006-0039 36
centering of the valves. Refer above to "A, 6. Dart Valves and Actuator
Assemblies."
f. Automatic Level Controls
Inspect the level controls in the stilling wells as recommended by the

manufacturers. Refer to the Manufacturer's Instructions for inspection
and maintenance.
g. Fasteners
Check all fasteners on a regular basis, at least once every 6 months, to

ensure they are secure. Refer to the Fastener "Torque Values" Drawing
114808.
B. Mechanism Removal
For replacement or repair of the Star Rotor, Shaft Assembly, Standpipe or Disperser, the
Mechanism must be removed from the tank.
WARNING: Disconnect and lock out the power to the motor before starting any
disassembly.
1. If the motor will be removed, refer below to "D. Component Removal..., 1. The
Motor."
2. Preparation for removal of the mechanism
Refer to the Mechanism Assembly Drawing.
a. A maintenance support fixture or substantial shoring should be prepared

for the support of the mechanism during repairs or maintenance. It must
support the mechanism off the ground high enough it allows adequate
clearance for removal of the star rotor. It should support the mechanism
with the drive support angles at the 4 corners. And, it must be substantial
enough to safely support the complete mechanism weight, as given in the
Parts List. Note the clearance required for rotor removal.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D408
MAINTENANCE
2-2006 12342
MCN2006-0039 37
b. The hood assembly may be too large to fit through the opening inside the
walkway platform, and in that case the walkway and supports should be
removed. If the hood is also slightly larger than the clearance between the
mechanism support angles, some of the hood sectors and supports at one
end should be removed to provide the needed clearance. (Although the
hood sectors are rubber, they can be torn or damaged.) Accordingly,
disconnect the hood sectors from the outside at the support arms and at
the standpipe flange. Be sure to save the bolts and washers for reuse.
c. The crowder may also be too large to fit between the support beams and
so two sections may need removal. Set the sections in the bottom of the
tank.
d. Remove the mechanism mounting bolts and retain the bolts and any shims
that may have been used. Tag the location of the shims.
3. Lifting and removal of the mechanism
a. Check the capacities of the crane and rigging to be sure they are capable
of lifting the entire weight of mechanism and support beams. Refer above
and to the Parts List weights.
WARNING: If the motor is connected to power, lock out and then disconnect the
power to the motor.
b. Temporarily remove the upper and lower belt guards, driven sheave and
belts to prevent damage to the motor drive assembly during lifting.
To remove the V-belts and sheaves, loosen two adjusting screws

underneath the mounting plate. Loosen each screw equally to avoid
binding. Adjust the screws for the slack needed to remove the belts from
the motor sheave. About 2" (50 mm) movement should allow belt
removal. Remove the sheave.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D408
MAINTENANCE
2-2006 12342
MCN2006-0039 38
c. Lift the mechanism using slings run under the mechanism support beams
at each and, and using a spreader beam to avoid contact with the upper
assemblies. Note: Use lifting eyes whenever provided.
WARNING: Make sure the assembly is free to be moved and the lifting cables
are secure before attempting the lift.
Keep the mechanism level at all times during the lifting, using the
spreader beam to balance the load. Check balance by lifting just enough to
support the mechanism entirely with the lifting cables.
Set the mechanism on the maintenance support fixture or shoring. Secure

the mechanism.
d. Refer below to "D. Component Removal and Installation."
4. Reinstallation of the Mechanism
The mechanism will be installed in basically the reverse order of the removal.
Take note of the following:
a. Use the same method for lifting as used during removal.
b. Make sure any shims used previously for leveling or alignment of the
mechanism are in their original places, as marked.
c. Lift the mechanism into place on the mechanism supports, carefully

guiding it between the supports and watching for clearance of the hood
and crowder assemblies. The rotor should be concentric with the draft
tube spool.
Bolt the mechanism to its supports, referring to the fasteners Torque

Values Drawing.
d. Check the draft tube spool for concentricity with the rotor. It must be
within ±1/8" (±3 mm) all around to provide optimum slurry circulation
and solids suspension. Adjust for concentricity of the spool with the rotor
by loosening the bolts and shifting the spool on the spacer. Perfect
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D408
MAINTENANCE
2-2006 12342
MCN2006-0039 39
concentricity is not required. In extreme misalignment, recheck the

centering of the drive mechanism, referring above.
e. Reinstall the lower belt guard and the sheaves. Install and tension the belts
referring above under Section A. General Maintenance, "2. Drive V-Belt
Tension." Be sure to install the upper beltguard.
f. If any hood sectors were removed, refer to "C. 4. Hood [Disperser]" for
instructions on "Installation."
C. Component Removal and Installation
Refer to the Mechanism Assembly Drawings.
WARNING: Disconnect and lock out the power to the motor before starting any
disassembly.
1. The Motor
Removal -
a. Disconnect the wiring at the motor and tag the lines. Remove the belt
guard.
b. Remove the V-belts: Loosen the two adjusting screws under the mounting
plate. About 2" (50 mm) movement should allow belt removal.
c. Remove the sheaves.
d. Support the motor with a cable or sling, according to the motor

manufacturer's instructions, and lift the motor free of mounting plate.
e. Set the motor in a clean dry maintenance area.
Installation -
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D408
MAINTENANCE
2-2006 12342
MCN2006-0039 40
a. Reinstall the motor referring above and following the reverse order. Refer
to "A. Inspection and General Maintenance" item "2. Drive V-Belt
Tension." Install the V-belts in a matched set. Do not mix belts old and
new belts.
b. Tension the V-belts referring above under "A. 2. Drive V-Belt Tension."
Install the beltguard.
2. Draft Tube Collar Assembly
Refer to the Tank General Assembly and Collar Assembly drawings.
Removal - The draft tube collar assembly, which mounts to the draft tube and
false bottom, will erode over time despite its Elastomer covering. It is not
necessary to remove the mechanism for collar assembly replacement.
a. Disconnect the fasteners holding the halves of the collar assembly

together and remove the collar assembly halves from around the draft
tube. It may be possible to save the bolts, nuts and spacers for reuse.
Installation -
a. Set the new collar sections in position around the draft tube, as shown on
the Collar Assembly drawing, and loosely install the bolts with nuts and
washers, and the spacers at the splices.
b. Adjust for specified elevation and secure the collar on the draft tube,
referring to the Collar Assembly drawing.
c. Check the rotor for concentricity with the collar assembly, referring to the
Installation instructions.
3. Air Control Assembly
Flow of air between the inner standpipe and atmosphere is controlled by this air
duct assembly, and so it should be clear for free flow of air generated by the rotor
and adjustable for froth control. Normally it would not require replacement, but
the gate may become corroded and not adjustable. In that case the air duct and air
control gate assembly should be replaced as a complete unit.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D408
MAINTENANCE
2-2006 12342
MCN2006-0039 41
4. Hood Sectors
The hood consists of twelve sectors that bolt to the standpipe and to each other.
Removal - The hood assembly may be too large to fit between the support angles
for removal intact with the mechanism, and so it will be necessary to remove a
couple of hood sectors and support arms at one end of the hood to provide the
clearance needed. If only the hood will be removed for replacement or repairs, the
mechanism can remain in the tank.
a. Disconnect the hood sectors from each other. Save the bosses, capscrews,
washers and nuts for reuse.
b. Disconnect the sectors from the standpipe flange and remove. Check for
wear and deterioration.
Installation -
a. Referring to the Mechanism Assembly drawing, install the 12 disperser

hood sectors one at a time, mounting them to the crowder and standpipe,
using the hood sector pipe bosses and clamps. Leave the fasteners loose
until all hood sectors have been installed and fastened together.
b. Connect the disperser hood sectors to each other, using the specified
fasteners.
c. Secure all fasteners, referring to the Torque Values drawing in the

Drawings section of this manual.
5. Disperser
Removal - Although the disperser may be significantly worn, it can still be heavy
and unwieldy. Support it all around during its removal. Refer to the Parts List for
the weight. Note that a urethane disperser will be heavier than a rubber disperser.
The star rotor extends about 11"-0 (275 mm) below the disperser.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D408
MAINTENANCE
2-2006 12342
MCN2006-0039 42
a. Depending on the elevation setting of the mechanism, it may be possible

to remove the draft tube spacer and spool for clearance in replacing the
disperser. The alternative is to remove the mechanism from the tank
referring to "C. 3. Lifting and removal of the mechanism."
b. If the mechanism is removed from the tank, set it on the fixture or

shoring, where the disperser can be disconnected from the crowder and
standpipe.
c. The top ring of the disperser is held by studs in a ring that attaches the
disperser to the standpipe with nuts and washers. Support the disperser in
position with adjustable blocking or a device, such as lift truck, jacks and
pallet, etc., until all nuts have been removed.
d. Lift the mechanism high enough to remove the disperser and set a new
one in its place.
Installation - Use the lifting device to support the disperser.
a. Lift the disperser up to the standpipe and run the studs through the
horizontal ring in the standpipe.
b. Apply an anti-seize compound to the threads of the studs, and then install
the washers and nuts and snug tighten.
c. Tighten all nuts equally in half turns to draw the disperser up evenly, until
all nuts are tightened to the value listed on the Torque Values drawing.
d. The nuts must be retorqued after one month of operation of the flotation
unit.
6. Star Rotor
To reduce uneven wear on the rotor and increase its operating life, the rotor
direction of rotation should be reversed at least once a month. The rotor can also
be turned end-for-end for additional wear. Rotors should be replaced if they flex
under low loading, which would be evident by poor mixing.
Removal -
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D408
MAINTENANCE
2-2006 12342
MCN2006-0039 43
a. Remove the mechanism from the tank referring to "C. 3. Lifting and
Removal of the Mechanism."
b. Place the mechanism assembly on a fixture support or on shoring with the

rotor shaft in vertical position, so the rotor can be lowered or raised into
position under the shaft using a lift truck or sling.
c. While supporting the rotor from below, unscrew the rotor and adapter
flange from end of the shaft. Refer to the Mechanism Assembly drawing.
d. Lower the rotor far enough to clear the end of the shaft, and then set it on
blocking large enough to support it by at least four vanes.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D408
MAINTENANCE
2-2006 12342
MCN2006-0039 44
Installation - The star rotor can be inverted for wear on the opposite end or side.
The nut cover was used to protect the rotor-mounting sleeve on the
end of the rotor. Installation of the star rotor is basically the same
in as removal, only in reverse order.
a. If the rotor will be reused by reversing it end for end, remove the rotor cap
and install it on the other end. Make sure the mounting surface of the
upper hub of the rotator is clean.
b. Mount the adapter flange to the star rotor, as shown on the Mechanism
Assembly drawing.
c. Using a lifting truck or forklift, raise the star rotor into position from
below, and attach the adapter flange to the flotation shaft, using the
specified capscrews.
d. Toque all fasteners referring to the Torque Values drawing.
Note: Paint the fasteners, or cover with sealant after installation to

prevent corrosion.
e. Install the Mechanism assembly, referring above, and to the installation

instructions in this manual.
7. Fasteners Torque Specifications
All High Strength Bolts must be tightened using the Turn-of-Nut Method, provided below. Do
not reuse the High Strength Bolts.
Bolt Length Disposition of Outer Faces of Bolted Parts
One face normal to bolt axis and Both faces sloped not more than
As measured from underside of Both faces normal to bolt axis. other face sloped not more than 1:20 from normal to bolt axis
head to extreme end of point. 1:20 (bevel washer not used) (bevel washers not used)
Up to and including (4) diameters

1/ 3 turn ½ turn 2/3 turn
Over (4) diameters but not
exceeding (8) diameters ½ turn 2/3 turn 5/6 turn
Over (8) diameters but not
exceeding (12) diameters 2/3 turn 5/6 turn 1 turn
Nut rotation is the rotation relative to the bolt, regardless of the element (nut or Bolt). The Tolerance on rotation is 30o over or under.
Copyright
Rev. 1 F5-D408
MAINTENANCE
2-2006 12342
MCN2006-0039 45
Tighten all other fasteners according to the Torque Values Drawing 114808 in the drawings
section of this manual. Note that all torque values for the fasteners are for clean dry threads.
If the fastener is being secured against a rubber covered part, do not over tighten as damage to the
rubber coating may occur.
Copyright
Rev. A F5-D502
OPERATION
2-2006 12342
MCN2006-0039 46
Flotation
Mineral froth flotation is the most important mineral processing technique available today. In
flotation, gas bubbles produced by the mechanical agitation of the mechanisms are used to float
the mineral particles, through adhesion, to the surface of the cells for recovery.
Basically, the adhesion of the small particles to the gas bubbles reduces the specific gravity of the
combined mineral-air particles. So the specific gravity of their association is less than the specific
gravity of the slurry, which induces these particles to rise in the slurry and float to the surface for
discharge as a froth.
A. WEMCO SMARTCELLTM FLOTATION MACHINES
Refer to the Mechanism Assembly drawings in the drawing section of the manual.
The SMARTCELL flotation machine is a unique design with a patented rotor-disperser

that delivers intense, mixing and aeration. Ambient air is drawn into the cell and
uniformly distributed throughout the slurry, providing optimum air/particle contact. A
conical draft tube channels the flow for high slurry recirculation.
The combination of efficient aeration and optimum solids suspension gives high specie
recovery and concentrate grade performance, while reducing reagent consumption. Easy
start-up, simple operation, low reagent consumption, long mechanism life and less
required maintenance are features of the WEMCO flotation machines.
1. The Flotation Machine - General Description
Your WEMCO Flotation Cell is a cylindrical tank with nominal 250 M3

volume capacity. It features a WEMCO No. 450 shaft mechanism for heavy duty
operation, a conical draft tube for improved circulation, froth crowder and
standpipe to accelerate surface movement of solids, a feed box for feed solids
distribution, and connection and discharge boxes with dart valves for level
control.
Optional control features that can be included with a machine are air control,
ultrasonic slurry level sensing, froth washing, and embedded expert controls.
The flotation cell, consisting of the cylindrical tank and drive assembly, is the
basic module of the WEMCO system. The cells are usually connected together in
pairs and arranged in rows up to a dozen or more cells. Each pair is arranged in
Copyright
Rev. A F5-D502
OPERATION
2-2006 12342
MCN2006-0039 47
elevated steps for gravity flow of the slurry. Refer to the General Arrangement
drawing for the sizes and arrangement of the cells.
The cylindrical shape of the tank improves mixing and air distribution because all
points on the tank periphery are equidistant from the rotor discharge. Normally
the tank bottom is flat, but in some unique applications the corner between the
bottom and side wall is beveled.
2. The Mechanism
The rotor position, which is well above the tank bottom, eliminates contact with
abrasive, oversize tramp material, thereby reducing wear on the rotor and
disperser surfaces. Induced air flow into the slurry by the turning rotor provides
efficient aeration.
Since no forced air supply system is required, one mechanism can be removed for
service without shutting down the entire bank of cells, or it can be serviced on-
line. Air flow compensation for varying feed densities is automatic.
The elevated rotor also allows cells to restart instantly after a shutdown, unlike
forced-air systems with rotors caught in settled solids. And, it can be restarted
under full load. Mechanism erosion is further reduced by large clearances
between the rotor and disperser.
The Crowder and Standpipe is the elastomer lined steel cylinder assembly,
below the shaft bearing assembly, which controls the flow of air to the mixing
slurry. This is where the air is thoroughly dispersed through the slurry in the form
of bubbles that attach to the particles for flotation.
The disperser hood attaches to a special ring around the lower end of the
standpipe. The hood sectors disperse the mixed bubbles and particles from the
crowder and standpipe and the rotor out to the surface of the cell for flotation.
A Manual Air Inlet assembly, located in the base plate of the bearing stand and
extending into the standpipe, admits the flow of air induced by the turning rotor
into the slurry inside the standpipe. Air flow is controlled by means of an air
control gate, as the air generated by the rotor provides for maximum froth
formation with minimum consumption of frothing agent. The induced air flow
provides efficient aeration with mechanical simplicity.
Copyright
Rev. A F5-D502
OPERATION
2-2006 12342
MCN2006-0039 48
3. The Tank and Control Boxes
Draft Tube and False Bottom promotes the circulation and suspension of solids
in the flotation cell by drawing the slurry from the tank bottom up the draft tube
into the rotor and standpipe, where the slurry is mixed with air and pumped back
out into the cell. Draft tubes are noted for their efficiency of mixing. The conical
bottom increases circulation at the periphery of the tank.
False Bottom design manages coarse particles. All of the slurry circulates up
through the draft tube. The false bottom increases the velocity of the slurry as it
flows along the bottom to be drawn up into the draft tube.
Froth Crowder and Standpipe, at water surface, accelerates movement of the

froth across the surface of the tank, reducing residence time in the froth phase and
the air input required for froth support. The shortened recovery period means
energy savings, increased recovery and improved grade.
Lip length of internal froth launder relates directly to froth removal. The lip
length of a round cell is longer than the launder of an equivalent volume
rectangular unit. The internal launder design conserves plant floor space.
Feed box is a rectangular box design to receive the discharge from the grinding
circuit, the previous flotation machine or other plant unit operation. It facilitates
mass flow and provides uniform distribution of feed into the cell.
Connection box, similar in design to the feed box, is the means for level control
and even flow between cells. Dart valves in the connection box maintain the
slurry level in the flotation cells by controlling the flow between cells.
Discharge box maintains the slurry level in the preceding cells and provides a
connection to the tailings sump.
Dart valves, located in the connection and discharge boxes, are used to control
the flow of slurry between the cells and from the discharge box. The valves are
raised and lowered by pneumatic positioners that receive signals from the level
controls, as will be described below.
Copyright
Rev. A F5-D502
OPERATION
2-2006 12342
MCN2006-0039 49
B. SMARTCELL LEVEL CONTROLS
Slurry level in the flotation cells is controlled by the automatically operated dart valves,
located in the connection boxes and ending with the discharge box.
Level control is absolutely essential for good cell flotation performance. The key
components of a level control are:
1 - Level Sensor
2 – Customer Supplied DCS Controller
3 - Dart valves
4 - Positioner
Copyright
Rev. A F5-D502
OPERATION
2-2006 12342
MCN2006-0039 50
1. Ultrasonic Level Sensor System
For: 1) Slurry Level

2) Froth Level
The level sensors come pre-calibrated for an indicated range and should only be
adjusted by qualified personnel. As originally specified, these are all highly
reliable electronic devices and if kept clean and not abused, should function well
for extended plant service.
The system consist of:
-stilling well with a float and target,

-an ultrasonic source and sensor,
-a customer supplied distributed control system (DCS), and
-the pneumatically actuated dart valves
The stilling well minimizes the turbulence and froth around the float. The float
with the target attached above the surface rises and falls with the surface.
The Ultrasonic sensor sends a signal to the target and receives the reflected signal
back. The signal from the Ultrasonic sensor goes to the customer supplied DCS
which sends a signal to the pneumatically actuated dart valves that open and
close to maintain the slurry level. Froth level is similarly controlled or
monitored.
2. Dart Valves
The valves control the flow of slurry through the flotation cells to maintain slurry
level. The valves are actuated by rods from the pneumatic positioners, which
move the valves up and down in circular seats at the bottoms of the connection
and discharge boxes.
The pneumatic positioners receive a signal from the customer supplied DCS
through the intelligent positioner, via the Foundation Fieldbus protocol.
If a dart valve does not seat closed when the actuator lever arm is stroked to the
full up position, then a mechanical adjustment can be made, according to the
Maintenance instructions. The level control is not the way to adjust the valves.
Copyright
PART LIST
FLSMIDTH DORR OLIVER EIMCO CHILE SA.

Nueva de Lyon 72 of/1102, Prov, Santiago
Telef. 56-2-2900000 Fax 56-2- 3344919
PART LIST Nº PL-12342-257m3 REV : E REF : 12342

HECHO POR NSC REVISADO POR CFS
APROBADO POR CFS FECHA IMPR. 11-Jun-09
ITEM PAGE Part Number Drawing Nº Ref Description OBS

Nº
1 2-3 12342ME01EN01-A 12342ME01EN01 GENERAL ASSEMBLY
2 4 BAP2080-1025-01 BAP2080-1025 FEED TANK
3 5 BAP2080-1010-01 BAP2080-1010 TANK COMPLETE
4 6 12342ME01EN15-A 12342ME01EN15 DISCHARGE TANK
E 5 7 12342ME01EN05-A 12342ME01EN05 DRAFT TUBE ASSY. MODEL 257m3
6 8 12342ME01EN08-A 12342ME01EN08 FEED BOX ASSY
7 9 SP1123394 SP1123394 RADIAL LAUNDER ASSY
8 10-11 12342ME01EN07-A 12342ME01EN07 CIRCULAR BOX ASSEMBLY TYPE -A
9 12-13 12342ME01EN07-C 12342ME01EN07 CIRCULAR BOX ASSEMBLY TYPE -C
10 14 12342ME01EN02-A 12342ME01EN02 DISCHARGE , BOX ASSEMBLY
11 15-16 12342ME01EN13-A 12342ME01EN13 MECHANISM ASSEMBLY
12 17 12342ME01EN14-A 12342ME01EN14 DRIVE ASSEMBLY
E 13 18 12342ME01EN06-A 12342ME01EN06 BELT GUARD, #450, WEMCO FLOT, STEEL
14 19 1108838 1108838 CROWDER AND STANDPIPE ASSEMBLY
15 20 1193075 1193075 MANUAL AIR INLET ASSEMBLY
16 21 1121515-01L 1121515 LEVEL SENSOR ASSEMBLY
17 21 1121187-01L 1121187 LEVEL FLOAT ASSEMBLY
18 22 12342ME01EN003 12342ME01EN003 PLATFORM ASSEMBLY
19 23-24 12342ME01EN004 12342ME01EN004 PLATFORM ASSEMBLY
E 20 25 12342ME01EN10 12342ME01EN10 CABLE TRAY ASSEMBLY
E 21 26 12342ME01EN11 12342ME01EN11 CABLE TRAY ASSEMBLY
Release 11-Jun-09 Pag.1 de 26

PART LIST

Telef. 56-2-2900000 Fax 56-2- 3344919

ITEM CANT TOTAL Part Number Drawing Nº Ref Description OBS

Nº UNID ORDEN
1 12342ME01EN01-A 12342ME01EN01 GENERAL ASSEMBLY
1 2 2 BAP2080-1025-01 BAP2080-1025 FEED TANK
2 6 6 BAP2080-1010-01 BAP2080-1010 TANK COMPLETE
3 4 4 12342ME01EN15-A 12342ME01EN15 DISCHARGE TANK
4 2 2 12342ME01EN08-A 12342ME01EN08 FEED BOX ASSY
5A 10 10 12342ME01EN07-A 12342ME01EN07 CIRCULAR BOX ASSEMBLY TYPE -A
5C 10 10 12342ME01EN07-C 12342ME01EN07 CIRCULAR BOX ASSEMBLY TYPE -C
6 4 4 12342ME01EN02-A 12342ME01EN02 DISCHARGE , BOX ASSEMBLY
7 12 12 12342ME01EN13-A 12342ME01EN13 MECHANISM ASSEMBLY
8 12 12 12342ME01EN14-A 12342ME01EN14 DRIVE ASSEMBLY
9 12 12 1108838 1108838 CROWDER AND STANDPIPE ASSEMBLY
10 12 12 1193075 1193075 MANUAL AIR INLET ASSEMBLY
E 11 12 12 1121515-01L 1121515 LEVEL SENSOR ASSEMBLY
12 1 1 12342ME01EN003 12342ME01EN003 PLATFORM ASSEMBLY
13 1 1 12342ME01EN004 12342ME01EN004 PLATFORM ASSEMBLY
14 48 48 1127620-01 1127620 SHIM PLATE, STL
E 15 1120 1120 1127662-01 1127662 WASHER 3/4" BOLT, STL
16 192 192 1142644-01 1142644 CAPSCREW HX HD, GR5 ZNC 7/8-9x15
E 17 1968 1968 F10429 CAPSCREW HX HD, GR5 ZNC 3/4-10x3-1/2
E 18 1968 1968 F10889 NUT, HX, GR5, ZNC, 3/4-10
19 192 192 M034362 NUT, HX, NYLOC, GR5 ZNC, 7/8-9
E 20 2816 2816 F11200 WASHER, PLN, ZNC, TYPE A-W, 3/4x2x.148, STL
21 384 384 F16802 WASHER, PLN, TYPE A-W, F844, ZNC, 7/8
22 2 2 1193583 1193583 FALSE BOTTOM TAB
23 44 44 1193582 1193582 FALSE BOTTOM TAB
24 20 20 1072315-01 1072315 JOINT, CIRCULAR EXPANSION
25 12 12 1193872 1193872 CONE, FLOOR, DRAFT TUBE, 250M3
26
E 27 12 12 12342ME01EN05-A 12342ME01EN05 DRAFT TUBE ASSY. MODEL 257m3
28 828 828 W57774B 57774B GROMMET 4" RUBBER
29 12 12 SP1123394 SP1123394 RADIAL LAUNDER ASSY
30 72 72 1193549 1193549 FALSE BOTTOM SECTION
31 24 24 86801-S 86801 BLIND FLANGE DIA 12"
32 24 24 87891-N 87891 GASKET DIA. 12"
33 816 816 903944A 903944 WASHER, NYLON, 3mm THKx 30 mmIDx100mmOD
Pag. 2 de 26
PART LIST

Telef. 56-2-2900000 Fax 56-2- 3344919


Nº UNID ORDEN
34 816 816 903895A 903895 HOSE, 3-1/2" ID, MULTIPLIES, EPDM
35
36 8 8 1194536 1194536 FLANGE BLIND, 28"
37 8 8 1194538 1194538 GASKET 28"
E 38 10 10 W172028 - GASKETING, NEOPRENE 1/2x1x25'
E 39 20 20 903150A 903150 SEALANT, URETHANE ADHESIVE
E 40 2712 2712 F10407 CAPSCREW, HX HD, GR5, ZNC, 5/8-11x2
E 41 224 224 F10427 CAPSCREW, HX HD, GR5, ZNC, 3/4-10x3
42
43 96 96 M028095 CAPSCREW, HX HD, GR5, ZNC, 1-8x3-1/2
44 816 816 F10425 CAPSCREW, HX HD, GR5, ZNC, 1-8x2-1/2
45 48 48 F50142 CAPSCREW, HX HD, GR5, ZNC, 1-8x1 1/4
46 192 192 F10051 BOLT, HX HD, TYPE 1-1/4-7x4
E 50 2712 2712 F10858 NUT, HX, GR5, ZNC, 5/8-11
E 51 224 224 F10889 NUT, HX, GR5, ZNC, 3/4-10
53 96 96 F10854 NUT, HX, GR5, ZNC, 1-8
56 192 192 F10845 NUT, HVY HX, A325, 1-1/4-7
E 60 8136 8136 M025683 WASHER, PLN, TYPE A-N, F844, ZNC, 5/8
E 61 448 448 F11200 WASHER, PLN, TYPE A-W, 3/4x2x,148,STL
62
63 192 192 F12647 WASHER, FLAT, THRU HDN, F436, 1"
64 864 864 F11201 WASHER, PLN, TYPE A-W, F844, ZNC 1"
66 384 384 F50133 WASHER, FLAT, THRU HDN, F436HDG 1 1/4
67 288 288 12342ME01EN01-67 CAPSCREW HX HD, GR5 ZNC 7/8-9x3
68 288 288 12342ME01EN01-68 NUT, HX, GR5 ZNC, 7/8-9
69 576 576 12342ME01EN01-69 WASHER, PLN, TYPE A-N, F844, ZNC, 7/8
Pag. 3 de 26
PART LIST

Telef. 56-2-2900000 Fax 56-2- 3344919


Nº UNID ORDEN
1 2 BAP2080-1025-01 BAP2080-1025 FEED TANK
2 1 2 BAP2080-1024-01 BAP2080-1024 TANK SEGMENT WELDMENT
Pag.4 de 26
PART LIST

Telef. 56-2-2900000 Fax 56-2- 3344919


Nº UNID ORDEN
6 BAP2080-1010-01 BAP2080-1010 TANK COMPLETE
Pag.5 de 26
PART LIST

Telef. 56-2-2900000 Fax 56-2- 3344919


Nº UNID ORDEN
4 12342ME01EN15-A 12342ME01EN15 DISCHARGE TANK
2 1 4 12342ME01FA01 12342ME01FA01 TANK SEGMENT WELDMENT
Pag.6 de 26
PART LIST

Telef. 56-2-2900000 Fax 56-2- 3344919


Nº UNID ORDEN Weight [Kg]
E 12 12342ME01EN05-A 12342ME01EN05 DRAFT TUBE ASSY. MODEL 257m3
1 2 24 12342ME01FA03-A 12342ME01FA03 DRAFT TUBE 315
2 2 24 12342ME01FA03-C 12342ME01FA03 DRAFT TUBE 369
3 2 24 12342ME01FA03-D COLLAR SPLIT 104
4 53 636 12342ME01FA03-4 Hex Cap Screws ANSI B18.2.1 - 5/8-11x2.000 GR5. ZNC
5 106 1272 12342ME01FA03-5 Washer 0.6250 N ANSI B18.22.1 GR5. ZNC
6 53 636 12342ME01FA03-6 Unified Hex Nuts 5/8 ANSI B18.2.2 GR5. ZNC
7 1 12 12342ME01EN05-7 RUBBER LINED 10mm Rubber
8 1 12 12342ME01EN05-8 RUBBER LINED 3 mm Rubber
Pag.7 de 26
PART LIST

Telef. 56-2-2900000 Fax 56-2- 3344919


Nº UNID ORDEN
1 2 12342ME01EN08-A 12342ME01EN08 FEED BOX ASSY
1 1 2 BAP2080-170 BAP2080-170 FEED BOX WELDMENT
Pag.8 de 26
PART LIST

Telef. 56-2-2900000 Fax 56-2- 3344919


Nº UNID ORDEN
1 12 SP1123394 SP1123394 RADIAL LAUNDER ASSY
1 24 288 1108840-01 1108840 RADIAL LAUNDER, STL
2 48 576 1123229-01 1123229 WEIR, STL
3 12 144 SP1123908-01 SP1123908 INBOARD BAFFLE SUPPORT, LOWER, STL
4 12 144 1108847-01 1108847 BAFFLE, STL
5
6 12 144 1108851-01 1108851 INBOARD LAUNDER SUPPORT, STL
7 12 144 1108850-01 1108850 OUTBOARD BAFFLE & LAUNDER SUPPORT, STL
8 24 288 M028457 COUPLING, FERNCO #1056-88, PVC
9
10 12 144 1123229-02 1123229 WEIR, CIRCUMFERENTIAL, STL
11 204 2448 F10407 CAPSCREW HX HD, GR5 ZNC 5/8-11x2
12 408 4896 F11197 WASHER, PLN, ZNC, 5/8x 1-3/4x,134
(TYPE A-W, TRHU HDN, STL)
13 204 2448 F10858 NUT, HX, GR5, ZNC, 5/8-11
14
15 360 4320 F10401 CAPSCREW, HX HD, GR5, ZNC, 3/8-16x1
17 360 4320 F10855 NUT, HX, GR5, ZNC, 3/8-16
Pag.9 de 26
PART LIST

Telef. 56-2-2900000 Fax 56-2- 3344919
PART LIST N PL-12342-257m3 REV E REF : 12342

ITEM CANT TOTAL Part Number Drawing Nº Ref Description Weight OBS
Nº UNID ORDEN [Kg]
10 12342ME01EN07-A 12342ME01EN07 CIRCULAR BOX ASSEMBLY TYPE -A
1 1 10 12342-ILIST ACTUATOR ASSY, 250MM DIA x 250MM STROKE 111.9
2 1 10 570057 ACTUATOR SUPPORT WELDMENT 71.7
3 1 10 570058 UPPER HOUSING WELDMENT 461.0
4 1 10 571224 STUFFING BOX ASSEMBLY 22.8
5 1 10 570577 SHAFT, CIRCULAR BOX 68.2
E 6 1 10 RM1080096-5 DART VALVE SEAT 21" DIA. 144.5
E 7 1 10 1183394 1183394 VALVE DART 24" DIA. 67.5
8 1 10 1083519-01 COVER, DART VALVE, 26" 19.1
9 1 10 1085506-01 HOSE, 3" ID x 3-1/2" OD x 1-1/2" LG, NATURAL RUBBER 0.1 NAT. RUBBER
10 1 10 571223 HOUSING, SHAFT 30.0
11 1 10 570055 BELLOWS 0.2 NEOPRENE
13 1 10 571225 3/4'' THRU 3'' SOLIDLUBE LT 4-BOLT FLANGE BEARING - 700 Series 1.2
14 1 10 570059 GSKT, FF, FLG, NEOP, 12 3/16" O.D. x 6 11/16" I.D. x 1/8" 0.2 NEOPRENE
15 1 10 570060 SLIDE PLATE 1.2 UHMWPE
16 1 10 570062 PLATE, 10 x 450 x 500 16.1 A36 STL
17 1 10 43369H FLANGE, FLAT FACED 11.1 A36 STL
18 1 10 570065 TUBING, 3" I.D. x 516" WALL 1.1 NEOPRENE
19 8 80 F11786 SCR,SHC,FLT,.375-16X1.000,ALLOY GR5 ZNC
20 8 80 F10417 SCR,HHC,.500-13X2.500,GR5ZNC GR5ZNC
25 8 80 F10103 SCR,HHC,.625-11X2.250,GR5 GR5
26 8 80 F10856 NUT,HEX,.500-13,GR5ZNC GR5ZNC
29 8 80 F10871 NUT,HEX,.625-11,GR5 GR5
30 1 10 F50140 NUT,HVY,HEX,1.500-6,A325HDG A325HDG
31 17 170 F15118 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-N,.500,F844ZNC F844ZNC
32 84 840 F11200 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-W,THRU,HDN,0.750X2.000X.148,STLZNC STLZNC
33 20 200 M025683 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-N,.625,F844ZNC Steel, Mild
35 1 10 RM570063-1 611 Series, 4" Dia Hose Clamp SS, Austenitic
Pag.10 de 26
PART LIST
39 1 10 570066 BOOT, MULTIFLEX, 3" I.D. 1.2 NEOPRENE
40 1 10 12342ME01FA08 LOWER HOUSING WELDMENT W/30" MANHOLE 590.6
41 1 10 12342ME01FA09 MANHOLE 30" COVER WELDMENT 71.6
42 1 10 12342ME01FA010 MANHOLE 30" COVER SUPPORT 16.4
43 1 10 12342ME01FA10-4 PLATE, 10 x 60 I.D. x 102 O.D. 0.4 A36 STL
44 1 10 M011555-PIN,COTTER PIN,COTTER,.250X3.000,STL STL
45 28 280 F10225 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.500 GR5 ZNC
46 2 20 F10906-NUT,HEX,JAM NUT,HEX,JAM,.500-13 GR5 ZNC
47 1 10 RM577924-59 EYEBOLT, 1/2-13UNC x 6" A36 STL
48 28 280 F10867 NUT,HEX,.750-10,GR5 GR5
49 28 280 F60225 WSHR,PLN,TYPB-N,.750,F844ZNC F844ZNC
50 1 10 12342ME01EM07-50 LOCTITE SEAL Steel
Pag.11 de 26
PART LIST

Telef. 56-2-2900000 Fax 56-2- 3344919

Nº UNID ORDEN [Kg]
10 12342ME01EN07-C 12342ME01EN07 CIRCULAR BOX ASSEMBLY TYPE -C
1 1 10 12342-ILIST ACTUATOR ASSY, 250MM DIA x 250MM STROKE 111.9
2 1 10 570057 ACTUATOR SUPPORT WELDMENT 71.7
3 1 10 570058 UPPER HOUSING WELDMENT 461.0
4 1 10 571224 STUFFING BOX ASSEMBLY 22.8
5 1 10 570577 SHAFT, CIRCULAR BOX 68.2
6 1 10 RM1080096-5 DART VALVE SEAT 21" DIA. 144.5
E 7 1 10 1183394 1183394 VALVE DART 24" DIA. 67.5
E 8 1 10 1083519-01 COVER, DART VALVE, 26" 19.1
9 1 10 1085506-01 HOSE, 3" ID x 3-1/2" OD x 1-1/2" LG, NATURAL RUBBER 0.1 NAT. RUBBER
10 1 10 571223 HOUSING, SHAFT 30.0
13 1 10 571225 3/4'' THRU 3'' SOLIDLUBE LT 4-BOLT FLANGE BEARING - 700 Series 1.2
14 1 10 570059 GSKT, FF, FLG, NEOP, 12 3/16" O.D. x 6 11/16" I.D. x 1/8" 0.2 NEOPRENE
15 1 10 570060 SLIDE PLATE 1.2 UHMWPE
16 1 10 570062 PLATE, 10 x 450 x 500 16.1 A36 STL
17 1 10 43369H FLANGE, FLAT FACED 11.1 A36 STL
18 1 10 570065 TUBING, 3" I.D. x 516" WALL 1.1 NEOPRENE
19 8 80 F11786 SCR,SHC,FLT,.375-16X1.000,ALLOY GR5 ZNC
25 8 80 F10103 SCR,HHC,.625-11X2.250,GR5 GR5
29 8 80 F10871 NUT,HEX,.625-11,GR5 GR5
30 1 10 F50140 NUT,HVY,HEX,1.500-6,A325HDG A325HDG
31 17 170 F15118 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-N,.500,F844ZNC F844ZNC
33 20 200 M025683 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-N,.625,F844ZNC Steel, Mild
Pag.12 de 26
PART LIST

39 1 10 570066 BOOT, MULTIFLEX, 3" I.D. 1.2 NEOPRENE
40 1 10 12342ME01FA08 LOWER HOUSING WELDMENT W/30" MANHOLE 590.6
41 1 10 12342ME01FA09 MANHOLE 30" COVER WELDMENT 71.6
42 1 10 12342ME01FA010 MANHOLE 30" COVER SUPPORT 16.4
43 1 10 12342ME01FA10-4 PLATE, 10 x 60 I.D. x 102 O.D. 0.4 A36 STL
44 1 10 M011555-PIN,COTTER PIN,COTTER,.250X3.000,STL STL
45 28 280 F10225 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.500 GR5 ZNC
46 2 20 F10906-NUT,HEX,JAM NUT,HEX,JAM,.500-13 GR5 ZNC
47 1 10 RM577924-59 EYEBOLT, 1/2-13UNC x 6" A36 STL
48 28 280 F10867 NUT,HEX,.750-10,GR5 GR5
49 28 280 F60225 WSHR,PLN,TYPB-N,.750,F844ZNC F844ZNC
50 1 10 12342ME01EM07-50 LOCTITE SEAL Steel
Pag.13 de 26
PART LIST

Telef. 56-2-2900000 Fax 56-2- 3344919

ITEM CANT TOTAL Part Number Drawing Nº Ref Description Weight

Nº UNID ORDEN [kg]
E 4 12342ME01EN02-A 12342ME01EN02 DISCHARGE , BOX ASSEMBLY
1 6 24 12173ME01EN09-A 12173ME01EN09 BEARING ASSY / GUIDE, VALVE ROD 6
2 1 4 12342ME01FA02 12342ME01FA02 DISCHARGE BOX 3458
3 1 4 12173ME01FA03-A 12173ME01FA03 MECHANISM BEAM SUPPORT 218
4 2 8 12173ME01FA04-A 12173ME01FA04 SUPPORT ANGLE 45
5 1 4 12173ME01FA15-A 12173ME01FA15 SUPPORT ANGLE & DEFLECTOR 172
E 6 2 8 12173ME01EN06-A 12173ME01EN06 VALVE DIA 21" 28
E 7 2 8 12173ME01FA14-D 12173ME01FA14 SP. NUT 3" NPT Steel/znc 1
9 2 8 12173ME01FA16-A 12173ME01FA16 18", DART VALVE SEAT 37
E 10 2 8 12342-I LIST 12342-I LIST PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR CS1 250-350 15
12 8 32 12342ME01EN02-12 Washer 7/8 Gr5. znc
13 8 32 12342ME01EN02-13 Unified Hex Nuts 7/8-9 ANSI B18.2.2 Gr5. znc
14 12 48 12342ME01EN02-14 Bolts 1/2"- 13 ; L: 2" Gr5. znc
15 12 48 12342ME01EN02-15 Nuts 1/2" -13 Gr5. znc
16 24 96 12342ME01EN02-16 Washer - A 1/2" Gr5. znc
17 8 32 12342ME01EN02-17 Bolts 3/4-10; L: 2" Gr5. znc
E 18 8 32 F10889 Nuts 3/4-10 Gr5. znc
19 168 672 12342ME01EN02-19 washer 3/4 Gr5. znc
20 76 304 12342ME01EN02-20 Bolts 3/4-10; L: 3 1/4" Gr5. znc
E 21 76 304 F10889 Nuts 3/4-10 Gr5. znc
22 2 8 12173ME01FA14-A 12173ME01FA14 VALVE ROD 3"; UPPER SEGMENT 4
23 2 8 12173ME01FA14-C 12173ME01FA14 VALVE ROD 3"; LOWER SEGMENT 2
25 2 8 12173ME01FA14-F 12173ME01FA14 TUBING, 3" I.D. x 5/16" WALL; L:585 mm NAT. RUBBER 2
26 4 16 12173ME01FA14-E 12173ME01FA14 TUBING, 3" I.D. x 5/16" WALL; L:510mm NAT. RUBBER 2
29 2 8 BAP2080-1008-02-14 PL 20 X 715 I. D. X 927 O. D. ASTM A36 104
E 31 2 8 12173ME01FA14-G 12173ME01FA14 EYE BOLT; 2" SP 6
E 33 2 8 ANSI B18.2.2 - 2 - 4 1/2 Heavy Hex Jam Nut Gr5. znc 1
34 2 8 ISO 4035 - M56 Hexagon thin nuts (chamfered) - GR A and B Gr5. znc 1
35 2 8 12342ME01EN02-35 BLIND FLANGE; PL 20 X 483 O. D. STLA36 /Rubb. 28
37 12 48 12342ME01EN02-37 Hex Nut - 7/8 - 9 Gr5. znc
38 12 48 12342ME01EN02-38 Washer A - 7/8 - narrow - Type A Gr5. znc
39 12 48 12342ME01EN02-39 Hex Bolt - 7/8-9 UNC - 3 (Reg. Thr - In) Gr5. znc
40 12 48 12342ME01EN02-40 Spring Lock Washer - 7/8" Regular Gr5. znc
41 4 16 12342ME01EN02-41 Hex Bolt - 5/8"-11 - UNC Gr5. znc
42 4 16 12342ME01EN02-42 Hex Nut - 5/8 - 11 Gr5. znc
43 4 16 12342ME01EN02-43 Washer A - 5/8" REGULAR Gr5. znc
44 4 16 12342ME01EN02-44 Helical Spring Lock Washer 5/8" Gr5. znc
Pag.14 de 26
PART LIST

Telef. 56-2-2900000 Fax 56-2- 3344919


Nº UNID ORDEN
E 12 12342ME01EN13-A 12342ME01EN13 MECHANISM ASSEMBLY
1 1 12 1192856-01 1192856 SHAFT, #450, WEMCO FLOT, STEEL
2 1 12 1124636-05 1124636 55" STAR ROTOR, #450, NATURAL RUBBER
(ADD DWGS: BAP2080SKR55 / 905200)
3 12 144 1144077-01 1144077/8017659 DISPERSER HOOD SECTOR # 450, POLYURETHANE
4 1 12 1108838-01L 1108838 CROWDER AND STANDPIPE ASSEMBLY
5 1 12 1124418-01 1124418 DISPERSER MODEL 250, WEMCO FLOT POLYURETHANE
(ADD DWGS: 1124417/1138258/905200)
6 1 12 12342ME01FA15-A 12342ME01FA15 / 1159765 MECHANISM SUPPORT #450, FLOT, STEEL/RUBBER
7 1 12 1193075-01L 1193075 MANUAL AIR INLET ASSY, 14", WEMCO FLOT
8 1 12 1125888-01 1125888/905200 CAP, ROTOR, #250, WEMCO FLOT, RUBBER
9 4 48 903150A 903150 SEALANT, URETHANE ADHESIVE
10 1 12 1159767-01 1159767 REDUCER MOUNTING PLATE, # 450, FLOT, STEEL
13 1 12 12342ME01EN14-A BAP2080-156 DRIVE ASSEMBLY, #450, WEMCO FLOT
15 48 576 1126231-01 1126231 HOOD SECTOR BOSS, SCH-40 PIPE, 316S/S
16 12 144 1141671-01 1141671 HOOD SECTOR CLAMP, #450, WEMCO FLOT, STEEL
17 1 12 1192857-01 1192857 ADAPTER FLANGE, #450, WEMCO FLOT, STEEL
18 108 1296 F10442 CAPSCREW, HX HD, GR5, ZNC, 1/2-13x2-3/4
23 4 48 M026065 CAPSCREW, HX HD, GR5, ZNC, 1-8x2
25 18 216 M034012 CAPSCREW, HX HD, GR5, ZNC, 1-1/4-7x6
27 12 144 M032251 CAPSCREW, HX HD, GR5, ZNC, 7/8-9x3
31 108 1296 M015646 NUT,HX,NYLOC, GR5, ZNC, 1/2-13
32 32 384 F10889 NUT, HX, GR5, ZNC, 3/4-10
34 12 144 F10859 NUT, HX, GR5, ZNC, 7/8-9 (NUT, HVY HX, A325)
35 18 216 M015130 NUT, HX, GR8, ZNC, 1-1/4-7
39 216 2592 F11199 WASHER, PLN, ZNC, 1/2" x 1-3/8 x ,109
(TYPE A-W, THRU HDN)
40 30 360 F11197 WASHER, PLN, ZNC, 5/8"x1-3/4x,134
(TYPE A-W, THRU HDN, STL)
41 20 240 M025682 WASHER, PLN, TYPE A-N, F844, ZNC, 1.00
42 102 1224 M025681 WASHER, PLN, TYPE A-N, F844, ZNC, 3/4
43 4 48 F11201 WASHER, PLN, TYPE A-N, F844, ZNC, 1.00
44 24 288 M033872 WASHER, PLN, TYPE A-N, THRU HDN, STL, ZNC, 7/8
45 36 432 M033868 WASHER, PLN, TYPE A-N, STL, ZNC, 1-1/4
50 1 12 21066A 21066 NAMEPLATE
Pag. 15 de 26
PART LIST

Telef. 56-2-2900000 Fax 56-2- 3344919

STAMP SERIAL NUMBERS:

SEE BAP2080-107 CELL TAG NO.
FOR TAG NUMBERS
21066HL (DWG 21066) QTY. 1 LEGEND PLATE
51 1 12 W75305-1 75305 PLATE, CAUTION, VBELT
STAMP WITH DEFLECTION : 21mm AND LBS. MAX: 23
52 1 12 W69017-1 69017 DECAL, WARNING, MOVING PARTS
53 8 96 W234140 RIVET, WARNING, MOVING PARTS
Pag. 16 de 26
PART LIST

Telef. 56-2-2900000 Fax 56-2- 3344919


Nº UNID ORDEN
E 12 12342ME01EN14-A 12342ME01EN14 DRIVE ASSEMBLY
1 1 12 616159-220 616159-220 MOTOR, 400HP, 1500 RPM, 3300 V, 50 HZ
2 1 12 1191775-01 1191775 REDUCER VERTICAL, B3BV 15, FLENDER
3 1 12 1191764-01 1191764 SHEAVE, 17" OD, 4,125" BORE, 8V, 10-GRV
4 1 12 1191765-01 1191765 SHEAVE, 21,2" OD, 90MM BORE, 8V, 10-GRV
5 10 120 1122938-01 1122938 V-BELT, 8VX1600
E 6 1 12 12342ME01EN06-A 12342ME01EN06 BELT GUARD, #450, WEMCO FLOT, STEEL
7 1 12 561501 561501 MOUNTING PLATE, MOTOR, # 450, STEEL
8 2 24 561502 561502 ADJUSTING SCREW, W/HARDWARE ZNC
9 2 24 1122939-01 1122939-01 RETAINER, MOUNTING PLATE, STEEL
11 4 48 M032251 CAPSCREW, HX HD, GR5, ZNC, 7/8-9x3
13 6 72 M028758 CAPSCREW, HX HD, GR5, ZNC, 7/8-9x4-1/4
14 6 72 F10859 NUT, HX, GR5, ZNC, 7/8-9, (NUT, HVY HX, A325)
18 6 72 M011241 WASHER, LOCK, ZNC, 5/8"
(FLAT, THRU HDN, F436)
E 25
30 1 12 1160208-01 1160208 RETAINER, SEAL, REDUCER, SIZE 15
31 1 12 1160209-01 1160209 SEAL, REDUCER, SIZE 15 G.B
E 32 1 12 12173C117-A 12173C117 TERMINAL SUPPORT
E 33 1 12 12173ME01FA015-C 12173ME01FA015 ESCUADRAS TERMINAL SUPPORT
E 34 12 144 12342ME01EN14-34 CAPSCREW, HX HD,GR5 ZNC, 5/8-111 x 2
E 35 18 216 12342ME01EN14-35 Washer, PLN, TYPE A-W F844, ZNC, 5/8
E 36 12 144 12342ME01EN14-36 NUT, HX, GR5, ZNC, 5/8-11
E 37 6 72 12342ME01EN14-37 CAPSCREW, HX HD,GR5 ZNC, 5/8-111 x 2
E 38 1 12 12173ME01FA015-D 12173ME01FA015 ESCUADRAS TERMINAL SUPPORT
Pag. 17 de 26
PART LIST

Telef. 56-2-2900000 Fax 56-2- 3344919


Nº UNID ORDEN
E 12 12342ME01EN06-A 12342ME01EN06 BELT GUARD, #450, WEMCO FLOT, STEEL
1 1 12 12342ME01FA07-C 12342ME01FA07 VENTANA TIPO C
2 1 12 12342ME01FA07-D 12342ME01FA07 VENTANA TIPO D
3 1 12 12342ME01FA07-A 12342ME01FA07 ESTRUCTURA CUBRE CORREA
4 2 24 12342ME01EN06-4 Type A - Wing Nut - ANSY B18,7 -1/2-13 Gr5. znc
5 2 24 12342ME01EN06-5 PL 3 x DIA. EXT 40 x DIA. INT 14
6
Pag.18 de 26
PART LIST

Telef. 56-2-2900000 Fax 56-2- 3344919


Nº UNID ORDEN
12 1108838 1108838 CROWDER AND STANDPIPE ASSEMBLY
4 6 72 1108839-01 1108839/900417 STANDPIPE & CROWDER SEGMNT, #450, STL/RBBR
11 72 864 M025681 WASHER, PLN, TYPE A-N, F844, ZNC, 3/4
12 36 432 F10889 NUT, HX, GR5, ZNC, 3/4-10
Pag. 19 de 26
PART LIST

Telef. 56-2-2900000 Fax 56-2- 3344919


Nº UNID ORDEN
12 1193075 1193075 MANUAL AIR INLET ASSEMBLY
4 1 12 1193058-01 1193058 AIR INLET PIPE #450, WEMCO FLOT, STEEL

7 1 12 1193063-01 1193063 AIR INLET ARM, 14", MANUAL BUTTERFLY, STEEL
10 1 12 1193065-01 1193065 AIR INLET PLATE, 14", MANUAL BUTTERFLY, STL
12 2 24 83747AK 83747 U-BOLT, RND, STL, W/NUTS, GR2, ZNC
13 4 48 F12197 NUT, HX, GR2, ZNC, 1/4-20
18 1 12 M032288 NUT, WING, TYPE A, ZNC, 3/8-16
(FLAT, THRU HDN, F436)
27 6 72 F10859 NUT, HX, GR5, ZNC, 7/8-9 (NUT, HVY HX, A325)
Pag. 20 de 26
PART LIST

Telef. 56-2-2900000 Fax 56-2- 3344919


Nº UNID ORDEN
12 1121515-01L 1121515 LEVEL SENSOR ASSEMBLY
1 1 12 1121187-01L 1121187 LEVEL FLOAT ASSEMBLY
5 1 12 1121125-01 1121125 SUPPORT, LEVEL FLOAT
11 2 24 83747G 83747 U-BOLT, RND, ST , W/NUTS, GR2 ZNC**

5/8-11x6 PIPE
20 4 48 F10407 CAPSCREW, HX HD, GR5ZNC 5/8-11x2
21 4 48 F10858 NUT, HX, GR5ZNC 5/8-11
22 12 144 F11197 WASHER, PLN TYPE A-W, THRU HDN STL ZNC**
5/8" x 1 3/4 x ,134
12 1121187-01L 1121187 LEVEL FLOAT ASSEMBLY

1 1 12 1109224-01 1109224 WELL, STILLING, SHORT
2 1 12 1071405-01 1071405 PLATE, TARGET, PVC
4 1 12 1109109-01 1109109 PLATE, SENSOR, 2" FPT, PVC

5 1 12 1109264-01 1109264 CAGE, FLOAT
7 3 36 F14804 CAPSCREW, HX HD GR5ZNC 1/4- 20x 3/4
8 1 12 W8017722A 8017722 DETECTOR, SONIC LEVEL

9 1 12 1113228-01 1113228 FLOAT, BALL, 6" DIA, 304 SS
13 1 12 1071772-02 ALL THREAD, 304SS, 1/4-20x38"

14 8 96 F10430 CAPSCREW, HX, GR5ZNC 3/8-16X1 1/2
15 4 48 F10417 CAPSCREW, HX, GR5ZNC 1/2-13X2 1/2
17 2 24 F11198 WASHER, PLN TYPE A-W, F844ZNC 1/4

18 16 192 F11173 WASHER, PLAIN, TYPE A-W, F844ZNC, 3/8
19 8 96 F11199 WASHER, PLAIN, TYPE A-W, THRU
HDN, STL, ZNC, 1/2"x 1-3/8 x ,109
23 2 24 M024371 NUT, HX, GR5ZNC 1/4-20
24 8 96 F10855 NUT, HX, GR5ZNC 3/8-16
25 4 48 F10856 NUT, HX, GR5ZNC 1/2-13
Pag. 21 de 26
PART LIST

Telef. 56-2-2900000 Fax 56-2- 3344919


Nº UNID ORDEN
1 12342ME01EN003 12342ME01EN003 PLATFORM ASSEMBLY
1 2 2 12342ME01FA041-A 12342ME01FA041 ACTUATOR PLATFORM
2 2 2 12342ME01FA041-D 12342ME01FA041 PLATFORM BEAM
3 6 6 12342ME01FA041-E 12342ME01FA041 GRATING WALKWAY
4 2 2 12342ME01FA42-D 12342ME01FA42 HANDRAIL, WALKWAY
5 2 2 BAP2080-1026 BAP2080-1026 PLATFORM BEAM
7 2 2 BAP2080-1036 BAP2080-1036 HANDRAIL, WALKWAY
9 4 4 BAP2080-1078 BAP2080-1078 GRATING WALKWAY
11 2 2 BAP2080-1003 BAP2080-1003 SUPPORT BEAM
15 10 10 BAP2080-1092 BAP2080-1092 STAIR STRINGER
16 4 4 BAP2080-1042 BAP2080-1042 HANDRAIL, STAIR STRINGER
19 1 1 12342ME01FA42-A 12342ME01FA42 HANDRAIL, WALKWAY
20 1 1 12342ME01FA43-C 12342ME01FA43 HANDRAIL, WALKWAY
23
E 28 8 8 12342ME01EN004-28 Hex Cap Screws 3/4-10x2.5 Gr5. Znc
E 29 32 32 12342ME01EN004-29 Hex Cap Screws 3/4-10x2 Gr5. Znc
E 31 60 60 12342ME01EN004-31 Hex Bolts 3/8-16x1.25 Gr5. Znc
E 32 40 40 12342ME01EN004-32 Hex Nuts 3/4-10 Gr5. Znc
E 35 80 80 12342ME01EN004-35 Washer 3/4 Gr5. Znc
E 38 120 120 906204-A 906204 GRATING CLIP ASSY.
Pag. 22 de 26
PART LIST

Telef. 56-2-2900000 Fax 56-2- 3344919


Nº UNID ORDEN
1 12342ME01EN004 12342ME01EN004 PLATFORM ASSEMBLY
1 2 2 12342ME01FA042-D 12342ME01FA042 HANDRAIL, WALKWAY
2 6 6 12342ME01FA041-E 12342ME01FA041 GRATING WALKWAY
3 2 2 12342ME01FA041-A 12342ME01FA041 ACTUATOR PLATFORM
4 2 2 12342ME01FA41-D 12342ME01FA42 PLATFORM BEAM
16 40 40 BAP2080-1092 BAP2080-1092 STAIR TREAD
17 16 16 BAP2080-1042 BAP2080-1042 HANDRAIL, STAIR STRINGER
E 29 224 224 12342ME01EN004-29 Hex Cap Screws 3/4-10x2 Gr5. Znc
E 31 720 720 12342ME01EN004-31 Hex Bolts 3/8-16x1.25 Gr5. Znc
Pag. 23 de 26
PART LIST
E 38 550 550 906204-A 906204 GRATING CLIP ASSY.
Pag. 24 de 26
PART LIST

Telef. 56-2-2900000 Fax 56-2- 3344919

Nº UNID ORDEN [Kg]
E 1 12342ME01EN10 12342ME01EN10 CABLE TRAY ASSEMBLY
1 36 36 1198504 1198504 CABLE TRAY 1,7
2 36 36 1198612 1198612 CABLE TRAY COVER PLATE 0,8
3 216 216 88441C 88441 TEKS/4, HX WSHR HD, CADSTL 1/4-14x1
4 224 224 F10855 Hex Nut 3/8-16
5 224 224 F11202 Washer 3/8
6 38 38 1198557 1198557 UNISTRUT, P1000
7 38 38 1198558-2 1198558 ALLTHREAD ROD
8 38 38 F10430 Hex Bolt - 3/8-16 UNC - 1,5
9 24 24 1198558-03 1198558 ALL THREAD ROD
10 12 12 M048948 UNISTRUT P 1000, GA12 0,5
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Pag.25 de 26
PART LIST

Telef. 56-2-2900000 Fax 56-2- 3344919

Nº UNID ORDEN [Kg]
E 1 12342ME01EN11 12342ME01EN11 CABLE TRAY ASSEMBLY
1 172 172 1198504 1198504 CABLE TRAY 1,651
2 190 190 1198557 1198557 UNISTRUT, P1000 0,317
3 190 190 1198558-2 1198558 ALLTHREAD ROD
4 172 172 1198612 1198612 CABLE TRAY COVER PLATE
5 1032 1032 88441C 88441 TEKS/4, HX WSHR HD, CADSTL 1/4-14x1
6 190 190 F10430 Hex Bolt - 3/8-16 UNC - 1,5
7 1048 1048 F10855 Hex Nut 3/8-16
8 1048 1048 F11202 Washer 3/8
9 96 96 1198558-03 1198558 ALL THREAD ROD
10 48 48 M048948 UNISTRUT P 1000, GA12 0,485
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Pag.26 de 26
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Parts List 12342ME01FA03
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION MASS MATERIAL
1 2 12342ME01FA03-A DRAFT TUBE 314,6 Steel
2 2 12342ME01FA03-C DRAFT TUBE 369,1 Steel
7
3 2 12342ME01FA03-D COLLAR SPLIT 112,0 Steel
ROTOR 4 53 5/8-11x2.000 Hex 5/8-11x2.000 0,1 Steel, Mild
5 106 0.6250 N Washer 0.6250 N 0,0 Steel, Mild
1 6 53 5/8-11 Hex 5/8 0,0 Steel, Mild
D 7 NATURAL RUBBER THI. 10 mm. Rubber D
8 NATURAL RUBBER THI. 3 mm. Rubber
80
150
3
3
A A
3057
7
4
DETAIL 1
5
AFTER DRAFT TUBE WILL BE ASSEMBLED
ADD EPOXIC PASTE IN ORDER TO PROTECT THE BOLTS
1
C C
RUBBER 3 mm. EACH FACE
6
2 (TOTAL 6 mm.)
2 DRAFT TUBE & CONICAL ALL RUBBER

1
COVERED INSIDE 10 mm OF THICKNESS

5
MAT: NATURAL RUBBER
6
THIS FACE WILL BE RUBBER
COVERED WITH 3 mm. THICKNESS
RUBBER 10 mm.
SECTION A-A
2
B B
RUBBER 10 mm.
7 DETAIL 2 RUBBER 3 mm.
REVISION HISTORY
REV DESCRIPTION DATE AUTH APPROVED
A EMITIDO PARA REVISION SEP. 2008 IMF CFS
0 EMITIDO PARA FABRICACION OCT. 2008 IMF CFS
1 SE MODIFICA ITEM 2 20-02-2009 IMF CFS
2 SE AGREGAN ITEMS 7 Y 8 MAR. 2009 IMF CFS
A
D A
THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH MINERALS AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED C COPYRIGHT FLSMIDTH
NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH MINERALS OR INSTALLING, OPERATIONG OR MAINTAINING ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
FLSMIDTH MINERALS EQUIPMENT, UNLESS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH MINERALS SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH, USA
DO NOT SCALE PRINTS FILE SPEC. 12342ME01EN005.idw REF. FROM
DATE 25/09/2008 SHEET 1 OF 1

DRAWN IMF ASSEMBLY DRAFT TUBE 257 M3 CELL REV.
CFS WEMCO FLOTATION

2
CHECK'D
12342ME01EN005
DWG.
No.
APPR ACJ
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Parts List
430
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION MASS MATERIAL
11 1 1 558575-01 ACTUATOR ASSY, 250MM DIA x 250MM STROKE 111.9 kg
38 2 1 570057 ACTUATOR SUPPORT WELDMENT 71.7 kg
4 3 1 570058 UPPER HOUSING WELDMENT 461.0 kg
4 4 1 571224 STUFFING BOX ASSEMBLY 22.8 kg
20 5 1 570577 SHAFT, CIRCULAR BOX 68.2 kg
33
25 29 33 6 1 RM1080096-5 DART VALVE SEAT 21" DIA. 115.1 kg
1 14 D 7 1 1183394 VALVE DART 24" 67.5 kg
D D
8 1 1083519-01 COVER, DART VALVE, 26" 19.1 kg
1 5 9 1 1085506-01 HOSE, 3" ID x 3-1/2" OD x 1-1/2" LG, NATURAL RUBBER 0.1 kg NAT. RUBBER
16
35
3 20
10
11
1
1
571223
570055
HOUSING, SHAFT
BELLOWS
30.0 kg
0.2 kg NEOPRENE
10
12 1 570056 BELLOWS 0.1 kg NEOPRENE
37 39
13 1 571225 3/4'' THRU 3'' SOLIDLUBE LT 4-BOLT FLANGE BEARING - 700 Series 1.2 kg
13 DETAIL 1 14 1 570059 GSKT, FF, FLG, NEOP, 12 3/16" O.D. x 6 11/16" I.D. x 1/8" 0.2 kg NEOPRENE
12
15 1 570060 SLIDE PLATE 1.2 kg UHMWPE
2 11 12 5 16 1 570062 PLATE, 10 x 450 x 500 16.1 kg A36 STL
1210
2 38 17 1 43369H FLANGE, FLAT FACED 11.1 kg A36 STL
18 1 570065 TUBING, 3" I.D. x 516" WALL 1.1 kg NEOPRENE
4 2
13 12 19 8 F11786 SCR,SHC,FLT,.375-16X1.000,ALLOY 0.0 kg GR5 ZNC
20 8 F10417 SCR,HHC,.500-13X2.500,GR5ZNC 0.1 kg GR5ZNC
20 31 26 21 4 F10403 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.000,GR5ZNC 0.2 kg GR5ZNC
3 32 27 21 22 4 F10407 SCR,HHC,.625-11X2.000,GR5ZNC 0.1 kg GR5ZNC
3
23 8 F23925 SCR,HHC,.625-11X2.250,GR5ZNC 0.1 kg GR5ZNC
2 11 24 36 F10404 SCR,HHC,.750-10X4.000,GR5ZNC 0.3 kg GR5ZNC
10 25 8 F10103 SCR,HHC,.625-11X2.250,GR5 0.1 kg GR5
32 33 28 26 8 F10856 NUT,HEX,.500-13,GR5ZNC 0.0 kg GR5ZNC
39 27 40 F10889 NUT,HEX,.750-10,GR5ZNC 0.1 kg GR5ZNC
28 12 F10858 NUT,HEX,.625-11,GR5ZNC 0.0 kg GR5ZNC
17 36
1 DETAIL 2 29 8 F10871 NUT,HEX,.625-11,GR5 0.0 kg GR5
30 1 F50140 NUT,HVY,HEX,1.500-6,A325HDG 0.6 kg A325HDG
3874
3874
34 28 23
31 17 F15118-WSHR,PLN,TYPA WSHR,PLN,TYPA-N,.500,F844ZNC 0.0 kg F844ZNC
40 -N,.500,F844ZNC
6 3 32 84 F11200 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-W,THRU,HDN,0.750X2.000X.148,STLZNC 0.0 kg STLZNC
1
42 33 20 M025683 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-N,.625,F844ZNC 0.0 kg Steel, Mild
C 5 C
34 16 F11197 WSHR,PLN,TYPA-W,THRU,HDN,0.625X1.750X.134,STLZNC 0.0 kg STLZNC
35 1 RM570063-1 611 Series, 4" Dia Hose Clamp 0.0 kg SS, Austenitic
41 35 36 1 RM570063-3 611 Series, 4" Dia Hose Clamp 0.0 kg SS, Austenitic
445
17 37 1 RM570063-4 611 Series, 6" Dia Hose Clamp 0.0 kg SS, Austenitic
18 5
38 1 RM570063-5 611 Series, 6" Dia Hose Clamp 0.0 kg SS, Austenitic
24
39 1 570066 BOOT, MULTIFLEX, 3" I.D. 1.2 kg NEOPRENE

50 40 1 12342ME01FA08 LOWER HOUSING WELDMENT W/30" MANHOLE 590.6 kg
12
2253
2253
41 1 12342ME01FA09 MANHOLE 30" COVER WELDMENT 71.6 kg
APPLY A BED OF LOCTITE
42 1 12342ME01FA010 MANHOLE 30" COVER SUPPORT 16.4 kg
DETAIL 3
24
ON SITE
43 1 12342ME01FA10-4 PLATE, 10 x 60 I.D. x 102 O.D. 0.4 kg A36 STL
24 27 32 44 1 M011555-PIN,COTTER PIN,COTTER,.250X3.000,STL 0.0 kg STL
45 28 F10225 SCR,HHC,.750-10X2.500 0.2 kg GR5 ZNC
731
46 2 F10906-NUT,HEX,JAM NUT,HEX,JAM,.500-13 0.0 kg GR5 ZNC

7 47 1 RM577924-59 EYEBOLT, 1/2-13UNC x 6" 0.3 kg A36 STL
1
48 28 F10867 NUT,HEX,.750-10,GR5 0.1 kg GR5
1282
1189
49 28 F60225 WSHR,PLN,TYPB-N,.750,F844ZNC 0.0 kg F844ZNC

8 19 50 1 12342ME01EM07-50 LOCTITE SEAL 0.1 kg Steel
30 9 12
639
C C
FLOW
458
40
11
90 REF.
3
LATERAL VIEW
100°
100°
1407
B B
4
3
PROCESS
13°
1
10°
SECTION A-A
16 A
42
q
15 31 46 47 12
0°
520 REF. TY
B 3
P.
40
42
AT
T. PART N°: 12342ME01EN07-A PART N°: 12342ME01EN07-C
6 RP
HO
520
9A
NC PART NAME: CIRCULAR BOX ASSY PART NAME: CIRCULAR BOX ASSY
n99
643 REF.
(OPPOSITE) (AS SHOWN)

120°
40
B
43
250
REVISION HISTORY
REV DESCRIPTION BY DATE APPROVED
44 A INITIAL RELEASE. ISSUED TO CONSTRUCTION. JSM 05/11/2008 CFS
B ADD ANCHOR DETAILS, AS SHOWN, & OPP. VIEW; ADD 3D VIEW. JSM 26/02/2009 CFS
45 48 49
C GENERAL REVISION JSM 03-06-2009 CFS
41
D MODIFIED AS INDICATED. JSM 10/06/2009 CFS
A 40
41
SECTION B-B D A
SECTION C-C
24
A THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH DORR OLIVER EIMCO AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED C COPYRIGHT GL&V
3 17 3 41
28 34 23 NOR TO BE USED EXCEPT FOR EVALUATING PROPOSALS OF FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO OR INSTALLING, OPERATIONG OR MAINTAINING ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
(ANCHOR BOLT DISTRIBUTION) DORR-OLIVER EIMCO EQUIPMENT, UNLESS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH DORR-OLIVER EIMCO SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH, USA Rev G (12/02)
1640
( 0,075 : 1 ) DO NOT SCALE PRINTS FILE SPEC. 12342ME01EN07 REF. FROM
DATE 28/10/2008 SHEET 1 OF 1

CIRCULAR BOX
PLAN VIEW 3D VIEW DRAWN JSM
MOD 40"
REV.
CFS
D
CHECK'D DWG.
APPR ACJ ASSEMBLY DETAILS No. 12342ME01EN07
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
D D
VIEW A-A
9
C
VIEW E-E C
B
B
3 A A
4
C C
32
B 34 35 36 B
D D
E
33
34 35 36
3
4
6
VIEW B-B
17 18
P/NAME: DRIVE ASSEMBLY
30
P/N: 12342ME01EN4-A
REVISION HISTORY
A ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION,THIS DRAWING REPLACE THE DRAWING BAP2080-156 25/02/2009 NSC CFS
B SE AGREGAN ITEM 03/06/2009 IMF CFS
30
D
31
A A
VIEW D-D THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH MINERALS AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED C COPYRIGHT FLSMIDTH
VIEW C-C 37 35 FLSMIDTH MINERALS EQUIPMENT, UNLESS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH MINERALS SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH, USA
DATE 05/04/2009 SHEET 1 OF 1

DRIVE ASSEMBLY
DRAWN Isaac REV.
CHECK'D CFS
MODEL 450
APPR ACJ WEMCO FLOTATION
DWG.
No. 12342ME01EN14 B
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Parts List
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION MASS COMMENTS
2 12342ME01FA041-A ACTUATOR PLATFORM 171,0
PART LIST FASTENERS
PART LIST FASTENERS 2 12342ME01FA041-D PLATFORM BEAM 109,2
QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION MASS COMMENTS 6 12342ME01FA041-E GRATING WALKWAY 272,7
56 HEX. BOLT 3/4-10 x 2-1/2" HEX. BOLT 3/4-10 X 2-1/2" 2 12342ME01FA42-D HANDRAIL, WALKWAY 57,6
224 HEX. BOLT 3/4-10 x 2" HEX. BOLT 3/4-10 X 2" 10 BAP1080-1003 SUPPORT BEAM 1471,3
872 HEX. BOLT 5/8-11 x 1-3/4" HEX. BOLT 5/8-11 x 1-3/4"
16 BAP1080-1026 PLATFORM BEAM 109,3
D 280 HEX. NUT 3/4-10 HEX. NUT 3/4-10 20 BAP1080-1027 PLATFORM BEAM 155,6 D
872 HEX. NUT 5/8-11 HEX. NUT 5/8-11 16 BAP1080-1036 HANDRAIL, WALKWAY 11,7
720 HEX. NUT 3/8-16 HEX. NUT 3/8-16 10 BAP1080-1040 HANDRAIL, WALKWAY 15,1
560 WASHER 3/4 WASHER 3/4 10 BAP1080-1043 HANDRAIL, WALKWAY 14,6
1744 WASHER 5/8 WASHER 5/8
1440 WASHER 3/8 WASHER 3/8
10 BAP1080-1063 SUPPORT BEAM 1460,3
20 BAP1080-1078 GRATING, WALKWAY 148,3
2 BAP2080-1090 GRATING WALKWAY 61,2
10 BAP2080-172 GRATING
40 BAP1080-1092 STAIR TREAD 9,8
16 BAP1080-1042 HANDRAIL, STAIR STRINGER 17,2
C 8500 8500 8500 8500
B 8
8
BAP1080-1045
BAP1080-1069
STRAIR STRINGER
STAIR STRINGER
4,8
4,8
1 BAP2080-1038 HANDRAIL,WALKWAY 15,1
1 BAP-2080-1071 PLATFORMA BEAM 109,2
330-FT-717 330-FT-716 330-FT-715 330-FT-714 330-FT-713 1

1
BAP2080-1093
BAP2080-1062
PLATFORM BEAM
HANDRAIL, WALKWAY
109,2
15,0
B 1 12342ME01FA42-A HANDRAIL, WALKWAY 64,4
1 12342ME01FA43-C HANDRAIL, WALKWAY 45,7
1 12342ME01FA43-A HANDRAIL, WALKWAY 61,4
GG E E
C C
LL
C
A A
B
12500
FLUJO
330-FT-723 J 330-FT-722 330-FT-721 330-FT-720 330-FT-719

B B
A
D A
REVISION HISTORY DATE 18/04/2008 SHEET 1 OF 6

REV DESCRIPTION DATE
03/09/2008
AUTH APPROVED DRAWN IMF PLATFORM ASSEMBLY 250 M3 CELLS REV.
A INITIAL RELEASE IMF CFS
CHECK'D CFS WEMCO FLOTATION
B
C
SE AGREGA PLATAFORMA ACTUADOR
SE AGREGA LISTA DE PERNOS
28/11/2008
13/03/2009
IMF
IMF
CFS
CFS APPR ACJ
DWG.
No. 12342ME01EN004 C
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
BAP1080-1040
BAP1080-1042
BAP1080-1040
BAP1080-1042
D D
BAP1080-1042 1 BAP1080-1040
BAP1080-1040
12342ME01FA42-A
BAP1080-1040 BAP1080-1042 BAP1080-1045
BAP1080-1045 BAP1080-1003
BAP1080-1053
BAP1080-1053 BAP1080-1003
BAP1080-1003
BAP1080-1045 BAP1080-1053
12342ME01FA42-D
BAP1080-1045
BAP1080-1053 BAP1080-1003
12342ME01FA041-A BAP1080-1003
BAP1080-1053
C C
BAP1080-1040
SECTION A-A
BAP1080-1042
BAP1080-1043
BAP1080-1040
BAP1080-1043
BAP1080-1040
BAP1080-1043 BAP1080-1036 BAP1080-1042 BAP1080-1092 BAP1080-1042
BAP1080-1063 BAP1080-1078
BAP1080-1053 BAP1080-1078
BAP1080-1063 BAP1080-1063
BAP1080-1003
BAP1080-1026
3 BAP1080-1026
BAP1080-1053 BAP1080-1003
BAP1080-1027 BAP1080-1027
BAP1080-1003
BAP1080-1027
BAP1080-1053
SECTION C-C SECTION E-E
BAP1080-1045 BAP1080-1027
B
BAP1080-1003
SECTION B-B B
DETAIL 1 BAP1080-1042
Washer 3/4 BAP1080-1036

Hex Bolt 3/4-10 - 2
Hex Bolt 5/8-11 - 1,5
BAP1080-1078 Washer 5/8
N N BAP1080-1083 Washer 5/8
BAP1080-1045 BAP1080-1026 Hex Bolt 5/8-11x1.75
Hex Nuts 5/8-11 Hex Nut 5/8 - 11
Washer 5/8 BAP1080-1045
Hex Bolt 3/4-10x2.5
Hex Nut 3/4 - 10 Hex Nut 5/8 - 11
Washer 3/4
Washer 3/4 Washer 5/8
Hex Bolt- 5/8-11- 2 Washer 5/8 Washer 5/8
Washer 3/4 Washer 5/8
Washer 5/8
BAP1080-1027 Hex Nuts 3/4-10 Washer 5/8
BAP1080-1063 DETAIL 3
Hex Bolt 5/8-11x1.75
BAP1080-1053
DETAIL 2
SECTION G-G SECTION J-J
SECTION N-N SECTION L-L
A
D A
DATE 18/04/2008 SHEET 2 OF 6

DRAWN IMF PLATFORM ASSEMBLY 250 M3 CELLS REV.

APPR ACJ
DWG.
No. 12342ME01EN004 C
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
D 330-FT-717 330-FT-716 330-FT-715 330-FT-714 330-FT-713 D
C C
330-FT-723 330-FT-722 330-FT-721 330-FT-720 330-FT-719
B B
PLAN SUPPORT BEAM
A
D A
DATE 18/04/2008 SHEET 3 OF 6


APPR ACJ
DWG.
No. 12342ME01EN004 C
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
D D
BAP1080-1027 BAP1080-1026 BAP1080-1026 BAP1080-1027 BAP1080-1027 BAP1080-1026 BAP1080-1026 BAP1080-1027 BAP1080-1027 BAP1080-1026 BAP1080-1026 BAP1080-1027 BAP1080-1027 BAP1080-1026 BAP1080-1026 BAP1080-1027 330-FT-713
BAP1080-1027
BAP1080-1027
12342ME01FA041-A
12342ME01FA041-D
BAP-2080-1071
C C
BAP1080-1053 330-FT-717 330-FT-716 330-FT-715 330-FT-714

BAP1080-1045 BAP1080-1069 BAP1080-1053 BAP1080-1045 BAP1080-1069 BAP1080-1053 BAP1080-1045 BAP1080-1053 BAP1080-1045 BAP1080-1069 BAP1080-1053
BAP1080-1069 BAP1080-1045 BAP1080-1053 BAP1080-1069 BAP1080-1045 BAP1080-1053 BAP1080-1045 BAP1080-1069 BAP1080-1045

BAP1080-1053 BAP1080-1069 BAP1080-1053 BAP1080-1053
330-FT-723
12342ME01FA041-D
BAP1080-1027
12342ME01FA041-A
B B
BAP2080-1093
BAP1080-1027
330-FT-722 330-FT-721 330-FT-720 330-FT-719

BAP1080-1027 BAP1080-1026 BAP1080-1026 BAP1080-1027 BAP1080-1027 BAP1080-1026 BAP1080-1026 BAP1080-1027 BAP1080-1027 BAP1080-1026 BAP1080-1026 BAP1080-1027 BAP1080-1027 BAP1080-1026 BAP1080-1026 BAP1080-1027
PLAN PLATFORM BEAM
A
D A
DATE 18/04/2008 SHEET 4 OF 6


APPR ACJ
DWG.
No. 12342ME01EN004 C
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
BAP1080-1043
BAP1080-1043 BAP1080-1036 BAP1080-1036 BAP1080-1043 BAP1080-1036 BAP1080-1036
D D
330-FT-717 330-FT-716 330-FT-715 330-FT-714 330-FT-713
12342ME01FA43-C
BAP2080-1038
12342ME01FA42-D
12342ME01FA42-A
C C
BAP1080-1040 BAP1080-1042 BAP1080-1042 BAP1080-1040 BAP1080-1042 BAP1080-1042 BAP1080-1040 BAP1080-1042 BAP1080-1042 BAP1080-1040 BAP1080-1042 BAP1080-1042 BAP1080-1040
BAP1080-1040 BAP1080-1042
BAP1080-1040 BAP1080-1042 BAP1080-1040 BAP1080-1042
BAP1080-1040
330-FT-723 330-FT-722 330-FT-721 330-FT-720 330-FT-719
12342ME01FA43-A BAP2080-1062
12342ME01FA42-D
B B
12342ME01FA42-C
BAP1080-1043 BAP1080-1036 BAP1080-1036 BAP1080-1043 BAP1080-1036 BAP1080-1036 BAP1080-1043 BAP1080-1036 BAP1080-1036 BAP1080-1043 BAP1080-1036 BAP1080-1036 BAP1080-1043
PLAN HANDRAIL WALKWAY
A
D A
DATE 18/04/2008 SHEET 5 OF 6


APPR ACJ
DWG.
No. 12342ME01EN004 C
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
D D
330-FT-717 BAP2080-172 330-FT-716 BAP2080-172 330-FT-715 BAP2080-172

330-FT-714 BAP2080-172
330-FT-713
BAP1080-1078 BAP1080-1078 BAP1080-1078 BAP1080-1078 BAP1080-1078 BAP1080-1078 BAP1080-1078 BAP1080-1078 BAP1080-1078 BAP1080-1078
906204A
906204A
12342ME01FA041-E
12342ME01FA041-E
906204A
906204A
906204A
12342ME01FA041-E
BAP2080-172
C C
BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1092 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1092 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1092 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1092 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP2080-1090
906204A
BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1092 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1092 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1092 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1092 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083 BAP2080-1090
BAP1080-1083
12342ME01FA041-E 906204A
12342ME01FA041-E
BAP2080-172
B B
12342ME01FA041-E
906204A
906204A
BAP2080-172 BAP2080-172
BAP1080-1078 330-FT-723 BAP1080-1078

330-FT-722 BAP1080-1078 330-FT-721 BAP1080-1078 330-FT-720 BAP1080-1078 330-FT-719 BAP2080-172 BAP1080-1078
BAP2080-172
BAP1080-1078 BAP1080-1078
BAP1080-1078 BAP1080-1078
PLAN GRATING
DETAIL GRATING CLIP ASSEMBLY 906204A

PART NUBER QTY DESCRIPCTION MASS COMMENT MATERIAL
D
536 TOP CLIP STEEL
536 BOTTOM CLIP STEEL
A 536 MACHINE SCREW 1/4 x 3" STEEL A
536 HEX. NUT 1/4" STEEL THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH MINERALS AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED C COPYRIGHT FLSMIDTH
DATE 18/04/2008 SHEET 6 OF 6


APPR ACJ
DWG.
No. 12342ME01EN004 C
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Parts List
4300 8500 QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION MASS COMMENTS
222 906204A GRATING CLIP 0,0
BAP1080-1042
D
2 12342ME01FA041-A ACTUATOR PLATFORM 171,0
330-FT-711 2 12342ME01FA041-D PLATFORM BEAM 109,2
BAP1080-1042 6 12342ME01FA041-E GRATING WALKWAY 272,7
2 12342ME01FA42-D HANDRAIL, WALKWAY 57,6
BAP1080-1043 BAP1080-1036 2 BAP1080-1003 SUPPORT BEAM 1471,3
D BAP1080-1092 2 BAP1080-1026 PLATFORM BEAM 109,3 D
G G 2
2
BAP1080-1036
BAP1080-1040
HANDRAIL, WALKWAY
HANDRAIL, WALKWAY
11,7
15,1
BAP1080-1063
2 BAP1080-1043 HANDRAIL, WALKWAY 14,6
2 BAP1080-1063 SUPPORT BEAM 1460,3
2 BAP2080-172 GRATING
10 BAP1080-1092 STAIR TREAD 9,8
4 BAP1080-1042 HANDRAIL, STAIR STRINGER 17,2
2 BAP1080-1045 STRAIR STRINGER 4,8
2 BAP1080-1069 STAIR STRINGER 4,8
BAP1080-1027 1 12342ME01FA42-A HANDRAIL, WALKWAY 64,4
BAP1080-1053 1 12342ME01FA43-C HANDRAIL, WALKWAY 45,7
L SECTION D-D 1 12342ME01FA43-A HANDRAIL, WALKWAY 61,4
L
EXTREMO VIGA EXIST.
D BAP1080-1042 A MODIFICAR
A A
FLUJO
12500
12342ME01FA42-D PART LIST FASTENERS

BAP1080-1040 BAP1080-1040
4200 (REF.) 4300 (REF.)
PART LIST FASTENERS
BAP1080-1043
QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION MASS COMMENTS
C 8 HEX. BOLT 3/4-10 x 2-1/2" HEX. BOLT 3/4-10 X 2-1/2" C
BAP1080-1063
32 HEX. BOLT 3/4-10 x 2" HEX. BOLT 3/4-10 X 2"
B 330-FT-712 J 112 HEX. BOLT 5/8-11 x 1-3/4" HEX. BOLT 5/8-11 x 1-3/4"
40 HEX. NUT 3/4-10 HEX. NUT 3/4-10
112 HEX. NUT 5/8-11 HEX. NUT 5/8-11
J BAP1080-1053 3
60
80
HEX. NUT 3/8-16
WASHER 3/4
HEX. NUT 3/8-16
WASHER 3/4
12342ME01FA041-A 224 WASHER 5/8 WASHER 5/8
BAP1080-1027 120 WASHER 3/8 WASHER 3/8
2 SECTION B-B BAP1080-1045
DETAIL 1 Hex Nuts 5/8-11
12342ME01FA42-C BAP1080-1092
BAP1080-1043
12342ME01FA42-D Hex Bolt 5/8-11x1.75
Washer 5/8 BAP1080-1042
Hex Bolt 5/8-11 - 1,5
BAP1080-1078
BAP1080-1036
Washer 5/8
BAP1080-1045
B
Hex Nut 5/8 - 11
Washer 5/8 BAP1080-1026
12342ME01FA041-A Washer 5/8
BAP1080-1063
B C8500 DETAIL 2 DETAIL 3 B
C
12342ME01FA42-D
1 GENERAL PLANT VIEW BAP1080-1092 BAP1080-1045

12342ME01FA42-A
BAP1080-1040
BAP1080-1040 BAP1080-1042
SECTION C-C
BAP1080-1083
Hex Bolt 3/4-10x2.5
K K BAP1080-1083
Washer 3/4
Washer 5/8
BAP1080-1053 BAP1080-1078
BAP1080-1003
BAP1080-1053
Washer 3/4 Hex Bolt- 5/8-11- 2
Washer 3/4 Hex Bolt 3/4-10 - 2
Hex Nut 5/8 - 11
Hex Nut 3/4 - 10
BAP1080-1045 Hex Nuts 3/4-10
Washer 5/8
SECTION J-J SECTION L-L
REVISION HISTORY
Hex Bolt 5/8-11x1.75 Hex Nuts 5/8-11 REV DESCRIPTION DATE AUTH APPROVED
12342ME01FA041-A BAP1080-1053
BAP1080-1003 A INTIAL RELEASE 03/09/2008 IMF CFS
SECTION A-A Washer 5/8

BAP1080-1027
B
C
SE AGREGA PLATAFORMA DE ACTUADOR
SE AGREGA LISTA DE PERNOS
28/11/2008
13/03/2009
IMF
IMF
CFS
CFS
Washer 3/4
A BAP1080-1040
D A
BAP1080-1063 THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH MINERALS AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED C COPYRIGHT FLSMIDTH
SECTION G-G
Washer 5/8 FLSMIDTH MINERALS EQUIPMENT, UNLESS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH MINERALS SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH, USA
BAP1080-1053
DATE 02/09/2008 SHEET 1 OF 2
SECTION K-K DRAWN IMF PLATFORM ASSEMBLY 257 M3 CELLS REV.

APPR ACJ
DWG.
No. 12342ME01EN003 C
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
330-FT-711 330-FT-711
BAP1080-1027
BAP1080-1063
H BAP1080-1026 H
12342ME01FA041-D
12342ME01FA041-A
BAP1080-1027
G G
BAP1080-1003
BAP1080-1053
BAP1080-1045 BAP1080-1069
PLAN VIEW PLATFORM BEAM

12500
12500
PLAN VIEW SUPPORT BEAM
BAP1080-1053 BAP1080-1069 BAP1080-1045
330-FT-712 BAP1080-1003
330-FT-712
F F
12342ME01FA041-A
E E
12342ME01FA041-D
BAP1080-1063
BAP1080-1027 BAP1080-1027 BAP1080-1026
906204A
330-FT-711 330-FT-711
BAP1080-1078
BAP1080-1043
12342ME01FA43-C
BAP1080-1078
D 12342ME01FA42-D D
12342ME01FA041-E
BAP2080-172
906204A
12342ME01FA42-A
C BAP1080-1040 BAP1080-1042 BAP1080-1042 C

12342ME01FA43-A 906204A
12500
12500
PLAN VIEW HANDRAIL WALKWAY PLAN VIEW GRATING

BAP1080-1040
BAP1080-1092
BAP1080-1083
BAP1080-1042 BAP1080-1042 BAP1080-1083 BAP1080-1083
330-FT-712
BAP1080-1042
330-FT-712
BAP1080-1083
DETAIL GRATING CLIP ASSEMBLY 906204A

906204A PART NUMBER QTY DESCRIPTION MASS COMMENT MATERIAL
120 TOP CLIP STEEL
120 BOTTOM CLIP STEEL
B 120 MACHINE SCREW 1/4 x 3" STEEL B
120 HEX. NUT 1/4" STEEL
12342ME01FA42-D
BAP2080-172
12342ME01FA041-E A1
906204A FLSMIDTH MINERALS EQUIPMENT, UNLESS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY FLSMIDTH MINERALS SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH, USA
BAP1080-1043 BAP1080-1036 BAP1080-1078
BAP1080-1078 DATE 02/09/2008 SHEET 2 OF 2
A A
12342ME01FA42-C
906204A

APPR ACJ
DWG.
No. 12342ME01EN003 C
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ITEM CANT. PART NUMBER DESCRIPCION PESO UNIT. PESO TOTAL MATERIAL
1 1 12342ME01FA07-C VENTANA TIPO C 23 kg 23 kg
2 1 12342ME01FA07-D VENTANA TIPO D 23 kg 23 kg
3 1 12342ME01FA07-A ESTRUCTURA CUBRE CORREA 81 kg 81 kg
4 2 ANSI B18.17 - 1/2 - 13 Heavy Type A - Wing Nut 0 kg 0 kg GR5.ZNC
5 2 RM12342ME01FA07-31 PL 3 x DIA. EXT 40 x DIA. INT 14 0 kg 0 kg Steel
D D
449
VISTA DE PLANTA
DETALLE C
1950
C
C C
2
A
B
3
901
VISTA 3D
2 1
B B
A
CORTE A-A PART N°: 12342ME01EN06-A
ELEVACION
PART NAME: BELT GUARD 257M³ CELL
3 DETALLE B
REVISION HISTORY
DESCRIPTION REV DATE BY APPROVED
EMITIDO PARA FABRICACION 0 27-10-2008 IMF CAF
PERNOS SON INCLUIDOS EN EL DRIVE ENSAMBLE 1 03-06-2009 IMF CAF
A
D A
DO NOT SCALE PRINTS 12342ME01EN06.idw
FILE SPEC. REF. FROM
DATE 14-09-2006 SHEET 1 OF 1

DRAWN IMF PLANO DE ENSAMBLE REV.
CHECK'D CFS GUARDA CORREAS CELDAS 257 m³

APPR ACJ
DWG.
No. 12342ME01EN06 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Parts List
36 1198504 CABLE TRAY 1,7
36 1198612 CABLE TRAY COVER PLATE 0,8
216 88441C TEKS/4, HX WSHR HD, CADSTL 1/4-14x1 0,0
224 F10855 Hex Nut 3/8-16 0,0
224 F11202 Washer 3/8 0,0
38 1198557 UNISTRUT, P1000 0,3
D 38 1198558-2 ALLTHREAD ROD 0,1 D
38 F10430 Hex Bolt - 3/8-16 UNC - 1,5 0,0
24 1198558-03 ALL THREAD ROD 0,0
12 M048948 UNISTRUT P 1000, GA12 0,5
C D
C
D
A A
B B
1198612
1198504
C C
4
2
3
1198558-2
1198557
1198558-03
1198504
SECTION C-C F11202
F10855
F10855
1198504
M048948
F11202 DETAIL 1
1198558-2
F11202
1198557
F10855
B B
DETAIL 2
1198612
1198558-03
1 1198504 1198558-03
F11202
F10855
VIEW A-A
M048948
1198504
F10855
F11202
1198557
F10430 F10430 SECTION D-D
DETAIL 3
88441C
REVISION HISTORY
A INTIAL RELEASE 27/04/2009 IMF CFS
1198504
A
D A
1198612 THIS DRAWING CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF FLSMIDTH MINERALS AND IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED C COPYRIGHT FLSMIDTH
DATE 27/04/2009 SHEET 1 OF 1

DETAIL 4 DRAWN Isaac CABLE TRAY ASSEMBLY REV.
VIEW B-B CHECK'D CFS WEMCO FLOTATION DWG.

No. 12342ME01EN010 A
APPR ACJ
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Parts List
172 1198504 CABLE TRAY 1,651 kg
190 1198557 UNISTRUT, P1000 0,317 kg
190 1198558-2 ALLTHREAD ROD 0,085 kg
172 1198612 CABLE TRAY COVER PLATE 0,819 kg
1032 88441C TEKS/4, HX WSHR HD, CADSTL 1/4-14x1 0,009 lbmass
190 F10430 Hex Bolt - 3/8-16 UNC - 1,5 0,067 lbmass
D 1048 F10855 Hex Nut 3/8-16 0,018 lbmass D
1048 F11202 Washer 3/8
96 1198558-03 ALL THREAD ROD 0,032 kg
48 M048948 UNISTRUT P 1000, GA12 0,485 kg
C 1198504
1198612
A A
B B
D
D 1198557
C 1198558-03 C
M048948
F10855
DETAIL 1
F11202
F10855
1198558-2
1198612 F11202
1 F10855
1198612
F10855
1198558-2
B
F11202
1198558-03
4 F10855 1198557
1198557
B
2
1198558-03
3 DETAIL 2
F11202 1198557
1198504
1198504
SECTION A-A
M048948
SECTION D-D
SECTION C-C
F10855
F11202
DETAIL 3 F10430
88441C
1198612
REVISION HISTORY
A INITIAL RELEASE 26/04/2009 IMF CFS
A
1198504
D A
DETAIL 4 DATE 21/04/2009 SHEET 1 OF 1

DRAWN Isaac CABLE TRAY ASSEMBLY REV.
SECTION B-B CHECK'D CFS WEMCO FLOTATION

APPR ACJ
DWG.
No. 12342ME01EN011 A
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RELIANCE FRAME HP TYPE PHASE HERTZ RPM
SALES ORDER
B415430 5010 400 P 3 50 1491
VOLTS AMPS DUTY AMBoC INSUL S.F. NEMA DESIGN
3300 62.1 CONT 40 F 1.15 ---
CODE ENCL. ROTOR WK2 STATOR RES.@25oC

TYPICAL
LETTER (lb-ft2) OHMS (BETWEEN LINES)
DATA
G TEFC-XT 270 0.53638
PERFORMANCE
LOAD HP AMPERES RPM % %

POWER FACTOR EFFICIENCY
NO LOAD 0 18.3 1500 5.9 0.0

1/4 100 23.6 1498 60.3 91.8
2/4 200 34.6 1496 79.7 94.8
3/4 300 47.7 1494 86.0 95.5
4/4 400 62.1 1491 88.0 95.4
5/4 500 77.8 1489 88.2 95.1
6/4 600 94.9 1486 87.3 94.6
SPEED TORQUE
RPM TORQUE TORQUE AMPERES

% FULL LOAD LB-FT
LOCKED ROTOR 0 118 1667 397.1

PULL UP 300 101 1417 370.8
BREAKDOWN 1461 247 3480 199.8
FULL LOAD 1491 100 1409 62.1
AMPERES SHOWN FOR 3300 VOLT CONNECTION(S). IF OTHER VOLTAGE CONNECTIONS ARE AVAILABLE, THE AMPERES WILL
VARY INVERSELY WITH THE VOLTAGE.
REVISION 0
DR. BY CD
CK. BY S. Raynor
A-C MOTOR V142377
APP. BY T. Lingafeldt PERFORMANCE SH 1 OF 9
DATE 8/11/2008 DATA ISSUE DATE: 8/11/2008
REL S.O. B415430 HERTZ 50 AMBoC 40 CODE LETTER G
FRAME 5010 RPM 1491 INSUL F ENCLOSURE TEFC-XT
HP 400 VOLTS 3300 S.F. 1.15 STATOR RES.@25oC 0.53638
TYPE P AMPS 62.1 NEMA DESIGN --- OHMS (BETWEEN LINES)
2 2
PHASE 3 DUTY CONT ROTOR WK (lb-ft ) 270 TYPICAL DATA
4000 500
3600 450
3200 400 1
2800 350
TORQUE IN LB-FT AT 3300 VOLTS (2)
AMPS AT 3300 VOLTS (1)
2400 300
2000 250
2
1600 200
1200 150
800 100
400 50
0 0
0 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500
SPEED IN RPM
AMPERES SHOWN FOR 3300 VOLT CONNECTION, IF OTHER VOLTAGE CONNECTIONS ARE AVAILABLE, THE AMPERES WILL VARY
INVERSELY WITH THE VOLTAGE. REVISION 0
DR. BY CD A-C MOTOR
CK. BY S. Raynor V142377
DATE 8/11/2008 CURVES ISSUE DATE: 8/11/2008
2 2
1500 100 100
1498 90 90
1496 80 80
1494 70 70
PF (2) AND EFF (3) . IN PERCENT
1492 60 60 2
SPEED IN RPM (4)
AMPS (1)
1490 50 50
1488 40 40
1486 30 30
1484 20 20
RATED LOAD
1482 10 10
1480 0 0
0 70 140 210 280 350 420 490 560 630 700
HORSEPOWER
DR. BY CD A-C MOTOR
2 2
THERMAL LIMIT CURVES

1000
900 Motor Initial Temperature:
800
700 40°C Cold 120°C Hot
600
500
400 Overload
300
200
100
90
80
Breakdown
70 Acceleration
60
50
Time (Seconds)
40 Locked Rotor
30
Cold
Hot
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
Rated Voltage
1
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
Percent Full Load Current
REVISION 0
DR. BY CD A-C MOTOR
2 2
Voltage Decay Curve
(Toc = Open Circuit Time Constant)
4000
3600
3200
2800
2400
Voltage
2000 Toc = 1.832 seconds
1600
1200
800
400
0
0 1.1 2.2 3.3 4.4 5.5 6.6 7.7 8.8 9.9 11
Time (Seconds)
DR. BY CD A-C MOTOR
2 2
EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT DATA

(Per Unit, Per Phase)
FULL LOAD LOCKED ROTOR

R1 0.00961 X1 0.07643 R1 0.00777 X1 0.06499
R2 0.00502 X2 0.11171 R2 0.02132 X2 0.06322
RM 0.06412 XM 2.77751 RM 0.19992 XM 2.64956
BASE OHMS 36.49500 BASE VOLTS 1905
SC Time Constant 0.081 Sec X" = XS 0.12821
OC Time Constant 1.832 Sec X/R Ratio 11.12
R1 X1 X2
RM
R2/SLIP
XM
Parallel Equivalent
FL RM' pu 120.3785 LR RM' pu 35.31481
FL XM' pu 2.77899 LR XM' pu 2.66464
R1 = Stator dc resistance X1 = Stator leakage reactance
R2 = Rotor resistance X2 = Rotor leakage reactance
RM = Core loss resistance XM = Magnetizing reactance
SC = Short circuit FL = Full load
OC = Open circuit LR = Locked rotor
X" = XS = Subtransient reactance
REVISION 0
DR. BY CD A-C MOTOR
2 2
Power Factor vs. Speed Curve

100
90
80
70
Power Factor in Percentage
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000
Speed in RPM
DR. BY CD A-C MOTOR
2 2
Recommended Winding and Bearing Temperatures
Stator Winding Class B Class F
Maximum Running Total Temperature 130 °C 155 °C

Alarm Total Temperature 135 °C 160 °C
Trip Total Temperature 145 °C 170 °C
Sleeve Bearings - Oil Lubricated Bearing Oil

( 40 °C Ambient )
Typical Running Total Temperature 80 °C 60 °C

Anti-Friction Bearings - Grease Lubricated Bearing Grease

( 40 °C Ambient )
Typical Running Total Temperature 90 °C 80 °C

Recommended Vibration Settings for Standard Motors
Speed (rpm) Shaft Vibration (mils) Bracket Vibration (mils)

Alarm Shutdown Alarm Shutdown
3600 2.50 3.00 1.00 1.50
1800 3.00 3.50 2.00 2.50
1200 3.00 3.50 2.00 2.50
900 & Lower 3.00 3.50 2.00 2.50
REVISION 0
DR. BY CD A-C MOTOR
2 2
A-C MOTOR
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
STANDARD 3 LEAD STAR { Y } CONNECTED
T1
T3 T2
T1 T2 T3
L1 L2 L3
( N.P. 1575-BA )
REVISION 0
DR. BY CD A-C MOTOR
Instalación, Operación y
Mantenimiento de los
Motores Grandes
DutyMaster® de CA
Serie Global TEFC/TEAO
de Montaje Horizontal
Manual de Instrucciones B-3684-3S

Mayo del 2001
®
Tabla de Contenido
SECCIÓN 1: DESCRIPCIÓN GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
INTRODUCCIÓN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
RECEPCIÓN Y ACEPTACIÓN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
ALMACENAMIENTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
SECCIÓN 2: INSTALACIÓN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
INSTALACIÓN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
MANEJO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
INSPECCIÓN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
UBICACIÓN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
CIMIENTOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
VERIFICACIONES PREVIAS A LA INSTALACIÓN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
ACOPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
ALINEACIÓN DEL ACOPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
PROCEDIMIENTO DE ALINEACIÓN DEL ACOPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
LUBRICACIÓN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
COJINETES ANTIFRICCIÓN (Lubricados con grasa) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
COJINETE DE MANGUITO (Lubricado con aceite) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
CONEXIÓN ELÉCTRICA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
CONEXIÓN A TIERRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
LECHADA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SECCIÓN 3: OPERACIÓN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
VERIFICACIÓN PREVIA A LA OPERACIÓN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
ARRANQUE INICIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
LÍMITES DE VIBRACIÓN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
COMIENZO DEL SERVICIO (Avance por impulsos y arranques repetidos) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
SECCIÓN 4: MANTENIMIENTO DE RUTINA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
MANTENIMIENTO PROGRAMADO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
INSPECCIÓN PERIÓDICA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
LUBRICACIÓN DE COJINETES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
COJINETES DE MANGUITO (Lubricados con aceite) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
DESMONTAJE DEL CARTUCHO Y DEL COJINETE DE MANGUITO G50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
REEMPLAZO DEL COJINETE DE MANGUITO G50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
DESMONTAJE DEL CARTUCHO Y DE LOS COJINETES DE MANGUITO G5000,
G315, G5810 y G40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
REEMPLAZO DE LOS COJINETES DE MANGUITO G5000, G315, G5810 y G40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
DESMONTAJE DE LA ESCUADRA DE SOPORTE DEL
COJINETE ANTIFRICCIÓN Y DE MANGUITO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
DESMONTAJE Y REEMPLAZO DEL COJINETE ANTIFRICCIÓN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
DESMONTAJE DEL ROTOR Y DEL ESTATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
MANTENIMIENTO DEL BOBINADO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
LIMPIEZA EN SECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
CEPILLADO Y LIMPIEZA DE SECCIONES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
SOPLADO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
LIMPIEZA POR SOLVENTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
LIMPIEZA CON AGUA Y DETERGENTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
REACONDICIONAMIENTO (REIMPREGNACIÓN) DE LOS BOBINADOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
INSPECCIÓN DE LA RESISTENCIA DEL AISLAMIENTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
PARTES DE REPUESTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
SECCIÓN 5: ACCESORIOS OPCIONALES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
DETECTOR DE TEMPERATURA DE RESISTENCIA DEL BOBINADO - RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
TERMOSTATO DEL BOBINADO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
TERMOPAR DEL BOBINADO - T/P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
TERMISTORES DEL BOBINADO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
DETECTOR DE TEMPERATURA DE RESISTENCIA DEL COJINETE - RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
TERMOPAR DEL COJINETE - T/P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
TERMOSTATO DEL COJINETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
TERMÓMETRO DEL COJINETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
CALENTADORES ESPACIALES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
SISTEMA DE CIRCULACIÓN DE ACEITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
ACEITERA DE NIVEL CONSTANTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
TRANSFORMADORES DE CORRIENTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
PARARRAYOS Y CAPACITORES DE SOBRETENSIÓN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
APÉNDICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
DISTRIBUCIÓN GENERAL G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
COJINETE ANTIFRICCIÓN DEL ENSAMBLAJE DEL MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
COJINETE DE MANGUITO DEL ENSAMBLAJE DEL MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
RESOLUCIÓN DE PROBLEMAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
SECCIÓN 1: DESCRIPCIÓN GENERAL
INTRODUCCIÓN envolventes y sistemas de aislamiento, hasta el más mínimo
componente... cuidadosamente seleccionados y acoplados
para brindar un óptimo rendimiento. El resultado es un producto
que en realidad, más que un motor... parece un sistema.
PELIGRO
El diseño de los motores TEFC Serie G de Reliance permite
LA ALTA TENSIÓN Y LAS PARTES GIRATORIAS realizar rápidamente el desensamblaje, la inspección y el
PUEDEN CAUSAR LESIONES GRAVES O FATALES. reensamblaje. Están disponibles los siguientes accesorios
EL USO DE MAQUINARIA ELÉCTRICA, AL IGUAL comunes:
QUE CUALQUIER UTILIZACIÓN DE POTENCIA
CONCENTRADA Y EQUIPO GIRATORIO, PUEDE SER • Detectores de temperatura de cojinetes
PELIGROSO. SOLAMENTE PERSONAL CALIFICADO
DEBE REALIZAR LA INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN Y • Detectores de temperatura del bobinado
MANTENIMIENTO DE MAQUINARIA ELÉCTRICA. SE
RECOMIENDA FAMILIARIZARSE CON EL ESTÁNDAR
• Calefactores de espacios
DE SEGURIDAD NEMA MG2 PARA LA
CONSTRUCCIÓN Y GUÍA PARA LA SELECCIÓN,
INSTALACIÓN Y USO DE MOTORES HP • Pararrayos
INTEGRALES, CON EL CÓDIGO NACIONAL
ELÉCTRICO Y CON LAS PRÁCTICAS LOCALES DE • Capacitores contra sobretensión
SEGURIDAD.
• Monitores de vibración
• Cajas de conductos especiales
Este manual contiene la información que usted necesita para

IMPORTANTE obtener el máximo provecho de su Motor TEFC Serie G de
Reliance. Le sugerimos leerla completa y cuidadosamente
Siempre que se traslade el motor, será necesario bloquear antes de desempacar e instalar el motor.
el eje del motor para prevenir el movimiento axial.
RECEPCIÓN Y ACEPTACIÓN
EL FABRICANTE DE LOS PRODUCTOS DESCRITOS EN

ESTE MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES ES RELIANCE
ADVERTENCIA
ELECTRIC COMPANY.
LAS ARGOLLAS U OREJETAS DE IZADO ESTÁN
Estas instrucciones no cubren todos los detalles o variaciones DESTINADAS PARA IZAR EL MOTOR SÓLO CON
en el equipo ni contemplan todos los imprevistos o riesgos LOS ACCESORIOS ESTÁNDAR COMO EL
posibles que podrían encontrarse en relación con la instalación, TACÓMETRO, ETC., INSTALADOS POR RELIANCE
operación y mantenimiento. Si se requiere más información o si ELECTRIC. NO SE DEBEN USAR LOS MEDIOS DE
surgieran problemas particulares que no estén cubiertos en IZADO EN EL MOTOR PARA IZAR EL MOTOR
este manual, le recomendamos comunicarse con Reliance CON EQUIPO ADICIONAL INSTALADO, COMO
Electric Industrial Company. ENGRANAJES, BOMBAS, COMPRESORES U OTRO
EQUIPO IMPULSADO POR MOTOR. NO SE PUEDE
Los motores Reliance® Serie G Totalmente cerrados y enfriados USAR LOS MEDIOS DE IZADO EN EL MOTOR PARA
por ventilador (TEFC) y totalmente cerrados con aire superior IZAR CONJUNTOS DE MOTOR Y OTROS EQUIPOS
(TEAO) están diseñados y construidos para proporcionarle un INSTALADOS SOBRE UNA BASE COMÚN.
sistema de potencia de impulsión integrado por componentes
compatibles. Un sistema así es capaz de suministrar la potencia
en HP, el par torsor, la velocidad y las características de En todos los casos, debe tenerse cuidado de izar el motor en la
eficiencia de potencia necesarias para toda maquinaria fiable dirección considerada en el diseño de los medios de izado. Es
de producción. necesario usar todas las orejetas para el izado. De la misma
manera, es necesario tomar precauciones a fin de prevenir
Este enfoque de sistema se utilizó en el diseño del motor y sobrecargas peligrosas resultantes de la aceleración, de la
también en la fabricación de punta utilizada para producir y desaceleración o de las fuerzas de impacto. El ángulo de izado
probar estas robustas y confiables máquinas. Se extiende con cables o con cadenas nunca deberá ser menor de 45
desde los principales ensamblajes como los rotores, estatores, grados respecto de la horizontal.
1
Al recibir la unidad, inspeccione cuidadosamente el embalaje y embarque del eje, gire el eje (a mano) 10 a 15 revoluciones. Esta
la caja de embalaje para detectar cualquier evidencia de daño. acción distribuye la grasa, evita la corrosión en el cojinete debido
Si observa algún daño evidente, no acepte el motor antes a la condensación, o a la presencia de gases contaminantes
de que el agente de carga o de entrega expresa haga las cerca del motor. Después de girar el eje vuelva a colocar el
anotaciones apropiadas en su factura de flete o recibo puntal de embarque y el embalaje de protección del eje.
expreso. Si posteriormente se descubre alguna pérdida o daño
ocultos, notifíquelo inmediatamente a su agente de carga o de Si se almacena el motor y está expuesto a las inclemencias del
servicio expreso y solicítele que realice una inspección. tiempo, es importante inspeccionar la grasa del cojinete para
detectar la presencia de agua en el drenaje de grasa. Si la
ALMACENAMIENTO grasa está contaminada con agua, será necesario
desensamblar el motor, retirar la grasa del (de los) cojinete(s) e
Saque la unidad del embalaje hasta que esté listo para usarla. inspeccionarse la(s) carcasa(s) y el(los) cojinete(s) para
Si el motor se almacenará durante algún tiempo antes de la comprobar que no haya corrosión. Si se detecta corrosión, será
instalación, deberá colocarse en un área limpia, seca y a necesario reemplazar el(los) cojinete(s). Si no hubiera
temperatura cálida. corrosión, vuelva a empaquetar el(los) cojinete(s)/carcasa(s)
con grasa según las instrucciones de la página 13.
Las pruebas de los motores de la Serie G de Reliance con

PRECAUCIÓN cojinetes de manguito lubricados con aceite se realizan con un
aceite que contiene un inhibidor de corrosión. Este aditivo
protege contra el óxido y la corrosión los cojinetes y las partes
Los motores con cojinete de manguito se envían sin estructurales asociadas. El aceite se drena antes de enviar el
aceite. Llene los depósitos del cojinete hasta el nivel equipo. Una capa delgada de aceite permanece en las partes
correcto antes de girar el eje. El no seguir esta vitales, lo cual proporciona protección temporal de corto plazo
precaución puede dar como resultado daño o la contra la corrosión.
destrucción del equipo.
Tan pronto como reciba el motor, se recomienda llenar el
depósito de aceite del cojinete hasta el nivel de aceite
necesario y con el tipo apropiado de aceite lubricante. (En la
Siempre que el área de almacenamiento esté fría y húmeda, o página 11 se incluye información sobre la lubricación y el tipo
si existen cambios sustanciales de humedad, será necesario de lubricante para cojinetes.)
energizar los calefactores de espacios (si se suministran).
Si el intervalo de almacenamiento será de 30 días, se
Es necesario inspeccionar periódicamente el motor y verificar y recomienda girar a mano semanalmente el eje un mínimo de 10
registrar mensualmente la resistencia del aislamiento. Si ocurre a 15 revoluciones para asegurarse que exista una película de
algún cambio sustancial en la resistencia del aislamiento, será aceite en las superficies del cojinete. Si el motor está equipado
necesario investigarlo y realizar alguna acción correctiva. con calefactores en el colector de aceite será necesario
Consulte con la oficina local de ventas de Reliance para obtener activarlos para impedir que la condensación ingrese al aceite.
más información. Vuelva a colocar el puntal de envío y el embalaje del eje.
Los motores TEFC Serie G de Reliance con cojinetes Será necesario que los motores sujetos a almacenamiento
antifricción se envían con la cantidad apropiada de grasa en prolongado se manipulen y se traten de conformidad con los
cada cojinete. requisitos del Boletín de Servicio de Reliance B-8018-2
disponible en la Oficina de Ventas de Distrito de Reliance.
Después de cada 30 días de almacenamiento, retire solamente
suficiente embalaje para exponer el eje y retire el puntal de
2
SECCIÓN 2: INSTALACIÓN
INSTALACIÓN
ADVERTENCIA
ADVERTENCIA LOS MEDIOS DE IZADO EN EL MOTOR SE
SUMINISTRAN PARA MANIPULAR EL MOTOR Y
LA INSTALACIÓN DEBE REALIZARSE DE NO DEBEN USARSE PARA IZAR EL MOTOR
CONFORMIDAD CON LO ESTIPULADO EN EL CON EQUIPO ADICIONAL INSTALADO, COMO
CÓDIGO NACIONAL ELÉCTRICO Y CONGRUENTE ENGRANAJES, BOMBAS, COMPRESORES U OTRO
CON TODOS LOS CÓDIGOS LOCALES. EQUIPO IMPULSADO POR MOTOR. EN EL CASO DE
CONJUNTOS COLOCADOS EN UNA BASE COMÚN,
SERÁ NECESARIO INSTALAR EL ACOPLE, LA NO SE DEBE USAR MEDIO ALGUNO DE IZADO
CORREA Y LAS GUARDAS DE LA CADENA SEGÚN PROVISTO EN EL MOTOR O EN EL GENERADOR
SEA NECESARIO PARA BRINDAR PROTECCIÓN PARA IZAR EL CONJUNTO Y LA BASE, POR EL
CONTRA EL CONTACTO ACCIDENTAL CON PARTES CONTRARIO, SE DEBE IZAR EL CONJUNTO POR
EN MOVIMIENTO. LAS MÁQUINAS ACCESIBLES MEDIO DE UN ESTROBO ALREDEDOR DE LA BASE
AL PÚBLICO DEBERÁN TENER PROTECCIÓN O MEDIANTE OTROS MEDIOS DE IZADO PROVISTOS
ADICIONAL MEDIANTE REJILLAS, BARANDILLAS, EN LA BASE. EN TODO CASO, ES NECESARIO
ETC., A FIN DE EVITAR EL CONTACTO ENTRE EL TENER CUIDADO DE ASEGURARSE QUE EL IZADO
PERSONAL Y EL EQUIPO. SE REALICE EN LA DIRECCIÓN CONSIDERADA EN
EL DISEÑO DE LOS MEDIOS DE IZADO. DE LA
MISMA MANERA, ES NECESARIO TOMAR
Para lograr arranques con éxito es necesario observar buenas PRECAUCIONES PARA EVITAR SOBRECAR-
prácticas de manejo, de inspección y de instalación. Se debe GAS PELIGROSAS DEBIDO A FUERZAS DE
instalar el motor sobre una superficie plana con rigidez y masa ACELERACIÓN, DESACELERACIÓN O IMPACTO.
apropiadas para mantener las frecuencias resonantes del
sistema retiradas de las frecuencias de excitación en un 20%.
La necesidad de una alineación más estrecha y bases más Si se necesita el manejo o envío adicional de los motores,
pesadas se vuelve más crítica con motores de mayor tamaño y asegúrese de bloquear el eje de la misma manera que se
velocidad de funcionamiento. bloqueó en la fábrica de Reliance. El bloqueo del eje limita el
movimiento axial y radial del rotor lo cual previene el daño a los
MANEJO cojinetes.
Con mucho cuidado, extraiga el motor del embalaje. Se INSPECCIÓN

proporcionan dispositivos de izado como argollas u orejetas de
izado fundidas en la parte superior del motor. Coloque un Antes de instalar el motor, lleve a cabo las verificaciones
gancho de izado en cada uno de los dispositivos de izado siguientes:
provistos y cuidadosamente extraiga el motor de su embalaje.
Use un guinche con capacidad apropiada. 1. Verifique que no haya daños resultantes del envío.
Consulte los párrafos sobre recepción y almacenamiento.
(Consulte las páginas 1 y 2.)
2. Si el motor ha estado en almacenamiento durante un
período prolongado o si ha estado sujeto a condiciones
adversas de humedad, verifique la resistencia del
aislamiento del bobinado del estator. (Consulte la página
14.)
3. Examine los datos de la placa del motor para asegurarse
que coincida con el circuito de alimentación eléctrica al
cual se conectará. Se garantiza que el motor funcionará
con éxito a una frecuencia de línea máxima del 5%, y a una
tensión de línea máxima del 10%, por encima o por debajo
de las capacidades nominales indicadas en la placa de
datos, o una variación combinada de tensión y frecuencia
máxima del 10% por encima o por debajo de las
capacidades nominales indicadas en la placa de datos. La
eficiencia, el factor de potencia y la corriente pueden variar
respecto a la información indicada en la placa de datos.
4. Asegúrese que la dirección de giro del motor sea la
correcta para la aplicación destinada.
3
UBICACIÓN se coloca sobre el cimiento o base, es necesario proporcionar
apoyo adecuado mediante placas y cuñas niveladoras entre el
Es necesario colocar el motor en un entorno que cumpla con bastidor y el cimiento, en los puntos de carga; es decir, debajo
las normativas de los códigos locales, de la National Board de las patas del bastidor, en los puntos de intersección de las
of Fire y de Underwriter's Laboratories. Las consideraciones vigas y debajo de las secciones largas sin soporte de la base.
adicionales descritas a continuación también deben regir la El número de cuñas debe mantenerse al mínimo. Se prefiere el
ubicación. uso de menos cuñas gruesas que un mayor número de cuñas
delgadas.
En los motores totalmente cerrados y enfriados por ventilador
(TEFC) la instalación debe realizarse en una ubicación que Se recomienda dejar espacio entre la base y los cimientos para
proporcione espacio adecuado para la circulación del aire del la lechada. Se recomienda picar la superficie del hormigón para
ventilador de enfriamiento externo. Se recomienda evitar la proporcionar una buena superficie de adherencia.
exposición a altas temperaturas ambiente, a la humedad y a la
contaminación atmosférica. Los ácidos, los álcalis y los gases VERIFICACIONES PREVIAS A LA
también tienen efectos perjudiciales sobre la maquinaria
eléctrica. Debe colocarse en un lugar accesible para las
INSTALACIÓN
inspecciones y el mantenimiento de rutina.
Si la habitación no es lo suficientemente grande para tener PRECAUCIÓN

ventilación natural, será necesario incorporar alguna fuente
externa de aire forzado y filtrado. La habitación deberá permitir
Los motores con cojinete de manguito se envían sin
que el calor desarrollado durante el funcionamiento pueda
aceite. Llene los depósitos del cojinete hasta el nivel
escapar y no recircule sobre el mismo.
correcto antes de girar el eje. El no seguir esta
Se recomienda considerar la inclusión de equipo permanente precaución puede dar como resultado daño o la
de manejo para realizar con facilidad el mantenimiento y las destrucción del equipo.
reparaciones mayores sin tener que desensamblar com-
pletamente las unidades individuales.
Antes del envío, todos los motores Reliance se someten a
CIMIENTOS pruebas de verificación del funcionamiento. No obstante que se
han realizado ensayos completos en la fábrica, se recomienda
Los planos suministrados con el software del motor muestran inspeccionar los motores para detectar cualquier cambio
las dimensiones de los cimientos y se recomienda con- ocurrido por el manejo indebido durante el envío, el
siderarlos antes de planificar los cimientos. almacenamiento, la instalación o por cimientos insatisfactorios.
El no verificar o realizar los trabajos necesarios indicados
Los cimientos deben consistir preferiblemente en paredes o
anteriormente, podría causar la desalineación que a su vez
pilotes de hormigón sólido que deben penetrar lo suficiente en
resultará en vibración y en el fallo prematuro del cojinete.
el suelo para apoyarse en una sub-base sólida. Esta base
deberá tener suficiente rigidez para prevenir la vibración y Antes de verificar la alineación del motor, retire todos los
asegurar el funcionamiento prolongado y sin problemas. Si bloques y apoyos de embalaje para envío instalados en la
fuera necesario, un ingeniero consultor, experto en el diseño de fábrica. El eje deberá girar libremente. El grado de exactitud
cimientos, debería diseñar y supervisar su construcción. necesario para la alineación depende de la velocidad nominal
de la máquina. Mientras mayor sea la velocidad, mayor deberá
Si se piensa utilizar vigas de acero en vez de hormigón en los
ser el cuidado y la exactitud necesarios en la alineación.
cimientos, las vigas de acero deben estar bien arriostradas y
apoyadas en columnas apropiadas para prevenir la vibración El motor debe estar a nivel para mantener el nivel apropiado de
debido a resonancia. Las frecuencias naturales del motor y de aceite. Inspeccione el equipo impulsado por el motor para
la estructura de apoyo deben estar alejadas un mínimo de un asegurarse que el motor estará acoplado a un eje a nivel. Si
20% de la velocidad de giro y dos veces la velocidad de giro y fuera necesario, nivele dicho eje antes de acoplar los equipos.
múltiplos de la frecuencia de la línea de alimentación eléctrica.
El tamaño de los cimientos se determina mediante el peso, el ACOPLE

tamaño y la velocidad del equipo, y por el tipo y condiciones del
suelo subyacente. La anchura y la longitud de los cimientos 1. En preparación para realizar la alineación del acople,
usualmente se prolongan un mínimo de 150 mm (6 pulgadas) elimine por lavado con solvente el compuesto de
sobre las dimensiones del equipo en todos los lados de la base. protección anticorrosiva en el eje del motor y en los
Se necesita mayor anchura y mayor peso para el fun- acoples instalados en la fábrica.
cionamiento a mayores velocidades y para cimientos que se 2. Antes de instalar el acople, llene los colectores de aceite
proyectan sobre el nivel de piso a fin de brindar estabilidad con el aceite recomendado y hasta el nivel correcto.
contra el balanceo y la vibración por resonancia.
3. Será necesario calentar los acoples para la instalación
Los motores grandes no son rígidos ni se apoyan por sí apropiada. No instale a presión ni a golpes los acoples
mismos, y deben tener apoyos uniformes. Por lo tanto, cuando sobre el eje.
4
ALINEACIÓN DEL ACOPLE COJINETE DE MANGUITO
(LUBRICADO CON ACEITE)
Existen varios procedimientos diferentes para alinear el motor
con el equipo impulsado. El resultado final depende de la Si el motor ha estado almacenado durante seis meses o más,
precisión de las partes en cuanto a redondez, planeidad, será necesario cambiar el aceite de los cojinetes de acuerdo
descentrado de las superficies de referencia, rigidez de la con lo indicado en la Sección 4 para las Condiciones Estándar.
instalación y de la habilidad del instalador. Las superficies de
las bases del motor deben estar planas y paralelas a los ejes.
Deje un espacio para introducir cuñas debajo del motor y
realizar ajuste de elevación. El tamaño de las cuñas debe ser PRECAUCIÓN
igual a la longitud total de la plantilla de la pata, deben ser
planas y sin rebabas. Introduzca cuidadosamente las cuñas
para mantener el plano de las patas y evitar flexionar o torcer el Los motores con cojinete de manguito se envían sin
bastidor del motor. Para una superficie irregular de montaje, aceite desde la fábrica. Llene los colectores de aceite
quizá sea necesario maquinar una cuña a fin de compensar la hasta el nivel correcto antes de girar el eje. El no seguir
inclinación o la irregularidad de la superficie. A fin de minimizar esta precaución puede dar como resultado daño o la
el efecto de apilamiento suave y esponjamiento asociado con destrucción del equipo.
las capas excesivas, use la combinación más gruesa de
material de cuñas con el mínimo número de cuñas.
Al llenar los depósitos de aceite del motor con cojinetes de
PROCEDIMIENTO DE ALINEACIÓN DEL manguito que no están equipados con aceiteras de nivel
ACOPLE constante, asegúrese que los tapones de drenaje estén en
posición y fijos. Vierta el aceite a través de la tapa de llenado
Consulte procedimientos aceptados para la alineación de hasta que el nivel de aceite aparezca en el indicador de aceite.
acoples tales como los de indicador de doble cuadrante o de Llene el aceite hasta alcanzar el punto intermedio del indicador.
alineación por rayo láser. La alineación del acople se ha de Para los motores con aceiteras de nivel constante, consulte las
realizar dentro de los límites siguientes: instrucciones incluidas en la sección de Accesorios.
DESALINEACIÓN ANGULAR MÁXIMA PERMISIBLE = 0,001
pulgadas por pulgada de diámetro de cubo de acople.
DESALINEACIÓN PARALELA MÁXIMA PERMISIBLE = 0,002

PRECAUCIÓN
pulgadas TIR (siglas en inglés para el descentrado total
indicado). En los motores equipados con sistemas de lubricación
con aceite circulante y válvulas de aguja ajustable, será
necesario ajustar la válvula para evitar que se inunde el
colector de aceite. Desconecte la válvula y ajuste el
PRECAUCIÓN caudal, la presión y la temperatura según se define en
la hoja de dimensiones o la placa de datos. Si no está
disponible la hoja de dimensiones comuníquese con la
No use el acople para compensar la alineación
Oficina de Ventas de Reliance en su localidad.
deficiente. Esto puede resultar en vibración, ruido,
desgaste del acople, sobrecargas en los cojinetes y fallo
prematuro de los mismos.
CONEXIÓN ELÉCTRICA
LUBRICACIÓN
NOTA: Se recomienda inspeccionar el sistema de lubricación PELIGRO
en preparación para el giro del eje durante la operación de
alineación EL USUARIO ES RESPONSABLE DE VELAR POR
EL CUMPLIMIENTO CON LAS NORMATIVAS DEL
COJINETES ANTIFRICCIÓN CÓDIGO NACIONAL ELÉCTRICO Y DE CUALQUIER
OTRO CÓDIGO LOCAL APLICABLE. LAS PRÁC-
(Lubricados con grasa) TICAS DE CABLEADO, LOS INTERRUPTORES CON
CONEXIÓN A TIERRA Y LA PROTECCIÓN CONTRA
Durante el ensamblaje se empaquetan con grasa las cámaras LA CORRIENTE EXCESIVA TIENEN PARTICULAR
de los cojinetes, y normalmente no necesitan engrase adicional IMPORTANCIA. EL INCUMPLIMIENTO DE ESTAS
al momento de la instalación, a menos que la unidad se haya PRECAUCIONES PUEDE RESULTAR EN LESIONES
almacenado durante seis meses o más antes de la instalación. GRAVES O EN LA MUERTE.
Es necesario añadir lubricante de acuerdo con lo indicado en la
Sección 4, Tabla II.
Se puede suministrar una caja de terminales para las líneas de

alimentación eléctrica al estator. Se puede suministrar otras
cajas de terminales para todas las demás conexiones
eléctricas.
5
CONEXIÓN A TIERRA LECHADA
Se recomienda el uso de un compuesto de lechada comercial
de buena calidad y sin contracción entre los cimientos de
ADVERTENCIA concreto y todos los postes de la base.
El no conectar debidamente a tierra el motor puede

causar lesiones graves al personal.
Se recomienda conectar a tierra los motores grandes por medio

del conductor a tierra equipado con un terminal de cobre con
soldadura fuerte, o con un terminal apropiado sin soldadura
acoplado al motor. No se recomienda el uso de terminales
soldados. Se recomienda el uso de una arandela entre la
cabeza del perno y la orejeta del terminal. Se recomienda fijar
el otro extremo con abrazaderas o terminales apropiados a un
conducto metálico rígido o a la conexión a tierra disponible más
cercana. El calibre del conductor de conexión a tierra debe
determinarse de conformidad con la Tabla 250-95 del Código
Nacional Eléctrico siguiente. Las restricciones de la instalación
se indican en la Sección 250-92.
6
SECCIÓN 3: OPERACIÓN
VERIFICACIÓN PREVIA A LA OPERACIÓN
PRECAUCIÓN
PELIGRO
Cuando exista la probabilidad de que la máquina
ESTE EQUIPO SE ENCUENTRA A LA TENSIÓN DE impulsada se dañe por la dirección errónea de giro,
LÍNEA CUANDO SE ENCIENDE LA ALIMENTACIÓN es mejor desacoplar el motor de la carga durante la
DE CA. ANTES DE PROCEDER, DESCONECTE Y verificación del giro o durante el arranque inicial.
BLOQUEE CON LLAVE TODOS LOS CONDUCTORES
SIN CONEXIÓN A TIERRA DE LA LÍNEA DE Algunos motores están diseñados para girar en una sola
ALIMENTACIÓN DE CA. EL INCUMPLIMIENTO DE dirección según se indica en las placas de datos. Al hacer
ESTAS PRECAUCIONES PUEDE RESULTAR EN funcionar dichas unidades en la dirección errónea se
LESIONES GRAVES O EN LA MUERTE. reducirá el flujo de aire y se producirá el calentamiento
excesivo. Verifique que el motor y el equipo impulsado
estén funcionando en la dirección correcta de giro. Si
fuera necesario cambiar la dirección de giro, desconecte
Antes de arrancar el motor por primera vez será necesario y bloquee con llave toda alimentación eléctrica de entrada
llevar a cabo las verificaciones siguientes: e intercambie cualquiera de las fases de la alimentación
eléctrica de entrada.
1. Los pernos de sujeción deben estar apretados. Apriete los
pernos de sujeción de la manera siguiente:
Bastidor Par de apriete mínimo
de los pernos de sujeción 8. Vuelva a colocar todos los paneles y las cubiertas.
G5000/G315 136 N-m (100 lbs-pie) 9. Verifique la dirección de giro mediante la aplicación
G5800/G40 170 N-m (125 lbs-pie) momentánea de la alimentación eléctrica del motor.
G50 204 N-m (150 lbs-pie)
10. Verifique que las guardas de los acoples y otros
2. Si el motor ha estado inactivo durante largo tiempo envolventes de protección no estén bloqueando el aire de
después de la instalación, inspeccione la resistencia del ventilación sobre las aberturas del motor y del escape.
aislamiento (consulte la página 14).
3. Verifique la alimentación eléctrica de entrada para
ARRANQUE INICIAL
asegurarse que la tensión de línea, la frecuencia y las
fases sean las correctas para el motor (consulte la placa
de datos del motor). PRECAUCIÓN
4. Inspeccione todas las conexiones eléctricas para verificar
la terminación correcta, la holgura, la resistencia Lea y comprenda completamente cada uno de los
mecánica y la continuidad eléctrica. pasos del procedimiento a continuación antes de
arrancar el motor.
5. Inspeccione la unidad para asegurarse que se haya
retirado del eje del motor el puntal para envío.
6. Para los motores con cojinete de manguito inspeccione el
1. Cuando la alineación sea correcta y el motor esté
sistema de lubricación a modo de asegurarse que las
debidamente lubricado, prepare la unidad para un
aceiteras de nivel constante (si estuvieran instaladas) y
arranque desacoplado de marcha sin carga. Se debe
los depósitos de aceite estén llenos hasta el nivel
desenganchar el acople y si fuera necesario debe
apropiado de aceite y con el tipo apropiado de aceite. No
instalarse una placa individual.
llene excesivamente los depósitos de aceite.
2. Inspeccione cuidadosamente el motor. Realice el
arranque inicial siguiendo la secuencia regular de las
operaciones de arranque en las instrucciones de control.
IMPORTANTE
3. Después del arranque, compruebe que el motor esté
funcionando uniformemente. Si el motor muestra vibración
Los motores que funcionen con un sistema de lubricación
excesiva, apáguelo inmediatamente e investigue la causa.
forzada deben tener en funcionamiento el sistema de
Compruebe que no haya desequilibrio del acople y del
lubricación forzada antes de arrancar el motor.
pasador, falta de lubricación, falta de planeidad de las
patas y resonancia estructural.
7. Gire a mano el eje para asegurarse que éste gira
libremente.
7
4. Inspeccione frecuentemente las temperaturas del cojinete COMIENZO DEL SERVICIO
si se hubiesen instalado detectores. La temperatura no (Avance por impulsos y arranques repetidos)
deberá exceder 90°C (195°F). Durante el arranque inicial,
la velocidad de ascenso de la temperatura del cojinete
será elevada. Esta velocidad de ascenso deberá reducirse
después de 30 minutos. Si esta velocidad de ascenso no PRECAUCIÓN
disminuye o la temperatura excede 90°C, detenga el
motor. Los arranques frecuentes o avances por impulsos
5. Inspeccione los controles de protección para asegurarse pueden reducir grandemente la vida útil de un motor de
que estén funcionando debidamente antes de cualquier inducción. Si fuera necesario arrancar repetidamente el
funcionamiento prolongado. motor o avanzarlo por impulsos, verifique la aplicación
con la oficina de ventas de Reliance Electric en su
6. Haga funcionar el motor un mínimo de dos horas. localidad.
ADVERTENCIA A temperatura ambiente, el motor normalmente es capaz de

dos arranques sucesivos y de avance por inercia hasta
PARA ASEGURARSE QUE NO SE ARRANQUEN detenerse entre los arranques.
SÚBITAMENTE LOS MOTORES, APAGUE Y BLO-
QUEE CON LLAVE O ETIQUETE LA FUENTE DE El motor también es capaz de realizar un arranque a
ALIMENTACIÓN ANTES DE PROCEDER. EL NO temperatura de operación bajo carga nominal. Para determinar
SEGUIR ESTAS PRECAUCIONES PUEDE DAR COMO el tiempo de enfriamiento necesario antes de poder realizar
RESULTADO LESIONES CORPORALES. arranques adicionales consulte a la oficina de ventas de
Reliance Electric en su localidad o la placa de datos para el
arranque del motor si se hubiese suministrado.
Después del arranque inicial, ensamble el acople y lubríquelo
Si se intenta realizar más arranques que los indicados
con el lubricante recomendado por el fabricante. Compruebe
anteriormente en un período más corto de tiempo, puede
que el acople no se agarrote.
resultar en daño grave a los bobinados eléctricos y al rotor del
Después de ensamblar y lubricar el acople, repita los pasos 2 motor.
hasta el 6 de la sección de arranque inicial de este manual.
Las condiciones de arranque listadas anteriormente se aplican
Compruebe que el equipo impulsado no esté transmitiendo
sólo si la inercia de la carga conectada, el par torsor de la carga
vibraciones de regreso al motor a través del acople o de la
durante la aceleración, la tensión aplicada y el método de
base.
arranque son aquellos para los cuales se diseñó el motor. Para
situaciones de arranque no especificadas aquí, consulte la
LÍMITES DE VIBRACIÓN oficina de ventas de Reliance Electric en su localidad antes de
proceder. Consulte los datos de la placa de datos del motor que
Amplitud Máxima también puede indicar las condiciones de arranque.
RPM (Pico a Pico)
en la carcasa del cojinete
3000-3600 Incl. 0,75 milésimas
(0,20 pulg./seg. pico)
1800-o más lento 1,0 milésimas
(0,20 pulg./seg. pico)
Los niveles de vibración listados en la tabla anterior deben

usarse como pautas solamente.
8
SECCIÓN 4: MANTENIMIENTO DE RUTINA
1. Escuche y trate de detectar cualquier ruido anormal e
investigue inmediatamente la causa.
ADVERTENCIA
2. Compruebe que no haya vibración excesiva.
NO USE SOLVENTES QUE CONTENGAN TRI-
CLOROETANO PARA LIMPIAR EL INTERIOR O 3. Inspeccione todos los pasajes de aire y asegúrese que no
EL EXTERIOR DEL MOTOR. PUEDE OCURRIR estén bloqueados ni obstruidos.
DAÑO A LA PINTURA Y A LOS SISTEMAS DE
AISLAMIENTO.
4. Compruebe que todas las cubiertas estén fijas en
posición.
MANTENIMIENTO PROGRAMADO 5. Asegúrese que todo esté bien lubricado. Verifique el nivel
de aceite en los motores de cojinete de manguito. El nivel
Las inspecciones que son importantes para el funcionamiento y de aceite debe estar en el punto medio de la mirilla
mantenimiento apropiado de un motor Reliance deben indicadora cuando el motor esté inactivo y en
realizarse cada 3 meses (o cada 500 horas de funcionamiento funcionamiento.
— lo que ocurra primero). Además, se recomienda siempre
observar lo siguiente. 6. Verifique la velocidad de ascenso de la temperatura del
cojinete.
• Proporcionar ventilación adecuada.
• Mantener limpias y sin obstrucciones las aberturas de 7. Si estuviesen instaladas, verifique que las aceiteras de
ingreso de aire y de escape. nivel constante tengan aceite en ellas. Compruebe que
el tapón de la aceitera esté firmemente enroscado.
• Evitar los impactos directos y las cargas de empuje axial en
Asegúrese que el aceite esté limpio.
el eje de salida.
• Mantener el nivel correcto de lubricante (inspecciónelo 8. Verifique las variaciones de la tensión y la frecuencia. La
semanalmente en las unidades lubricadas con aceite). tensión desequilibrada o el funcionamiento de una sola
Cuando los motores A-C Serie G de Reliance Electric se fase en motores polifásicos causará calentamiento
aplican correctamente, necesitan mantenimiento de rutina excesivo y fallo. Un mínimo desequilibrio de tensión
mínimo. Dado que las holguras y los acoples ajustados son aplicada a un motor polifásico causará grandes corrientes
maquinados con precisión, no se necesitan ajustes mecánicos de desequilibrio y resultará en sobrecalentamiento.
periódicos. Al igual que cualquier máquina de precisión, las Verifique la distorsión armónica total de la fuente de
inspecciones periódicas y el mantenimiento sencillo de rutina alimentación eléctrica para evitar el calentamiento
prolongará la vida útil de su motor y ayudará a identificar excesivo. Se recomienda la verificación periódica de las
condiciones potencialmente perjudiciales. El tiempo mínimo fases, la tensión, la frecuencia y el consumo eléctrico de
utilizado para realizar los procedimientos sencillos indicados a un motor en funcionamiento.
continuación no se los puede siquiera comparar con el costo de
la productividad perdida y las engorrosas reparaciones mayores Estas verificaciones también pueden proporcionar una
incurridas como consecuencia del descuido o los gastos de excelente indicación de la carga del equipo impulsado. Las
inspección y mantenimiento de rutina. comparaciones de estos datos con las demandas de
alimentación eléctrica sin carga y con carga plena brindarán
INSPECCIÓN PERIÓDICA una indicación del rendimiento de la máquina impulsada.
LUBRICACIÓN DE COJINETES
PELIGRO Dependiendo de la aplicación y la capacidad nominal, el motor
estará equipado con cojinetes de tipo antifricción o de
DESCONECTE Y BLOQUEE CON LLAVE LA FUENTE manguito. Cuando los cojinetes reciban las inspecciones y
DE ALIMENTACIÓN ELÉCTRICA ANTES DE TOCAR lubricación apropiadas proporcionarán años de servicio
PARTE INTERNA ALGUNA. PUEDE HABER ALTA ininterrumpido. Haga uso de uno de los siguientes
TENSIÓN PRESENTE INCLUSO CUANDO LA procedimientos de lubricación, dependiendo del tipo de
MÁQUINA NO ESTÉ GIRANDO. EL NO SEGUIR ESTA cojinetes que tenga su motor.
PRECAUCIÓN PUEDE RESULTAR EN LESIONES
CORPORALES GRAVES O LA MUERTE.
Cojinetes antifricción (Lubricado con grasa)
Los motores CA Serie G están diseñados con el exclusivo
sistema de lubricación positiva Reliance PLS® que hace pasar
Cada 3 meses (o 500 horas de funcionamiento, lo que ocurra
grasa nueva directamente en el cojinete.
primero).
9
Los períodos de relubricación indicados en la Tabla II se ofrecen TABLA II
como pautas para las diversas condiciones de servicio, INTERVALOS DE RELUBRICACIÓN
velocidades, tipos de cojinetes y horas de funcionamiento.
La limpieza es importante en la lubricación. Cualquier grasa MOTORES EQUIPADOS CON COJINETES ANTIFRICCIÓN
utilizada para lubricar cojinetes antifricción debe ser fresca y sin Velocidad Condiciones Condiciones Condiciones
contaminación. De manera similar, se debe tener cuidado de (RPM) Estándar Rigurosas Extremas
limpiar y engrasar las áreas de entrada de la grasa del motor a 3000 y 6 meses 3 meses 2 meses
fin de evitar la contaminación de la grasa.
3600 6 meses 3 meses 3 meses
MOTORES G40 EQUIPADOS CON COJINETES DE RODILLOS
Menos de 3000 4 meses 2 meses 1,5 meses
IMPORTANTE
VOLUMEN DE RELUBRICACIÓN
No se debe mezclar los lubricantes. Los lubricantes de VOLUMEN EN PULGADAS CÚBICAS
diferentes fabricantes y con diferentes composiciones VELOCIDAD MÁXIMA DEL MOTOR - RPM
quizá no sean compatibles, y pueden resultar en
lubricación deficiente y fallo del cojinete. Si se desea TAMAÑO DEL
usar un lubricante no incluido en la lista definida en la BASTIDOR 3000 y 3600 MENOS de 3000
placa de datos del motor o en este manual de G5000 y G315 1,5 3,0
instrucciones, primero consúltelo con la oficina de ventas
G5810 & G40 1,5 3,0
de Reliance en su localidad para obtener su aprobación
e instrucciones pertinentes. No use grasas automotrices, G50 ---- 4,0
grasas con aditivos EP o grasas diferentes a las Los datos incluidos en una placa de lubricación en el motor tienen
especificadas en la placa de datos de lubricantes precedencia sobre esta Tabla.
del motor y en este manual de instrucciones. El
incumplimiento de estas instrucciones puede resultar
en una lubricación deficiente y fallo del cojinete.
Lubricante recomendado
Lubricante recomendado Consulte la placa de datos de lubricación para determinar el
tipo de lubricante a utilizar. Si no hay una placa de lubricación
Consulte la placa de datos del motor. Sólo use grasa limpia y en el motor, use los lubricantes siguientes:
fresca, extraída de envases limpios. Bastidores G5000 y G315 — grasa lubricante de hidro-
carburo con base de poliurea
Instrucciones de lubricación Bastidores G5810 y G40 — grasa lubricante de hidrocarburo
con base de poliurea
1. Seleccione las condiciones de servicio de la Tabla I.
Bastidor G50 — grasa lubricante de hidrocarburo con base
2. En la Tabla II, seleccione la frecuencia de lubricación y el de litio
volumen recomendado de llenado. Nota: Los datos contenidos en la placa de lubricación en el
motor tienen precedencia sobre estos datos. Sólo use grasa
TABLA I limpia y fresca, extraída de envases limpios.
CONDICIONES DE SERVICIO
Procedimiento de lubricación por engrase
Condiciones Ocho horas al día, carga normal o liviana, La lubricación de los cojinetes antifricción Reliance puede
estándar aire ambiente limpio a 40°C (100°F) como efectuarse con el motor en funcionamiento o estacionario, sin
máximo embargo, se recomienda hacerlo con el motor caliente y
Condiciones Funcionamiento las veinticuatro horas del estacionario.
rigurosas día o cargas de impacto, vibración, aire
ambiente contaminado con suciedad o
polvo a 40-50°C (100-120°F).
Condiciones Impactos o vibración fuertes, y polvo ADVERTENCIA
extremas
SI LA LUBRICACIÓN SE REALIZA MIENTRAS EL
MOTOR ESTÁ FUNCIONANDO, EVITE EL CONTACTO
CON LAS PARTES GIRATORIAS. EL NO SEGUIR
ESTA PRECAUCIÓN PUEDE RESULTAR EN
LESIONES CORPORALES GRAVES O LA MUERTE.
10
1. Localice la grasera, elimine toda la grasa endurecida y la 1. Viscosidad en SUS (centistokes) a 37,8°C (100°F).
suciedad de la grasera.
2. Punto de fluidez: Por debajo de la temperatura mínima de
2. Retire el tapón de seguridad. Si la grasa se endurece arranque.
alrededor del tapón, límpielo con un trozo de madera o
una herramienta adecuada. Si aparece grasa endurecida 3. Calidad: Use un aceite de tipo turbina con viscosidad
en el tapón, arranque el motor hasta que caliente la adecuada, con inhibidores de corrosión, espuma y
carcasa del cojinete y permita el flujo libre de grasa a oxidación. Evite el uso de aceites automotrices o aditivos
través de la misma. diferentes a los específicamente recomendados por el
fabricante del aceite.
3. Añada el volumen correcto de lubricante recomendado
según la placa de lubricación o según los datos de la tabla A continuación se describe el procedimiento para cambiar el
anterior por medio de una pistola engrasadora manual. aceite:
4. Arranque el motor y hágalo funcionar con el tapón de 1. Desconecte la alimentación eléctrica del motor.
seguridad abierto durante varios minutos hasta eliminar el
exceso de grasa. 2. Retire el tapón de drenaje, ubicado en la parte inferior de
la carcasa del cojinete. Para el extremo opuesto al de
5. Vuelva colocar los tapones y limpie cualquier exceso de impulsión, la tubería de drenaje de aceite está etiquetada
grasa. en la cubierta del ventilador.
COJINETES DE MANGUITO 3. Si pareciera que el aceite está contaminado, se puede

purgar la carcasa mediante el llenado con aceite fresco y
(Lubricados con aceite) el drenaje repetido hasta que el aceite salga limpio.
Se recomienda cambiar periódicamente el aceite, o
inmediatamente si está decolorado o contaminado. Siga el 4. Vuelva a colocar el tapón y llene con aceite hasta el punto
calendario indicado en la placa de datos del motor, o si no se medio de la mirilla.
conociera observe el calendario siguiente.
5. Apriete la tapa de llenado y los tapones, llene la aceitera
de nivel constante si estuviese instalada.
TABLA III
CALENDARIO DE LUBRICACIÓN 6. Arranque la unidad y observe para asegurarse que no
exista fuga de aceite y que no descienda el nivel de aceite.
VELOCIDAD CONDICIONES CAMBIO DE
rpm DE SERVICIO ACEITE (hrs)
Todas las DESMONTAJE DEL CARTUCHO Y DEL
Estándar 8800
velocidades COJINETE DE MANGUITO G50
Rigurosas 4400
1. Retire la cubierta del ventilador/toma de aire y los
Condiciones estándar: Carga normal o liviana, limpio –18°C accesorios (plomería para lubricación forzada) que están
(0°F) hasta 40°C (104°F) de temperatura de aire ambiente. acoplados a la pantalla extrema y a la carcasa del
cojinete. Afloje los pernos y retire la cubierta protectora
Condiciones rigurosas: Impactos medianos, vibración, empernada al reborde de la pantalla extrema.
suciedad, polvo, –30°C (–20°F) hasta 50°C (120°F) de
temperatura de aire ambiente. 2. Es necesario desacoplar de la pantalla extrema la carcasa
del cojinete antes de retirar la pantalla extrema del
El lubricante para motores de cojinete con manguito se debe bastidor.
seleccionar de la manera siguiente:
3. Retire el tapón de drenaje en la parte inferior de la carcasa
VELOCIDAD
del cojinete y drene el aceite del depósito.
Temperatura 1200 rpm Más de
Ambiente o menos 1200 rpm
4. Afloje y retire los pernos en la línea de división de la
0°F a 120°F 300 SUS 150 SUS carcasa del cojinete.
(–18°C a 50°C)* (68 cST) (32 cST)
–20F a 50°F 150 SUS 90 SUS 5. Si el motor tiene cojinetes aislados y cumple con las
(–30°C a 10°C)** (32 cST) (18 cST) normas API-541, se acoplará un sello maquinado en el
exterior de la carcasa del cojinete. Es necesario
desacoplar el sello de la carcasa del cojinete antes de
* Para temperaturas más altas, se debe usar enfriadores de retirar la mitad superior de la carcasa del cojinete. El sello
aceite. está aislado de la carcasa del cojinete con un sello no
** Para temperaturas menores, se recomienda usar divisible. No se puede retirar la mitad superior de la
calentadores a fin de asegurar las temperaturas altas de carcasa del cojinete a menos que el sello y el empaque se
arranque. desensamblen de la carcasa del cojinete.
11
6. Use las argollas de izado, levante la mitad superior de la REEMPLAZO DEL COJINETE DE
carcasa del cojinete directamente hacia arriba y sepárela MANGUITO G50
del área del cojinete para despejar la pantalla extrema.
Asegúrese que estén despejados el cojinete y los sellos 1. Se puede reemplazar el cojinete de manguito sin
antes de mover hacia adelante la mitad superior de la perturbar la instalación ni desacoplar el equipo impulsado.
carcasa del cojinete. Retire los revestimientos superior e inferior del cojinete
según se indicó en la sección anterior (Desmontaje de la
7. Levante la mitad superior del revestimiento del cojinete y carcasa y del cojinete de manguito).
retírelo de la carcasa del cojinete.
2. Asegúrese que los rebordes de apoyo del eje y la
8. Afloje y retire los pernos en la línea de división del anillo chumacera no tengan abolladuras ni rebabas antes de
retenedor de aceite. Retire el anillo retenedor de aceite. volver a colocar el cojinete. Reacondicione el eje con tela
o piedra de esmeril según sea necesario. Limpie
9. Desensamble los resortes del sujetador que rodea los minuciosamente el eje y el colector de aceite.
sellos de laberinto (interior y exterior). Levante y retire la
mitad superior de cada sello. Gire la mitad inferior para 3. Aplique una capa de aceite a la chumacera.
extraerla del portasellos.
4. Inspeccione el cojinete de repuesto para verificar que no
tenga abolladuras ni daño. El cojinete debe estar
Es necesario ensamblar los sellos de laberinto de manera
empaquetado con un compuesto parafinado anticorrosivo.
que las orejetas de sujeción queden en la posición de las
Con ayuda de un solvente, elimine la parafina de las
9:00 en punto. Los agujeros posteriores de drenaje en la
superficies del cojinete. Seque el cojinete antes de
superficie del sello deben quedar de frente al colector de
ensamblarlo en la carcasa. Los cojinetes son esféricos
aceite y estar colocados en la posición de las 6:00 en
autoajustables. Aplique una capa de aceite en el diámetro
punto.
exterior del revestimiento del cojinete y también en el
diámetro interior de la carcasa del cojinete. NO RAYE LA
10. Desconecte y retire el RTD de la mitad inferior del SUPERFICIE DE METAL BABBIT DEL COJINETE PARA
revestimiento del cojinete. EL ASIENTO.
11. Use un guinche, gato mecánico o un estrobo no metálico 5. Vuelva a ensamblar el motor. Aplique sellador a la línea
alrededor del eje para levantarlo del revestimiento de la divisoria de los sellos de la carcasa del cojinete. Llene el
mitad inferior del cojinete. Gire la mitad inferior del depósito de aceite de manera que el aceite alcance el
revestimiento del cojinete para sacarla de la carcasa del punto intermedio de la mirilla.
cojinete.
6. Gire lentamente el eje para asegurar que los cojinetes y
12. Afloje y retire los pernos que sujetan la mitad inferior de la los sellos estén debidamente asentados.
carcasa del cojinete a la pantalla extrema. Use argollas y
guinches para retirar la mitad inferior de la carcasa. Las DESMONTAJE DEL CARTUCHO Y DE LOS
cuñas de ajuste para la colocación axial del eje están
ubicadas entre la carcasa inferior del cojinete y los
COJINETES DE MANGUITO G5000, G315,
tapones maquinados extremos ajustados a presión. G5810 y G40
Observe su ubicación para conservarla durante el 1. Retire la cubierta del ventilador/toma de aire y los
reensamblaje. accesorios (plomería para lubricación forzada) que están
acoplados a la pantalla extrema y a la carcasa del
13. El sello maquinado interior, el portasellos exterior y el cojinete. Afloje los pernos y retire la cubierta protectora
perno en la pantalla divisoria se encuentran aún empernada al reborde de la pantalla extrema.
acoplados a la carcasa del cojinete. Se puede aflojar los
2. Es necesario desacoplar de la pantalla extrema la carcasa
pernos para retirar estas partes y desensamblarlas.
del cojinete antes de retirar la pantalla extrema del
bastidor.
14. Para volver a ensamblar el conjunto lleve a cabo en orden
inverso los pasos listados. Ensamble la mitad inferior y 3. Retire el tapón de drenaje en la parte inferior de la carcasa
superior de los sellos. Presione la mitad superior del sello del cojinete y drene el aceite del depósito.
exterior y de la pantalla divisoria para eliminar cualquier
4. Afloje y retire los pernos en la línea de división de la
holgura entre el sello y el eje en la parte inferior.
carcasa del cojinete. Retire la mitad superior de la carcasa
Asegúrese que la holgura de lado a lado sea simétrica.
del cojinete.
15. Todas las superficies maquinadas de la línea divisoria de 5. La superficie exterior del cojinete tiene ranuras para abrir
la carcasa del cojinete y los sellos deben tener un con palanca y facilitar el desmontaje de la parte superior
recubrimiento de compuesto sellador (Curil T o Permatex de la carcasa del cojinete.
#3). También aplique compuesto al reborde de los sellos
6. Con la presión de la mano, separe las mitades del
maquinados y al portasellos.
cojinete. (Las mitades del cojinete tienen pasadores de
unión. ) NOTA: Algunos modelos están equipados con
tornillos con cabeza hueca además de los pasadores. Es
necesario retirar estos tornillos antes de intentar abrir con
palanca la mitad superior del cojinete.
12
7. Retire la mitad superior del cojinete y los dispositivos de 8. A mano (o con una herramienta apropiada) gire
chaveta contra el giro del cojinete de la carcasa del lentamente el eje 2 revoluciones en cada dirección.
cojinete.
9. Retire los cojinetes según se indica en la sección
8. Retire el RTD del cojinete si estuviese instalado. "DESMONTAJE DEL CARTUCHO Y DE LOS COJINETES
DE MANGUITO G5000, G315, G5810 y G40". Inspec-
9. Con una soga o un estrobo no metálico alrededor del eje, cione el diámetro interior de las mitades de cojinete para
elévelo justo lo suficiente para poder girar y sacar la mitad comprobar que no haya áreas bruñidas (brillantes). Un
inferior del cojinete. patrón correcto de bruñido es:
La mitad superior del cojinete – sin áreas bruñidas

NOTA: Las cuñas de ajuste que se usan para el juego
longitudinal se encuentran en el extremo exterior del Mitad inferior del cojinete – área bruñida simétrica
cojinete en la carcasa. Retírelas y anote la cantidad alrededor de la posición de las 6:00 en punto, de 25 mm a
utilizada en cada extremo. 50 mm (una a dos pulgadas) de anchura, que cubre
aproximadamente el 70% de la longitud axial del diámetro
interior del cojinete.
10. Retire la mitad inferior del cojinete y baje cuidadosamente
el eje. 10. Si no se encuentra el patrón correcto de bruñido lleve a
cabo lo siguiente:
11. Para retirar la mitad inferior del cartucho del cojinete, use
argollas para soportar el peso del cartucho y después Con ayuda de las herramientas apropiadas para raspar
retire los pernos de montaje. cojinetes o con una almohadilla de fibra no metálica,
elimine las áreas muy bruñidas.
12. Para volver a ensamblar el conjunto lleve a cabo en orden
inverso los pasos listados. Limpie el cojinete y la chumacera con un solvente que no
deje residuos como el alcohol desnaturalizado.
13. Todas las superficies maquinadas de la línea divisoria de
la carcasa del cojinete y los sellos deben tener un 11. Repita los pasos 3-10 hasta obtener el patrón correcto de
recubrimiento de compuesto sellador (Curil T o Permatex bruñido.
#3).
12. Limpie el cojinete y la chumacera, y vierta aceite limpio y
fresco en la chumacera y sobre el cojinete. Asegúrese de
REEMPLAZO DE LOS COJINETES DE cubrir con aceite ambos diámetros, interior y exterior.
MANGUITO G5000, G315, G5810 y G40 Instale la mitad inferior del cojinete. Tenga precaución para
prevenir el daño al cojinete y evitar que la suciedad
1. Retire los cojinetes según se indica en la sección contamine la superficie del cojinete.
"DESMONTAJE DEL CARTUCHO Y DE LOS COJINETES
DE MANGUITO G5000, G315, G5810 y G40". 13. Reemplace las chavetas contra el giro del cojinete. Se
debe instalar las orejetas que impiden el movimiento axial
2. Compruebe que la chumacera y los rebordes no tengan del cojinete apuntando hacia el cojinete.
abolladuras ni rebabas; reacondicione con piedra de
caucho o reemplace según sea necesario. 14. Ensamble la mitad superior del cojinete.
3. Con un paño limpio y sin pelusa, limpie y seque la 15. Vuelva a ensamblar las partes en el orden inverso al
chumacera y el cojinete. No debe haber aceite en el eje ni desmontaje. Asegúrese que estén enganchados los
en el diámetro interior del cojinete. pasadores en las mitades superior e inferior de la carcasa.
Aplique un compuesto sellador (Curil T o Permatex #3) a
4. Levante el eje según sea necesario para volver a las superficies de la mitad inferior de la carcasa del
ensamblar el cojinete. Instale la mitad inferior del cojinete. cojinete.
5. Con cuidado, baje el eje hasta que quede en su posición

final.
6. Ensamble la mitad superior del cojinete.
7. Vuelva a ensamblar las partes en el orden inverso al

desmontaje. Asegúrese que estén enganchados los
pasadores en las mitades superior e inferior de la carcasa.
13
DESMONTAJE DE LA ESCUADRA DE DESMONTAJE DEL ROTOR Y DEL ESTATOR
SOPORTE DEL COJINETE ANTIFRICCIÓN
Consulte a Reliance Electric para obtener los procedimientos
Y DE MANGUITO apropiados de desmontaje.
1. En los motores con cojinetes antifricción es necesario
retirar los pernos de capuchón interiores antes de retirar la MANTENIMIENTO DEL BOBINADO
pantalla extrema.
2. En los motores con cojinetes de manguito es necesario ADVERTENCIA

retirar el cartucho del cojinete antes de desensamblar la
pantalla extrema. (Vea la Sección Desmontaje del LOS SOLVENTES PUEDEN SER TÓXICOS O
Cartucho y del Cojinete de Manguito G50 o G40.) INFLAMABLES. SIGA LOS PROCEDIMIENTOS E
INSTRUCCIONES DE SEGURIDAD DEL FABRICANTE.
3. Retire todos los pernos que sujetan la pantalla extrema al EL NO SEGUIR ESTA PRECAUCIÓN PUEDE
bastidor. RESULTAR EN LESIONES CORPORALES.
4. Con ayuda de un guinche, apoye la escuadra de soporte.
5. Para retirar la escuadra de soporte G50 de su posición

ajustada en rebajo, se suministran orificios de empuje PRECAUCIÓN
adyacentes a los cuatro pernos de escuadras de soportes
ubicados a 45°. Apriete uniformemente los pernos de No use solventes que contenga tricloroetano para
ajuste para evitar la desalineación axial de la pantalla limpiar el interior o el exterior del motor. Puede ocurrir
extrema. Para retirar las escuadras de soporte G5000, daño a la pintura y a los sistemas de aislamiento.
G315, G5810 y G40 de la posición ajustada en rebajo, se
suministran ranuras para apalancamiento en las orejetas.
Abra la desconexión manual y bloquéela con llave para
DESMONTAJE Y REEMPLAZO DEL COJINETE desenergizar el motor. Para inspeccionar los extremos y la
ANTIFRICCIÓN superficie exterior de los bobinados, retire las escuadras de
soporte del motor. La inspección de estas porciones de los
1. Retire la pantalla extrema (consultar el procedimiento de bobinados proporcionará una buena indicación de su condición
desmontaje de la pantalla extrema antes descrito). general. Quizá sea necesario desmontar el rotor para poder
inspeccionar y limpiar completamente los bobinados.
2. Ya se puede retirar el cojinete mediante el uso de un
Existen diversos métodos para limpiar los bobinados. Los
extractor convencional de cojinetes y ubique los brazos de
métodos descritos a continuación son los utilizados más
extracción detrás del anillo de rodadura del cojinete.
frecuentemente, en orden de preferencia.
Proteja el centro del eje con un bloque espaciador de
pizarra carbonosa negra u otro material blando entre el eje NOTA: Antes de limpiar los bobinados verifique que no haya
y el extractor de cojinetes. bloqueos sueltos, evidencia de daño al aislamiento, distorsión
o movimiento de las bobinas, etc. Si existiese cualquiera de
3. Limpie e inspeccione todas las partes. Elimine la grasa estos problemas, comuníquese con el ingeniero de ser-
vieja. vicio de Reliance Electric en su localidad para obtener
recomendaciones.
4. Compruebe que los rebordes de cojinetes y chumaceras
del eje no tengan abolladuras antes de volver a instalar el LIMPIEZA EN SECO
cojinete. Reacondicione el eje con tela o piedra de esmeril
según sea necesario. Este método es satisfactorio cuando las superficies a limpiar
son accesibles y cuando sólo haya que eliminar suciedad en
5. Caliente el cojinete a 120°C (250°F) durante un mínimo de seco. Use un paño sin pelusa, limpio y seco. La pelusa se
30 minutos. adherirá al aislamiento y aumentará la acumulación de
suciedad. La pelusa es particularmente perjudicial en sistemas
6. Coloque el cojinete en el eje. Asegúrese que el cojinete de aislamiento de alta tensión ya que tiende a concentrar
haga contacto con el reborde guía en el eje. NO use descargas de corona.
fuerzas de impacto en el cojinete.
7. Deje que enfríe el cojinete. Engrase la cavidad lateral

externa del cojinete en toda su capacidad 100%. Engrase
las tapas interiores y la carcasa del cojinete de soporte a
un 60% de su capacidad.
8. Ensamble la pantalla extrema en orden inverso. (Consulte

el procedimiento para Desmontaje de Escuadra de
Soporte de Cojinete Antifricción.)
14
CEPILLADO Y LIMPIEZA DE SECCIONES
Use un cepillo de cerdas para eliminar el polvo seco y la PRECAUCIÓN
suciedad por cepillado y después limpie los residuos con una
aspiradora. NO USE CEPILLOS DE ALAMBRE. Para evitar daño a los bobinados, la presión del chorro y
la temperatura no debe exceder 30 psi (200 kPa) y 90°C
SOPLADO respectivamente.
Se puede eliminar la suciedad seca y el polvo de las rendijas

inaccesibles mediante el uso de un chorro de aire comprimido
de baja presión y sin aceite. Al añadir un DETERGENTE NO CONDUCTIVO al agua de
lavado se puede eliminar el aceite, la grasa, la brea y la
parafina. Después del lavado, es necesario secar los bobinados
en un horno. (Vea la sección "Inspección de la resistencia de
PRECAUCIÓN aislamiento".)
Para evitar el daño a los bobinados no use presiones de REACONDICIONAMIENTO

aire mayores de 30 psi (200 kPa). Evite dirigir el aire de (REIMPREGNACIÓN) DE LOS BOBINADOS
tal manera que la suciedad se sople hacia cavidades
más interiores. Si después de la limpieza con solvente o agua y detergente, el
aislamiento muestra signos de resequedad, quizá sea
necesario volver a impregnar los bobinados. Consulte al
ingeniero de servicio de Reliance Electric en su localidad para
obtener información sobre el tipo y el método apropiado de
rebarnizado.
ADVERTENCIA
INSPECCIÓN DE LA RESISTENCIA DEL
EL USO DE UN CHORRO DE AIRE PUEDE HACER AISLAMIENTO
VOLAR LA SUCIEDAD Y GENERAR MATERIA EN
PARTÍCULAS. USE PROTECCIÓN APROPIADA PARA Si el motor ha estado en almacenamiento durante un período
LA PIEL Y LOS OJOS, ASÍ COMO PROTECCIÓN prolongado o si ha estado sujeto a condiciones adversas de
RESPIRATORIA. EL NO SEGUIR ESTA PRECAUCIÓN humedad, verifique la resistencia del aislamiento del bobinado
PUEDE RESULTAR EN LESIONES CORPORALES. del estator con un megómetro o medidor de resistencia de
aislamiento.
Se puede determinar la resistencia mínima de aislamiento (RM)

LIMPIEZA POR SOLVENTES por medio de la fórmula siguiente:
RM = KV + 1
PRECAUCIÓN
Donde
No use solventes con tricloroetano. Puede ocurrir daño RM = La resistencia mínima de aislamiento en mega
a la pintura y a los sistemas de aislamiento. ohmios a 40°C de todo el bobinado de la máquina.
KV = Capacidad nominal de potencia de máquina, en

kilovoltios.
LIMPIEZA CON AGUA Y DETERGENTE
En máquina en buenas condiciones, es frecuente encontrar
Se puede limpiar los bobinados mediante lavado con manguera lecturas de aislamiento y resistencia de 10 a 100 veces la RM.
o por rociado a presión mediante un generador de vapor de Si la resistencia del aislamiento es menor que la calculada con
baja presión o de una línea de vapor del taller. la fórmula, será necesario secar los bobinados de la manera
siguiente:
Seque en un horno (preferiblemente en un horno con

aire circulante) a una temperatura no mayor de 90°C
hasta que la resistencia del aislamiento permanezca
constante.
15
PARTES DE REPUESTO 2. El distribuidor de Reliance Electric más cercano.
La alta productividad esperada en la industria actualmente 3. Partes de Repuesto de Reliance (Reliance Renewal
requiere un programa de mantenimiento bien planificado. El Parts), Cleveland, Ohio.
éxito del cual a menudo depende del número y tipo de partes Asegúrese de incluir los datos completos indicados en la placa
de repuesto en inventario. Se recomienda otorgar consideración de datos, número de orden de compra, número de serie,
especial a tener en inventario todos los componentes de número de modelo, capacidad nominal, etc., para su motor al
repuesto esenciales para proteger a las unidades contra el hacer el pedido de la lista de partes de repuesto.
costoso tiempo de inactividad.
Se puede obtener las partes a través del distribuidor más
A través de las oficinas indicadas a continuación se puede cercano o directamente de nuestra fábrica. Al hacer pedido de
obtener una lista detallada de partes de repuesto que Reliance partes que no tengan disponible un número de parte, brinde
Electric recomienda mantener en inventario para su motor: una descripción completa de la parte y el número de orden de
compra, número de serie, número de modelo, etc. del equipo en
1. La oficina de ventas de Reliance Electric más cercana. el cual se utiliza dicha parte.
16
SECCIÓN 5: ACCESORIOS OPCIONALES
3. La temperatura puede monitorearse utilizando un
ohmiómetro o con un puente de resistencia que convierta
PELIGRO la resistencia en temperatura.
EL USUARIO ES RESPONSABLE DE VELAR POR EL 4. Responderá térmicamente a los cambios normales de

CUMPLIMIENTO CON LAS NORMATIVAS DEL carga y temperatura, pero no lo suficientemente rápido
CÓDIGO NACIONAL ELÉCTRICO Y DE CUALQUIER para proporcionar protección de rotor bloqueado.
OTRO CÓDIGO LOCAL APLICABLE. LAS PRÁC-
TICAS DE CABLEADO, LOS INTERRUPTORES CON
CONEXIÓN A TIERRA Y LA PROTECCIÓN CONTRA
TERMOSTATO DEL BOBINADO
LA CORRIENTE EXCESIVA TIENEN PARTICULAR Propósito
IMPORTANCIA. EL INCUMPLIMIENTO DE ESTAS
PRECAUCIONES PUEDE RESULTAR EN LESIONES Indicar que la temperatura del bobinado ha excedido las
GRAVES O EN LA MUERTE. temperaturas normales de funcionamiento.
Principios de Funcionamiento
NOTA: El motor estará equipado con los accesorios
siguientes SÓLO si se ordenan con el motor. El termostato utiliza un disco bimetálico de acción a presión
para accionar un conjunto de contactos. La temperatura de
funcionamiento se selecciona en la fábrica y no es ajustable.
DETECTOR DE TEMPERATURA DE Los contactos se pueden cablear directamente a un relé para
RESISTENCIA DEL BOBINADO - RTD proporcionar características de indicación de alarma o de
apagado del motor. Con este dispositivo no se pueden
Propósito proporcionar medios para medir o monitorear la temperatura.
Consulte las etiquetas de los conductores y las limitaciones de
Medir o monitorear la temperatura de bobinado durante el corriente de los contactos.
funcionamiento.
Interconexión del Cliente
Los conductores terminan en una caja de conductos separada.
El detector de temperatura RTD utiliza un alambre enrollado en Los conductores están etiquetados.
una bobina de listón plano. Éste se enrolla de tal manera que no
funciona como dispositivo de inducción. Su modo de Comentarios
funcionamiento es el de un cambio lineal en la resistencia
debido a la temperatura. 1. No se puede usar para medir o monitorear temperaturas.
Interconexión del Cliente
2. Se puede cablear directamente al arrancador del motor
Los conductores del detector de temperatura RTD se retenido en el relé de la bobina para permitir el apagado
suministran en una caja de conductos separada. Los del motor debido al exceso de temperatura.
conductores vienen etiquetados y conectados a un bloque de
terminales. Es necesario que un lado del circuito puente del 3. Se puede cablear directamente a un circuito de alarma sin
cliente esté conectado a tierra. Esto se puede hacer en la caja necesidad de usar un relé separado.
de terminales del motor o en el extremo de instrumentación del
circuito. Las tensiones que puedan aparecer en el circuito 4. Se puede usar con CA o CC.
entonces pasarán a tierra.
5. El termostato proporciona una característica de
Comentarios restablecimiento térmicamente automático. La carac-
terística de restablecimiento automático por acción a pre-
1. Puede proporcionar mediciones continuas de temperatura sión puede causar dificultades en la resolución de
o el monitoreo de la temperatura. problemas a menos que esté conectada a un relé con
restablecimiento manual.
2. Necesita un control instalado separadamente y una fuente
de alimentación eléctrica a fin de leer la temperatura o 6. Responderá térmicamente a los cambios normales de
proporcionar un medio para el funcionamiento del relé carga y temperatura, sin embargo no responderá lo
(para las características de alarma o de apagado del suficientemente rápido para proporcionar protección de
motor). rotor bloqueado.
17
TERMOPAR DEL BOBINADO - T/P DETECTOR DE TEMPERATURA DE
RESISTENCIA DEL COJINETE - RTD
Propósito
Propósito
Medir o monitorear la temperatura de bobinado.
Medir o monitorear la temperatura del cojinete durante el
Principios de Funcionamiento funcionamiento.
El T/P utiliza una unión de dos metales disímiles para generar Principios de Funcionamiento
una tensión que varía con el cambio de temperatura en la unión.
El detector de temperatura RTD utiliza un alambre enrollado en
Interconexión del Cliente una bobina. Éste se enrolla de tal manera que no funciona
como dispositivo de inducción. Su modo de funcionamiento es
Utilice el mismo tipo de alambre del T/P, conecte los
el de un cambio lineal en la resistencia debido a la temperatura.
conductores suministrados en una caja de conductos separada.
Los conductores están etiquetados. Interconexión del Cliente
Comentarios Se suministra una tira de terminales dentro de una caja de
conductos. Los conductores están etiquetados.
1. Puede proporcionar mediciones continuas de temperatura
o el monitoreo de la temperatura. Comentarios
2. Puede medir la temperatura mediante un potenciómetro y 1. Puede proporcionar mediciones continuas de temperatura
convertir la tensión en temperatura mediante el uso de o el monitoreo de la temperatura.
tablas de conversión apropiadas.
2. Necesita un control instalado separadamente y una fuente
3. Necesita un control instalado separadamente y una fuente de alimentación eléctrica a fin de leer la temperatura o
de alimentación eléctrica a fin de leer la temperatura o proporcionar un medio para el funcionamiento del relé
proporcionar un medio para el funcionamiento del relé para las características de alarma o de apagado del
para las características de alarma o de apagado del motor.
motor.
3. Se puede monitorear la temperatura utilizando un
TERMISTORES DEL BOBINADO ohmiómetro o un puente de resistencia y convertir la
resistencia (después de restar la resistencia del diodo
Propósito electroluminiscente) en temperatura mediante el uso de
las tablas apropiadas de conversión para el elemento.
Indicar que la temperatura del bobinado ha excedido las
temperaturas normales de funcionamiento.
TERMOPAR DEL COJINETE - T/P
Propósito
El dispositivo en un semiconductor que cambia su resistencia
Medir o monitorear la temperatura del cojinete durante el
abruptamente a cierta temperatura. El cambio se utiliza para
funcionamiento.
desencadenar una acción de conmutación en un control
externo que proporciona una señal de alarma o de apagado. Principios de Funcionamiento
Interconexión del Cliente El T/P utiliza una unión de dos metales disímiles para generar
una tensión que varía con el cambio de temperatura en la unión.
Los conductores del termistor se llevan hasta una tira de
terminales localizada en el cabezal de la bobina. Los Interconexión del Cliente
conductores separados continúan hasta el controlador, ubicado
en la caja de conductos accesoria, donde se realizan las Utilice el mismo tipo de alambre del T/P, conéctelos a los bornes
conexiones del cliente. en la tira de terminales suministrados en una caja de conductos
separada. Los conductores están etiquetados.
Comentarios
Comentarios
No se puede usar para medir o monitorear las temperaturas del
bobinado. De manera similar a la acción de conmutación 1. Puede proporcionar mediciones continuas de temperatura
provista por un termostato para una alarma o apagado. No o el monitoreo de la temperatura.
proporcionará protección de rotor bloqueado.
18
2. También puede medir la temperatura mediante un Propósito
potenciómetro y convertir la tensión en temperatura
mediante el uso de tablas de conversión apropiadas. Los calentadores espaciales sirven para evitar la condensación
de la humedad en el interior del envolvente del motor durante
3. Necesita un control instalado separadamente y una fuente los períodos de apagado o de almacenamiento.
de alimentación eléctrica a fin de leer la temperatura o
proporcionar un medio para el funcionamiento del relé Montaje
para las características de alarma o de apagado del
La selección de los calentadores espaciales se realiza, a
motor.
menos que se indique de manera diferente, por medio de los
parámetros siguientes.
TERMOSTATO DEL COJINETE
1. La temperatura nominal máxima de la funda de 200°C
(También conocido como relé de temperatura del cojinete o (350°F) como estándar. Hay disponibles temperaturas
interruptor de bulbo de gas) menores de funda.
Propósito 2. El aumento de temperatura en el interior del motor se

elevó aproximadamente 6°C (10°F) sobre la temperatura
Indicar que la temperatura del cojinente ha excedido las ambiente.
temperaturas normales de funcionamiento. 3. Supone una temperatura ambiente máxima de 40°C.
Principios de Funcionamiento Con base en lo anterior, se calculan los calentadores
espaciales, se instalan y se terminan en una caja de conductos
El dispositivo funciona debido a la expansión del gas confinado accesoria. Los conductores están etiquetados.
en el interior de un elemento de bulbo sellado de gas que se
pone en contacto con la carcasa del cojinete. A medida que Las potencias aproximadas de los calentadores espaciales son
aumenta la temperatura del cojinete o del aceite, el gas en el como sigue: G5000/G315, 320 W; G5810/G40, 400 W; SG50,
elemento se expande y flexiona un diafragma en el interruptor. 625 W y MG50, 750W.
El movimiento del diafragma activa los contactos del interruptor.
Los contactos se pueden cablear directamente a un relé para SISTEMA DE CIRCULACIÓN DE ACEITE
proporcionar características de indicación de alarma o de
apagado del motor. Propósito
Construcción Proporcionar una fuente de aceite frío y limpio a los cojinetes.
El termostato consiste en un conjunto de contactos nor-
malmente cerrados o normalmente abiertos accionados por un
diafragma que está conectado a un bulbo de gas por medio de PRECAUCIÓN
un tubo capilar.
Si un sistema está equipado con una válvula de aguja
TERMÓMETRO DEL COJINETE variable para controlar el caudal, será NECESARIO
ajustar esta válvula. Desconecte la válvula y ajústela
Propósito según el caudal indicado en la hoja de dimensiones. Si
no está disponible la hoja de dimensiones comuníquese
Medir directamente la temperatura del aceite en el colector de con la Oficina de Ventas de Reliance en su localidad.
aceite o en el anillo de rodamiento exterior del cojinete.
CALENTADORES ESPACIALES Descripción
El sistema de lubricación de aceite consiste en dispositivos para

introducir aceite a los cojinetes y drenajes que permitirán la
PELIGRO eliminación del exceso de aceite en el colector sin rebalses ni
permitirán que el nivel en el colector baje demasiado como para
LOS CALENTADORES ESPACIALES FUNCIONAN no permitir que los anillos retenedores de aceite tomen aceite
CON LA TENSIÓN DE LÍNEA. DESCONECTE LA en caso de que se pierda la fuente de aceite.
ALIMENTACIÓN ELÉCTRICA DE LOS CALENTA-
DORES ESPACIALES ANTES DE LLEVAR A CABO Se suministran entradas y salidas de aceite con cada cojinete
LABORES DE MANTENIMIENTO EN EL MOTOR. EL para introducir aceite en el área de la chumacera. Se suministra
NO SEGUIR ESTA PRECAUCIÓN PUEDE RESULTAR un orificio en la tubería de entrada de aceite para controlar la
EN LESIONES CORPORALES GRAVES O LA MUERTE. cantidad de aceite que se introduce en el cojinete. La salida de
aceite proporcionará drenaje adecuado sin la pérdida total de
aceite en el colector.
El cojinete también está equipado con anillos retenedores de

aceite.
19
Requisito TRANSFORMADORES DE CORRIENTE
Quizá exista la necesidad de un sistema de lubricación en Descripción
algunas capacidades nominales debido al tamaño de la
chumacera y a la velocidad del eje. En esos casos la unidad se Los transformadores de corriente son medios para medir o
suministrará de manera estándar con los aditamentos de detectar el flujo de corriente a través de los conductores de
admisión y salida para la conexión a una fuente de aceite entrada en los motores de CA.
suministrada por el cliente.
Aplicación
En la hoja de dimensiones se muestran los detalles o
capacidades nominales que requieren un sistema de Las aplicaciones involucran el uso de transformadores de
lubricación por chorro. corriente por protección diferencial o por medición de corriente
de fase en la línea.
ACEITERA DE NIVEL CONSTANTE
Instalación
Descripción
Se puede suministrar e instalar los transformadores de
Las aceiteras de nivel constante con una opción para los corriente en una caja de conductos sobredimensionada para el
motores con cojinete de manguito. Las aceiteras de nivel motor principal.
constante se utilizan como pequeños colectores suple-
mentarios de aceite que proporcionan una fuente adicional de Se identificarán los transformadores de corriente según la
aceite para llenar pequeñas cantidades de aceite perdidas por relación indicada en la placa de datos en los transformadores
fugas de largo plazo. Proporcionan esta característica sin de corriente e incluirán terminales de tipo roscado en los
cambiar el nivel de aceite en el colector. terminales secundarios.
Funcionamiento Selección
El dispositivo está instalado a un lado de la unidad y está La selección de los transformadores de corriente se basa en la
interconectado a la carcasa del cojinete. Cuando disminuye el relación que el usuario especifique según los requisitos de sus
nivel de aceite en el colector del cojinete, el dispositivo de nivel medidores o instrumentación relacionada.
constante añade aceite para alcanzar un nivel predeterminado.
Este nivel se establece en la fábrica y no es necesario realizar PARARRAYOS Y CAPACITORES DE
ajustes adicionales. SOBRETENSIÓN
Si fuera necesario reemplazar la aceitera o verificar su Descripción
funcionamiento, deberá seguirse el procedimiento indicado a
continuación: Los pararrayos se utilizan para limitar el valor de cresta de las
curvas de tensión de entrada. Los capacitores de sobretensión
1. La ranura de nivel de aceite en el cuerpo de la aceitera, tienden a prolongar el tiempo de ascenso del frente de onda de
por debajo del recipiente de la aceitera, debe estar sobretensión y reducen sus efectos en el bobinado del estator.
colocada en el punto intermedio del indicador de nivel de
aceite. Instalación
2. La posición de la aceitera se ajusta mediante el cambio de Se puede instalar los pararrayos y los capacitores en una caja
longitud del manguito roscado en la parte inferior del de conductos principal sobredimensionada. Ellos se conectan
cuerpo de la aceitera. desde los conductores de línea a tierra, usualmente lo más
cercanamente posible al motor.
NOTA: La tapa de llenado en la aceitera de nivel constante Selección
debe estar firmemente cerrada para que funcione la aceitera.
El valor estándar de capacitancia de Reliance Electric para los
Características capacitores de sobretensión es de 1,0 mfd – 460, 575 V; 0,50
mfd – 2300-7000 V. Ellos son apropiados para sistemas de 25,
El dispositivo tiene las siguientes características:
40, 50 ó 60 Hz. Los pararrayos se seleccionan según el RMS
1. Constituye una fuente auxiliar de aceite para fugas máximo de línea a la tensión de tierra.
menores de aceite.
2. Proporciona una indicación de la velocidad de fuga de

aceite mediante el cambio de nivel de aceite en la aceitera
de nivel constante.
3. Brinda la seguridad a "simple vista" de que hay aceite

en el cojinete sin necesidad de acercarse a la carcasa
o al eje.
20
Caja principal
de terminales
Cajas auxiliares
Argollas Grasera
de terminales
Grasera
21
APÉNDICE
Entrada Orificio para Almohadilla Rebalse de grasa

DISTRIBUCIÓN GENERAL G
de aire pasador de conexión

a tierra
ELEVACIÓN EXTREMO DE
LATERAL IMPULSIÓN
COJINETE ANTIFRICCIÓN DEL
ENSAMBLAJE DEL MOTOR
1. DEFLECTOR DE AIRE
2. SELLO/ANILLO RECOGE LUBRICANTE DEL COJINETE DEL EXTREMO POSTERIOR
3. ESCUADRA DE SOPORTE DE EXTREMO POSTERIOR
4. TUERCA DE SEGURIDAD (NO SE NECESITA PARA TODOS LOS DISEÑOS)
5. ARANDELA DE SEGURIDAD (NO SE NECESITA PARA TODOS LOS DISEÑOS)
6. COJINETE DEL EXTREMO POSTERIOR
7. TAPA INTERIOR DE COJINETE DEL EXTREMO POSTERIOR
8. BARRERA TÉRMICA DEL EXTREMO POSTERIOR
9. ENSAMBLAJE DEL ESTATOR/BASTIDOR
10. DISPOSITIVOS DE IZADO
11. ENSAMBLAJE DE CAJA DE CONDUCTOS
12. ENSAMBLAJE DE ROTOR/EJE
13. BARRERA TÉRMICA DE EXTREMO POSTERIOR

(NO SE NECESITA PARA TODOS LOS DISEÑOS)
14. TAPA INTERIOR DE EXTREMO FRONTAL
15. ANILLO A PRESIÓN INTERIOR (NO SE NECESITA

PARA TODOS LOS DISEÑOS)
16. COJINETE DE EXTREMO FRONTAL
17. ANILLO A PRESIÓN EXTERIOR (NO SE NECESITA

PARA TODOS LOS DISEÑOS)
18. ESCUADRA DE SOPORTE DE EXTREMO FRONTAL
19. SELLO DE COJINETE DE EXTREMO FRONTAL

(NO SE NECESITA PARA TODOS LOS DISEÑOS)
20. VENTILADOR
21. CUBIERTA DEL VENTILADOR
22
23
COJINETE DE MANGUITO DEL
ENSAMBLAJE DEL MOTOR
1. DEFLECTOR DE AIRE
2. ANILLO RECOGEDOR DE ACEITE DEL EJE
3. SELLO EXTERIOR DE EXTREMO POSTERIOR (SÓLO EN G50)
4. CARCASA DE COJINETE DEL EXTREMO POSTERIOR
5. COJINETE Y ANILLO RETENEDOR DE ACEITE
6. SELLO DE COJINETE INTERIOR DEL EXTREMO

POSTERIOR (SÓLO EN EL G50)
7. CUBIERTA DE ESCUADRA DE SOPORTE
8. CUÑA DE AJUSTE DE JUEGO AXIAL (SÓLO EN EL G50)
9. ESCUADRA DE SOPORTE DEL COJINETE DE MANGUITO
10. ENSAMBLAJE DEL ESTATOR/BASTIDOR
11. DISPOSITIVOS DE IZADO
12. ENSAMBLAJE DE LA CAJA DE CONDUCTOS
13. ENSAMBLAJE DE ROTOR/EJE
14. ESCUADRA DE SOPORTE DEL COJINETE

DE MANGUITO
15. CUÑA DE AJUSTE DE JUEGO AXIAL

(SÓLO EN EL G50)
16. CUBIERTA DE ESCUADRA DE SOPORTE
17. SELLO INTERIOR DEL EXTREMO FRONTAL
18. CARCASA DE COJINETE DE EXTREMO FRONTAL
19. COJINETE Y ANILLO RETENEDOR DE ACEITE
20. SELLO EXTERIOR DE EXTREMO FRONTAL

(SÓLO EN EL G50)
21. SELLO DE AIRE DEL COJINETE DEL EXTREMO

FRONTAL (SÓLO EN EL G50)
22. VENTILADOR
23. CUBIERTA DEL VENTILADOR
24
25
PROBLEMA CAUSA SOLUCIÓN
El motor no arranca El motor está conectado Inspeccione la conexión del motor y las conexiones del
erróneamente control
Tensión errónea de línea Verifique en la placa de datos la tensión necesaria
El relé de sobrecarga está disparado Corrija y restablezca
Los fusibles están quemados o Reemplace los fusibles
defectuosos
Hay un circuito abierto en el estator o Compruebe que no haya circuitos abiertos
en el rotor
Hay un corto circuito en el estator Compruebe que no haya cortocircuitos
El bobinado está conectado a tierra Compruebe que no haya conexión a tierra
El motor hace demasiado ruido El bobinado está funcionando con Si el bobinado está funcionando sólo con una fase, no
una sola fase arrancará la unidad. Detenga la unidad e intente
restablecerla
Los apoyos están sueltos Inspeccione y corrija
El cojinete es ruidoso Inspeccione y reemplace
Las mitades del acople están sueltas Verifique la alineación y apriete
Verifique la alineación con el motor de impulsión
conectado
Vibración Verifique la planeidad de las patas
Corrija el equilibrio del motor si fuera necesario
Verifique el desequilibrio de la chaveta en el acople
La temperatura del cojinete es La lubricación es insuficiente Añada lubricante según las instrucciones en la placa de
excesiva (cojinete antifricción) datos
El acople está desalineado Vuelva a alinear la unidad
La holgura interna no es suficiente El reemplazo del cojinete es erróneo – consulte al
fabricante
La ventilación es insuficiente Limpie los filtros, verifique que las ventilas no estén
bloqueadas
La temperatura del cojinete es El suministro de aceite es insuficiente Consulte los requisitos indicados en la placa de datos y
excesiva (cojinete de manguito) corrija
Compruebe que la lubricación y los niveles de aceite
sean correctos y que no haya fugas
El empuje extremo es excesivo Verifique la alineación y el juego axial del acople
El aceite está contaminado Drene y vuelva a llenar, cambie los filtros en el sistema
de lubricación por chorro
Inspeccione las posibles fuentes de contaminación
La holgura es ajustada Compruebe que exista la holgura correcta entre el
diámetro interior del cojinete y el D.E. del eje.
No funcionan los anillos retenedores Compruebe que no haya daño, verifique que no haya
de aceite deformaciones ni rebaba – repare o reemplace si fuera
necesario
Se limpió el material del cojinete Reacondicione, raspe y reajuste
El eje está rugoso o tiene corrosión Reacondicione y pula el eje
26
PROBLEMA CAUSA SOLUCIÓN
La temperatura del cojinete Desalineación del cojinete Vuelva a alinear o a asentar el cojinete
es excesiva (cojinete de
manguito) continuación El acople está desalineado Vuelva a alinear el motor
Corriente del eje Aísle térmicamente el cojinete y aísle el eje del piso
Temperatura excesiva Sobrecarga Reduzca la carga a la capacidad nominal indicada
en la placa de datos o reemplácelo con una unidad
de mayor capacidad
La ventilación está restringida Inspeccione las aberturas y los conductos para
comprobar que no haya obstrucciones y corríjalas
Problemas Eléctricos Compruebe que no haya bobinas conectadas a tierra
o en cortocircuito ni tensiones desequilibradas entre
fases
Derrame de aceite (unidades Llenado excesivo Drene el aceite hasta alcanzar el nivel correcto o
de cojinete de manguitos) ajuste la elevación de la aceitera
Los sellos no están sujetados Apriete
debidamente
Los aditamentos de tubería están Apriete o reemplace las partes con roscas gastadas
sueltos
Está obstruido el pasaje de Despeje el pasaje
ventilación del compensador de
presión de aire del cojinete
Se usó el compuesto sellador Use Permatex de aviación tipo No. 3 u otro sellador
utilizado en la superficie de la tapa de juntas flexible
del cojinete
Derrame de aceite El flujo de aceite es excesivo en el Reduzca el flujo hasta el nivel recomendado en la
(sistema de lubricación sistema de lubricación a presión placa de datos
a chorro)
La presión de aire está Limpie las tuberías de ventilación
desequilibrada
Vibración excesiva El acople está desalineado Vuelva a alinear según las condiciones de
funcionamiento
El acople está desequilibrado Vuelva a balancear
La chaveta del acople está
desequilibrada
El rotor está desequilibrado
Existe resonancia con los cimientos Realice ajustes a los cimientos
– el diseño de la estructura es
erróneo
El cojinete está gastado Reemplace el cojinete si fuera demasiado grande
El equipo acoplado Verifique la vibración del motor sin acoplamiento, si
fuera necesario vuelva a balancear el equipo
27
Rockwell Automation
6040 Ponders Court
Greenville, SC 29615-4617, EUA
Tel. 1.864.297.4800 Fax 1.864.281.2433
correo electrónico: adv@powersystems.rockwell.com
Web www.dodge-pt.com www.reliance.com
www.ptplace.com
Comuníquese con nosotros en www.rockwellautomation.com

Rockwell Automation, una empresa de Rockwell International Corporation (NYSE: ROK), incluye las principales marcas en la
industria de automatización, e incluye los productos Dodge para transmisión de potencia mecánica, los motores y variadores
Reliance Electric, los controles Allen-Bradley y el software de Rockwell Software. El extraordinario enfoque de Automatización
Completa de Rockwell Automation para ayudar a los clientes a lograr una ventaja competitiva cuenta con el apoyo de miles de
asociados, distribuidores y proveedores de soluciones autorizados en todo el mundo.
Oficinas principales para Dodge y Reliance Electric Oficinas principales para Allen-Bradley y Rockwell Software
Américas Europa Pacífico Asiático Américas Europa Pacífico Asiático
Rockwell Automation Rockwell Automation Rockwell Automation Rockwell Automation Rockwell Automation Rockwell Automation
6040 Ponders Court Brühlstraße 22 55 Newton Rd. 1201 South Second Street SA/NV 27/F Citicorp Centre
Greenville, SC 29615-4617 USA D-74834 Elztal-Dallau #11-01/02 Revenue House Milwaukee, WI 53204-2496 USA Boulevard du Souverain 36 18 Whitfield Road
Tel: (1) 864.297.4800 Germany Singapore 307987 Tel: (1) 414.382.2000 1170 Brussels, Belgium Causeway Bay, Hong Kong
Fax: (1) 864.281.2433 Tel: (49) 6261-9410 Tel: (65) 351.6723 Fax: (1) 414.382.4444 Tel: (32) 2 663 06 00 Tel: (852) 2887 4788
Fax: (49) 6261-941-122 Fax: (65) 355.1733 Fax: (32) 2 663 06 40 Fax: (852) 2887 1846
© 2001 Rockwell International Corporation

RELIANCE ELECTRIC y DUTYMASTER son marcas comerciales de Rockwell Automation.
Impreso en EE.UU. B-3684-3S 5/01 3C-K

Dokumentationsübersicht Bauart / Type
Documentation chart Größe / Size
Bei Korrespondenz bitte angeben / Please quote in correspondence No. 4456539 EN/SP
Best.-Nr. / Order-No.: 4440017386
Pos. Produkt Betriebsanleitung / Dokumente Reg.-Nr.

Item Product Operating instructions / documents Reg. no.
Maßzeichnung/
6 165 580
Dimension drawing
0020 Ersatzteilzeichnung/
Getriebe / 6 101 759 f
0110 Spare parts drawing
0190 Ersatzteilliste/
Gear unit EL 4456539- 001….12
0270 Spare parts list
Betriebsanleitung/ siehe / see GL 4456539- 001….12
B3 BV 15
Operating instructions BA 5017 .. 03.00, BA 7300 .. 01.05
Maßzeichnung/
5 475 135
Dimension drawing
0060 Ersatzteilzeichnung/
Ölversorgungsanlage / EL44456539-001….12DE/EN
0150 Spare parts drawing
0230 Ersatzteilliste/
Oil supply system EL 4456539- 001….12
0310 Spare parts list
Betriebsanleitung/
OLOO 7 GL 1.211.007
Operating instructions
Maßzeichnung/
Dimension drawing
Ersatzteilzeichnung/
Spare parts drawing
Ersatzteilliste/
Spare parts list
Betriebsanleitung/
Maßzeichnung/
Dimension drawing
Ersatzteilzeichnung/
Spare parts drawing
Ersatzteilliste/
Spare parts list
Betriebsanleitung/
∗ = geänderte Unterlage, bitte austauschen

modified document, please replace
= ergänzte Unterlage, bitte hinzufügen

completed document, please add
A. FRIEDR. FLENDER AG, D - 46393 Bocholt Datum Name Abt.

Tel. 02871/92-0; Fax 02871/922596 30.09.08 Boßmann IDED.FR
EZ: 4456539-001...12
Bauart B3BV Seite
Ersatzteilliste (EL) Tipo Página
Lista de recambios Größe 15,0 1/2
Tamaño
Übersetzung 10,874
Multiplicación
Bei Korrespondenz bitte angeben 4440017386
Indiquese en toda correspondencia EL 4456539-001....012 DE/ES
Hierzu gehört Zeichnungs-Nr.
Véase plano no. 6101759
Teil-Nr. Menge Benennung Zeichnungs-Nr. Material-Nr. Gw(kg)
Pieza no.Cantidad Designación No. del plano Ident no. Peso
E 0054 1 ST FILTER-LUFT NASS G1 I/A PC/PE/PVC 000.001.158.093 0,8
FILTRO DE AIRE
G 0099 1 ST KEGELRADSATZ ZS 325/1,125 1.6587 9514435/A 000.001.353.805 113,3
JUEGO DE ENGRANAJES CÓNICOS
E* 0100 1 ST KEGELRADW L ZS 325/1,125 1.6587 6040335/A 000.001.252.829 82,4
EJE PARA RUEDA CÓNICA
E* 0102 1 ST KEGELRAD R ZS 325/1,125 1.6587 6040336/B 000.001.252.845 30,9
RUEDA CÓNICA
E 0119 1 ST RINGTRAEGER100X160,0X24 ST/GJL 5889335/C 000.000.669.335 1,6
"PORTAJUNTAS ""FEY"""
E 0128 1 ST RING-PASS 311X431X6,5 H S355J2G3 5881757/A 000.000.561.757 3,3
ANILLO DE AJUSTE
E 0132 1 ST WDR 100X125X12 BAUM W 5710 75FPM585 000.000.781.847 0,1
ANILLO DE OBTURACIÓN DE EJE
E 0135 3 ST RING,AS 125/05,0X0,98 W 5730 FED-ST 000.000.347.206 0,0
JUNTA DE LAMINILLAS FEY
E 0150 1 ST EINBAUS 32222/DF ST-KAEF 000.000.379.978 15,6
JUEGO DE RODAMIENTOS
E 0151 1 ST WAELZL 2226 NJ EC/C3 D 5412 SKF/FAG 000.000.770.357 11,7
RODAMIENTO
E 0200 1 ST WELLE 280X1296 34CrNiMo6 6040232/A 000.001.252.646 511,0
EJE
E 0223 1 ST O-RING OR0240 -04 W 5713 72NBR872 000.000.306.514 0,1
JUNTA TÓRICA
E 0232 1 ST WDR 260X300X20 BAUMSL W 5710 75FPM585 000.000.307.019 0,5
E 0250 1 ST WAELZL 24152 CC/W33 D 635 MET-KAEF 000.000.781.488 110,0
RODAMIENTO
RODAMIENTO
E 0300 1 ST STRDWELLE LP 442,0/3,47 1.6587 5877492/A 000.000.677.492 103,0
EJE DE ENGRANAJE CILÍNDRICO
E 0302 1 ST STIRNRAD RP 442,0/3,47 1.6587 5877498/A 000.000.677.498 468,0
ENGRANAJE CILÍNDRICO
E 0350 1 ST WAELZL 22328 E D 635 MET-KAEF 000.000.380.879 34,5
RODAMIENTO
RODAMIENTO
E 0400 1 ST STRDWELLE RP 320,0/2,78 1.6587 6040420/- 000.001.252.937 58,5
E 0402 1 ST STIRNRAD LP 320,0/2,78 17CRNIMO6 5880918/E 000.000.560.918 174,0
E 0450 1 ST WAELZL 32320 D 720 ST-KAEF 000.000.380.540 12,9
RODAMIENTO
RODAMIENTO
Die mit * gekennzeichneten Teile gehören zu einer Baugruppe (G). Die Baugruppe ist nur komplett auszutauschen.
Los elementos marcados con * pertenecen a un subgrupo (G).El subgrupo sólo se puede cambiar completo.
A. Friedr.Flender AG, D 46393 Bocholt, Datum FechaKAMPSHOFF, ASTRID FR. 1569

Tel.+49(0)2871/92-0, Fax+49(0)2871/922596, http://www.flender.com 30.09.2008 Rev.:
Bauart B3BV Seite
Tamaño
Übersetzung 10,874
Multiplicación
Indiquese en toda correspondencia EL 4456539- 001….12 DE/ES
E 0705 1 ST KPPLGTEIL 1 M24X75 1.6587 6007977/- 000.001.214.750 0,7
PIEZA DE ACOPLAMIENTO
G 0773 1 ST WAECHT-D 0,5 BAR KOMPLETT 000.001.249.562 0,2
PRESOSTATO
E 0774 1 ST WAECHT-TEMP ATHs-SW22 F 5926 G1/2A 000.000.361.807 0,5
CONTROLADOR DE TEMPERATURA
E 0775 1 ST FILTER-S 4.225-20.060.2.F2 F 5922 000.000.389.276 3,4
FILTRO DE DOBLE CAMBIO

Bauart B3BV Seite
Tamaño
Übersetzung 10,874
Multiplicación
FILTRO DE AIRE
RUEDA CÓNICA
ANILLO DE AJUSTE
RODAMIENTO
EJE
E 0223 1 ST O-RING OR0240 -04 W 5713 72NBR872 000.000.306.514 0,1
JUNTA TÓRICA
RODAMIENTO
RODAMIENTO
E 0302 1 ST STIRNRAD RP 442,0/3,47 1.6587 5877498/A 000.000.677.498 468,0
RODAMIENTO
RODAMIENTO
E 0400 1 ST STRDWELLE RP 320,0/2,78 1.6587 6040420/- 000.001.252.937 58,5
RODAMIENTO
RODAMIENTO

Bauart B3BV Seite
Tamaño
Übersetzung 10,874
Multiplicación
E 0705 1 ST KPPLGTEIL 1 M24X75 1.6587 6007977/- 000.001.214.750 0,7
PRESOSTATO
E 0775 1 ST FILTER-S 4.225-20.060.2.F2 F 5922 000.000.389.276 3,4

Bauart B3BV Seite
Tamaño
Übersetzung 10,874
Multiplicación
FILTRO DE AIRE
RUEDA CÓNICA
ANILLO DE AJUSTE
RODAMIENTO
EJE
E 0223 1 ST O-RING OR0240 -04 W 5713 72NBR872 000.000.306.514 0,1
JUNTA TÓRICA
RODAMIENTO
RODAMIENTO
E 0302 1 ST STIRNRAD RP 442,0/3,47 1.6587 5877498/A 000.000.677.498 468,0
RODAMIENTO
RODAMIENTO
E 0400 1 ST STRDWELLE RP 320,0/2,78 1.6587 6040420/- 000.001.252.937 58,5
RODAMIENTO
RODAMIENTO
A. Friedr.Flender AG, D 46393 Bocholt, Date FechaKAMPSHOFF, ASTRID FR. 1569

Bauart B3BV Seite
Tamaño
Übersetzung 10,874
Multiplicación
Indiquese en toda correspondencia EL 4456539- 001….12DE/ES
E 0705 1 ST KPPLGTEIL 1 M24X75 1.6587 6007977/- 000.001.214.750 0,7
PRESOSTATO
E 0775 1 ST FILTER-S 4.225-20.060.2.F2 F 5922 000.000.389.276 3,4
A. Friedr.Flender AG, D 46393 Bocholt, Date Fecha KAMPSHOFF, ASTRID FR. 1569
Bauart B3BV Seite
Tamaño
Übersetzung 10,874
Multiplicación
FILTRO DE AIRE
RUEDA CÓNICA
ANILLO DE AJUSTE
RODAMIENTO
EJE
E 0223 1 ST O-RING OR0240 -04 W 5713 72NBR872 000.000.306.514 0,1
JUNTA TÓRICA
RODAMIENTO
RODAMIENTO
E 0302 1 ST STIRNRAD RP 442,0/3,47 1.6587 5877498/A 000.000.677.498 468,0
RODAMIENTO
RODAMIENTO
E 0400 1 ST STRDWELLE RP 320,0/2,78 1.6587 6040420/- 000.001.252.937 58,5
RODAMIENTO
RODAMIENTO

Bauart B3BV Seite
Tamaño
Übersetzung 10,874
Multiplicación
E 0705 1 ST KPPLGTEIL 1 M24X75 1.6587 6007977/- 000.001.214.750 0,7
PRESOSTATO
E 0775 1 ST FILTER-S 4.225-20.060.2.F2 F 5922 000.000.389.276 3,4
A. Friedr.Flender AG, D 46393 Bocholt, Date Fecha KAMPSHOFF, ASTRID FR. 1569
List of equipment Type B3BV Page
1 of 1
Size 15
Please quote in correspondence GL 4456539- 001- 12 EN
Part No. Qty. Description Manufacturer
700 1 Pump STOZ

Type KSW 3
Capacity 46 l/min at
n1 = 1339 1/min
n1 max. = 2500 1/min
Suction connection G 1
Pressure connection G 1
773 1 Pressure monitor FLENDER

similar to Flender Works Standard W 5925
Screw connection G 1/4
Adjustment range p = 0.3-1.5 bar
Quantity of switching contacts: 1
Contact loading:
4 A / 250 V AC / 250 VA
2 A / 24 V DC
1 A / 50 V DC
0.02 A / 250 V DC
Degree of protection: IP 65
adjusted at p < 0.5 bar --> SYSTEM STOP
774 1 Temperature monitor FLENDER

Type ATHs-22/A
as per Flender Works Standard W 5926
Immersion tube length 100 mm
Connection immersion tube G 1/2
Contact loading:
2 A / 230 V AC / 460 VA
0.25 A / 230 V DC / 58 W
adjusted at t > 95°C --> WARNING
adjusted at t > 100 °C -> SYSTEM STOP
Diese technische Unterlage hat gesetzlichen Schutz ( DIN 34 )
A. Friedr. Flender AG, D 46393 Bocholt, Datum Name: Kampshoff IDE

Tel. 02871/92-0, Telefax 02871/922596, http://www.flender.com 2008-07-16 Rev.: )
List of equipment Type B3BV Page
2 of 1
Size 15
Please quote in correspondence GL 4456539- 001- 12EN
Part No. Qty. Description Manufacturer
775 1 Double change-over filter FLENDER

Type 4.225-20.060.2.F2
as per Flender Works Standard W 5922
Nominal width DN 20
Nominal pressure PN 16
Rate of flow approx. 46 l/min
Filter coarseness 60 mm
Filterelement : stainless steel wire cloth
Housing material GK-Al
Filter bowl material GK-Al
optical diff. pressure indication
electrical diff. pressure check
Type 2.F2
Contact loading:
1 A / 250 V AC / 60 VA
1 A / 250 V DC / 30 W
adjusted at Dp > 2 bar ––> WARNING (CLEAN FILTER)
A. Friedr. Flender AG, D 46393 Bocholt, Datum Name: Kampshoff IDE

Tel. 02871/92-0, Telefax 02871/922596, http://www.flender.com 2008-07-16 Rev.: )
B 5959 EN 08.07
1/4
1. General
These operating instructions contain basic information on installation, commissioning,
operation and maintenance of STOZ lubricating oil pumps.
Intended use:
STOZ lubricating oil pumps are used to pump lubricating, non-corrosive fluids.
Pump data and operating conditions:

Technical specifications of the individual pumps are documented in the associated
drawing or data sheet.
Identification of the STOZ pump:

Each pump is with marked with the following information:
• Article number
• Serial number
• Date of manufacture
• Marking of fluid connections:
S for suction connection
D for pressure connection
2. Safety
In addition to the special safety instructions listed in the following, the valid national safety and
accident prevention regulations for handling machinery and technical equipment are to be
observed.
Failure to observe the safety instructions may involve a danger to persons, the environment
and the machine and to loss of all claims for compensation.
Information attached to the pump itself such as type plate, arrow indicating direction of rotation,
marking of fluid connections, must always be observed and kept in legible condition.
Qualification of personnel:
The personnel for installation, operation and maintenance must have appropriate qualifications
to carry out this work. The owner of the machine must ensure that the personnel is familiar with
and fully understands the contents of the operating instructions.
Safety instructions for the owner:

• If hot or cold machine parts lead to dangers, these parts must be protected against contact
by the owner.
• In the case of moving parts (e.g. belt drives, couplings), appropriate guards against contact
This technical document is our property. All copying or Denomination:

forwarding to third parties has consequences under civil and
criminal law. Brief description / Operating instructions
Date: STOZ pump (foot / flange / flange, vertical)
13.08.07
Type N / KSW
Drawing no.: Article no. Page:
Weltestraße 3 1/4
88250 Weingarten
B 5959 EN 08.07
2/4
are to be installed. These must not be removed during operation of the machine.
• Leakages (e.g. of the shaft seal) must be drained off in such a way that there is no danger
for persons or the environment. Statutory regulations must be observed.
Safety instructions for maintenance and installation work:

All work on the machine must only be carried out when it is at a standstill. Immediately after
completing work, all safety and protective equipment must be re-installed or put into operation
again.
Before commissioning, the points listed in the section “Initial commissioning” must be
observed.
Unauthorised conversion and replacement part manufacture:

All modifications and conversions on the pump are only permitted with the agreement of the
manufacturer. OEM parts serve safety purposes. The use of other parts may render liability for
ensuing consequences null and void.
Unauthorised operation:
The operational safety of the pump supplied is only ensured when used as intended. The
threshold values listed in the data sheet must never be exceeded.
3. Transport and storage

Protective measures and packaging:
The pumps are packaged in the factory in such a way that they are protected against corrosion,
shocks and impacts.
The fluid connections are sealed with plastic plugs. This prevents residual fluid, which is still in
the pump as a residue of the trial run and as corrosion protection, from escaping. This also
protects the connection threads and reliably prevents foreign bodies from entering the inside of
the pump.
Transport:
To prevent damage, the transport packaging is to be protected against shocks and impacts.
We guarantee that the goods are delivered in perfect condition. After receipt of the goods, they
must be inspected immediately for transport damage. If damage is detected, this is to reported
immediately to the responsible forwarding agent and the pump manufacturer.
Storage:
The following points are to be observed when storing the pumps:

13.08.07
Type N / KSW
Weltestraße 3 2/4
88250 Weingarten
B 5959 EN 08.07
3/4
• The storage environment must not be damp or wet
• Corrosion protection measures for metallic parts are to be taken
• The fluid connections are to be sealed with protective plugs
4. Pump description
Structure and functional principle of the vane pump
With self-priming vane pumps, a rotor 2 runs in an eccentric hole in stator 1 (housing). The
movable blades 3 fixed in the rotor (blades, fins) are pressed against the running surface of the
stator hole with the aid of elastic and centrifugal force. The displacement cells thus formed
pump the fluid via different changes in volume from the suction to the pressure side.
Direction of rotation
Ecc.
Displacement cell
Design structure
The extremely robust but simple structure of the pump is the basic condition for long, trouble-
free operation. The drive shaft with the pressed-on or pinned rotor runs on plain bearings in the
housing, in the case of versions with special bearings also in the cover. The blades are guided
in the rotor slots on the side and pressed against the running surface of the eccentric stator
hole with coil springs. The housing is sealed with a cover and a seal between this.
STOZ pumps are produced in two versions:
• “N”: Flow direction depends on the direction of rotation

13.08.07
Type N / KSW
Weltestraße 3 3/4
88250 Weingarten
B 5959 EN 08.07
4/4
• “KSW”: Direction of rotation does not depend on the direction of rotation
Dimensions, direction of rotation of rotation and flow

The dimensions and the direction of rotation and flow of the individual pump versions
are given in our brochure or in the associated drawings.
5. Installation – assembly
All lines are to be connected oil- and air-tight. The pump is to be installed in accordance with
the installation position with the aid of the fixing holes provided for this purpose and the
standardised tightening torque.
6. Commissioning
For initial commissioning or after a standstill time of more than 6 months, the pump is
to be filled with oil before commissioning.
7. Maintenance
STOZ pumps are maintenance-free, as they are lubricated by the pumping medium.
We recommend replacing wear and sealing parts after an operating period of
approx. 45,000 hours.

13.08.07
Type N / KSW
Weltestraße 3 4/4
88250 Weingarten
B 5925 DE_EN 07.07
1/6
Bedienungsanleitung Operating instructions

Für künftige Verwendung aufbewahren Please keep carefully for future use
Membran-/ Diaphragm-/
Kolbendruckschalter Piston Pressure Switch
Baureihe 0180 / 0181 D Series 0180 / 0181 GB
Baureihe 0186 / 0187 Series 0186 / 0187
Einbau und Inbetriebnahme sind nach dieser Bedienungsanleitung Installation and commissioning must be carried out in accordance with
und nur von autorisiertem Fachpersonal vorzunehmen these operating Instructions and by authorized, qualified personnel
only.
Robert-Scheuffele GmbH & Co. KG Robert-Scheuffele GmbH & Co. KG

Keplerstraße 12-14 Keplerstraße 12-14
D-74321 Bietigheim-Bissingen D-74321 Bietigheim-Bissingen
Telefon (07142) 597-0 Telephone (07142) 597-0
Telefax (07142) 597-19 Telecopy (07142) 597-19
www.suco.de www.suco.de
E-Mail: info@suco.de e-mail: info@suco.de
Funktion und Anwendung Operating and use
Die Baureihe 0180 / 0181 und 0186 / 0187 öffnet oder The series 0180 / 0181 and 0186 / 0187 switch opens or
schließt einen elektrischen Stromkreis beim Erreichen eines closes an electrical circuit when a certain (adjustable) pres-
einstellbaren Druckwerts. Durch das Ansteigen des Drucks sure is reached. A diaphragm or piston is moved by the in-
wird eine Membrane bzw. ein Kolben bewegt. Die Auslen- crease in pressure. The amount of the diaphragm deflection
kung Membrane bzw. der Hub des Kolbens hängt von der or piston travel depends on the force of the pressure applied
Druckkraft und der einstellbaren Federvorspannung ab. Bei and the (adjustable) spring tension. At a predetermined de-
einer definierten Auslenkung der Membrane bzw. einem flection of the diaphragm or movement of the piston, a micro
definierten Hub des Kolbens wird ein Mikroschalter betätigt, switch is actuated which opens or closes the electrical con-
der die elektrischen Kontakte öffnet bzw. schließt (Wechsler). tacts (changeover).
? Der Druckschalter überwacht einen eingestellten Druckwert.

? The pressure switch monitors a preset pressure.
Vorraussetzungen für den Produkteinsatz Conditions governing the use of the product
Allgemeine, stets zu beachtende Hinweise für den ordnungs- The following general instructions are to be observed at all
gemäßen und sicheren Einsatz des Druckschalters: times to ensure the correct, safe use of the pressure switch:
? • Halten Sie die angegebenen Grenzwerte wie z.B. Drücke,

Kräfte, Momente und Temperaturen ein. ? • Do not exceed the specified limits for e.g. pressures,
forces, moments or temperatures under any circum-
stances.
• Berücksichtigen Sie die vorherrschenden Umgebungsbe-
dingungen (Temperatur, Luftfeuchte, Luftdruck etc.). • Give due consideration to the prevailing ambient condi-
• Beachten Sie die Vorschriften der Berufsgenossenschaf- tions (temperatures, atmospheric humidity, atmospheric
ten, des Technischen Überwachungsvereins (TÜV) oder pressure, etc.).
die entsprechenden nationalen Bestimmungen. • Observe the applicable safety regulations laid down by the
• Beachten Sie unbedingt die Warnungen und Hinweise in regulatory bodies in the country of use.
der Bedienungsanleitung. • Observe without fail the warning notices and other instruc-
• Setzen Sie den Druckschalter niemals starken Stößen tions laid down in the operating instructions.
oder Vibrationen aus. • Never subject pressure switch to intense blows or high
• Verwenden Sie das Produkt nur im Originalzustand. Neh- vibrations.
men Sie keine eigenmächtige Veränderungen vor. • Never expose the pressure switch to severe side impacts
• Entfernen Sie die alle Transportvorkehrungen wie Schutz- or vibrations.
folien, Kappen oder Kartonagen. • Use the product only in its original condition. Do not carry
• Die Entsorgung der einzelnen Werkstoffe in Recycling- out any unauthorized modifications.
Sammelbehältern ist möglich. • Remove all items providing protection in transit such as
foils, caps or cartons.
• Disposal of the above-named materials in recycling con-
tainers is permitted.
Bedienungsanleitung_0180-0181 Seite 1 von 1

B 5925 DE_EN 07.07
2/6
Betriebsbedingungen Operating conditions

Bei Medientemperaturen außerhalb der Raumtemperatur Media temperatures other than room temperature (20°C):
(20°C): The effects of extreme temperatures (relative to the room
Extreme Temperatureinflüsse (abweichend von der Raum- temperature) can lead to pronounced variations in the
temperatur) können zu einer starken Schaltpunktabwei- switc hing point or failure of the pressure switch.
chung oder zum Ausfall des Druckschalters führen Type of protection IP65:
Schutzart IP65: Type testing does not apply to all ambient conditions without
Die Typenprüfung ist nicht uneingeschränkt auf alle Umwelt- limitations. The user is responsible for verifying that the plug-
bedingungen übertragbar. and-socket connection complies with the specified rules and
Die Überprüfung, ob die Steckverbindung anderen als den regulations of CE, or whether it may be used for specialized
angegebenen Bestimmungen und Vorschriften entspricht purposes other than those intended by us.
bzw. ob diese in speziellen, von uns nicht vorgesehenen Use with oxygen:
Anwendungen eingesetzt werden kann, obliegt dem Anwen- Diaphragm pressure switch:
der.
If oxygen is used, the applicable accident prevention regula-
Sauerstoffeinsatz: tions must be observed. In addition, we recommend a maxi-
Membrandruckschalter: mum operating pressure of 10 bars, which should not be ex-
Beim Einsatz von Sauerstoff sind die einschlägigen Unfallver- ceeded.
hütungsvorschriften zu beachten. Außerdem empfehlen wir, Piston pressure switch:
einen maximalen Betriebsdruck von 10 bar nicht zu über-
schreiten. Piston pressure switches are not suitable for gaseous media,
particularly oxygen.
Kolbendruckschalter:
Kolbendruckschalter sind für gasförmige Medien, insbesonde- Protection against overpressure:
re für Sauerstoff nicht geeignet. The static overpressure safety is included in the technical data.
Überdrucksicherheit: The overpressure safety corresponds to the hydraulic, pneu-
matic part of the pressure switch. The dynamic rating of the
In den Technischen Daten ist die statische Überdrucksicher- overpressure safety is smaller than 30 to 50%.
heit angegeben. Sie bezieht sich auf den hydraulischen bzw.
pneumatischen Teil des Druckschalters. Der dynamische
Wert ist 30 bis 50 % niedriger.
Technische Daten Technical data
Bemessungsbe- Bemessungsbe- Gebrauchs -kategorie Rated operating Rated operating Utilization

triebsspannung Ue triebsstrom Ie voltage U e current Ie category
250 Volt AC 50/60 Hz 4 Ampere AC12 250 Volt AC 50/60 Hz 4 Amps AC12
250 Volt AC 50/60 Hz 1 Ampere AC14 250 Volt AC 50/60 Hz 1 Amp AC14
30 Volt DC 4 / 4 Ampere DC12 / DC13 30 Volt DC 4 / 4 Amps DC12 / DC13
50 Volt DC 2 / 1 Ampere DC12 / DC13 50 Volt DC 2 / 1 Amp DC12 / DC13
75 Volt DC 1 / 0,5 Ampere DC12 / DC13 75 Volt DC 1 / 0,5 Amp DC12 / DC13
125 Volt DC 0,3 / 0,2 Ampere DC12 / DC13 125 Volt DC 0,3 / 0,2 Amp DC12 / DC13
250 Volt DC 0,25 / 0,2 Ampere DC12 / DC13 250 Volt DC 0,25 / 0,2 Amp DC12 / DC13
Bemessungsisolationsspannung Ui: 300 Volt Rated insulation voltage Ui: 300 volts
Bemessungsstoßspannungsfestigkeit Uimp: 2,5 kV Rated surge capacity Uimp: 2,5 kV
konventioneller thermischer Strom Ithe: 5 Ampere Rated thermal current Ithe: 5 Amps
Schaltüberspannung: < 2,5 kV Switching over voltage: < 2,5 kV
Bemessungsfrequenz: DC und 50 / 60 Hz Rated frequency: DC and 50 / 60 Hz
Nennstrom der Kurzschlusseinrichtung: bis 5 Ampere Rated current of short-circuit protective device: Up to 5 Amps
Bedingter Kurzschlussstrom: < 350 Ampere Rated short-circuit current: < 350 Amps
IP-Schutzart nach EN 60 529:1991: IP65 mit Stecker IP protection to EN 60 529:1991: IP65 with plug
Anzugsdrehmoment der Anschlussschrauben: < 0,35 Nm Tightening torque for terminal screws: < 0,35 Nm
Anschlussquerschnitt: 0,5 bis 1,5 mm² Connection size: 0,5 to 1,5 mm²
-1 -1
Schalthäufigkeit: < 200 min Operating frequency: < 200 per min
Schalthysterese: 10-30%, im Werk Switching hysteresis: 10-30% adjustable by
einstellbar the factory
mechanische Lebensdauer: mechanical life:
6 6
Membranausführung: 10 Schaltspiele Diaphragm type 10 operation cycles
(bei Schaltdrücken bis 40 bar) (at trip pressure up to 40 bars)
6 6
Kolbenausführung: 10 Schaltspiele Piston type 10 operation cycles
Gehäusewerkstoff: verzinkter Stahl (Fe/Zn12cC) Body material: Zic plated steel (Fe/Zn12cC)
Temperaturbeständigkeit: NBR -30°C bis +100°C Temperature range: NBR -30°C to +100°C
EPDM -30°C bis +120°C EPDM -30°C to +120°C
FKM -5°C bis +120°C FKM -5°C to +120°C
Überdrucksicherheit: Over pressure safety:
Membrandruckschalter: 100 bar (0,3…1,5 bar, 1...10 bar) Diaphragm pressure switch: 100 bars (0,3 to 1,5 bar, 1 to 10 bar)
300 bar (1...10 bar m. Endnummer 300 bars (1 to 10 with end number
040, 041, 042, 340, 341, 342 und 040, 041, 042, 340, 341, 342 and
restliche Druckbereiche) residual pressure range)
Kolbendruckschalter: 600 bar Piston pressure switch: 600 bars

B 5925 DE_EN 07.07
3/6
Bedienteile und Anschlüsse Operating controls and connections
Bild 1 Bild 2 Fig. 1 Fig. 2

2 2 4 2 2 4
P P
1 1
3 3
(1) Hydraulischer / Pneum a- (1) Hydraulic / Pneumatic

tischer Anschluss connection
(2) Elektrischer Anschluss (2) Electrical connection
(AMP 6,3x0,8) (AMP 6,3x0,8)
(3) Einstellschraube für den (3) Switching point adjus ting
Schaltpunkt screw
1 1
Einbau Installation
Mechanisch, pneumatisch, hydraulisch: Mechanical / pneumatic / hydraulic:
Drehen Sie den Druckschalter an dem sechskantförmigen With a size 27 open-ended wrench (to DIN 894 or similar),
Ansatz mit einem Maulschlüssel der Schlüsselweite 27 (nach install the pressure switch, by means of the hexagon connec-
DIN 894 o.ä.) in den vorgesehenen Druckanschluss (An- tor, in the corresponding pressure socket (tightening torque
zugsdrehmomente siehe nachfolgende Tabelle). G1/4”: 50 Nm).
? Zum Abdichten des Systems verwenden Sie einen Standard-

Kupferdichtring mit den entsprechenden Abmessungen. ? For sealing the system use a standard copper gasket of the
appropriate dimensions.
Anschlussgewinde Drehmoment Connecting thread Torque

M10x1keg. und Einschrauben bis System abge- M10x1keg. and Tighten until system is hermetically
NPT1/8“ dichtet ist NPT1/8“ sealed
M10x1zyl. 35 Nm M10x1 straight 35 Nm
Restliche 50 Nm Others 50 Nm
Elektrisch: Electrical:
Verkabeln Sie den Druckschalter gemäß dem Schaltbild (Bild Connect up the pressure switch in accordance with the circuit
2). diagram (Fig. 2).
? Verwenden Sie die Gerätesteckdose 1-1-80-652-002 (nicht

im Lieferumfang enthalten!). ? Use a connector type 1-1-80-652-002 (not include in the deliv-
ery specification).

B 5925 DE_EN 07.07
4/6
Inbetriebnahme Entry into service

1. Verkabeln Sie die elektrischen Anschlüsse 1 und 4 mit 1. Using a continuity tester, wire up the electrical connections
einem Durchgangsprüfer (Bild 2). 1 and 4 (Fig. 2).
? Bei Verwendung einer Prüflampe als Durchgangsprüfer:

Achten Sie auf die max. zulässige Schaltleistung (siehe
technische Daten).
? If using a testing lamp as a continuity tester, observe the maxi-
mum permissible switching capacity (see technical data)
2. First, screw in the adjusting screw (3) as far as it will go. To
2. Drehen Sie die Einstellschraube (3) zunächst ganz ein. adjust the pressure switch use a screwdriver with a 6,3 mm
Verwenden Sie zum Einstellen des Druckschalters einen wide blade.
?
Schraubendreher mit 6,3 mm Klingenbreite.
Beachten Sie bitte, dass die Einstellschraube (3) nur beim
Eindrehen einen Anschlag besitzt.
? Take care to ensure that the adjusting screw (3) dose not seize
at any point other than when it is fully tightened down.
3. Adjust the pressure switch to the desired actuating pressure
3. Beaufschlagen Sie den Druckschalter mit dem gewünsch- (a test pressure gauge is required).
ten Schaltdruck (Kontrollmanometer erforderlich). 4. Ease off the adjusting screw (3) to a sufficient extent to
4. Drehen Sie die Einstellschraube (3) so weit heraus, bis cause the pressure switch to trip (continuity tester reacts).
der Druckschalter umschaltet (Durchgangsprüfer rea- 5. If necessary. adjust the trip pressure setting by turning the
giert). adjusting screw (3).
5. Korrigieren Sie gegebenenfalls den Schaltdruck durch When putting the pressure switch into service, please observe
Verdrehen der Einstellschraube (3).
Bei der Inbetriebnahme des Druckschalters beachten Sie
! the applicable safety regulations laid down by the governing
bodies in the country of use.
bitte die entsprechenden Sicherheitsvorschriften der Berufs-
! The adjustment of Hysteresis can only carried out in the factory.
genossenschaften oder die entsprechenden nationalen
Bestimmungen. ? If this is inexpertly undertaken, damage may be caused to the
pressure switch.
? Die Einstellung der Hysterese ist nur werkseitig durchführ-

bar. Bei unsachgemäßer Vorgehensweise kann der Druck-
schalter beschädigt werden.
Ausbau Removing the pressure switch
Beachten Sie folgende wichtige Punkte beim Ausbau des When removing the pressure switch, observe the following
Druckschalters: important instructions:
• Das Drucksystem, aus dem der Druckschalter ausgebaut • The pressurized system from which the pressure switch is
werden soll, muss sich in drucklosem Zustand befinden. intended to be removed must be entirely of pressure.
• Es müssen alle relevanten Sicherheitsbestimmungen • All the relevant safety regulations must be observed.
beachtet werden. • Use a size 27 open-ended wrench (to DIN 894 or similar), to
• Drehen Sie den Druckschalter mit einem Maulschlüssel remove the pressure switch.
der Schlüsselweite 27 (nach DIN 894 o.ä.) aus dem
Druckanschluss.
Zeichenerklärung Key to drawings:

Hinweis,
!
Ach-
tung ? Bemer-
kung
Recyc-
ling
Ge-
fahr ! Caution
? Note
Recyc-
ling
Dan-
ger
Art.-Nr.: 1-1-80-628-014_2 06 / 02 Art.-No.: 1-1-80-628-014_2 06 / 02

B 5925 DE_EN 07.07
5/6
Bedienungsanleitung Operating instructions

Für künftige Verwendung aufbewahren Please keep carefully for future use
Gerätesteckdose Connector
1-1-80-652-002 D 1-1-80-652-002 GB
Einbau und Inbetriebnahme sind nach dieser Bedienungsanleitung Installation and commissioning must be carried out in accordance with
und nur von autorisiertem Fachpersonal vorzunehmen these operating Instructions and by authorized, qualified personnel
only.
Robert-Scheuffele GmbH & Co. KG Robert-Scheuffele GmbH & Co. KG

Keplerstraße 12-14 Keplerstraße 12-14
D-74321 Bietigheim-Bissingen D-74321 Bietigheim-Bissingen
Telefon (07142) 597-0 Telephone (07142) 597-0
Telefax (07142) 597-19 Telecopy (07142) 597-19
www.suco.de www.suco.de
E-Mail: info@suco.de e-mail: info@suco.de
Vorraussetzungen für den Produkteinsatz Conditions governing the use of the product
Allgemeine, stets zu beachtende Hinweise für den ordnungs- The following general instructions are to be observed at all
gemäßen und sicheren Einsatz der Gerätesteckdose: times to ensure the correct, safe use of the connector:
? • Beachten Sie die Vorschriften der Berufsgenossenschaf-

ten, des Technischen Überwachungsvereins (TÜV) oder
die entsprechenden nationalen Bestimmungen.
? • Observe the applicable safety regulations laid down by the
regulatory bodies in the country of use.
• Observe without fail the warning notices and other instruc-
• Beachten Sie unbedingt die Warnungen und Hinweise in tions laid down in the operating instructions.
der Bedienungsanleitung. • Remove all items providing protection in transit such as
• Entfernen Sie die alle Transportvorkehrungen wie Schutz- foils, caps or cartons.
folien, Kappen oder Kartonagen. • Disposal of the above-named materials in recycling con-
• Die Entsorgung der einzelnen Werkstoffe in Recycling- tainers is permitted.
Sammelbehältern ist möglich.
Einzelteile und Anschlüsse Operating controls and connections
Bild 1 Fig. 1
Codiernut location groove
1 1 5
5
2 2
3 3
4 4
(1) Befestigungsschraube Bild 2 (1) Mounting screw Fig. 2

(2) Dichtung 2 4
(2) Seal 2 4
(3) Steckergehäuse P (3) Plug housing P

1 1
(4) Anschlussplatte (4) Terminal board
(5) PG-Verschraubung (5) Pg screw coupling
Bedienungsanleitung 1-1-80-652-002_1 Seite 1 von 1

B 5925 DE_EN 07.07
6/6
Verkabelung der Gerätesteckdose Wiring up the connector

Stellen Sie sicher, dass das Kabel Take care to ensure that the cable is laid in such a way that it
− quetschfrei, is not:
− knickfrei, - pinched
− dehnungsfrei verlegt ist. - kinked
Verkabelung der Gerätesteckdose: - under tension.
Wiring up the connector:
1.Lösen Sie die Befestigungsschraube (1) und ziehen diese
am Kopfende ganz heraus, achten Sie dabei auf den Fiber- 1. Remove the mounting screw (1) from the head end, taking
glas-Dichtring (2) (gut aufbewahren !) care not to damage the seal (2) (set aside carefully for fu-
2.Demontieren Sie die nun gelöste Anschlussplatte (4), in den ture use).
Sie diese mit einem Schraubendreher von oben (Bohrung 2. Now remove the loose terminal board (4) by pushing out
der Befestigungsschraube (1)) her heraus drücken, beim with a screwdriver inserted from above through the mount-
Herausdrücken ist der Widerstand des Dichtringes zu über- ing screw (1) hole. In this process it is necessary to over-
w inden. come the resistance exerted by the seal.
3.Schließen Sie die Kabel (max. Leitungsquerschnitt 1,5 mm²) 3. Connect the cable (max. lead cross-section 1,5 mm²) to the
an den dafür vorgesehenen Schraubklemmen an (Bild 2). screw terminal provided (Fig. 2).
4.Anschlussplatte (4) wieder in das Steckergehäuse (3) 4. Reinstall the terminal board (4) in the plug housing (3),
schieben und Befestigungsschraube (1) mit Fiberglas- install the mounting screw (1) with seal (2) and tighten se-
Dichtring (2) montieren und festschrauben. curely.
Achten Sie bei der Montage der Gerätesteckdose auf den
ordnungsgemäßen Sitz der Fiberglas-Dichtung (2) und auf
! Take care to ensure that the profiled seal (2) and Pg screw
coupling (5) are correctly installed, otherwise the conditions
! eine sachgemäße Montage der Pg-Verschraubung (5), da specified for protection category IP 65 will not be met.
sonst die Schutzart IP65 nicht erreicht werden kann.
Montage der Gerätesteckdose Installing the connector
? Bei der Montage beachten Sie bitte, dass die Codiernut mit
der Codiernase des Druckschalters übereinstimmt.
Schieben Sie die Gerätesteckdose soweit auf den Druck-
? During installation, take care that the locating groove engages
the locating lug on the pressure switch. Push the connector
onto the pressure switch until it locks in place.
schalter, bis diese im Druckschalter einrastet.
Technische Daten Technical data
Bemessungsisolationsspannung Ui: 300 Volt Rated insulation voltage Ui: 300 volts
IP-Schutzart nach EN 60529:1991: IP 65 IP protection to EN 60529:1991: IP 65
Anzugsdrehmoment der Anschlussschrauben: < 0,35 Nm Tightening torque for terminal screws: < 0,35 Nm
Anschlussquerschnitt: 0,5 bis 1,5 mm² Connection size: 0,5 to 1,5 mm²
Zeichenerklärung Key to drawings:
! Achtung
? Hinweis, Be-
merkung
Recycling
! Caution
? Note Recycling
Art.-Nr.: 1-1-80-628-015_2 9 / 97 Art.-No.: 1-1-80-628-015_2 9 / 97
Bedienungsanleitung 1-1-80-652-002_1 Seite 2 von 2

B 5926 EN 07.07
1/6
H Please read these operating instructions before commissioning

the instrument. Keep these operating instructions in a place
which is accessible to all users at all times. Please assist us to
improve these operating instructions, where necessary. Your
comments will be appreciated.
Phone +49 661 6003-0
Fax +49 661 6003-607
H
ATHs-SW-..
All necessary settings and, where appropriate, alterations inside
the instrument are described in these operating instructions.
However, if any difficulties should still arise during start-up,
please do not carry out any manipulations on the unit which are
not permitted. You could endanger your rights under the
instrument warranty! Please contact the nearest subsidiary or
the head office in such a case.
JUMO GmbH & Co. KG ATHf-SW-..

Street address:
Moltkestraße 13 - 31
36039 Fulda, Germany
Delivery address:
Mackenrodtstraße 14
Postal address:
Phone: +49 661 6003-0
Fax: +49 661 6003-607
e-mail: mail@jumo.net
Internet: www.jumo.net Surface-
JUMO Instrument Co. Ltd.
JUMO House mounting
Temple Bank, Riverway
Harlow, Essex CM20 2TT, UK
Phone: +44 1279 635533
Thermostats
Fax: +44 1279 635262 ATH.-SW-... Series
e-mail: sales@jumo.co.uk
Internet: www.jumo.co.uk
JUMO Process Control, Inc.

8 Technology Boulevard
Canastota, NY 13032, USA
B 60.3035.0
Phone: 315-697-JUMO
1-800-554-JUMO
Operating
Fax: 315-697-5867
e-mail: info@jumo.us
Internet: www.jumo.us
Instructions
04.07/00408320
1 Introduction / Application 2 Instrument identification

ATH-SW series surface-mounting thermostats are approved as: Type designation
■ Temperature monitors (TW)
■ Protection temperature limiters (STB), ATH . -SW /
■ Safety temperature monitors STW (STB)
ATH Thermostat, surface-mounting, with microswitch
■ Type examination as per:
- DIN 3440 s with screw-in pocket
- Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC attached to housing (rigid stem)
(all types except ATH.-SW-2 and ATH.-SW-22) (pocket U or UZ)
f with capillary
-SW Housing in die-cast aluminium,
Safety notes protected against dust and water jets, IP65 rating
Physical and toxicological properties of the substances that may escape in
the event of a system fracture: -20 Temperature monitor (TW),
with changeover contact (SPDT)
End of scale Danger- Fire and Water Toxicological data
ous explosion hazard conta- -20 Safety temperature monitor STW (STB),
reactions Ignition Explosion mination irri- danger toxic with changeover contact (SPDT)
temp. limit tant to health -70 Protection temperature limiter (STB),
°C % v/v
with break contact (SPST-NC) and lock-out
liquid-filled
≥ +200°C < +200°C no +355°C 0.6 - 8 yes yes 1
no
/au gold-plated switch contacts
≥ +200°C ≤ +350°C no +490°C -- yes yes 1 no
gas-filled Types Single thermostats Twin thermostats
≥ +400°C ≤ +500°C no
ATH.-SW-2 ATH.-SW-22
H 1 Filling liquid may escape in the event of a system fracture. At present
there is no restrictive statement from the health authorities concerning any
ATH.-SW-2020
danger to health over short periods and at low concentration, e.g. after a ATH.-SW-2070
fracture of the measuring system. ATH.-SW-7070
Nameplate
(example) (1)
( 1 ) Type/ Max. housing temp./ (2)
Protection (3)
( 2 ) Order code
( 3 ) Control range/Rating/
Sales No./ Serial number
( 4 ) Approval mark / Connection
diagram (4)
B 5926 EN 07.07
2/6
3 Mounting
General
Capillary / Temperature probe / Pocket Opening the housing
General
■ Cutting through or kinking the capillary of the surface-mounting
thermostat will lead to permanent instrument failure ! (1) (1)
■ Minimum permissible bending radius of the capillary is 5 mm.
■ The temperature probe must be mounted in a JUMO pocket, otherwise
the approval of the surface-mounting thermostat becomes invalid.
■ The temperature probe must be completely immersed in the medium to be
measured.
■ For operation in air, a process connection without pocket must be chosen.
(1) (1)
■ To ensure their overall accuracy, the thermostats must only be used
together with the pockets supplied by the factory (diameter D = 8,
10 mm).
■ Pockets with diameter D = 10 mm may only be fitted with probes with (2)
diameter d = 8 mm. (3)
■ Fitting several probes into a common pocket is only permitted with 2 or 3
plain probes 6 mm dia. and pockets 15 x 0.75 mm.
■ When fitting 2 probes in a common pocket, the factory-supplied spring
clip must be fitted in the pocket.
■ In the case of pockets U, US, UZ, UZS, E, ES and EZS in materials
St 35.8I/16Mo 3, the permissible operating life above 420°C is limited to
200,000 hours. The requirements of TRD 508 must be observed for
operation in this range.
1. Remove the 4 cover screws ( 1 )
2. Remove the housing top ( 2 )
Fixing the surface-mounting thermostat
Nominal position (NL)
to DIN 16 257, NL 0 — NL 90 (other NL on request) H Make sure that the seal ( 3 ) is seated correctly when assembling.
Dimensions
Thermostats with rigid stem ATHs-SW-.. Thermostats with capillary ATHf-SW-..
Code s (rigid stem) Code f (with capillary)
The housing spigot is secured in the enlarged open end of the pocket by a Switch head mounting by 4 screws through housing base,
fixing screw. capillary exit on the side of housing
ATHs-SW-.., ATHf-SW-..,
with pocket U with plain
cylindrical
probe A,
no pocket
ATHs-SW-..,
with pocket UZS
ATHf-SW-..,
with pocket U
( A ) M 20x1.5 screw gland

SW = hex
B 5926 EN 07.07
3/6
Approved probes or pockets Permissible loading on the pocket
A U SW
UO
Pockets U, US, UZ, UZS, E, ES and EZS
A The values given below refer to the maximum loading on the probe
L1
mounting concerned. The maximum pressure which can be sealed
G
depends on the mounting conditions and may possibly be lower.
S
L
Steel pocket
Materials
_15
Tube: St 35.8 I
Ød ØD Screw-in nipple up to 300°C: 9 SMnPb.28 K
Screw-in nipple up to 450°C: 16 Mo 3 (turned groove)
Plain cylindrical probe Screw-in pocket with Screw-in pocket, with Weld-in nipple: 16 Mo 3 (no turned groove)
screw-in spigot screw-in spigot Form
Form A to A to DIN 3852/2, with
DIN 3852/2, fixing screw.
with fixing screw. Loading
US ES
Temper- Tube diameter D
Ø 25
ature 8 x 0.75 mm
or conical 10 x 0.75 mm 15 x 0.75 mm
SW
Max. permissible pressure

27
Ø30
100°C 89 bar 72 bar 48 bar
Ø 12
D2 150°C 83 bar 67 bar 45 bar
200°C 78 bar 63 bar 42 bar
S
Ø 12
300°C 59 bar 47 bar 32 bar

S
350°C 50 bar 40 bar 27 bar

400°C 46 bar 37 bar 25 bar
ØD Ø8
D Ø8
450°C 24 bar 19 bar 13 bar
Weld-in pocket For code f, weld-in pocket, with welding
with fixing screw and clip. shoulder, pocket secured with union nut,
probe form C.
UZ UZS UZO EZS Permissible incident flow velocity
Temperature: +200°C
Thermal medium: air ( 1 ), water, oil ( 2 )
~91
Ø 90 Tube diameter D: 08 mm
10 mm
.............. 15 mm
Ø 30
Permissible incident flow velocity (m/sec) at max. permitted pressure loading

and different immersion tube lengths S
S
Screw-in pocket with Weld-in pocket For code s, probe Weld-in pocket, with a
fixing screw and with welding shoulder; temperatures above G3/4 (3/4" pipe)
extension. fixing screw and +150°C, pocket open thread on instrument
extension. at end, with screw-in and extension, for
spigot Form A to thermostats with a Air (1)
DIN 3852/2, with rigid stem and probe
fixing screw and temperatures above Water, oil (2)
extension. +150°C.
E B C D
Immersion tube length (mm)
A
SW
SW
SW
SW The values given below refer to the maximum loading on the probe
mounting concerned. The maximum pressure which can be sealed
L1
depends on the mounting conditions and may possibly be lower.

L1
L1
G G
L1
G
G
S
Immersion tube length

S
200 mm: Material: steel

~15
L
~15
~15
Temperature: +200°C
d d
Thermal medium: air ( 1 ), water, oil ( 2 )
D d
Tube diameter D: 08 mm
For code f, screw-in Probe form C Plain cylindrical probe Plain cylindrical
pocket secured with with loose nipple with shoulder and probe, threaded 10 mm
union nut, probe form threaded at both union nut, shoulder connector brazed or
C. With screw-in ends. brazed or welded to welded to capillary. .............. 15 mm
spigot Form A to capillary.
DIN 3852/2.
Permissible incident flow velocity (m/sec) at max. permitted pressure loading
Q V H and different immersion tube temperatures t
10
( A ) Washer Air (1)

( B ) Seal
L1
G = thread
L
SW = hex
~10
d
D
Water, oil (2)

For code f, double For code f, sealing Coiled probe
thread for retrofitting gland for retrofitting
on capillary. on capillary.
Max. probe Max. probe
temperature +200°C. temperature +200°C. Temperature °C
B 5926 EN 07.07
4/6
Stainless steel pocket 4 Installation
Material Tube and nipple: X 6 CrNiMoTl 17 122 Regulations and notes
Temperature Tube diameter D
8 x 0.75 mm
or conical
10 x 0.75 mm 15 x 0.75 mm V ■ The electrical connection must only be carried out by qualified
personnel.
■ The choice of cable, the installation and the electrical connection
Max. permissible pressure must conform to the requirements of VDE 0100 “Regulations on the
100°C 92 bar 74 bar 50 bar Installation of Power Circuits with Nominal Voltages below 1000 V”
150°C 88 bar 71 bar 48 bar or the appropriate local regulations.
■ If contact with live parts is possible while working on the device, it
200°C 83 bar 67 bar 45 bar must be completely disconnected from the electrical supply.
300°C 72 bar 58 bar 39 bar ■ Earth the instrument at the PE terminal to the protective earth
400°C 67 bar 54 bar 36 bar conductor. This cable must have at least the same cross-section as
Permissible incident flow velocity: on request used for the supply cables. Earthing cables must be wired in a star
configuration to a common earth point that is connected to the
protective earth conductor of the electrical supply. Do not loop
Brass pocket earthing cables, i.e. do not run them from one instrument to
another.
Material Tube and nipple: CuZn
■ Apart from faulty installation, incorrect settings on the thermostat
Temperature Tube diameter D may also affect the proper functioning of the subsequent process or
8 x 0.75 mm 10 x 0.75 mm 15 x 0.75 mm lead to damage. Setting up must therefore be restricted to qualified
personnel. Please observe the relevant safety regulations for such
Max. permissible pressure matters.
100°C 50 bar 40 bar 27 bar
150°C 48 bar 39 bar 26 bar
Permissible incident flow velocity: on request
Electrical connection
Probe mountings B, C, D H The thermostat conforms to Protection Class I.
(probe in direct contact with medium)
Nipple material
CuZn 39 9 SMnPb.28K X 6 CrNiMoTi 17 122
1. Pull off touch guard.
Max. temperature 2. Pass the cable (5 to 10 mm cable dia.)
200°C 300°C 400°C through the screw gland ( A ).
Probe material dia. mm Thermostat function Screw terminal for up to 2.5 mm2 conductor cross-section.
3. Make connection at the terminals (1, 2 and 4)
TW STB, STW (STB) as shown in the corresponding connection diagram.
Cu-DHP 04 06 bar 2 bar 4. Connect protective earth conductor to the PE terminal.
05 05 bar 5. Clip touch guard back on.
06 04 bar 6. The reset button ( B ) must be free to move (on STB).
07 03 bar
08 03 bar
09 03 bar
10 03 bar
1.4571 (V4A); St 35 04 - 10 10 bar 2 bar 1 1 (B)
Process connections A, H, UO, UZO, Q and V must only be used in
pressure-free media. 2
4 2
Mounting the probe

H The temperature probe (2) must be immersed in the medium for its
entire length, otherwise there will be appreciable deviations from the
switching point.
(A)
On thermostats with capillary, probe H The connection is suitable for fixed wiring. Cable entry is without fixed
strain relief. Attachment type X (no special tools).
mountings U and US, the temperature
probe is held in position by sliding a
clamping clip over the capillary and Cu capillary with protective earth conductor function !
clamping it with a screw in the enlarged
open end of the pocket.
With probe mountings B, C, D, E, ES, Q
V With CrNi capillaries “longer than 1000 mm”, the users themselves are
responsible for taking the necessary protective measures against
and V, the probe is secured ex-factory electric shock.
by the fitting attached to the capillary.
(1)
( 1 ) Capillary
( 2 ) Temperature probe
( 3 ) Pocket
( 4 ) Spring clip
(2)
(3)
(4)
B 5926 EN 07.07
5/6
Connection diagrams 5 Setpoint/Limit setting
Single thermostats
TW, STW (STB) and STB
1. Open the housing
2. Set the limit on the setpoint spindle ( 5 ), using a screwdriver.
3. Close the housing.
( 1 ) Upper stop
( 2 ) Setpoint marker
( 3 ) Lower stop
( 4 ) Scale graduation
TW, STW (STB) with STB with break ( 5 ) Setpoint spindle
changeover contact contact (SPST-NC)
(SPDT) and lock-out
Twin thermostat
Resetting the STB

After the temperature has dropped by about 10% of span below the set limit
(safe temperature limit), the microswitch can be reset.
1. Open the housing
2. Press the reset knob ( B )
until the microswitch is reset.
System I and II: 3. Close the housing.
with changeover contact (SPDT) 1 1
Switching action: TW, STW (B)

2
4 2
System I: with changeover contact System I and II:

(SPDT) with break contact (SPST-NC) and
Switching action: TW, STW lock-out Self-monitoring
System II: with break contact Switching action: STB Response to a fracture of the measuring system
(SPST-NC) and lock-out
Switching action: STB
H On the STB and STW (STB), the circuit stays open permanently in the
event of a fracture of the measuring system (leakage).
On the STB, the microswitch is additionally locked out.
Response to low temperature

Closing the housing
1. Make sure that the plastic seal ( 3 ) in the housing base ( 2 )
H Ifcircuit
the probe temperature falls below the minimum value of -20°C, the
is opened (STW (STB) and STB).
is seated correctly. After the temperature has risen above the minimum probe
2. Place the housing top ( 2 ) onto the base ( 4 ). temperature, the STB must be reset manually.
The STW resets itself automatically.
(1) (1) Use of the STW (STB) as STB
V The lock-out facility to DIN 3440 must be ensured by the subsequent

circuit. This circuit must comply with VDE 0116.
(1) (1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
3. Tighten the cover screws ( 1 ).

B 5926 EN 07.07
6/6
6 Technical data 7 Appendix
Mode of operation
to EN 60730-1 and EN 60730-2-9
TW 2 BL
STW(STB) 2 BKLP
STB 2 BFKLP
Explanation of code:
1 mode of operation, type 1
2 mode of operation, type 2
B automatic mode of operation with micro-disconnection
F can only be reset with tools
K with probe break protection
L no auxiliary power required
P mode of operation, type 2, verified through declared
temperature cycling
Permissible ambient temperature in operation

Capillary Switch head for end of scale
TW STW (STB), STB
max. +80°C +80°C +80°C
min. -40°C -40°C +80°C <200°C
-20°C -20°C +80°C ≥200°C ≤350°C
-40°C -40°C +80°C > 350°C ≤ 500°C
Permissible probe temperature: max. end of scale +15%
Permissible storage temperature: max. 50°C, min. -50°C
Switching point accuracy

in % of scale span,
referred to setpoint or limit value at TA +22°C
+0
TW, STB, STW (STB) in upper third of scale -5 %
at start of scale +0
-10%
Mean ambient temperature effect

in % of scale span, referred to the limit value.
A deviation of the ambient temperature at the thermostat head and/or the
capillary from the +22°C calibration ambient temperature produces a shift in
the switching point:
higher ambient temperature = lower switching point
lower ambient temperature = higher switching point
Surface-mounting thermostats with end of scale
<+200°C ≥ +200°C ≤ +350°C
TW STB/STW (STB) TW STB/STW (STB)
effect due to switch head
0.08% per °C 0.17% per °C 0.06% per °C 0.13% per °C
effect due to capillary (per meter)
0.047 % per °C 0.054 % per °C 0.09 % per °C 0.11 % per °C
Surface-mounting thermostats with end of scale
≥ +350°C ≤ +500°C
TW STB/STW (STB)
effect due to switch head
0.14% per °C 0.12% per °C
effect due to capillary (per meter)
0.04 % per °C 0.03 % per °C
Max. permissible contact rating

(supplementary information to details on nameplate)
10(2) A, 230 V AC +10%, p.f. = 1(0.6)
0.25 A, 230 V DC +10%
or
6(1.2) A, 230 V AC +10%, p.f. = 1(0.6)
for gold-plated microswitch, code /au
0.1 A, 24 V AC/DC
Contact reliability
To ensure maximum switching reliability, we recommend a minimum loading
of:
20 mA, 24 V AC/DC, with silver contacts (standard)
10 mA, 10 V AC/DC, with gold-plated contacts (code /au)
Rated surge voltage

1500 V (via the switching contacts: 400 V)
Overvoltage category II
Required fusing, see max. contact rating
Operating medium
water, oil, air, superheated steam
Time constant t0.632

in water in oil in air / superheated
≤ 45 sec ≤ 60 sec
steam
≤ 120 sec
H Maintenance / Fault
The thermostats require no maintenance. In the event of a fault, please
return the instrument to the supplier with full details of the fault.
Enclosure protection The staff of our technical offices, agencies or subsidiaries are always
EN 60 529 - IP65, operation under normal conditions pleased to help you with advice and service.
B 5922 EN 12.07
1/16
Operating Instructions
DOUBLE FILTER
type series 4.225
last updated: 2007-07
rev.: FRE-01
B 5922 EN 12.07
2/16
fluidtech double filter 4.225
Table Of Contents
1 DESCRIPTION OF THE FILTER........................................ 3
1.1 Intended Use................................................................................... 3
1.2 Technical data ................................................................................ 3
1.3 Identification marking.................................................................... 3
1.4 Scope of delivery ........................................................................... 3
2 DESIGN FEATURES ......................................................... 4

2.1 Operating Conditions .................................................................... 4
3 TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE ............................... 4
4 INSTALLATION ................................................................. 5
4.1 Setup ............................................................................................... 5
4.2 Mounting and connecting the filter.............................................. 5
5 STARTING UP ................................................................... 6
5.1 Troubleshooting ............................................................................ 8
6 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE........................................ 9

6.1 Replacing the filter elements........................................................ 9
6.2 Cleaning of filter elements.......................................................... 10
6.3 Maintenance ................................................................................. 11
7 ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTATION (S. SUPPLEMENTS) ..11
FRIEDRICHS FILTERSYSTEME GMBH

P.O. Box 1248 · 41846 Wassenberg • Phone +49/2432/96600 • FAX +49/2432/966090
2
B 5922 EN 12.07
3/16
1 Description of the filter
1.1 Intended Use

The filter has been designed, made and tested in accordance with the European Pressure
Equipment Directive 97/23/EC and the German Federal Equipment Safety Act (“Gerätesi-
cherheitsgesetz”).
The intended use of the filter is the elimination of dirt particles from the respective medium.
Double / change-over filters are designed for continuous filtration. Normally, one chamber is
in operation, while the other one is in standby mode (i.e. contains a clean filter element and
is filled with fluid). When the filter element of the active chamber starts clogging due to dirt
accumulation, the fluid flow can be switched over manually to pass through the other cham-
ber.
Due to an intersecting change-over between both filter chambers, an uninterrupted flow is

ensured.
1.2 Technical data

Designation: Double- / Changeover Filter
(Opposed Chamber Design)
Type series: 4.225
Nominal Size of Connection : DN 15/20 mm

Dimensions: see supplement
Connections: see supplement
Material: see supplement
1.3 Identification marking

Kind of marking: type plate
Position of type plate: filter casing
Manufacturer: FRIEDRICHS FILTERSYSTEME GMBH

Serial number; year of manufacture: stamped / engraved on type plate
1.4 Scope of delivery

Filter with 2 installed filter elements; connecting flanges with gaskets; change-over lever;
documentation

3
B 5922 EN 12.07
4/16
2 Design features
2.1 Operating Conditions

Designation of fluid: non-corrosive fluid, e.g. lubricating oil (*)
Operating temperature [°C]: -10 … 120
Max. operating pressure [bar]: 16

Ambient temperature min./max. [°C]: 5 … 120
(*) Fitness for other fluids depends on materials and coatings chosen for a particular filter (see order confirmation
for details). Use with other fluids than explicitly designated require consultation of the manufacturer for technical
release!
3 Transportation and storage

Appropriate packing has to be chosen, ensuring that no deformations or other damages of
any parts or sealing surfaces occur; high forces, impact or selective load on components can
result in deformations or damages!
Transportation and storage is not allowed at temperatures below freezing point (0 °C).
All openings like flanges and connections must be covered appropriately to prevent contami-
nation of the filter inside. As necessary, desiccant has to be placed with the filter for storage
in humid environment.
Attention: Take care not to damage any sealing surfaces!

4
B 5922 EN 12.07
5/16
4 Installation
4.1 Setup
Double filters must be placed and mounted in a such way that
• they are accessible from all sides for required surveys and inspections (including
reading-off of type plate)
• the filters and equipment can be operated and maintained from a safe position.
Setup must make sure that no inadmissible displacements, inclinations or excessive vibration
loads on the filter are induced by
• installation itself;
• dead weight of the filter;
• external forces.
4.2 Mounting and connecting the filter

Type series 4.225 double filters can be mounted in different positions (see supplement).
However, accessibility and ease of operation and maintenance should be considered when
choosing installation position.
Connection to surrounding installation is established via provided adaptor flanges (serve as

fixture for filter at the same time). Attachment of the flanges to on-site pipework is done either
with screwed pipe joints or by welding. The flanges are made of weldable steel.
To weld connection flanges and on-site pipework, carry out the following steps:
• dismount flanges with gaskets from filter; remove gaskets from flanges
• weld flanges to on-site pipework in such a way that mounting the filter is possible
without inducing any stress in the pipework
• welding is to be carried out according to applicable welding regulations and standards
• finally, filter and gaskets must be mounted stress-free between the fixed flanges

5
B 5922 EN 12.07
6/16
5 Starting up
Putting the filter into operation is not allowed until
• the filter is mounted according to this manual and applicable rules
• appropriate delimiting equipment is integrated in the installation and correctly set up
• the filter has been inspected to be in proper condition regarding installation, setting up
conditions and safe functioning.
The operator of the plant has to arrange for and carry out the pre-startup inspection with re-
spect to applicable regulations.
Type series 4.225 double filters are robust constructions and as such do not require any par-
ticular measures of precaution. However, the following hints should be followed:
• attach the handle of the change-over lever to the square-end of the rotary slide valve
as indicated in the illustration below
illustration 5-1: The handle (1) of the change-over lever must be aligned with the notch (2) of
the rotary slide valve to ensure that the handle always points on the active chamber
When handle is installed correctly, the pointer (3) indicates the actual flow scheme printed on
the type plate.
• Before starting up, the whole installation should be flushed. This eliminates potential
installation dirt contaminations that could cause trouble or malfunction. Additionally

6
B 5922 EN 12.07
7/16
this approach prevents rapid clogging at start-up and subsequent need for filter ele-
ment replacement / cleaning.
• Upon start-up, the filter chambers must be vented by opening (loosening) the upper
vent plug. Wait for fluid starting to leak and close (tighten) the vent plug again.
• Normally, operation is started in “one-chamber mode” in order to allow for an immedi-

ate change-over to the reserve chamber in case of rapid clogging. This can happen
due to potentially increased dirt loads on the filter element during start of operation.
• As an exception, the simultaneous use of both filter chambers is possible. This “dou-
blechamber operation mode” decreases high pressure drops observed with extremely
viscous liquids, which can happen e.g. during cold start at very low temperature. For
parallel operation of both chambers, turn the rotary slide valve to neutral position.
Immediately after start-up, change back to “one chamber operation mode”. Clean or
replace the filter element of the now bypassed chamber (see section 6.2: Cleaning of
filter elements) to have a clean filter element available as backup.

7
B 5922 EN 12.07
8/16
5.1 Troubleshooting
Leakage
• defective o-ring gaskets in hoods or flanges

=> replace as necessary
• if applicable: leaks in screwed pipe connections

=> tighten screw connections or seal up connections
• leaking vent plug or drain plug

=> replace leaking
Differential pressure too high during start-up
• fluid’s viscosity is temperature-dependant

=> see section 5: Starting up
• unsuitable choice of „differential pressure range“ (not matching viscosity of fluid)

=> change measuring range of differential pressure indicatore (see supplement)
Differential pressure too high in operation
• filter elements clogged

=> clean filter elements (see section 6.2: Cleaning of filter elements)

8
B 5922 EN 12.07
9/16
6 Service and Maintenance
6.1 Replacing the filter elements

As a result of clogging of the filter elements during operation, the filter pressure drop in-
creases over time. Our differential pressure indicators “deltaP®” type series 5.01 or 5.02 pro-
vide for easy and reliable monitoring.
When an installation-specific differential pressure is reached (marked in the display of the

deltaP® indicator) the clogged filter element of the active chamber must be cleaned (section
6.2: Cleaning of filter elements). For this, the respective chamber must be put out of opera-
tion (change-over lever indicates active chamber, see schematic illustration printed on type
plate)
The filter is a pressure vessel and as such to be handled with precaution.
Activate the stand-by chamber:
• first, slowly turn the change-over lever from one stop position to the other
• then, remove air from the chamber if necessary: open vent plug (loosen a few turns)
until fluid starts leaking, then close (tighten) it again.
The chamber put out of operation must be emptied completely by first opening the vent plug
(loosen a few turns – this ensures the chamber gets depressurised) and then opening the
drain plug. Use a vessel with sufficient capacity to collect the discharged fluid.
Using this discharge procedure, a carryover of polluted fluid from the “dirty” chamber to the
clean part of the filter is avoided. Such polluted fluid contains high amounts of filtered out
particles. Generally, contamination of the clean side must strictly be avoided.
The filter hood can be taken off after the 4 hexagon nuts have been unscrewed. The filter
element can then be dismounted from its fit, cleaned and re-inserted or replaced by another
clean element (see also section 6.3: Maintenance). Thereafter, the chamber can be closed
again and remains in stand-by operation.
Never remount an empty filter hood – always insert a clean, ready-for-operation fil-
ter element!
Otherwise, the empty chamber could accidentally be activated, letting the fluid pass without
filtration, so downstream system components can be damaged by dirt particles.

9
B 5922 EN 12.07
10/16
6.2 Cleaning of filter elements

The filter elements are passed through from outside to inside by the fluid, so the dirt accumu-
lates on the outside of the wire mesh.
Filter elements clogged with dirt particles must be rinsed in uncontaminated cleaning fluid.
When cleaning manually, close the open end of the filter element in oder to prevent a carry-
over of dissolved dirt particles from the dirt side (outside) to the clean side (inside).
● For effective manual cleaning, we recommend a special cleaning tool (rotating noz-
zle) which flushes the element from inside to outside with cleaning fluid.
● To clean the filter element without any special tools, first soak the element extensively
in cleaning fluid until incrustations get soft. Subsequently, blow clean, pressurised air
from inside to outside.
● Nearly fully automated and reliable cleaning is possible with dedicated cleaning units.
Choice of the appropriate detergent depends on the kind of liquid to be filtered. Petroleum
ether (benzine) is suitable for lubricating oil. Specialised detergents as well as equipment for
cleaning of metallic filters can be obtained from Friedrichs Filtersysteme GmbH.

10
B 5922 EN 12.07
11/16
6.3 Maintenance
The filter unit must be maintained by competent personnel at regular intervals to ensure leak
tightness and proper filtration results in the long run, despite mechanical, chemical and ther-
mal stress imposed upon the filter.
Considering operating conditions and experiences, the operator of the plant has to lay down
instructions for necessary inspection and maintenance procedures.
Normally, maintenance is limited to examining the gaskets for mechanical damages, which
should be carried out each time the filter elements are cleaned / replaced or at least once per
year. Since the gaskets are subjected to static stress only, replacement is seldom necessary.
In case the change-over lever has been removed during maintenance works, correct align-
ment must be ensured when refitting on the square-end of the rotary slide valve (see
illustration 5-1)
Every time a filter element has been cleaned, it should be examined for mechanical dam-
ages. As the filter medium (generally wire mesh) is arranged exclusively on the outside of the
filter element, this can be carried out be performing a thorough visual inspection.
Damage (such as cracks and holes) to the filter medium is normally caused by improper
handling and is readily identifiable. Pleats that are just deformed are not necessarily defec-
tive.
A magnifying glass or a microscope and good illumination may, of course, be helpful.
All damaged or used parts (e.g. worn out or twisted bolts and nuts, damaged gaskets, etc.)
must not be used any longer and are to be replaced by new ones.
7 Additional documentation (s. supplements)

• Technical Data Sheet for Type Series 4.225 Double Filter
• Documentation for Differential Pressure Indicator Type Series 5.02

11
B 5922 EN 12.07
12/16
Revision history
2005-10:
• English translation of German document

2007-07 (FRE-01):
• completely revised translation, based on German document (Rev. FRE-01; 06/2007)
• incorporation of Flender annotations concerning vocabulary, grammar, style, …;

changed spelling of “connexion” to “connection”

12
B 5922 EN 12.07
13/16
Type 4.225 DN 20 PN 16
dimensions:
fluidtech® duplex-filter
Technical Data: dimensions in mm

Weight: 3,4 kg
Operating pressure: max. 16 bar
Operating temperature: max. 120°C
Max. speed of flow (oil): max. 3 m/s
Filter area per filter element: 400 cm2
Length of filter element: 87 mm
Materials:
Eigennutz verwertet oder Außenstehenden zugänglich gemacht werden
uns das Recht vor, diese Beschreibung ohne Ankündigung zu ändern.

Alle Urheberrechte bei Firma FRIEDRICHS FILTERSYSTEME GMBH
Gebrauchsmustereintragung vorbehalten (§ 12 PatG). Wir behalten
Diese Zeichnung darf nicht zu Zwecken des Wettbewerbs oder aus
Casing, change-over valve and filter hood: GK-Al

(UWG §§ 17-21). Alle Rechte für den Fall der Patenterteilung oder
Hermann-Löns-Str. 2-4, D-41849 Wassenberg, GERMANY
Filter element: CrNi / GK-Al

Gaskets: Perbunan, Viton, or special materials
Subject to technical modifications
update: 10/05
WERK: Hermann-Löns-Str. 2-4 GESCHÄFTSFÜHRER: HANDELSREGISTER: BANKVERBINDUNGEN:
SITZ: Am Waldrand 29 KAUFM.: Amtsgericht Heinsberg HRB 0279 KREISSPARKASSE HEINSBERG
41849 Wassenberg Anneliese Friedrichs VAT-Nr.: DE 122488849 BLZ: 312 512 20 KTO.-Nr. 2 150 258
Postfach 1248 TECHN.: Steuer-Nr.: VOLKSBANK WEGBERG
41846 Wassenberg Andreas Friedrichs 210/5735/0134 BLZ: 312 623 93 KTO.-Nr. 801 663 028
B 5922 EN 12.07
™
deltaP
14/16
Differential Pressure Indicator
Connection and Data
Typ 5.02 110°
74
PG 11
low high
pressure pressure
19
Ø60 G1/4''
47
45
25
98
20
Ø9 Data:
Working pressure: max. 100 bar
Working temperature:
Medium max. 150°C
at device max. 120°C
Ø7
45
37
f1 f2
92
100
Application The deltaP - Differential Pressure Indicators are used for the monitoring of a va-
riable pressure difference via an optical display and electrical contacts in up to
two points.
Description A piston, hermetically sealed, moves against the effect of a calibrated measuring
spring. The piston´s position is transmitted magnetically, which means without
friction, to an indicating display and in addition to Reed-contacts for electrical si-
gnals. In the range of 10…100% ∆p, monitored by 0… 110° display-angle, the
red part of the display becomes visible. In the standard version at 75% ∆p (mark
in the display) usually the first (f1), at 100% ∆p the second (f2) Reed-contact is
switched. The switching points are engraved into the display.
Connection Connection should be done workmanlike , to ensure proper function. The de-
vice is prepared for G1/4" - pipe-connectors. Sealing can be done with gaskets,
PTFE-Tape or glue. The low pressure is to be connected to the side marked
with "-", the high pressure to the side marked with "+".
Electrical connection: see special supplement
FRIEDRICHS-FILTERSYSTEME GMBH
P.O. Box 1248 • 41846 Wassenberg • Germany • Phone +49/(0)2432/96 60-0 • Fax -90
B 5922 EN 12.07
™
deltaP
15/16
Differential Pressure Indicators
Construction and Maintenance
Typ 5.02
7
3a
6
13 9
12
10
11 2 5 3 4
8a
No. Name Material / DIN optional

1 Casing GK AlSi 12, hardcoated
2 Cover GK AlSi 12, hardcoated
3 Piston with ring-magnet Ms, Bariumferrite Stainless steel, special materials
3a Special piston Special gaskets instead of rolling diaphragm (Kotef / O-Rings) Adapter für ∆p >5 bis ≤20 bar
4 Measuring spring 1.4310 PTFE-surface, special materials
5 Rolling diaphragm Perbunan Viton, EP
6 Display disk (blue/red) with Aluminum ,Brass, Bariumferrite
magnet
7 Display Polycarbonat (Makrolon)
8 Clamp Plastic material, Brass (tin surface) Plug systems
8a Plugs DIN 43650 others on request
9 Gasket for cover Perbunan
10 Cover GK AlSi 12
11 Screw DIN 912 M8x25 stainless steel
12 Screw DIN 912 M6x25 stainless steel
13 Pipe-connectors G1/4"
Maintenance deltaP - Differential pressure indicators generally need no maintenance.

Though the rolling diaphragm can be damaged because of aging or very high
differential pressure loads.
If the rolling diaphragm or the gasket is damaged the differential pressure
can´t be monitored correctly!
Herewith it can come because of the narrow fit size to an only slight by-pass
flow through the inside of the indicator. However he instrument interior can
pollute thereby. If constant differential pressure should be indicated during an
unusually long time it is advisable to check the instrument interior for pollution
and especially to check the rolling diaphragm or gasket for damages. If ne-
cessary the instruments interior and the connection pipings are to be cleaned
and the gaskets changed. When installing the rolling diaphragm it is to be paid
attention of fitting the nipples in the bottom of the diaphragm to the piston´s
side.
B 5922 EN 12.07
™
deltaP
16/16
Differential Pressure Indicator
Electrical Connection and Data
Type 5.02 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM:
ATTENTION:
Electrical connection of the Differential pressure indicator is to be done by spe-
cialists (e.g. electricians) to prevent damages. In any case the connection cables
are to be seperated from mains supply before.
CABLE PREPARATION:
Beforer connection prepare the cable ends with tin or cable end sleeves.
standard-type with clamp-box
CONTACTS:
The contacts are switched according to the above-mentioned circuit diagram. The respecti-
ve differential pressure, engraved into the display (∆p1, ∆p2) controls the contacts (f1, f2).
Each contact is associated a clamp on the reverse of the differential pressure indicator. This
is protected with a sealed aluminum cover.
The clamp description is found on the the plate and on the upper side of the casing.
Connection to earth can be either made via the clamps or the brass-screws which hold the
plate. At loss of these screws they are absolutely to replace, because they serve simultane-
ously as fastening bolts for the plate.
CONNECTION:
Before connection to the clamps, the cable must be led through any kind of PG-11 cable
screw, the cluminum cover and it´s gasket. Subsequently the cables can be connected ac-
cording to the above-mentioned circuit diagram. The max. tightening moment is 2Nm.
Finally the aluminum cover is to be screwed with the casing.
Electrical Data:
Contact f1 f2
switching ability max. W 120 30
switching ability max. VA 120 60
switching voltage max. V ≅ 250 250
switching current max. A 3 1
constant current max. A 5 2
Voltage-proof up to V 800 500
volume resistance max. mΩ 100 100
isolation resistance typ. Ω 1011 109
cable diameter max. mm2 1,5 1,5
high-voltage-tested against earth up to 1350 VAC
Isolation protection class IP 65
Instrucciones de servicio
BA 5017 SP 03.00
Engranaje de ventilador de los tipos
H.BV y B.BV
Tamaños 5 a 16
H.BV
B.BV
A. Friedr. Flender AG ⋅ 46393 Bocholt ⋅ Tel. 02871/92-0 ⋅ Telefax 02871/92-2596 ⋅ www.flender.com

Indice

!
"#$%&

!
'
"$($%&

)
(

!
'
"$($%&
)

*

+

( ,

-
( ./
-
((

/ 0
( 1

0
( 2 ' !/

0

%

0
1
0
( 2
3
4

3
( 5 (
6/
6/ 7
8

) 9
) :
) 1/

: )
%
)
*
7

( *
7
-
- 2

-
0 3
;
; <
!
"
) *

) <

/
) 3
)
/

(
) 8
) <

/ /

)( $

) =

) =

)) =

) =

)-

7

BA 5017 SP 03.00

#
$
<
)
>

)
6 /
3

(
-
( 3

-
( 3

-
( =

-
( 3
7
0
( =
7
0
:

/

0
%$ &
-

(;
'(

0 *

/
(
0 ?

/ (
& !

; *

/
((
;
/

' ((
; 3

/

((
; 3/ (
;( 6
(
; 6

(
; : /

()
;) 65
' (
; 3

(-
;- 3

(0
;0 : ;
;; 3

/

;
; * ;
;( 6/
% ) *(

$

8
@ /

+*

BA 5017 SP 03.00
(
1. Datos técnicos
1.1 Datos técnicos generales
La placa de características del engranaje contiene los datos técnicos más importantes. Estos datos y
los acuerdos contractuales para el engranaje determinan los límites de su uso conforme a las
disposiciones.
1
2
3
4 5
6 7
8 9 10
11
12
1 Logotipo social y lugar de fabricación 7 No. revoluciones n2
2 Para indicaciones especiales 8 Tipo de aceite
3 Pedido No. - Posición - No. de orden 9 Viscosidad del aceite en Clase VG
4 Tipo / Tamaño *) 10 Cantidad de aceite en litros para carcasa principal
5 Indicación de potencia P en kW ó T2 en Nm 11 Número de las instrucciones de servicio
6 No. de revoluciones n1 12 Para indicaciones especiales
p. ej. *)
B 3 B V 13
Tamaño . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 ... 16
Montaje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V = Vertical
Ejecución eje motriz . . . B = Eje macizo con soporte de rodamientos reforzado
Número de etapas . . . . . 2ó3
Tipo de engranaje . . . . . H = Reductor de engranajes cilíndricos
B = Reductor de engranajes cilíndricos y cónicos
Las indicaciones relativas a los pesos y al nivel de presión acústica de las superficies de medición de
los diversos tipos de engranajes los podrá encontrar en los Puntos 1.1.1 ó 1.1.2.
Para más detalles técnicos, véanse los planos de la documentación del engranaje.
1.1.1 Pesos
aprox. peso (kg) para tamaño

Tipo
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
H2BV 330 395 565 670 925 980 1500 1785 2370 2780 3715 4000
H3BV 350 405 600 705 970 1140 1565 1845 2465 2840 3735 4160
B3BV 355 420 610 710 985 1140 1620 1900 2570 2965 4015 4300
Tabla 1.1: Pesos (valores orientativos)
Nota: Todas las indicaciones de peso se entienden sin carga de aceite ni anexos.
Encontrará los pesos exactos en los planos de la documentación del engranaje.
BA 5017 SP 03.00

1.1.2 Nivel de presión acústica de las superficies de medición
El engranaje tiene un nivel de presión acústica de superficies de medición a 1 m de distancia, el cual

se encuentra indicado en la Tabla 1.1.2.1 a 1.1.2.3.
La medición se realiza según DIN 45635, Parte 1 y Parte 23, según el método de intensidad acústica.
El puesto de trabajo del personal de servicio se define como un lugar en la superficie de medición, que
se sitúa a 1 m de distancia alrededor del engranaje, y en cuyas proximidades se encuentran personas.
El nivel de presión acústica se aplica al engranaje que se ha calentado en marcha, así como para una
velocidad de entrada n1 y una potencia de entrada P1 según la placa de características. En caso de
existir varias indicaciones, tiene aplicación el mayor número de revoluciones y la máxima potencia.
En el nivel de presión acústica de las superficies de medición están incluidos – cuando los hay – los
grupos de engrase acoplados. Las bridas se consideran como puntos de intersección en las tuberías
de admisión y de evacuación.
Tiene validez la medición realizada en los bancos de prueba de FLENDER en caso de que no se
puedan establecer claras condiciones técnicas de medición en el lugar de utilización.
Los niveles de presión acústica indicados en la tabla han sido obtenidos a base de evaluaciones
estadísticas de nuestro control de calidad. Con seguridad estadística es de esperar que el engranaje
cumpla estos valores acústicos.
1.1.2.1 Niveles de presión acústica de las superficies de medición para reductores de engranajes cilíndricos
(H.BV)
Niveles de presión acústica de las superficies de medición LpA en dB(A)

para reductores de engranajes cilíndricos
n1 Tamaño del engranaje
Tipo iN 1/min 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
6.3 1500 74 75 76 77 79 79 80 81 81 82 84 85
. 1000 69 70 71 72 74 74 75 76 76 77 80 80
10 750 66 67 67 69 70 71 72 73 73 74 76 77
11.2 1500 72 73 74 75 77 77 78 79 79 80 82 83
H2BV . 1000 67 68 69 70 72 72 73 74 74 75 77 78
16 750 64 65 66 67 69 69 70 71 71 72 74 75
18 1500 69 70 71 72 74 74 75 76 77 78 80 80
. 1000 64 65 66 68 69 69 70 71 72 73 75 75
28 750 61 62 63 64 66 66 77 68 69 70 72 72
22.4 1500 68 69 73 74 74 75 77 77 78 79 81 81
. 1000 63 65 68 69 69 71 72 73 73 74 76 77
35.5 750 60 61 65 66 65 67 69 69 70 71 73 73
40 1500 65 67 70 71 71 73 74 75 76 76 78 79
H3BV . 1000 1) 62 65 66 66 68 69 70 71 72 73 74
63 750 1) 1) 62 63 63 65 66 67 67 68 70 71
71 1500 62 64 67 68 68 70 71 72 73 74 76 76
. 1000 1) 1) 62 63 63 65 66 67 68 69 71 71
112 750 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 62 63 64 65 66 68 68
1) LpA t60 dB(A)
BA 5017 SP 03.00

y cónicos (B3BV) con ventilador
Niveles de presión acústica de las superficies de medición LpA in dB(A)

para reductores de engranajes cilíndricos y cónicos con ventilador
Tipo iN
1/min 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
12.5 1500 75 77 79 80 81 82 83 85 88 89 90 91
. 1000 68 69 71 72 73 74 77 78 80 82 83 83
31.5 750 63 64 66 68 69 70 71 73 74 75 76 77
35.5 1500 72 73 74 75 77 79 82 84 86 87 88 89
B3BV . 1000 65 66 67 69 71 72 73 75 77 78 79 80
56 750 1) 1) 62 64 65 67 69 70 71 72 73 74
63 1500 70 71 73 74 76 78 81 83 85 86 87 88
. 1000 63 64 66 68 69 71 73 75 77 78 79 80
90 750 1) 1) 61 63 64 66 67 68 70 71 72 73
1) LpA t60 dB(A)
y cónicos (B3BV) sin ventilador
Niveles de presión acústica de las superficies de medición LpA in dB(A)

para reductores de engranajes cilíndricos y cónicos sin ventilador
Tipo iN
1/min 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
12.5 1500 71 74 75 76 77 79 81 83 64 85 86 87
. 1000 66 68 69 70 72 73 75 77 78 80 80 81
31.5 750 1) 61 62 64 65 66 68 71 71 73 73 74
35.5 1500 67 70 71 71 72 74 77 79 80 81 82 83
B3BV . 1000 62 65 65 66 66 69 71 73 75 76 76 77
56 750 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 62 65 67 68 69 70 70
63 1500 64 70 67 68 68 70 73 75 76 78 78 79
. 1000 1) 63 62 62 62 65 68 70 71 72 73 73
90 750 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 61 63 64 65 66 67
1) LpA t60 dB(A)
BA 5017 SP 03.00
)
2. Instrucciones generales
2.1 Introducción
Las presentes instrucciones de servicio (BA) son un componente del suministro del engranaje. Se
deberían tener guardadas siempre cerca del engranaje.
Toda persona que esté relacionada con el montaje, manejo, mantenimiento y
Atención! reparación del engranaje debe haber leído y comprendido estas instrucciones
de servicio, y debe seguirlas. Declinamos toda responsabilidad por los daños
y fallos de funcionamiento que puedan resultar de la no observancia de estas
instrucciones de servicio.
El ”engranaje FLENDER” tratado en las presentes instrucciones de servicio ha sido desarrollado para
utilizarlo en servicio estacionario en el tratamiento de aguas residuales. El engranaje de ventilador tiene
un eje de salida reforzado cuyo rodamiento inferior está lubrificado con grasa.
El engranaje está diseñado solamente para el campo de aplicaciones indicado en Capítulo 1 “Datos
técnicos”. Condiciones de servicio divergentes exigen nuevos acuerdos contractuales.
El engranaje aquí descrito corresponde al estado técnico en el momento de la impresión de las
presentes instrucciones de servicio.
En interés del sucesivo desarrollo innovador nos reservamos el derecho de introducir en los
respectivos subgrupos y accesorios las modificaciones que, manteniendo las características
esenciales, se consideren idóneas para incrementar su capacidad de rendimiento y su seguridad.
2.2 Derecho de propiedad industrial
El derecho de propiedad industrial de las presentes instrucciones de servicio sigue siendo de

FLENDER AG.
Estas instrucciones de servicio no pueden ser utilizadas en su totalidad o parcialmente sin nuestro
permiso para fines de competencia o puestas a disposición de terceros.
Todas las consultas técnicas se han de dirigir a nuestras fábricas
para engranajes de tamaños 5 ... 12 para engranajes de tamaños 13 ... 16
A. FRIEDR. FLENDER AG A. FRIEDR. FLENDER AG

Getriebewerk Penig
Thierbacher Straße 24
D-09322 Penig D-46393 Bocholt
Tel.: 037381/60 Tel.: 02871/92-0

Fax: 037381/80286 Fax: 02871/92-2596
o a una de nuestras delegaciones de servicio postventa. En el Capítulo 11 “Stocks de recambios,

direcciones postventa” encontrará usted una lista con las direcciones de estas delegaciones.
BA 5017 SP 03.00

3. Instrucciones de seguridad
3.1 Uso conforme a las disposiciones
S El engranaje está construido según el más moderno estado de la técnica y se suministra en estado
de funcionamiento seguro. No se permiten modificaciones por cuenta propia que perjudiquen la
seguridad de funcionamiento. Esto se aplica también igualmente a los dispositivos de protección
colocados para proteger contra los contactos físicos.
S Sólo se permite colocar y poner en servicio el engranaje en el marco de las condiciones estipuladas
en el contrato de prestaciones y suministro.
3.2 Obligaciones fundamentales
S El usuario ha de cuidar de que las personas encargadas del montaje, servicio, cuidados,
mantenimiento y reparaciones hayan leído y entendido las instrucciones de servicio, y de que las
observen en todos sus puntos para:
– evitar peligros de lesión corporal o de muerte para el usuario o para terceros
– garantizar la seguridad de funcionamiento del engranaje
y para
– descartar interrupciones de utilización y contaminaciones del medio ambiente por manejo
incorrecto.
S Durante el transporte, el montaje y desmontaje, el manejo, así como los cuidados y mantenimiento,
se han de observar las prescripciones específicas para la seguridad en el trabajo y la protección del
medio ambiente.
S El engranaje sólo puede ser manejado, mantenido o reparado por personal autorizado, formado
profesionalmente y adiestrado.
S No está permitida la limpieza con un aparato de limpieza de alta presión.
S Todos los trabajos se han de realizar cuidadosamente y desde la perspectiva de la “Seguridad”.
S Los trabajos en el engranaje sólo están permitidos a máquina parada.

El grupo motriz tiene que estar asegurado contra la puesta en marcha accidental (p. ej. cerrando el
interruptor de llave o quitando los fusibles en la alimentación de la corriente). En el lugar de la puesta
en marcha se debe colocar un letrero de advertencia en el que se pueda ver que se está trabajando
en el engranaje.
S No están permitidos los trabajos de soldadura en el engranaje.

Los engranajes no deben ser utilizados como puntos de toma de masa para los trabajos de
soldadura. Pueden resultar destruidos por soldadura puntos del dentado y rodamientos.
S El grupo motriz se debe poner fuera de servicio inmediatamente si durante el servicio se constatase
que se han producido variaciones en el engranaje, tales como p. ej., una mayor temperatura de
servicio o ruidos de engranaje diferentes de los habituales.
S Las piezas motrices rotatorias, tales como acoplamientos, ruedas dentadas o transmisiones por
correas, tienen que estar aseguradas contra el contacto físico mediante adecuados dispositivos de
protección.
S Cuando el engranaje se monte en aparatos o instalaciones, el fabricante de los aparatos o

instalaciones está obligado a incorporar también en sus instrucciones de servicio las instrucciones,
observaciones y descripciones contenidas en las presentes instrucciones de servicio.
S Las instrucciones puestas en el engranaje, tales como p. ej., placa de características, flecha del
sentido de rotación etc., se han de tener en cuenta. Las mismas deben estar libres de pintura y
suciedad. Las placas que falten se deben reponer.
S Los recambios deben ser adquiridos por principio de FLENDER.
BA 5017 SP 03.00
-
3.3 Protección del medio ambiente
S Al cambiar el aceite se ha de recoger el aceite viejo en recipientes adecuados. Los charcos de aceite
que se hubiesen podido formar, se han de eliminar inmediatamente.
S Los agentes conservantes se deben guardar separados del aceite viejo.
S El aceite viejo, los agentes conservantes, los agentes ligantes del aceite y los trapos de limpieza
empapados de aceite se han de eliminar siguiendo las normas específicas de protección del medio
ambiente.
3.4 Tipo especial de peligro
S De acuerdo con las condiciones de servicio, el engranaje puede alcanzar considerables

temperaturas superficiales. Peligro de quemaduras!
S Al cambiar el aceite existe peligro de quemaduras por el aceite caliente que sale.
3.5 Advertencias y símbolos en las presentes instrucciones de servicio
Este símbolo se refiere a medidas de seguridad que se deben observar

indispensablemente para evitar daños personales.
Este símbolo se refiere a medidas de seguridad que se deben observar

Atención! indispensablemente para evitar daños en el engranaje.
Nota: Este símbolo se refiere a instrucciones generales de manejo que se deben

observar de manera especial.
4. Transporte y almacenamiento
Nota: Se deben observar las “Instrucciones de seguridad” del Capítulo 3.
4.1 Volumen de suministro
El contenido del suministro se especifica en los documentos de envío. Al recibir el envío se tiene que
comprobar si está íntegro. Si se constata que ha sufrido daños durante el transporte o que faltan piezas,
se debe comunicar inmediatamente por escrito.
4.2 Transporte
Para el transporte utilizar sólo dispositivos elevadores y receptores de carga

con suficiente capacidad de carga.
El engranaje se suministra en estado ensamblado. Los equipos adicionales (tales como p. ej.,
refrigeradores de aceite, tuberías y accesorios de tuberías) se suministran embalados por separado,
si se diese al caso.
El engranaje se embala de manera diferente en función de las características de la ruta de transporte

y del tamaño. Si en el contrato no se estipula otra cosa, el embalaje corresponde a las directrices de
embalaje HPE.
Se deben observar los pictogramas puestos sobre el embalaje. Tiene el siguiente significado:
bild-transport
Arriba Material Proteger contra Proteger contra Centro de Prohibidos Eslingar

fragil humedad el calor gravedad ganchos manuales aqui
BA 5017 SP 03.00
0
Al transportar el engranaje se procederá con el cuidado adecuado para evitar
Atención! daños a las personas y al engranaje.
Así p. ej., los empujes en los extremos libres de los ejes pueden producir daños
en el engranaje.
Nota: El transporte del engranaje se debe realizar con medios de transporte adecuados.
El engranaje se ha de transportar sin carga de aceite.
Para transportar el engranaje, los ganchos de las cadenas de ganchos o pernos

Atención! con cintas de bucles se utilizarán sólo los 4 agujeros de transporte previstos
para ello.
No esta permitido transportarlo por los tubos.
Las tuberías no deben sufrir desperfecto alguno.
El engranaje se ha de transportar sólo en la posición de uso.
Sólo se permite dejarlo puesto sobre una base de colocación adecuada
configurada de modo que quede descartado todo daño de los tubos, la bomba
y del acoplamiento.
Las roscas frontales en los extremos de los ejes no se deben utilizar para
aplicarles tornillos con argolla para el transporte.
500004-17-1
H.BV con bomba de brida B3BV con bomba de brida
500004-17-2
B3BV con motobomba
BA 5017 SP 03.00
;
En las unidades motrices con componentes adicionales montados en el engranaje, tales como motor
de accionamiento, acoplamiento montado etc., a causa del desplazamiento del centro de gravedad
resultante, puede resultar necesario un punto adicional para la aplicación de una eslinga.
500004-17-3
B3BV con motor
La representación gráfica exacta del engranaje se puede ver en los planos de la documentación del
engranaje.
La posición de los puntos de eslinga se encuentra en la documentación contractual del engranaje.
4.3 Almacenaje
El engranaje se ha de almacenar en un lugar protegido de las inclemencias del tiempo, en posición de

uso, sobre una base de madera libre de vibraciones y tapado.
No es admisible apilar los engranajes unos sobre otros
En caso de almacenaje al aire libre, el engranaje debe cubrirse con especial

Atención! esmero y se debe cuidar que no puedan depositarse sobre él ni humedad ni
sustancias extrañas.
Nota: Las condiciones ambientales especiales del transporte (p. ej. transporte marítimo) y
almacenamiento (clima, peligro de termitas o similares) se deben acordar
contractualmente.
4.4 Conservación estándar
El engranaje está provisto de una conservación interior y a los extremos libres de los ejes se les ha
aplicado una capa de pintura protectora.
La pintura exterior es resistente a los ácidos débiles y álcalis, aceites y disolventes. Es resistente al
agua de mar, al clima tropical y a la temperatura hasta 140 °C.
Nota: No dañar la pintura exterior.

Los daños mecánicos (arañazos), químicos (ácidos, álcalis) o térmicos (chispas,
perlas de soldadura, calor) conducen a la corrosión y al fracaso de la protección
exterior.
Nota: Si en el contrato no se estipula otra cosa, concedemos un periodo de garantía de 24

meses para la conservación interior y de12 meses para la conservación de los
extremos libres de los ejes. El periodo de garantía comienza con el día de envío del
engranaje.
Cuando los almacenamientos intermedios sean largos (> 24 meses) se recomienda revisar la
conservación interior y la conservación exterior, renovándolas si fuera necesario (ver Capítulo 7.
“Puesta en servicio”).
BA 5017 SP 03.00

5. Descripción técnica
5.1 Descripción general
El engranaje se suministra como reductor de engranajes cilíndricos de dos o tres etapas o como
reductor de engranajes cilíndricos y cónicos de tres etapas. Está diseñado para ser montado en
posición vertical.
El eje de salida gira en un tubo de remanso de aceite. Se impide así que se fugue aceite del engranaje
por el extremo del eje. El abastecimiento de aceite se hace por medio de una bomba de aceite con brida
en los tipos H2BV y H3BV. En el tipo B3BV el abastecimiento de aceite es posible por medio de una
bomba con brida o de una motobomba.
El engranaje puede funcionar por principio en ambos sentidos de giro.

Son posibles diversas situaciones de ejes (ejecuciones y asignaciones de sentidos de giro)
representadas esquemáticamente a continuación:
Ejecución
Tipo
B C
H2BV –
1
H3BV –
1
B3BV –
1
1 Tubo de remanso de aceite
engranaje.
Los engranajes se caracterizan por un favorable comportamiento acústico que se consigue por medio
de engranajes cónicos y cilíndricos con una elevada relación de contacto y una carcasa amortiguadora
de ruidos.
El favorable comportamiento de la temperatura del engranaje resulta de su buen grado de rendimiento,
la gran superficie de su carcasa y su sistema de refrigeración relacionado al rendimiento.
Nota: Si no se ha acordado otra cosa en el contrato, los engranajes no deben ser expuestos a
la acción de agentes nocivos como, p. ej., productos químicos, ambiente con aire de
elevado grado de suciedad, temperaturas ambientales diferentes de los 0 ... +20 °C.
5.2 Carcasa
Las carcasas son de fundición de hierro pero, en caso necesario, también se pueden fabricar de acero.
Las carcasas hasta el tamaño 12 inclusive están ejecutadas de una sola pieza. Los tamaños
constructivos 13 a 16 están provistos de una carcasa de dos piezas. La carcasa está ejecutada a
prueba de torsión y, por su configuración, presenta un buen comportamiento acústico y térmico.
La carcasa está dotada de orificios de transporte suficientemente dimensionados, así como tapas de
inspección o de montaje.
Existen una varilla de medición de aceite para controlar el nivel del aceite, un tornillo de purga para
cambiar el aceite y un tornillo de aireación para la renovación del aire del engranaje.
BA 5017 SP 03.00

Identificación por colores de la aireación, llenado de aceite, nivel de aceite y purga de aceite:
Aireación: amarillo
Llenado de aceite: amarillo
Nivel de aceite: rojo
Puntos de engrase: rojo
Purga de aceite: blanco

500005-17-1
12 5 14 7 16
6
17
10
2 13
8
11
1
15 9
3 5
H.BV
500005-17-2
5 9 2 14 7 16
6
17
10
13
8
11
1
15 9
3 5
B3BV
1 Carcasa 10 Placa de características

2 Orificios para transporte 11 Fijación del engranaje
3 Tapa 12 Linterna de motor
5 Juntas para ejes 13 Punto de engrase
6 Varilla de medición de aceite 14 Tapa para inspección o montaje
7 Aireación y evacuación de aire
de la carcasa
15
16
Bomba de brida
Bomba del motor g opcional
8 Tornillo de purga de aceite 17 Llenado de aceite
9 Cuello del eje
engranaje.
5.3 Piezas dentadas
Las piezas dentadas del engranaje están templadas por cementación. Los dentados de los engranajes
cilíndricos están esmerilados, los dentados de los engranajes cónicos, según tamaño y multiplicación
están lapeados, esmerilados o dentados como HPG. Gracias a la alta calidad del dentado se minimiza
el nivel de ruido del engranaje y se garantiza una marcha de funcionamiento seguro.
Los engranajes están unidos a los ejes mediante ajustes prensados y chavetas. Las uniones
transmiten con suficiente seguridad los pares que se producen.
BA 5017 SP 03.00
(
5.4 Lubricación
5.4.1 Lubricación a presión mediante instalación anexa de alimentación de aceite
Los engranajes están construidos con un sistema de engrase a presión.
La instalación de alimentación de aceite está montada fija en el engranaje y se compone de una bomba
de brida o de motor, un filtro basto, un presostato y las correspondientes tuberías. En los engranajes
de los tamaños 13 a 16 el filtro basto se ha sustituido por un filtro de doble conexión.
La dirección de impulsión de las bombas de brida utilizadas es independe del sentido de giro. En casos
excepcionales puede utilizarse una bomba de brida dependiente del sentido de giro. Los datos
correspondientes los puede obtener de los planos de la documentación del engranaje así como de la
lista de aparatos.
Ejecución bomba de brida
500005-17-3
2 3ó4 2 3ó4
1 1
H.BV B3BV
1 Bomba de brida 3 Filtro basto

2 Presostato 4 Filtro de doble conexión
En el tipo H3BV se ha previsto una bomba dispuesta en el interior del engranaje.
Dependiendo del pedido, en determinados casos de aplicación, se puede instalar una bomba
motorizada en lugar de la bomba de brida.
Ejecución bomba de motor
500005-17-4
2 2
3 4
1 1
B3BV v 12 B3BV w 13
1 Bomba de motor 3 Filtro basto

2 Presostato 4 Filtro de doble conexión
engranaje.
En los engranajes con instalación anexa de alimentación de aceite es
Atención! imprescindible conectar el presostato antes de la puesta en servicio.
Nota: Para el servicio y mantenimiento de la bomba, del presostato y del filtro basto o el filtro
de doble conexión, se deben tener en cuenta las instrucciones de servicio indicadas
en un anexo dependiente del pedido.
Los datos técnicos se pueden ver en una lista de aparatos confeccionada en
dependencia con el pedido.
BA 5017 SP 03.00

5.5 Soportes
Todos los ejes se apoyan en rodamientos.

5.6 Juntas de eje
5.6.1 Retenes radiales de eje
Los retenes radiales de eje se utilizan en general como juntas estándar. Están dotados de un labio
contra el polvo para proteger al verdadero labio obturador contra las impurezas exteriores.
Retenes radiales de eje en los pasos de eje impiden que pueda fugarse aceite de la carcasa por el eje
motriz y grasa por el eje de salida.
500005-10-10
5.6.2 Tubo de remanso de aceite
Mediante obturación del eje de salida al descubierto por abajo con un retén del eje sin contacto y sin
desgaste - un denominado “tubo de remanso de aceite” - se mantiene absolutamente estanca la salida
del eje. Esta ejecución sólo se emplea en lubricación a presión.
Nota: Para la relubricación del sellado del eje se deberán observar estrictamente los
intervalos de lubricación preestablecidos (véase capítulo 10 “Mantenimiento y
reparaciones”).
500005-17-5
1 Tubo de remanso de aceite 2 Punto de engrase
BA 5017 SP 03.00

5.7 Refrigeración
El engranaje es equipado, según las necesidades, con un ventilador, un refrigerador de aceite por
agua, un refrigerador de aceite por aire o una instalación de alimentación de aceite anexa. Si se utiliza
esta instalación de alimentación de aceite instalada anexa por separado, también se deben observar
las instrucciones de servicio especiales de esta instalación de alimentación de aceite.
5.7.1 Ventilador
Un montaje de ventilador sólo es posible en el tipo B3BV (engranaje de ruedas cónicas).

El ventilador está instalado sobre el eje rápido del engranaje y se encuentra asegurado contra el
contacto físico accidental mediante una capota de ventilador. El ventilador aspira el aire a través de
la rejilla protectora de la capota del ventilador y lo impulsa haciéndolo pasar a lo largo de las guías
laterales de la carcasa. Al hacerlo, el aire disipa una determinada cantidad de calor de la carcasa.
500005-13-5
B..V
1 Ventilador 2 Capota del ventilador
engranaje.
En los engranajes equipados con un ventilador, cuando se coloque el
Atención! dispositivo protector para el acoplamiento o similar, se debe dejar suficiente
distancia para que sirva de sección de aspiración para el aire de refrigeración.
En el plano acotado de la documentación del engranaje se puede ver la

distancia necesaria.
Nota: El ensuciamiento del ventilador o de la superficie de la carcasa reduce

considerablemente el efecto refrigerador (tener en cuenta el Capítulo 10
“Mantenimiento y reparaciones”).
BA 5017 SP 03.00
)
5.7.2 Instalaciones anexas de refrigeración de aceite por aire
Dependiendo del pedido, para los tipos H2BV se puede utilizar una instalación de refrigeración con
refrigerador de aceite por aire. Esta instalación de refrigeración del aceite está montada fija en el
engranaje y se compone de una bomba de brida, un filtro basto, un presostato, una válvula reguladora
de la temperatura, el propio refrigerador de aceite por aire y las correspondientes tuberías de conexión.
En los engranajes de los tamaños 13 a 16 el filtro basto se sustituye por un filtro de doble conexión.
El refrigerador de aceite por aire sirve para la refrigeración del aceite del engranaje, sirviendo de
refrigerante el aire ambiente. El aceite, dependiendo del caudal, es conducido en uno o varios flujos
a través del refrigerador, alrededor del cual pasa el aire ambiente impulsado por el ventilador. Para el
arranque en frío se ha previsto siempre una conducción de bypass dotada de una válvula
termorreguladora.
lista de aparatos.
500005-17-6
6 1
6 4
2 2
5 5
3 1 1
H2BV v 12 H2BV w 13
1 Bomba de brida 4 Filtro de doble conexión

2 Presostato 5 Refrigerador de aceite por aire
3 Filtro basto 6 Válvula termorreguladora
engranaje.
Cuando se instale el engranaje con la instalación anexa de refrigeración de
Atención! aceite por aire, se debe prestar atención a que la circulación del aire no resulte
obstaculizada. En los planos de la documentación del engranaje se pueden ver
las distancias mínimas necesarias hasta los elementos constructivos
adyacentes, paredes etc.
Nota: Para el servicio y mantenimiento se deben observar las instrucciones que se

encuentran adjuntas en el anexo confeccionado de acuerdo con el pedido.
Los datos técnicos se encuentran en la lista de aparatos confeccionada de acuerdo
con el pedido.
El ensuciamiento del ventilador o de la superficie de la carcasa reducen considerablemente el efecto

refrigerador (tener en cuenta el Capítulo 10 “Mantenimiento y reparaciones”).
BA 5017 SP 03.00

5.7.3 Instalaciones anexas de refrigeración de aceite por agua
Dependiendo del pedido, para los tipos H2BV se puede utilizar una instalación de refrigeración con
refrigerador de aceite por agua. Esta instalación de refrigeración del aceite está montada fija en el
engranaje y se compone de una bomba de brida, un filtro basto, un presostato, el propio refrigerador
de aceite por aire y las correspondientes tuberías de conexión. En los engranajes de los tamaños
13 a 16 el filtro basto se sustituye por un filtro de doble conexión.
lista de aparatos.
El usuario debe proveer la necesaria toma de agua de refrigeración.
500005-17-7
2 4 2
6 6
5 5
3
1 1
H2BV v 12 H2BV w 13

2 Presostato 5 Refrigerador de aceite por agua
3 Filtro basto 6 Entrada y salida del agua de refrigeración
engranaje.
Para lograr un óptimo rendimiento de refrigeración se debe mantener la
Atención! dirección de flujo del refrigerador de aceite por agua. No se deben intercambiar
las conexiones de entrada y de salida del agua de refrigeración.
La presión del agua de refrigeración puede ser como máximo de 8 bar.
En caso de peligro de congelación y de parada de larga duración del engranaje,
se debe descargar el agua de refrigeración. Los restos de agua se han de
expulsar por medio de aire comprimido.
Dependiendo del pedido, en determinados casos de aplicación, se puede instalar una bomba
motorizada en lugar de la bomba de brida.
con el pedido.
5.8 Acoplamientos
Para el accionamiento del engranaje se han de prever por regla general acoplamientos elásticos o
acoplamientos de flujo combinados con acoplamientos elásticos.
Nota: En los engranajes con ventilador la parte hidráulica del acoplamiento de flujo se
colocará sobre el eje del motor, para dejar suficiente distancia como sección
transversal de aspiración del aire de refrigeración (ver Capítulo 5.7.1)
Si se tienen que utilizar acoplamientos rígidos u otros elementos de entrada o de salida que ocasionan
fuerzas adicionales radiales y/o axiales (p. ej. ruedas dentadas, poleas para correas, discos volantes,
acoplamientos de flujo), esto se deberá acordar contractualmente.
Los acoplamientos con velocidades periféricas en el diámetro exterior de hasta
Atención! 30 m/s tiene que estar equilibrados estáticamente. Los acoplamientos con
velocidades periféricas superiores a 30 m/s tienen que estar equilibrados
dinámicamente.
BA 5017 SP 03.00
-
Para el servicio y mantenimiento de los acoplamientos se tendrán en cuenta las instrucciones de
servicio del correspondiente acoplamiento.
Cuando se instalen los accionamientos se ha de prestar atención a que los

Atención! componentes estén exactamente alineados unos con respecto a otros. Errores
de alineación de magnitud inadmisible de los extremos del eje a unir debido a
desalineación angular o axial ocasionan desgaste prematuro o daños de
material.
Nota: Cuanto menor sea la desalineación radial o angular entre las partes de acoplamiento
respecto a los extremos de eje a unir tanto mayor será la duración de vida y la
fiabilidad de la instalación y tanto mejor será la suavidad de marcha.
Las desalineaciones de las partes de acoplamiento entre sí pueden resultar por una alineación
imprecisa al hacer el montaje, aunque también por el funcionamiento de la instalación (dilatación
térmica, flecha del eje, bastidores de máquina demasiado blandos, etc.).
500005-10-29
Desalineaciones posibles
D Ka
D Kw
D Kr
Desalineación Desalineación Desalineación
axial (DKa) angular (DKw) radial (DKr)
La alineación se ha de hacer en dos niveles de eje verticales el uno respecto al otro. Esto es posible
mediante regla (desalineación radial) y galga de espesores (desalineación angular) según se muestra
en la figura. La exactitud de alineación se puede aumentar si se utiliza un comparador de reloj o bien
ópticamente con un láser.
500005-10-30
1 3
2 3
Alineación a base del ejemplo de un acoplamiento elástico
1 Regla 2 Galga de espesores 3 Puntos de medición
No está permitido bajo ningún concepto exceder las desalineaciones máx.

Atención! admisibles durante el funcionamiento.
Las mismas se indican en las instrucciones de servicio del acoplamiento.
La desalineación angular y radial pueden surgir al mismo tiempo. La suma
de las dos alineaciones no ha de sobrepasar el valor máx. adm. de la
desalineación angular o radial.
Nota: Para alinear los componentes de accionamiento (dirección vertical) se recomienda

emplear chapas de asiento o chapas laminares debajo de los pies de fijación.
Ventajoso es poner garras con tornillos de regulación en la cimentación para ajustar
lateralmente los componentes motrices.
BA 5017 SP 03.00
0
5.9 Calentador de inmersión
En caso de temperaturas muy bajas puede ser necesario calentar el aceite del engranaje antes de
conectar el accionamiento o incluso también durante el funcionamiento. En estos casos se pueden
prever uno o dos calentadores de inmersión, dependiendo del pedido, los cuales transforman la
energía eléctrica en energía calorífica y la ceden al aceite que los rodea. Los calentadores de inmersión
se introducen en la carcasa dentro de tubos protectores, de manera que es posible cambiar los
elementos calefactores sin necesidad de tener que vaciar antes el aceite.
Dado que debe estar garantizada la inmersión total de los elementos calefactores en el baño de aceite,
en los casos aislados en los que se deban emplear calefactores de inmersión sólo se podrá prever la
ejecución con retenes radiales de ejes, debido a su nivel de aceite más elevado.
Los elementos calefactores son controlados por un termostato que emite una señal, que debe ser
amplificada, al alcanzar las temperaturas máxima y mínima.
500005-17-8
2 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2
dibujado
invertido
H... / B... v 12 H... / B... w 13
1 Calentador de inmersión 2 Termostato
engranaje.
No poner nunca en funcionamiento el calentador de inmersión si no se ha
Atención! asegurado antes que los elementos calefactores están completamente
sumergidos en le baño de aceite. Peligro de incendio!

con el pedido.
BA 5017 SP 03.00
;
5.10 Medición de la temperatura del aceite
El engranaje, dependiendo del pedido, puede ser dotado de un termómetro de resistencia eléctrica
PT 100 para la medición de la temperatura del aceite en el cárter. Para poder medir la temperaturas
o las diferencias de temperaturas, el termómetro de resistencia PT 100 deberá ser conectado por el
cliente a un aparato de evaluación. El termómetro de resistencia está dotado de una cabeza de
conexión (protección clase IP54) para su cableado. En fábrica se ha previsto una conexión a un circuito
de dos conductores, no obstante el cliente puede realizar también un circuito de tres o de cuatro
conductores.
Nota: Debido al nivel de aceite necesario para realizar una medición segura, el termómetro
de resistencia no se puede utilizar en combinación con la junta laberíntica.
500005-17-9
1 1 1 1
H..V / B..V v 12 H..V / B..V w 13
1 Termómetro de resistencia PT 100
engranaje.
con el pedido.
BA 5017 SP 03.00

6. Montaje
6.1 Instrucciones generales de montaje
El montaje debe ser realizado con gran esmero por especialistas. Los daños debidos a una realización
inadecuada son causa de que rechacemos la responsabilidad que de ellos se derive.
Al hacer la planificación ya se debe tener cuidado para que alrededor del engranaje exista suficiente
espacio para el montaje y los futuros trabajos de cuidados y mantenimiento.
Para los engranajes con ventilador se ha de dejar suficiente espacio libre para la entrada del aire.
La radiación solar intensa puede causar el sobrecalentamiento del engranaje.
Atención! Se deben prever dispositivos de protección adecuados como, p. ej.,
recubrimientos, techumbres o similares.
Al comienzo de los trabajos de montaje se deben tener a disposición suficientes aparatos elevadores.
No están permitidos los trabajos de soldadura en el engranaje.
Atención! Los engranajes no deben ser utilizados como puntos de toma de masa para los
trabajos de soldadura. Pueden resultar destruidos por soldadura puntos del
dentado y rodamientos.
Se utilizarán todas las posibilidades de fijación adecuadas existentes en el tipo

Atención! de engranaje correspondiente.
Para que quede garantizada una lubricación suficiente, se debe mantener la posición de montaje
indicada en el pedido.
6.2 Montaje de engranaje sobre pie de carcasa
6.2.1 Cimentación
La cimentación debe estar horizontal y ser lisa.

Se ha de ejecutar de manera que no se produzca ninguna vibración de resonancia y que no se pueda
transmitir ninguna trepidación procedente de las cimentaciones vecinas. La construcción de base
sobre la que se tenga que montar el engranaje, deberá ser resistente a la torsión. Se deberá
dimensionar de acuerdo con la masa y el par, teniendo en cuenta las fuerzas que actúan sobre el
engranaje.
Se debe realizar una cuidadosa alineación con respecto a la maquinaria, tanto en el lado de
accionamiento como en el de salida, debiendo tenerse en cuanta eventuales deformaciones debidas
a las fuerzas motrices.
Los tornillos o tuercas de fijación han de apretarse al par prescrito. El par de apriete se puede ver en
el Punto 10.2.10. Hay que prever tornillos de la clase de resistencia mínima 8.8.
Cuando actúan fuerzas exteriores sobre el engranaje, es conveniente impedir un desplazamiento
mediante topes laterales.
Nota: Las dimensiones, las necesidades de espacio, la situación de las conexiones de
alimentación (p. ej. en engranajes con instalaciones anexas de refrigeración de
aceite) se pueden ver en los planos de la documentación del engranaje.
BA 5017 SP 03.00

6.2.2 Descripción de los trabajos de montaje
S Quitar con gasolina la pintura de protección anticorrosiva de los ejes.
Es imprescindible evitar el contacto de la gasolina con los anillos de

Atención! obturación de los ejes.
Cuidar de que haya suficiente ventilación. No fumar.

Peligro de explosión!
S Colocar los elementos de entrada y de salida (p. ej. piezas del acoplamiento) y asegurarlos. En caso
de que se tengan que colocar en caliente, se tomarán las temperaturas de ensamblaje necesarias
de los planos acotados de la documentación del acoplamiento.
Si no se indica lo contrario, el calentamiento se puede realizar por inducción, con soplete o en el horno.
Utilizar protección para no quemarse con las piezas calientes.
Proteger los anillos de obturación de los ejes contra los daños por
Atención! calentamientos superiores a los +100 °C (utilizar escudos contra la radiación
calorífica).
Las piezas del acoplamiento se deben montar con ayuda de un dispositivo

Atención! adecuado, para evitar que se dañen los rodamientos del eje a causa de la fuerza
de unión axial.
Asegurarse de que se dispone de los elevadores adecuados.
Cuando se monten los elementos se ha de prestar atención a no dañar los
anillos de obturación del eje, ni la superficie del eje.
Los elementos se deslizarán con decisión sobre el eje hasta el punto indicado por los planos acotados
dependientes del pedido.
Montar el acoplamiento con ayuda de un dispositivo de montaje. No está
Atención! permitido montarlo a fuerza de golpes o choques, ya que con ello se pueden
dañar los engranajes, los rodamientos, los anillos de seguridad y similares.
Nota: A los engranajes que a causa de su peso hagan necesario el empleo de un elevador,
se les aplicarán las eslingas de la manera descrita en el Capítulo 4. “Transporte y
almacenamiento”. En caso de partes montadas anexas se utilizarán puntos
adicionales de eslinga según los planos acotados dependientes del pedido.
BA 5017 SP 03.00
(
6.2.2.1 Superficies de alineación
Las superficies mecanizadas en la parte superior de la carcasa sirven para preajustar el engranaje.
500006-17-1
1 1
1 Superficies de alineación
La alineación fina definitiva se debe realizar con exactitud en los grupos de entrada y de salida a través
de los ejes, con ayuda de
S reglas
S nivel de burbuja
S comparador de reloj
S calibre explorador etc.
Sólo después de haber realizado la alineación se fijará el engranaje.

Nota: La vida útil de los ejes, rodamientos y acoplamientos, depende fundamentalmente
de la exactitud de la alineación de los ejes entre sí. Por lo tanto siempre se debe
aspirar a la desviación cero. Para ello también se deben tener en cuenta las
exigencias de los acoplamientos, que figuran en las instrucciones de servicio
especiales.
6.2.2.2 Montaje sobre un bastidor de cimentación
S Limpiar la cara inferior de las superficies del pie del engranaje.
S Colocar el engranaje con ayuda de un elevador adecuado sobre el bastidor de cimentación.
S Atornillar los tornillos de la cimentación con los pares de apriete predeterminados (ver Punto 10.2.10),
colocando en caso necesario topes contra el desplazamiento.
Cuando se aprieten los tornillos de fijación no se debe deformar el engranaje

Atención! a causa de un ajuste desigual.
BA 5017 SP 03.00

6.3 Brida de acoplamiento en el lado de salida
La zona frontal de la brida de acoplamiento tiene que estar completamente

Atención! exenta de grasa.
De ello depende en gran medida la seguridad en la transmisión del par.
Los disolventes y los trapos de limpieza que se han ensuciado no son
adecuados para el desengrase.
Atención! Apretar en cruz los tornillos de unión de la brida con el par de apriete pleno.
S Pares de apriete de los tornillos de unión de la brida del engranaje:
Tamaño Clase de resistencia

Par de apriete
engranaje Tornillo DIN 931
5 ... 6 10.9 610 Nm

7 ... 10 10.9 1050 Nm
11 ... 14 10.9 2100 Nm
15 ... 16 10.9 3560 Nm
Tabla 6.1: Pares de apriete en las uniones por brida
Nota: Los tornillos inutilizados se sustituirán por tornillos nuevos de igual clase de
resistencia y ejecución.
6.4 Engranaje con refrigerador de aceite por aire
S Realizar el cableado eléctrico del indicador de ensuciamiento del filtro de doble conexión (sólo en
engranajes de tamaños ≥ 13) y del presostato
S Realizar el cableado eléctrico del motor.
6.5 Engranaje con refrigerador de aceite por agua
S Antes de conectar el refrigerador de aceite por agua quitar los manguitos de cierre de la conexión
del agua de refrigeración y enjuagar el refrigerador para eliminar posibles restos de suciedad.
S Instalar las tuberías de entrada y salida del agua de refrigeración. Para esto, se han de ver el sentido
de circulación del agua de refrigeración y la posición de las conexiones indicadas en el plano acotado.
S Realizar el cableado eléctrico del indicador de ensuciamiento del filtro de doble conexión (sólo en
engranajes de tamaños ≥ 13) y del presostato
6.6 Engranaje con calentador de inmersión
S Realizar el cableado eléctrico del termostato.
S Realizar el cableado eléctrico de los elementos calefactores de inmersión.
6.7 Engranaje con medición de la temperatura del aceite
S Realizar el cableado eléctrico del termómetro de resistencia con el aparato de evaluación (debe ser
provisto por el cliente).
6.8 Notas generales para los componentes de montaje anexo
Nota: Para el servicio y mantenimiento de los componentes descritos en los Puntos 6.4
hasta 6.7 se han de tener en cuenta las instrucciones de servicio que se indican en
el anexo dependiente del pedido.
Los datos técnicos se encuentran en la lista de aparatos realizada en dependencia
con el pedido.
BA 5017 SP 03.00

7. Puesta en servicio
7.1 Medidas antes de la puesta en servicio
7.1.1 Quitar los agentes anticorrosivos
S Desenroscar y sacar el tornillo de purga de aceite y evacuar el aceite de conservación, o el aceite

de suavización, de la carcasa a un recipiente adecuado y eliminarlo según las disposiciones vigentes.
Para realizar esta operación puede ser necesario abrir otros tornillos de purga de restos de aceite
eventualmente existentes. La posición del punto de purga del aceite se encuentra identificada
mediante su correspondiente símbolo en el plano acotado de la documentación del engranaje.
El aceite que se haya podido derramar se ha de eliminar inmediatamente con

agentes ligantes del aceite.
S Volver a enroscar el tornillo de purga de aceite.

500007-17-1
2
1
H.BV
500007-17-2
2
1
B3BV
1 Varilla de medición de aceite 4 Punto de llenado de aceite

2 Tornillo de aireación / Tornillo de cierre 5 Punto de engrase
3 Tornillo de purga de aceite 6 Rodamiento lubrificado con grasa
engranaje.
Antes de la puesta en servicio cambiar el tapón roscado amarillo de plástico

Atención! por el tornillo de aireación con capuchón (ver nota en el engranaje).
BA 5017 SP 03.00
)
7.1.2 Llenar de lubricante
S Desenroscar y sacar la varilla del nivel del aceite en el engranaje
Llenar con aceite nuevo el engranaje utilizando un filtro de llenado (finura de

Atención! filtro máx. 25 µm).
Nota: El aceite a emplear puede ser de diferentes fabricantes y se deduce de las

instrucciones de servicio BA 7300 SP que se adjuntan por separado.
Las indicaciones tales como tipo de aceite, viscosidad y cantidad necesaria se
deducen de la placa de características del engranaje.
La cantidad de aceite indicada en la placa de características se debe entender como
una cantidad aproximada. Lo decisivo para la cantidad de aceite a llenar son las
marcas en la varilla de medición de aceite.
Nota: En los engranajes con lubricación a presión o con un sistema de refrigeración del
aceite se debe llenar adicionalmente el circuito de aceite. Para ello se debe hacer
funcionar brevemente el engranaje con la bomba montada, según el Capítulo 8.
S Controlar el nivel del aceite en la carcasa del engranaje con varilla del nivel del aceite
Nota: El nivel del aceite se debe encontrar en la marca superior de la varilla de medición
de aceite.

S Atornillar de nuevo la varilla del nivel de aceite.
7.1.2.1 Cantidades de aceite
Cantidad de aceite (valor orientativo) en litros para tamaño

Tipo
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
H2BV 14 15 25 30 40 45 65 75 95 110 160 180
H3BV 14 15 25 30 40 45 66 75 85 105 130 160
B3BV 14 15 27 30 39 42 62 71 96 105 150 155
Tabla 7.1: Valores orientativos de las cantidades de aceite necesarias para instalación vertical
de los engranajes con lubricación a presión
7.2 Puesta en servicio

S Controlar el nivel del aceite en la carcasa del engranaje mediante la varilla de medición del nivel del
aceite.
Nota: Cuando el aceite se ha enfriado, el nivel del aceite se debe encontrar en la marca
superior de la varilla de medición del nivel de aceite. Si el aceite está caliente, puede
sobrepasar ligeramente la marca superior. Bajo ningún concepto debe quedar por
debajo de la marca inferior, teniendo que agregarse aceite si así ocurriese.
Engranaje con sistema de refrigeración de aceite por agua:
S Abrir por completo las válvulas de cierre en las tuberías de entrada y de salida de refrigerante en el
sistema de refrigeración.
Nota: Los datos técnicos se encuentran en la lista de aparatos realizada en dependencia
con el pedido.
BA 5017 SP 03.00

7.3 Puesta fuera de servicio
S Para poner fuera de servicio el engranaje se debe desconectar el grupo motriz.
Asegurar el grupo motriz de manera que no se pueda poner en funcionamiento
accidentalmente.
Poner un cartel de advertencia en el lugar de puesta en marcha.
S En los engranajes con refrigerador de aceite por agua, cerrar las válvulas de cierre de las tuberías
de entrada y de salida del agua de refrigeración. Si existe peligro de congelación, se debe purgar el
agua del refrigerador de aceite por agua.
S Cuando el engranaje haya de estar fuera de servicio durante un largo periodo de tiempo, se deberá
poner en funcionamiento brevemente a intervalos de unas 3 semanas, aproximadamente. En caso
de puesta fuera de servicio de más de seis meses, se deberá dotar al engranaje de conservación,
ver Punto 7.3.1.
7.3.1 Conservación interior en caso de puesta fuera de servicio de larga duración
7.3.1.1 Conservación interior con agentes conservantes
Los engranajes con lubricación por aceite a presión, refrigeración por circulación de aceite o con juntas
de eje exentas de contacto, deben funcionar sin carga y con agente conservante antes de un periodo
de almacenaje de larga duración.
Durabilidad Conservante Medidas especiales

Cerrar el engranaje, sustituir el tornillo
aireación o el filtro de aire por el tapón
hasta 24 meses Castrol Alpha SP 220 S
roscado (amarillo), (se deben volver a
reponer al hacer la puesta en servicio)
En caso de periodos de almacenaje superiores a los 24 meses se deben volver a realizar las medidas de
conservación.
Si el almacenaje tiene que durar más de 36 meses, es necesario consultar previamente con FLENDER.
Tabla 7.2: Medidas de conservación al emplear aceite mineral o aceite sintético a base de PAO
Durabilidad Conservante Medidas especiales

Cerrar el engranaje, sustituir el tornillo
Aceite de protección
aireación o el filtro de aire por el tapón
hasta 36 meses anticorrosiva especial
roscado (amarillo), (se deben volver a
TRIBOL 1390 1)
reponer al hacer la puesta en servicio)
Si el almacenaje tiene que durar más de 36 meses, es necesario consultar previamente con FLENDER.
Tabla 7.3: Medidas de conservación al emplear aceite sintético a base de PG
1) a prueba de clima tropical, resistente al agua de mar, temperatura ambiente máxima 50 °C
7.3.1.2 Ejecución de la conservación interior
S Poner fuera de servicio el engranaje procediendo tal como se describe en el Capítulo 10
“Mantenimiento y reparaciones”, purgar el aceite.
S Llenar de agente conservante según Tabla 7.2 ó 7.3 hasta la marca superior de la varilla de medición
del nivel de aceite, a través del orificio aireación o a través de la abertura de la tapa de inspección
o de montaje.
S Cerrar de nuevo el orificio de aireación
S Hacer funcionar brevemente el engranaje sin carga
S Sacar el tornillo de purga del aceite, evacuar el agente conservante a un recipiente adecuado y
eliminarlo según las normativas vigentes.
Existe peligro de quemaduras por el agente conservante caliente que sale.
Hay que llevar puestos guantes de protección.
S Volver a enroscar el tornillo de purga de aceite.

Antes de volver a poner en servicio el engranaje se deberá sustituir el tornillo
Atención! de cierre por el tornillo de aireación o por el filtro de aire.
Para ello tener también en cuenta el Punto 7.1.1.
BA 5017 SP 03.00
-
7.3.2 Conservación exterior
Durabilidad Conservante Espesor de capa Observaciones
Conservación de larga duración a

base de cera, resistente al agua de
hasta 12 meses Tectyl 846 K19 aprox. 50 µm
mar, a prueba de clima tropical,
soluble en gasolina
Tabla 7.4: Conservación exterior de extremos de ejes y demás superficies brillantes

7.3.2.1 Ejecución de la conservación exterior
S Limpiar las superficies
S Untar con grasa los anillos de obturación de los ejes para proteger los labios de obturación contra
el agente conservante
S Aplicar el agente conservante
7.4 Rodamiento lubrificado con grasa
La cámara del rodamiento se ha de llenar de grasa para rodamientos con la cantidad indicada en la
tabla 7.5 cuando el engranaje haya estado fuera de servicio durante más de 36 meses o si se ha
inspeccionado/renovado el rodamiento inferior del eje de salida.
Cantidad de grasa (valor normativo en kg) para tamaño

Tipo
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
H.BV 0.300 0.300 0.400 0.400 0.700 0.900 0.900 1.000 1.400 2.000 2.400 2.300
B3BV
Tabla 7.5: Valores normativos para cantidades de grasa necesarias para el rodamiento inferior
del eje de salida
Nota: El engranaje es suministrado ya de fábrica con carga de grasa en el rodamiento
inferior del eje de salida.
500007-17-3
H.BV
500007-17-2
B3BV
5 Punto de engrase 6 Rodamiento lubrificado con grasa

engranaje.
BA 5017 SP 03.00
0
8. Servicio
8.1 Datos de servicio generales
Durante el servicio se debe controlar el engranaje en cuanto a:
S si ha aumentado demasiado (El engranaje es adecuado para el servicio la temp. de

servicio continuo a una temp. de 90 °C si se emplea
aceite mineral. En caso de temp. más elevadas se han
de emplear aceites sintéticos, cuando sea procedente.
Son adm. temperaturas de 100 °C durante breves
periodos de tiempo, ver también Capítulo 10.)
S si han variado los ruidos del engranaje
S si hay fugas de aceite en la carcasa y en las juntas de los ejes
S si es correcto el nivel del aceite (ver también Capítulo 7. “Puesta en servicio”).
Nota: Para controlar el nivel de aceite se debe poner fuera de servicio el engranaje.
Cuando el aceite está caliente, el nivel puede sobrepasar ligeramente la marca
superior de la varilla de medición de aceite. Bajo ningún concepto debe quedar el
nivel de aceite por debajo de la marca inferior de la varilla de medición, en caso
necesario se agregará aceite.
Si durante el funcionamiento del engranaje se constatasen irregularidades o

Atención! si el presostato del sistema de refrigeración del aceite disparase la alarma, se
deberá desconectar inmediatamente el grupo motriz. La causa del fallo se ha
de averiguar valiéndose de la tabla de fallos (Capítulo 9).
En la tabla de fallos se indican los fallos posibles, sus causas, así como
propuestas para ponerles remedio.
Si no se puede constatar la causa o si no existe posibilidad de reparación con
los propios medios, recomendamos pedir los servicios de un montador del
servicio postventa de una de nuestras delegaciones (ver Capítulo 11).
BA 5017 SP 03.00
(;
9. Fallos, causas y remedios

9.1 Instrucciones generales sobre fallos
Nota: Los fallos que se presenten durante el periodo de garantía que exijan una reparación
del engranaje, sólo pueden ser reparados por el servicio postventa de FLENDER.
Recomendamos a nuestros clientes que también soliciten la intervención de nuestro
servicio postventa, incluso después de haber transcurrido el plazo de garantía,
cuando se presenten fallos cuya causa no se pueda averiguar inequívocamente.
En caso de utilización del engranaje sin atenerse a las normativas, de
Atención! modificaciones en el engranaje que no hayan sido acordadas previamente con
FLENDER o de empleo de repuestos que no sean los originales de FLENDER,
FLENDER no podrá asumir ninguna garantía para el servicio del engranaje.
Durante la reparación de los fallos, el engranaje debe estar parado por

principio.
accidentalmente.
9.2 Fallos posibles
Fallos Causas Remedios
Cambios en los ruidos del Daños en los dentados Hacer intervenir al servicio postventa.
engranaje Controlar las piezas dentadas,
cambiar si fuera necesario los
componentes dañados.
Ha aumentado la holgura de Hacer intervenir al servicio postventa.

los rodamientos Ajustar la holgura de los rodamientos.
Rodamientos defectuosos Hacer intervenir al servicio postventa.

Cambiar los rodamientos defectuosos.
Ruidos fuertes en la zona Se ha aflojado la fijación del Apretar tornillos / tuercas con el par de
de fijación del engranaje engranaje apriete prescrito.
Cambiar tornillos / tuercas deteriorados
Temperatura aumentada en Nivel de aceite demasiado bajo Controlar el nivel de aceite a temperatura
los puntos de apoyo en la carcasa ambiente, en caso necesario agregar
aceite.
Aceite demasiado viejo Comprobar cuándo se cambió el aceite por

última vez, en caso necesario cambiar el
aceite. Ver Capítulo 10.
Bomba mecánica de aceite Controlar la bomba de aceite,

defectuosa en caso necesario cambiarla.
Rodamientos defectuosos Hacer intervenir al servicio postventa.

Controlar rodamientos,
en caso necesario cambiarlos
El engranaje está sucio de Insuficiente hermetización de Hermetizar las junturas

aceite las tapas de la carcasa o de
las junturas.
Salida de aceite del Insuficiente hermetización de Controlar las juntas, en caso necesario
engranaje las tapas de la carcasa o de cambiarlas. Hermetizar las junturas.
las junturas
Retenes radiales de los ejes Controlar los retenes radiales de los ejes,
defectuosos en caso necesario cambiarlos.
Salida de grasa por el eje Retenes radiales de los ejes Controlar los retenes radiales de los ejes,
de salida defectuosos en caso necesario cambiarlos.
BA 5017 SP 03.00
(
Fallos Causas Remedios
Agua en el aceite El aceite forma espuma en el Comprobar el estado del aceite con
cárter de lubricación muestra en tubo de ensayo, para
determinar la entrada de agua. Hacer
analizar el aceite en el laboratorio químico.
Refrigerador de aceite Reparar el refrigerador de aceite, en caso

necesario cambiarlo. Completar la carga
de aceite, buscar fugas,
caso de que existan, eliminarlas.
El engranaje recibe aire frío Proteger la carcasa del engranaje con un

del ventilador de la sala de aislamiento térmico adecuado. Cerrar la
máquinas: condensa agua salida del aire o desviarla en otra dirección
con medidas constructivas.
Temperatura de servicio Nivel de aceite demasiado alto Controlar el nivel de aceite, en caso
aumentada en la carcasa del engranaje necesario corregir el nivel de aceite
Aceite demasiado viejo Comprobar cuándo se realizó el último

cambio de aceite, en caso necesario
cambiar el aceite. Ver Capítulo 10.
El aceite está muy sucio Cambiar aceite. Ver Capítulo 10.
En los engranajes con Abrir por completo las válvulas en las

refrigerador de aceite por agua: tuberías de entrada y de salida. Controlar
el flujo de líquido refrigerante es que no haya obstáculos para el libre flujo
demasiado reducido. en el refrigerador de aceite por agua.
En engranajes con refrigerador Limpiar el bloque refrigerador.

de aceite por aire: el bloque Ver Capítulo 10.
refrigerador está sucio
Temperatura del líquido Controlar la temperatura,

refrigerante demasiado en caso necesario corregirla.
elevada
Flujo demasiado reducido a Limpiar el filtro de aceite.

través del refrigerador de aceite Ver Capítulo 10.
por agua: debido a filtro de aceite
muy sucio
Bomba de aceite defectuosa Controlar el funcionamiento de la bomba

de aceite, en caso necesario reparar la
bomba de aceite o cambiarla.
En engranajes con ventilador: Limpiar la capota del ventilador y la

abertura de aspiración de la carcasa del engranaje.
capota del ventilador y/o carcasa
del engranaje muy sucios
El presostato dispara la Presión de aceite < 0.5 bar Controlar el nivel del aceite a temperatura
alarma. (En engranajes con ambiente, en caso necesario rellenar de
lubricación a presión, aceite. Controlar la bomba de aceite, en
con refrigerador de aceite caso necesario cambiarla.
por agua o con refrigerador Controlar el filtro de aceite, en caso
de aceite por aire.) necesario limpiarlo, ver Capítulo 10.
El indicador del Filtro de conexión doble sucio Cambiar la conexión del filtro de doble
ensuciamiento del filtro de conexión siguiendo las instrucciones de
conexión doble dispara la servicio individuales del filtro, limpiar el
alarma cartucho de filtro sucio
Fallo en la instalación de Seguir las instrucciones de servicio de la

alimentación de aceite instalación de alimentación de aceite
Tabla 9.1: Instrucciones sobre fallos
BA 5017 SP 03.00
(
10. Mantenimiento y reparaciones
10.1 Indicaciones generales sobre el mantenimiento
Nota: Todos los trabajos de mantenimiento y de reparación se deben hacer

meticulosamente y sólo han de ser realizados por personal minuciosamente
adiestrado.
Los periodos indicados en la Tabla 10.1 dependen mucho de las condiciones

Atención! de utilización del engranaje. Por tal motivo, aquí sólo se pueden indicar valores
promedio de los periodos, los cuales se refieren a un
tiempo diario de servicio de 24 horas

duración de la conexión ED 100 %
velocidad motriz de 1500 1/min
temperatura máx. del aceite de 90 °C (válida para aceite mineral)
100 °C (válida para aceite sintético)
Nota: Para condiciones de servicio diferentes se han de adaptar correspondientemente los

periodos.
Medidas Periodos Observaciones
Controlar la temperatura del aceite diariamente

Controlar si ha variado el ruido del diariamente
engranaje
Controlar nivel de aceite mensualmente
Controlar la estanqueidad del engranaje mensualmente
Controlar el contenido en agua del después de aprox. 400 horas de servicio, véase Punto 10.2.1
aceite como mínimo una vez al año
Primer cambio de aceite después de la después de aprox. 400 horas de servicio véase Punto 10.2.2
puesta en servicio
Siguientes cambios de aceite cada 18 meses véase Punto 10.2.2
o cada 5000 horas de servicio 1)
Limpiar filtro de aceite cada 3 meses véase Punto 10.2.3
Limpiar tornillo de aireación cada 3 meses véase Punto 10.2.4
Reprensar grasa en ejecución de tubo cada 5000 horas de servicio, véase Punto 10.2.5
de remanso de aceite mínimo una vez cada 10 meses
Limpiar ventilador, capota del ventilador coincidiendo con el cambio de aceite véase Punto 10.2.6
y carcasa del engranaje
Controlar el estado del refrigerador de coincidiendo con el cambio de aceite véase Punto 10.2.7
aceite por aire
Controlar el estado del refrigerador de coincidiendo con el cambio de aceite véase Punto 10.2.8
aceite por agua
Controlar si es firme el asiento de los después del primer cambio de aceite, véase Punto 10.2.10
tornillos de fijación luego después de cada segundo
cambio de aceite
Inspeccionar todo el engranaje aprox. 2 años, coincidiendo con algún véase Punto 10.2.11
cambio de aceite
Tabla 10.1: Trabajos de mantenimiento y de reparación
1) Cuando se trata de aceites sintéticos, los periodos pueden ser tres veces mayores.
10.2 Descripción de los trabajos de mantenimiento y de reparación
10.2.1 Comprobar el contenido en agua del aceite
El fabricante del lubricante le facilitará más información sobre la manera de comprobar el contenido
en agua del aceite.
BA 5017 SP 03.00
((
10.2.2 Cambiar el aceite
Al cambiar el aceite se tiene que volver a llenar el engranaje con el mismo tipo
Atención! de aceite utilizado anteriormente. No es admisible mezclar aceites de diferente
tipo o de diferente fabricante. En especial no es admisible mezclar aceites
sintéticos con aceites minerales u otros aceites sintéticos. Al cambiar de aceite
mineral a aceite sintético, o de aceite sintético de una determinada base a
aceite sintético de otra base diferente, se tiene que enjuagar a fondo el
engranaje con el nuevo tipo de aceite.
Al cambiar el aceite, la carcasa se tiene que enjuagar a fondo con aceite para eliminar el lodo, las
partículas de fricción y los viejos restos de aceite. Para ello se ha de emplear el mismo tipo de aceite
que el utilizado para el servicio del engranaje. Los aceites muy viscosos se han de calentar
previamente. El aceite nuevo sólo se puede introducir una vez se hayan eliminado todos los residuos.
Nota: El aceite se debería purgar estando caliente el engranaje, inmediatamente después

de la puesta fuera de servicio.
S Poner fuera de servicio el engranaje desconectando el grupo motriz

accidentalmente.
S Cerrar las válvulas de cierre en las tuberías de entrada y de salida del agente refrigerante (en los
engranajes con sistema de refrigeración de aceite por agua).
500007-17-1
2
1
H.BV
500007-17-2
2
1
B3BV
1 Varilla de medición de aceite 4 Punto de llenado de aceite

2 Tornillo de aireación / Tornillo de cierre 5 Punto de engrase
3 Tornillo de purga de aceite 6 Rodamiento lubrificado con grasa
engranaje.
BA 5017 SP 03.00
(
S Poner debajo del tornillo de purga del aceite de la carcasa del engranaje un recipiente colector
adecuado.
S Desenroscar el tornillo de aireación en la parte superior de la carcasa.
S Desenroscar el tornillo de purga del aceite y evacuar el aceite al recipiente.
Existe peligro de quemaduras debido al aceite caliente que sale. Ponerse

guantes protectores.
S Limpiar meticulosamente el imán permanente del tornillo de purga del aceite.
S Enroscar el tornillo de purga del aceite.
Nota: Controlar el estado de la junta anular (la junta anular ha sido vulcanizada sobre el
tornillo de purga del aceite), en caso necesario utilizar un tornillo de purga de aceite
nuevo.
S Limpiar el filtro de aceite del sistema de refrigeración del aceite, ver Punto 10.2.3 (en los engranajes
que tengan sistema de refrigeración del aceite).


La cantidad de aceite indicada en la placa de características se debe entender como
una cantidad aproximada. Lo decisivo para la cantidad de aceite a llenar son las
marcas en la varilla de medición de aceite.
de aceite.

10.2.3 Limpiar el filtro de aceite

con el pedido.
10.2.4 Limpiar el tornillo de aireación
El tornillo de aireación se debe limpiar cuando se haya depositado sobre él una capa de polvo – por
lo menos cada 3 meses. Para este fin, se saca el tornillo de aireación y se lava con gasolina de lavado
o un producto similar, y se deja secar o se seca con aire comprimido.
BA 5017 SP 03.00
(
10.2.5 Reprensar grasa en ejecución de tubo de remanso de aceite

accidentalmente.
S En el punto de engrase del tubo de remanso de aceite se ha de aportar posteriormente a presión

grasa lítica de rodamientos según la siguiente Tabla 10.2.
S Los puntos de engrase están provistos de engrasadores planos AM10x1 según DIN 3404.
La grasa vieja que haya salido se debe quitar y eliminar inmediatamente.
Cantidad de grasa (valor normativo en kg) para tamaño

Tipo
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
H.BV 0.030 0.030 0.040 0.040 0.050 0.050 0.075 0.075 0.100 0.100 0.140 0.140
B3BV
Tabla 10.2: Cantidades de lubricación por grasa en el modelo con tubo de remanso de aceite
500007-17-3
H.BV
500007-17-2
B3BV
5 Punto de engrase 6 Rodamiento lubrificado con grasa
engranaje.
BA 5017 SP 03.00
()
10.2.6 Limpieza del ventilador y del engranaje
Nota: Un montaje de ventilador sólo es posible en el tipo B3BV (engranaje de ruedas

cónicas).

accidentalmente.
500010-17-1
B3BV
1 Ventilador 2 Capota del ventilador
engranaje.
S Desmontar la capota del ventilador.
S Emplear un pincel de cerdas duras para eliminar la suciedad que se haya adherido al rodete, la
capota y la rejilla de protección del ventilador.
S Eliminar las áreas de corrosión que pueda haber.
S Volver a montar la capota del ventilador.
No es admisible realizar la limpieza del engranaje mediante un aparato de

Atención! limpieza a alta presión.
BA 5017 SP 03.00
(
10.2.7 Controlar el refrigerador de aceite por aire

accidentalmente.
500005-17-6
6 1
6 4
2 2
5 5
3 1 1
H2BV v 12 H2BV w 13

2 Presostato 5 Refrigerador de aceite por aire
3 Filtro basto 6 Válvula termorreguladora
engranaje.

con el pedido.
Nota: Comprobar el estado de los tornillos, en caso necesario cambiarlos.
S Quitar la suciedad del bloque refrigerador.
S Poner brevemente en servicio el engranaje.
S Poner fuera de servicio el engranaje y controlar el nivel del aceite mediante la varilla de medición del
aceite.
de aceite.
BA 5017 SP 03.00
(-
10.2.8 Controlar el refrigerador de aceite por agua

accidentalmente.
S Cerrar las válvulas de cierre en las tuberías de entrada y de salida del agente refrigerante
500005-17-7
2 4 2
6 6
5 5
3
1 1
H2BV v 12 H2BV w 13

2 Presostato 5 Refrigerador de aceite por agua
3 Filtro basto 6 Entrada y salida del agua de refrigeración
engranaje.

con el pedido.
Nota: Comprobar el estado de los tornillos, en caso necesario cambiarlos.
S Verificar el refrigerador de posibles fugas en las tuberías que conducen el agua.
S Poner brevemente en servicio el engranaje.
S Poner fuera de servicio el engranaje y controlar el nivel del aceite mediante la varilla de medición del
aceite.
de aceite.
BA 5017 SP 03.00
(0
10.2.9 Rellenar aceite
accidentalmente.
Nota: Sólo se puede utilizar el mismo tipo de aceite empleado anteriormente (véase
también Punto 10.2.2).
de aceite.
10.2.10 Controlar si asientan bien todos los tornillos de fijación
accidentalmente.
S Cerrar las válvulas de cierre en las tuberías de entrada y de salida del agente refrigerante (en los
engranajes con sistema de refrigeración de aceite por agua).
S Controlar si asientan firmemente todos los tornillos de fijación mediante una llave dinamométrica.
Par de apriete
Tamaño de rosca Clase de resistencia
(con µ = 0.20)
M 10 8.8 60 Nm
M 12 8.8 105 Nm
M 16 8.8 255 Nm
M 20 8.8 500 Nm
M 24 8.8 870 Nm
M 30 8.8 1750 Nm
M 36 8.8 3050 Nm
M 42 8.8 4950 Nm
M 48 8.8 7400 Nm
M 56 8.8 11700 Nm
Tabla 10.3: Pares de apriete
Nota: Los tornillos inutilizados se sustituirán por tornillos nuevos de igual clase de
resistencia y ejecución.
10.2.11 Inspección del engranaje
La inspección del engranaje se debería transferir a nuestro servicio postventa, ya que nuestros
técnicos en razón de su experiencia son quienes pueden juzgar con mayor fiabilidad si se tienen que
cambiar piezas del engranaje y, en caso afirmativo, cuáles.
BA 5017 SP 03.00
;
10.3 Lubricantes
Para la elección del aceite siempre es determinante la viscosidad del aceite indicada en la placa de
características del engranaje (Clase VG). La clase de viscosidad indicada tiene validez para las
condiciones de servicio convenidas en el contrato.
Cuando sean otras las condiciones de servicio, será necesario consultarnos.

De estos lubricantes conocemos la estructura y sabemos que, según nuestros conocimientos actuales
sobre resistencia de carga, seguridad de agarrotamiento, capacidad de resistencia a manchas grises,
así como tolerancia con las juntas y pintura interior, presentan unos valores que han sido tomados
como base para el diseño del engranaje.
Por lo tanto nosotros recomendamos a nuestros clientes elegir un lubricante de las instrucciones de
servicio BA 7300 SP, teniendo en cuenta la clase VG indicada en la placa de características.
Nota: Con el fin de evitar malentendidos se advierte que esta recomendación no constituye
ninguna autorización en el sentido de una garantía para la calidad del lubricante
suministrado por su proveedor. Cada fabricante de lubricante tiene que garantizar él
mismo la calidad de su propio producto.
Si usted, por un motivo importante para usted, no sigue nuestra recomendación, asume usted la
responsabilidad en cuanto a la adecuación técnica del lubricante.
11. Stocks de recambio, direcciones postventa
11.1 Stocks de recambios
Un almacenamiento de las principales piezas de recambio y de desgaste en el mismo lugar de

instalación asegura que el engranaje se encuentre siempre en condiciones para ser utilizado.
Utilice usted la lista de recambios para realizar los pedidos de piezas de recambio.
El dibujo de la pieza de recambio que aparece en la lista de recambios suministra más información
Sólo aceptamos una garantía para las piezas originales de recambio suministrada por nosotros.
Se advierte expresamente que los recambios y accesorios no suministrados

Atención! por nosotros tampoco están verificados ni autorizados por nosotros. Por tal
motivo, el montaje y/o empleo de tales productos puede modificar bajo
determinadas circunstancias negativamente las características constructivas
preestablecidas del engranaje y, por consiguiente, perjudicar la seguridad
activa y/o pasiva. Se excluye toda responsabilidad o garantía por parte de
FLENDER por daños que resulten por emplear recambios y accesorios que no
sean originales.
Tenga usted en cuenta que para los componentes individuales existen frecuentemente
especificaciones de fabricación y suministro especiales, y que nosotros le ofrecemos los recambios
según el más moderno estado de la técnica y según las últimas normas legales.
En los pedidos de piezas de recambio se indicarán los siguientes datos:
Pedido No. / Posición Tipo / Tamaño Pieza No. Cantidad de piezas
BA 5017 SP 03.00

11.2 Direcciones del servicio postventa
Para hacer pedidos de piezas de recambio o requerir los servicios de un montador del servicio
postventa diríjase primero a FLENDER AG.
FLENDER Germany
A. FRIEDR. FLENDER AG
46393 Bocholt - Tel.: (0 28 71) 92-0 - Fax: (0 28 71) 92 25 96
E-mail: contact@flender.com S www.flender.com
Dirección de envío: Alfred - Flender - Strasse 77 - 46395 Bocholt
A. FRIEDR. FLENDER AG - Kupplungswerk Mussum

Industriepark Bocholt - Schlavenhorst 100 - 46395 Bocholt - Tel.: (0 28 71) 92 28 68 - Fax: (0 28 71) 92 25 79
E-mail: couplings@flender.com S www.flender.com
A. FRIEDR. FLENDER AG - Werk Friedrichsfeld
Am Industriepark 2 - 46562 Voerde - Tel.: (0 28 71) 92-0 - Fax: (0 28 71) 92 25 96
A. FRIEDR. FLENDER AG - Getriebewerk Penig
Thierbacher Strasse 24 - 09322 Penig - Tel.: (03 73 81) 60 - Fax: (03 73 81) 8 02 86
E-mail: ute.tappert@flender.com S www.flender.com
FLENDER - TÜBINGEN GMBH
72007 Tübingen - Tel.: (0 70 71) 7 07-0 - Fax: (0 70 71) 70 74 00
E-mail: sales-motox@flender-motox.com S www.flender.com
Dirección de envío: Bahnhofstrasse 40 - 72072 Tübingen
LOHER GMBH
94095 Ruhstorf - Tel.: (0 85 31) 3 90 - Fax: (0 85 31) 3 94 37
E-mail: info@loher.de S www.loher.de
Dirección de envío: Hans-Loher-Strasse 32 - 94099 Ruhstorf
FLENDER SERVICE GMBH

44607 Herne - Tel.: (0 23 23) 940-0 - Fax: (0 23 23) 940 333
E-mail: infos@flender-service.com S www.flender-service.com
24h Service Hotline +49 (0) 17 22 81 01 00
Dirección de envío: Südstrasse 111 - 44625 Herne
A. FRIEDR. FLENDER AG - FLENDER GUSS

Obere Hauptstrasse 228-230 - 09228 Chemnitz / Wittgensdorf - Tel.: (0 37 22) 64-0 - Fax: (0 37 22) 64 21 89
E-mail: flender.guss@flender-guss.com S www.flender-guss.de
BA 5017 SP 03.00

Germany
A. FRIEDR. FLENDER AG
46393 BOCHOLT - TEL.: (0 28 71) 92 - 0 - FAX: (0 28 71) 92 25 96
DIRECCIÓN DE ENVÍO: ALFRED - FLENDER - STRASSE 77 - 46395 BOCHOLT
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
VERTRIEBSZENTRUM BOCHOLT 46393 Bocholt
Alfred-Flender-Strasse 77, 46395 Bocholt
Tel.: (0 28 71) 92 - 0
Fax: (0 28 71) 92 - 14 35
E-mail: vz.bocholt@flender.com
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
VERTRIEBSZENTRUM STUTTGART 70472 Stuttgart

Friolzheimer Strasse 3, 70499 Stuttgart
Tel.: (07 11) 7 80 54 - 51
Fax: (07 11) 7 80 54 - 50
E-mail: vz.stuttgart@flender.com
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
VERTRIEBSZENTRUM MÜNCHEN 85750 Karlsfeld

Liebigstrasse 14, 85757 Karlsfeld
Tel.: (0 81 31) 90 03 - 0
Fax: (0 81 31) 90 03 - 33
E-mail: vz.muenchen@flender.com
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
VERTRIEBSZENTRUM BERLIN Schlossallee 8, 13156 Berlin

Tel.: (0 30) 91 42 50 58
Fax: (0 30) 47 48 79 30
E-mail: vz.berlin@flender.com
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
BA 5017 SP 03.00
(
FLENDER International (2003-12-01)
EUROPE Flender - Graffenstaden SA PORTUGAL

1, rue du Vieux Moulin Rodamientos FEYC, S.A
67400 Illkirch-Graffenstaden R. Jaime Lopes Dias, 1668 CV
AUSTRIA B.P. 84 1750 - 124 Lissabon
Flender Ges.m.b.H. Phone: +351 (0) 21 - 7 54 24 10
67402 Illkirch - Graffenstaden
Industriezentrum Nö-Süd Fax: +351 (0) 21 - 7 54 24 19
Phone: +33 (0) 3 - 88 67 60 00
Strasse 4, Objekt 14, Postfach 132 E-mail: info@rfportugal.com
Fax: +33 (0) 3 - 88 67 06 17
2355 Wiener Neudorf
E-mail: flencomm@flender-graff.com
Phone: +43 (0) 22 36 6 45 70 ROMANIA
Fax: +43 (0) 22 36 6 45 70 10 A. Friedr. Flender AG
E-mail: office@flender.at GREECE
Flender Hellas Ltd. Branch Office
www.flender.at 98 - 106, Soseaua Mihai Bravu
2, Delfon str., 11146 Athens
Phone: +30 210 - 2 91 72 80 Sector 2, Bloc D 16, Sc 1, Apartament 4
BELGIUM & LUXEMBOURG 021331 Bucuresti - 2
N.V. Flender Belge S.A. Fax: +30 210 - 2 91 71 02
E-mail: flender@otenet.gr Phone: +40 (0) 21 - 4 91 10 08
Cyriel Buyssestraat 130 Fax: +40 (0) 21 - 4 91 10 08
1800 Vilvoorde Mangrinox S.A. E-mail: flender@fx.ro
Phone: +32 (0) 2 - 2 53 10 30 14, Grevenon str., 11855 Athens
Fax: +32 (0) 2 - 2 53 09 66 Phone: +30 210 - 3 42 32 01 RUSSIA
E-mail: sales@flender.be Fax: +30 210 - 3 45 99 28 F & F GmbH
E-mail: mangrinox@otenet.gr Tjuschina 4-6
BULGARIA 191119 St. Petersburg
A. Friedr. Flender AG HUNGARY Phone: +7 (0) 8 12 - 3 20 90 34
Branch Office A. Friedr. Flender AG Fax: +7 (0) 8 12 - 3 40 27 60
c/o Auto - Profi GmbH Branch Office E-mail: flendergus@mail.spbnit.ru
Alabin Str. 52, 1000 Sofia Bécsi Út 3-5, 1023 Budapest
Phone: +359 (0) 2 - 9 80 66 06 Phone: +36 (0) 1 - 3 45 07 90 / 91 SLOVAKIA
Fax: +359 (0) 2 - 9 80 33 01 Fax: +36 (0) 1 - 3 45 07 92 A. Friedr. Flender AG
E-mail: sofia@auto-profi.com E-mail: jambor.laszlo@axelero.hu Branch Office
Vajanského 49
P.O. Box 286, 08001 Presov
CROATIA / SLOVENIA ITALY Phone: +421 (0) 51 - 7 70 32 67
BOSNIA-HERZEGOVINA Flender Cigala S.p.A. Fax: +421 (0) 51 - 7 70 32 67
A. Friedr. Flender AG Parco Tecnologico Manzoni E-mail: micenko.flender@nextra.sk
Branch Office Palazzina G
c/o HUM - Naklada d.o.o. Viale delle industrie, 17 SPAIN
Mandroviceva 3, 10000 Zagreb 20040 Caponago (MI) Flender Ibérica S.A.
Phone: +385 (0) 1 - 2 30 60 25 Phone: +39 (0) 02 - 95 96 31 Poligono Industrial San Marcos
Fax: +385 (0) 1 - 2 30 60 24 Fax: +39 (0) 02 -95 74 39 30 Calle Morse, 31 (Parcela D-15)
E-mail: flender@hi.hinet.hr E-mail: info@flendercigala.it 28906 Getafe - Madrid
Phone: +34 (0) 91 - 6 83 61 86
CZECH REPUBLIC THE NETHERLANDS Fax: +34 (0) 91 - 6 83 46 50
A. Friedr. Flender AG Flender Nederland B.V. E-mail: f-iberica@flender.es
Branch Office Industrieterrein Lansinghage www.flender.es
Hotel DUO, Teplicka 17 Platinastraat 133
19000 Praha 9 2718 ST Zoetermeer SWEDEN
Phone: +420 (0) 2 - 83 88 23 00 Postbus 725 Flender Scandinavia
Fax: +420 (0) 2 - 83 88 22 05 2700 AS Zoetermeer Äsenvägen 2
E-mail: flender_pumprla@hotelduo.cz Phone: +31 (0) 79 - 3 61 54 70 44339 Lerum
Fax: +31 (0) 79 - 3 61 54 69 Phone: +46 (0) 302 - 1 25 90
DENMARK E-mail: sales@flender.nl Fax: +46 (0) 302 - 1 25 56
Flender Scandinavia A/S www.flender.nl E-mail: kontakt@flenderscandinavia.com
Rugmarken 35 B, 3520 Farum www.flenderscandinavia.com
SALES OFFICES:
Phone: +45 - 70 22 60 03 Flender Nederland B.V.
Fax: +45 - 44 99 16 62 SWITZERLAND
Lage Brink 5-7 Flender AG
E-mail: kontakt@flenderscandinavia.com 7317 BD Apeldoorn
www.flenderscandinavia.com Zeughausstr. 48
Postbus 1073 5600 Lenzburg
7301 BH Apeldoorn Phone: +41 (0) 62 8 85 76 00
ESTHONIA / LATVIA / LITHUANIA Phone: +31 (0) 55 - 5 27 50 00 Fax: +41 (0) 62 8 85 76 76
Flender Branch Office Fax: +31 (0) 55 - 5 21 80 11 E-mail: info@flender.ch
Addinol Mineralöl Marketing OÜ E-mail: tom.alberts@flender-group.com www.flender.ch
Suur-Söjamäe 32 Bruinhof B.V.
11415 Tallinn / Esthonia Boterdiep 37 TURKEY
Phone: +372 (0) 6 - 27 99 99 3077 AW Rotterdam Flender Güc Aktarma Sistemleri
Fax: +372 (0) 6 - 27 99 90 Postbus 9607 Sanayi ve Ticaret Ltd. Sti.
E-mail: flender@addinol.ee 3007 AP Rotterdam IMES Sanayi, Sitesi
www.addinol.ee Phone: +31 (0) 10 - 4 97 08 08 E Blok 502. Sokak No. 22
Fax: +31 (0) 10 - 4 82 43 50 81260 Dudullu - Istanbul
FINLAND E-mail: info@bruinhof.nl Phone: +90 (0) 2 16 - 4 66 51 41
Flender Oy www.bruinhof.nl Fax: +90 (0) 2 16 3 64 59 13
Ruosilantie 2 B, 00390 Helsinki E-mail: cuzkan@flendertr.com
Phone: +358 (0) 9 - 4 77 84 10 www.flendertr.com
NORWAY
Fax: +358 (0) 9 - 4 36 14 10 Elektroprosess AS
E-mail: webmaster@flender.fi UKRAINE
Frysjaveien 40, 0884 Oslo A. Friedr. Flender AG
www.flender.fi Postboks 165, Kjelsås Branch Office, c/o DIV - Deutsche Industrie-
0411 Oslo vertretung, Prospect Pobedy 44
FRANCE Phone: +47 (0) 2 - 2 02 10 30 252057 Kiev
Flender s.a.r.l. Fax: +47 (0) 2 - 2 02 10 50 / 51 Phone: +380 (0) 44 - 4 46 80 49
3, rue Jean Monnet - B.P. 5 E-mail: post@elektroprosess.no Fax: +380 (0) 44 - 2 30 29 30
78996 Elancourt Cedex E-mail: flender@div.kiev.ua
Phone: +33 (0) 1 - 30 66 39 00 POLAND
Fax: +33 (0) 1 - 30 66 35 13 A. Friedr. Flender AG UNITED KINGDOM & EIRE
E-mail: sales@flender.fr Branch Office Flender Power Transmission Ltd.
SALES OFFICES: Przedstawicielstwo w Polsce Thornbury Works, Leeds Road
Flender s.a.r.l. ul. Wyzwolenia 27 Bradford
36, rue Jean Broquin 43 - 190 Mikolów West Yorkshire BD3 7EB
69006 Lyon Phone: +48 (0) 32 - 2 26 45 61 Phone: +44 (0) 12 74 65 77 00
Phone: +33 (0) 4 - 72 83 95 20 Fax: +48 (0) 32 - 2 26 45 62 Fax: +44 (0) 12 74 66 98 36
Fax: +33 (0) 4 - 72 83 95 39 E-mail: flender@pro.onet.pl E-mail: flenders@flender-power.co.uk
E-mail: sales@flender.fr www.flender.pl www.flender-power.co.uk
BA 5017 SP 03.00

SERBIA-MONTENEGRO SALES OFFICES: USA
ALBANIA / MACEDONIA Flender Brasil Ltda. Flender Corporation
A. Friedr. Flender AG Rua James Watt, 142 950 Tollgate Road
Branch Office conj. 142 - Brooklin Novo P.O. Box 1449, Elgin, IL. 60123
c/o G.P.Inzenjering d.o.o. 04576 - 050, São Paulo - SP Phone: +1 (0) 8 47 - 9 31 19 90
III Bulevar 54 / 19 Phone: +55 (0) 11 - 55 05 99 33 Fax: +1 (0) 8 47 - 9 31 07 11
11070 Novi Beograd Fax: +55 (0) 11 - 55 05 30 10 E-mail: flender@flenderusa.com
Phone: +381 (0) 11 - 60 44 73 E-mail: flesao@uol.com.br www.flenderusa.com
Fax: +381 (0) 11 - 3 11 67 91 Flender Corporation
E-mail: flender@eunet.yu Flender Brasil Ltda. Service Centers West
Rua Campos Salles, 1095 4234 Foster Ave.
sala 04 - Centro 14015 - 110, Bakersfield, CA. 93308
Ribeirão Preto - SP
AFRICA Phone: +55 (0) 16 - 6 35 15 90
Phone: +1 (0) 6 61 - 3 25 44 78
Fax: +1 (0) 6 61 - 3 25 44 70
Fax: +55 (0) 16 - 6 35 11 05 E-mail: flender1@lightspeed.net
NORTH AFRICAN COUNTRIES E-mail: flender.ribpreto@uol.com.br
Please refer to Flender s.a.r.l. VENEZUELA
3, rue Jean Monnet - B.P. 5 F. H. Transmisiones S.A.
78996 Elancourt Cedex CANADA Urbanización Buena Vista
Phone: +33 (0) 1 - 30 66 39 00 Flender Power Transmission Inc. Calle Johan Schafer o Segunda Calle
Fax: +33 (0) 1 - 30 66 35 13 215 Shields Court, Units 4 - 6 Municipio Sucre, Petare
E-mail: sales@flender.fr Markham, Ontario L3R 8V2 Caracas
Phone: +1 (0) 9 05 - 3 05 10 21 Phone: +58 (0) 2 - 21 52 61
Fax: +1 (0) 9 05 - 3 05 10 23 Fax: +58 (0) 2 - 21 18 38
EGYPT E-mail: flender@ca.inter.net E-mail: fhtransm@telcel.net.ve
Sons of Farid Hassanen www.flenderpti.com www.fhtransmisiones.com
81 Matbaa Ahlia Street
Boulac 11221, Cairo SALES OFFICE: ASIA
Phone: +20 (0) 2 - 5 75 15 44 Flender Power Transmission Inc.
Fax: +20 (0) 2 - 5 75 17 02 34992 Bemina Court BANGLADESH / SRI LANKA
E-mail: hussein@sonfarid.com Abbotsford - Vancouver Please refer to Flender Limited
B.C. V3G 1C2 No. 2 St. George’s Gate Road
Phone: +1 (0) 6 04 - 8 59 66 75 5th Floor, Hastings
SOUTH AFRICA Fax: +1 (0) 6 04 - 8 59 68 78 Kolkata - 700 022
Flender Power Transmission (Pty.) Ltd. E-mail: tvickers@rapidnet.net Phone: +91 (0) 33 - 2 23 05 45
Cnr. Furnace St & Quality Rd. Fax: +91 (0) 33 - 2 23 18 57
P.O. Box 131, Isando 1600 E-mail: flender@flenderindia.com
Johannesburg CHILE / ARGENTINA / BOLIVIA
Phone: +27 (0) 11 - 5 71 20 00 ECUADOR / PARAGUAY / URUGUAY PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Fax: +27 (0) 11 - 3 92 24 34 Flender Cono Sur Limitada Flender Power Transmission
E-mail: sales@flender.co.za Avda. Galvarino Gallardo 1534 (Tianjin) Co. Ltd.
www.flender.co.za Providencia, Santiago ShuangHu Rd.- Shuangchen Rd. West
Phone: +56 (0) 2 - 2 35 32 49 Beichen Economic Development
SALES OFFICES: Area (BEDA)
Flender Power Transmission (Pty.) Ltd. Fax: +56 (0) 2 - 2 64 20 25
E-mail: flender@flender.cl Tianjin 300400
Unit 3 Marconi Park Phone: +86 (0) 22 - 26 97 20 63
9 Marconi Crescent, Montague Gardens www.flender.cl
Fax: +86 (0) 22 - 26 97 20 61
P.O. Box 37291 E-mail: flender@flendertj.com
Chempet 7442, Cape Town www.flendertj.com
Phone: +27 (0) 21 - 5 51 50 03 COLOMBIA
Fax: +27 (0) 21 - 5 52 38 24 A.G.P. Representaciones Ltda. Flender Power Transmission
E-mail: sales@flender.co.za Flender Liaison Office Colombia (Tianjin) Co. Ltd.
Av Boyaca No 23A Beijing Office
Flender Power Transmission (Pty.) Ltd. 50 Bodega UA 7-1, Bogotá C-415, Lufthansa Center
Unit 3 Goshawk Park Phone: +57 (0) 1 - 5 70 63 53 50 Liangmaqiao Road, Chaoyang District
Falcon Industrial Estate Fax: +57 (0) 1 - 5 70 73 35 Beijing 100016
P.O. Box 1608 E-mail: aguerrero@agp.com.co Phone: +86 (0) 10 - 64 62 21 51
New Germany 3620, Durban www.agp.com.co Fax: +86 (0) 10 - 64 62 21 43
Phone: +27 (0) 31 - 7 05 38 92 E-mail: beijing@flenderprc.com.cn
Fax: +27 (0) 31 - 7 05 38 72 Flender Power Transmission
E-mail: sales@flender.co.za MEXICO (Tianjin) Co. Ltd.
Flender Power Transmission (Pty.) Ltd. Flender de Mexico S.A. de C.V. Shanghai Office
9 Industrial Crescent, Ext. 25 17, Pte, 713 Centro 1101-1102 Harbour Ring Plaza
P.O. Box 17609, Witbank 1035 72000 Puebla 18 Xizang Zhong Rd.
Phone: +27 (0) 13 - 6 92 34 38 Phone: +52 (0) 2 22 - 2 37 19 00 Shanghai 200 001
Fax: +27 (0) 13 - 6 92 34 52 Fax: +52 (0) 2 22 - 2 37 11 33 Phone: +86 (0) 21 - 53 85 31 48
E-mail: sales@flender.co.za E-mail: szugasti@flendermexico.com Fax: +86 (0) 21 - 53 85 31 46
www.flendermexico.com E-mail: shanghai@flenderprc.com.cn
Flender Power Transmission (Pty.) Ltd. Flender Power Transmission
Unit 14 King Fisher Park, Alton SALES OFFICES: (Tianjin) Co. Ltd.
Cnr. Ceramic Curve & Alumina Allee Flender de Mexico S.A. de C.V. Wuhan Office
P.O. Box 101995 Lago Nargis No. 38 Rm. 1503, Jianyin Building,
Meerensee 3901, Richards Bay Col. Granada, 709 Jianshedadao
Phone: +27 (0) 35 - 7 51 15 63 11520 Mexico, D.F. Wuhan 430 015
Fax: +27 (0) 35 - 7 51 15 64 Phone: +52 (0) 55 - 52 54 30 37 Phone: +86 (0) 27 - 85 48 67 15
E-mail: sales@flender.co.za Fax: +52 (0) 55 - 55 31 69 39 Fax: +86 (0) 27 - 85 48 68 36
E-mail: info@flendermexico.com E-mail: wuhan@flenderprc.com.cn
Flender de Mexico S.A. de C.V. Flender Power Transmission
AMERICA Ave. San Pedro No. 231-5 (Tianjin) Co. Ltd.
Col. Miravalle Guangzhou Office
64660 Monterrey, N.L. Rm. 2802, Guangzhou International
ARGENTINA Electronics Tower
Chilicote S.A. Phone: +52 (0) 81 - 83 63 82 82
Fax: +52 (0) 81 - 83 63 82 83 403 Huanshi Rd. East
Avda. Julio A. Roca 546
E-mail: info@flendermexico.com Guangzhou 510 095
C 1067 ABN Buenos Aires
Phone: +86 (0) 20 - 87 32 60 42
Phone: +54 (0) 11 - 43 31 66 10 Fax: +86 (0) 20 - 87 32 60 45
Fax: +54 (0) 11 - 43 31 42 78 E-mail: guangzhou@flenderprc.com.cn
E-mail: chilicote@chilicote.com.ar PERU
Potencia Industrial E.I.R.L. Flender Power Transmission
Calle Victor González Olaechea N° 110 (Tianjin) Co. Ltd.
BRASIL Urb. La Aurora - Miraflores, Chengdu Office
Flender Brasil Ltda. P.O.Box: Av. 2 de Mayo N° 679 G-6 / F Guoxin Mansion,
Rua Quatorze, 60 - Cidade Industrial Of.108-Miraflores 77 Xiyu Street
32211 - 970, Contagem - MG Casilla N° 392, Lima 18 Chengdu 610 015
Phone: +55 (0) 31 - 33 69 21 00 Phone: +51 (0) 1 - 2 42 84 68 Phone: +86 (0) 28 - 86 19 83 72
Fax: +55 (0) 31 - 33 69 21 66 Fax: +51 (0) 1 - 2 42 08 62 Fax: +86 (0) 28 - 86 19 88 10
E-mail: vendas@flenderbrasil.com E-mail: cesarzam@chavin.rcp.net.pe E-mail: chengdu@flenderprc.com.cn
BA 5017 SP 03.00

Flender Power Transmission ISRAEL SINGAPORE
(Tianjin) Co. Ltd. Greenshpon Engineering Works Ltd. Flender Singapore Pte. Ltd.
Shenyang Office Haamelim Street 20 13 A, Tech Park Crescent
Rm. 2-163, Tower I, City Plaza Shenyan P.O. Box 10108, 26110 Haifa Singapore 637843
206 Nanjing Street (N), Heping District Phone: +972 (0) 4 - 8 72 11 87 Phone: +65 (0) - 68 97 94 66
Shenyang 110 001 Fax: +972 (0) 4 - 8 72 62 31 Fax: +65 (0) - 68 97 94 11
Phone: +86 (0) 24 - 23 34 20 48 E-mail: sales@greenshpon.com E-mail: flender@singnet.com.sg
Fax: +86 (0) 24 - 23 34 20 46 www.greenshpon.com www.flender.com.sg
E-mail: shenyang@flenderprc.com.cn
JAPAN SYRIA
Flender Power Transmission Flender Japan Co., Ltd. Misrabi Co & Trading
(Tianjin) Co. Ltd. WBG Marive East 21F Mezzeh Autostrade Transportation
Xi’an Office Nakasa 2 - 6 Building 4/A, 5th Floor
Rm. 302, Shaanzi Zhong Da Mihama-ku, Chiba-shi P.O. Box 12450, Damascus
International Mansion Chiba 261-7121 Phone: +963 (0) 11 - 6 11 67 94
30 Southern Rd. Phone: +81 (0) 43 - 2 13 39 30 Fax: +963 (0) 11 - 6 11 09 08
Xi’an 710 002 Fax: +81 (0) 43 - 2 13 39 55 E-mail: ismael.misrabi@gmx.net
Phone: +86 (0) 29 - 7 20 32 68 E-mail: contact@flender-japan.com
Fax: +86 (0) 29 - 7 20 32 04
E-mail: xian@flenderprc.com.cn TAIWAN
KOREA A. Friedr. Flender AG
Flender Ltd. Taiwan Branch Company
INDIA 7th Fl. Dorim Bldg. 1F, No. 5, Lane 240
Flender Limited 1823 Bangbae-Dong, Seocho-Ku, Nan Yang Street, Hsichih
Head Office: Seoul 137-060 Taipei Hsien 221
No. 2 St. George’s Gate Road Phone: +82 (0) 2 - 34 78 63 37 Phone: +886 (0) 2 - 26 93 24 41
5th Floor, Hastings Fax: +82 (0) 2 - 34 78 63 45 Fax: +886 (0) 2 - 26 94 36 11
Kolkata - 700 022 E-mail: flender@unitel.co.kr E-mail: flender_tw@flender.com.tw
Phone: +91 (0) 33 - 22 23 05 45
Fax: +91 (0) 33 - 22 23 08 30 KUWAIT THAILAND
E-mail: flender@flenderindia.com South Gulf Company Flender Singapore Pte. Ltd.
Al-Reqai, Plot 1, Block 96 Representative Office
Flender Limited P.O. Box 26229, Safat 13123 23/F M Thai Tower, All Seasons Place
Industrial Growth Centre Phone: +965 (0) - 4 88 39 15 87 Wireless Road, Phatumwan
Rakhajungle, Nimpura Fax: +965 (0) - 4 88 39 14 Bangkok 10330
Kharagpur - 721 302 E-mail: adelameen@hotmail.com Phone: +66 (0) 2 - 6 27 91 09
Phone: +91 (0) 3222 - 23 33 07 Fax: +66 (0) 2 - 6 27 90 01
Fax: +91 (0) 3222 - 23 33 64 LEBANON E-mail: christian.beckers@flender.th.com
E-mail: works@flenderindia.com Gabriel Acar & Fils s.a.r.l.
Dahr-el-Jamal VIETNAM
SALES OFFICES: Zone Industrielle, Sin-el-Fil Flender Singapore Pte. Ltd.
Flender Limited B.P. 80484, Beyrouth Representative Office
Eastern Regional Sales Office Phone: +961 (0) 1 - 49 82 72 Suite 6/6A, 16F Saigon Tower
No. 2 St. George’s Gate Road Fax: +961 (0) 1 - 49 49 71 29 Le Duan Street, District 1
5th Floor, Hastings E-mail: gacar@beirut.com Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam
Kolkata - 700 022
Phone: +84 (0) 8 - 8 23 62 97
Phone: +91 (0) 33 - 22 23 05 45
MALAYSIA Fax: +84 (0) 8 - 8 23 62 88
Fax: +91 (0) 33 - 22 23 08 30 E-mail: flender@hcm.vnn.vn
Flender Singapore Pte. Ltd.
E-mail: ero@flenderindia.com
Representative Office
Flender Limited 37 A - 2, Jalan PJU 1/39
Western Regional Sales Office Dataran Prima AUSTRALIA
Plot No. 23, Sector 19 - C 47301 Petaling Jaya
Vashi, Navi Mumbai - 400 705 Selangor Darul Ehsan
Phone: +91 (0) 22 - 27 65 72 27 Phone: +60 (0) 3 - 78 80 42 63
Fax: +60 (0) 3 - 78 80 42 73 Flender (Australia) Pty. Ltd.
Fax: +91 (0) 22 - 27 65 72 28 9 Nello Place, P.O. Box 6047
E-mail: wro@flenderindia.com E-mail: flender@tm.net.my
Wetherill Park
Flender Limited N.S.W. 2164, Sydney
PAKISTAN Phone: +61 (0) 2 - 97 56 23 22
Southern Regional Sales Office Please refer to
41 Nelson Manickam Road Fax: +61 (0) 2 - 97 56 48 92, 97 56 14 92
A. Friedr. Flender AG
Aminjikarai, E-mail: sales@flender.com.au
46393 Bocholt
Chennai - 600 029 www.flender.com.au
Phone: +49 (0) 28 71 - 92 22 59
Phone: +91 (0) 44 - 23 74 39 21 Fax: +49 (0) 28 71 - 92 15 16 SALES OFFICES:
Fax: +91 (0) 44 - 23 74 39 19 E-mail: ludger.wittag@flender.com Flender (Australia) Pty. Ltd.
E-mail: sro@flenderindia.com Suite 3, 261 Centre Rd.
PHILIPPINES Bentleigh, VIC 3204 Melbourne
Flender Limited Phone: +61 (0) 3 - 95 57 08 11
Northern Regional Sales Office Flender Singapore Pte. Ltd.
Representative Office Fax: +61 (0) 3 - 95 57 08 22
209-A, Masjid Moth, 2nd Floor E-mail: sales@flender.com.au
(Behind South Extension II) 28/F, Unit 2814
New Delhi - 110 049 The Enterprise Centre Flender (Australia) Pty. Ltd.
Phone: +91 (0) 11 - 26 25 02 21 6766 Ayala Avenue corner Suite 5, 1407 Logan Rd.
Fax: +91 (0) 11 - 26 25 63 72 Paeso de Roxas, Makati City Mt. Gravatt
E-mail: nro@flenderindia.com Phone: +63 (0) 2 - 8 49 39 93 QLD 4122, Brisbane
Fax: +63 (0) 2 - 8 49 39 17 Phone: +61 (0) 7 - 34 22 23 89
E-mail: roman@flender.com.ph Fax: +61 (0) 7 - 34 22 24 03
INDONESIA E-mail: sales@flender.com.au
Flender Singapore Pte. Ltd. BAHRAIN / IRAQ / JORDAN / LYBIA Flender (Australia) Pty. Ltd.
Representative Office OMAN / QATAR / U.A.E. / YEMEN
Please refer to A. Friedr. Flender AG Suite 2 403 Great Eastern Highway
Perkantoran Puri Niaga II W.A. 6104, Redcliffe - Perth
Jalan Puri Kencana Blok J1 Middle East Sales Office
IMES Sanayi Sitesi Phone: +61 (0) 8 - 94 77 41 66
No. 2i, Kembangan Fax: +61 (0) 8 - 94 77 65 11
Jakarta Barat 11610 E Blok 502, Sokak No. 22
81260 Dudullu - Istanbul E-mail: sales@flender.com.au
Phone: +62 (0) 21 - 5 82 86 24
Fax: +62 (0) 21 - 5 82 86 23 Phone: +90 (0) 2 16 - 4 99 66 23
Fax: +90 (0) 2 16 - 3 64 59 13 NEW ZEALAND
E-mail: bobwall@cbn.net.id Please refer to Flender (Australia) Pty. Ltd.
E-mail: meso@flendertr.com
9 Nello Place, P.O. Box 6047
IRAN SAUDI ARABIA Wetherill Park
Cimaghand Co. Ltd. South Gulf Co. N.S.W. 2164, Sydney
P.O. Box 15745-493 Al-Khobar, Dahran Str. Phone: +61 (0) 2 - 97 56 23 22
No. 13, 16th East Street Middle East Trade Center Fax: +61 (0) 2 - 97 56 48 92
Beyhaghi Ave., Argentina Sq. 3rd floor, Flat # 23 E-mail: sales@flender.com.au
Tehran 15156 P.O. Box 20434 31952 Al-Khobar
Phone: +98 (0) 21 - 8 73 02 14 Phone: +966 (0) 3 - 8 87 53 32
Fax: +98 (0) 21 - 8 73 39 70 Fax: +966 (0) 3 - 8 87 53 31
E-mail: info@cimaghand.com E-mail: adelameen@hotmail.com
BA 5017 SP 03.00
)
12. Declaración del fabricante
Declaración del fabricante

conforme con la Directiva CE sobre máquinas 98/37/CE Anexo II B
Con la presente declaramos que el
Engranaje de ventilador de los tipos

H.BV y B.BV
Tamaños 5 a 16
descritas en las presentes instrucciones de servicio están destinados al montaje en una máquina,
y su puesta en marcha está prohibida, hasta que se constate que la máquina, en la que se montan
estos componentes, satisface las disposiciones de las directrices CE (versión original 98/37/CE
incluido las modificaciones posteriores).
Con esta declaración de fabricante se han tenido en cuenta todas las normas armonizadoras -
que afectan a nuestro producto -, que se han publicado por la Comisión de la CE en la Gaceta
Oficial de la Comunidad Europea.
Bocholt, 2000-03-30
Firma (responsable del producto)
BA 5017 SP 03.00

Instrucciones de servicio
BA 7300 SP 01.05
Recomendación de lubricantes
TEXACO
A. Friedr. Flender AG ⋅ 46393 Bocholt ⋅ Tel. 02871/92-0 ⋅ Telefax 02871/92-2596 ⋅ www.flender.com

Indice
1. Lubricantes para engranajes 3

1.1 Calidad necesaria de los aceites para reductores 3
1.1.1 Grupos de aceite 4
1.1.2 Temperaturas del aceite 4
1.1.3 Duraciones de uso generales del aceite 4
1.1.4 Cambio de aceite 4
Tabla A : Aceites lubricantes para reductores FLENDER de engranajes rectos,
cónicos y planetarios 5
Tabla B : Aceites lubricantes para engranajes de tornillo sinfín FLENDER 14
Tabla C : Aceites lubricantes para motores reductores FLENDER 18
1.2 Grasas lubricantes para reductores y rodamientos 23
Tabla D : Grasas lubricantes para reductores y rodamientos FLENDER 23
2. Lubricantes para acoplamientos ZAPEX 25

2.1 Calidad necesaria de los aceites y grasas 25
2.1.1 Clases de aceite y de grasa 25
2.1.2 Cambio de aceite y de grasa 25
Tabla E : Aceites y grasas lubricantes para acoplamientos FLENDER ZAPEX 26
BA 7300 SP 01.05

1. Lubricantes para engranajes
Esta recomendación de lubricantes no es válida para los engranajes de

Atención! WINERGY AG.
Para engranajes de ejes, reductores de barco y reductores turbo son aplicables

también recomendaciones especiales sobre los lubricantes.
Según indicaciones del fabricante, se fabrican o suministran los aceites para reductores citados en
estas instrucciones de servicio, en todo el mundo, en las calidades exigidas por FLENDER
(Excepciones: Observe las notas a pie de página en las siguientes tablas).
1.1 Calidad necesaria de los aceites para reductores
Para los reductores FLENDER sólo son admisibles aceites de la calidad CLP, que de acuerdo con
DIN 51517-3 contienen aditivos para el aumento de la protección contra la corrosión y la resistencia
al envejecimiento, así como para la reducción del desgaste en el campo del rozamiento mixto. La carga
admisible de gripado en la prueba FZG según DIN 51354-2 tiene que alcanzar, en condiciones de
ensayo, A/8,3/90 el nivel de fuerza de deterioro 12 o más de 12. En la prueba de rodamientos FE-8
según DIN 51819-3, en condiciones de ensayo D-7,5/80-80, el desgaste de las tablas tiene que ser
inferior a 30 mg y el de la jaula inferior a 100 mg.
Además, los aceites para reductores deben presentar los siguientes requisitos de calidad prescritos
por FLENDER:
S Suficiente estabilidad de punteado gris según el ensayo de punteado gris FVA 54

a) para los engranajes cilíndricos, cónicos y planetarios en la tabla A
se aplica el nivel de fuerza de deterioro GF 10 o más de 10,
así como la estabilidad de punteado gris GFT = elevada
b) para todos los demás engranajes en las tablas B y C
se aplica el nivel de fuerza de deterioro GF de 9 o más de 9
S Bajo espumado con menos del 15 % de formación de espuma en el ensayo de espuma FLENDER
S Compatibilidad con las juntas de elastómeros de los retenes radiales de eje usados en los engranajes
FLENDER
S Compatibilidad con restos del aceite de puesta en marcha y conservación empleado por FLENDER
S Compatibilidad con la pintura interna del reductor empleada por FLENDER
S Compatibilidad con juntas líquidas entre superficies enroscables.
Para el uso en engranajes de tornillo sinfín, además:
S Reducido desgaste, elevada estabilidad de picaduras y alto grado de rendimiento (baja temperatura)
en el ensayo de engranaje de tornillo sinfín cilíndrico.
Nota: Un empleo de aceites para reductores que no corresponden a los requisitos de

calidad indicados arriba excluye la obligación de garantía de FLENDER. Se hace
constar expresamente que cada fabricante o suministrador de aceite es responsable
de la calidad de su producto.
Para la selección del aceite son siempre determinantes el gruppo de aceite y la clase de viscosidad
del aceite indicados en la placa de datos del reductor. Con empleo de otra viscosidad o también de otro
aceite de engrase diferente que el aquí recomendado, el usuario asume la responsabilidad de la aptitud
técnica del lubricante. Para reducir al mínimo el riesgo técnico en un caso de esta clase, el aceite usado
tiene que ser conforme a la calidad CLP según la norma DIN 51517-3, la cual se debería hacer
confirmar por el fabricante del aceite.
¡Se tienen que cumplir el gruppo del aceite y la viscosidad del aceite indicados
Atención! en las placas de características y las indicaciones de las Instrucciones de
servicio de los reductores!
¡Sólo se admiten desviaciones previa consulta con FLENDER!

BA 7300 SP 01.05

1.1.1 Grupos de aceite
En las tablas A, B y C se distinguen cinco grupos de aceite:
S Aceites minerales (Aceite MIN)
S Poliglicoles (Aceite PG)
S Poli-a-olefina (Aceite PAO)
S Aceites degradables biológicamente (Aceite BIO)
S Aceites inofensivos fisiológicamente con autorización según USDA H1 (Aceite PHY).
1.1.2 Temperaturas del aceite
Los aceites sintéticos en comparación con los aceites minerales, tienen un mayor margen de
temperatura de empleo, así como un índice de viscosidad más elevado, es decir, un curso de
viscosidad - temperatura más plano. Valores de referencia para el margen de temperatura de empleo:
en aceites minerales aprox. –10 °C hasta +90 °C (por breve tiempo +100 °C),
en poliglicoles y en poli-a-olefinas, aprox. –20 °C hasta +100 °C (por breve tiempo +110 °C),
en aceites degradables biológicamente (ésteres sintéticos) aprox. –15 °C hasta +90 °C.
Nota: Las temperaturas de aplicación superiores e inferiores de los diferentes aceites para
reductores se pueden diferenciar mucho de los valores citados. Para condiciones de
servicio situadas fuera de los citados márgenes de temperatura se tienen que
observar el punto de inflamación y/o el punto de fluidez de los aceites. Estos datos
y propiedades de los aceites para reductores, así como otros, se tomarán siempre
de las Hojas de Datos Técnicos del fabricante del aceite (para este fin, se tiene que
consultar a FLENDER).
1.1.3 Duraciones de uso generales del aceite
Por los fabricantes de aceites se indican como valores mínimos las duraciones de uso siguientes
a 80 °C de temperatura media del aceite dentro del reductor, sin modificaciones importantes de las
calidades de los aceites:
– para aceites minerales, aceites degradables biológicamente y aceites inofensivos
fisiológicamente, 2 años o 10 000 horas de funcionamiento
– para poli-a-olefinas y poliglicoles, 4 años o 20 000 horas de funcionamiento.
Nota: Las duraciones de uso efectivas pueden ser más elevadas, a temperaturas por
encima de 80 °C, también más bajas. Aquí vale la regla de que un aumento de
temperatura de unos 10 K, aproximadamente reduce a la mitad la duración de uso.
1.1.4 Cambio de aceite
El grado de limpieza del aceite influencia la seguridad de funcionamiento y la duración útil del aceite
y del reductor. Por tanto, siempre se debe prestar atención en tener un aceite limpio en el reductor. Para
el primer cambio de aceite después de la puesta en servicio del reductor, así como para los posteriores
cambios de aceite, hay que observar las especificaciones dadas en las Instrucciones de servicio del
reductor. Con grandes cantidades de aceite, se recomienda hacer dependiente una depuración
necesaria del aceite o un cambio necesario del aceite, del resultado del análisis del aceite.
En los cambios de aceite con la misma clase de aceite, se deben mantener las cantidades residuales
de aceite dentro del reductor tan pequeñas como sea posible. En general, pequeñas cantidades
residuales no causan problemas. No se deben mezclar entre sí los aceites para reductores de
diferentes clases y fabricantes. En caso necesario hay que hacer confirmar por el fabricante del aceite
nuevo, la compatibilidad con los restos del aceite antiguo. Al cambiar entre clases de aceite muy
distintas o aceites con aditivos muy distintos, pero particularmente en el cambio de poliglicoles a otro
aceite para reductores o viceversa, el reductor se tiene que aclarar siempre a fondo con el aceite nuevo.
Los restos del aceite antiguo se deben retirar por completo del reductor.
Los aceites para reductores en ningún caso se deben mezclar con otros
Atención! productos. No está permitido el lavado con petróleo o con otros productos de
limpieza, porque siempre quedan retenidos restos dentro del reductor.
BA 7300 SP 01.05

Tabla A Aceites lubricantes para reductores FLENDER de engranajes rectos,
Viscosidad cónicos y planetarios
Cifra ISO-VG
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante a 40 °C
(mm2/s)
A11 VG 1000
CLP 680 S Degol BG 680 Plus

A12 VG 680 ECO GEAR 680 M Degol BMB 680 1)
GEAR RSX 680

GEAR RSX 460
Aceites
minerales A14 VG 320
GEAR RSX 320
ECO GEAR 320 M Degol BMB 320 1)
(Aceite MIN) CLP 220 S Degol BG 220 Plus
GEAR RSX 220

GEAR RSX 150
Degol BG 100 Plus

A17 VG 100 ECO GEAR 100 M
Degol BMB 100 1)
GEAR RSX 100
A21 VG 1000 Degol GS 1000
A22 VG 680 Degol GS 680 GEAR VSG 680

Poliglicoles
(Aceite PG)
A27 VG 100 GEAR VSG 100
4111 XEP
A31 VG 1000 5999 XEP
SYNTOGEAR PE 1000
4680 XEP SYNTOGEAR PE 680

A32 VG 680 ECO GEAR 680 S
5680 XEP EVOGEAR SX 680
5460 XEP
Degol PAS 460
EVOGEAR SX 460
Poli-a-
olefina A34 VG 320 ECO GEAR 320 S
4320 XEP
Degol PAS 320
SYNTOGEAR PE 320
(Aceite PAO) 4220 XEP SYNTOGEAR PE 220
5220 XEP
Degol PAS 220
EVOGEAR SX 220
4150 XEP
5150 XEP
Degol PAS 150 SYNTOGEAR PE 150
A37 VG 100 ECO GEAR 100 S 4100 XEP SYNTOGEAR PE 100
A41 VG 1000
A42 VG 680
Aceites A43 VG 460

degradables
biológica- A44 VG 320
mente
A45 VG 220
(Aceite BIO)
A46 VG 150
A47 VG 100
A51 VG 1000
A52 VG 680
Aceites A53 VG 460

inofensivos
fisiológica- A54 VG 320
mente
A55 VG 220
(Aceite PHY)
A56 VG 150
A57 VG 100
1) con proporción de sólidos MoS2
BA 7300 SP 01.05

Cifra ISO-VG
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante a 40 °C
(mm2/s)
A11 VG 1000 Beslux Gear XP 1000
A12 VG 680 Energol GR-XF 680 Beslux Gear XP 680

Aceites
minerales A14 VG 320 Energol GR-XF 320 Beslux Gear XP 320
(Aceite MIN)
A16 VG 150 Energol GR-XF 150
A17 VG 100
A21 VG 1000 Beslux Sincart W 1000
BERUSYNTH
A22 VG 680 EP 680
Enersyn SG-XP 680 Beslux Sincart W 680
BERUSYNTH
A23 VG 460 EP 460
Poliglicoles BERUSYNTH
A24 VG 320 EP 320
(Aceite PG)
BERUSYNTH
A25 VG 220 EP 220
BERUSYNTH
A26 VG 150 EP 150
BERUSYNTH
A27 VG 100 EP 100
Enersyn SG-XP 100
Bel-Ray Beslux Gearsint

A31 VG 1000 Synth. Gear Oil 6698 XP 1000
A32 VG 680 Synth. Gear Oil 6696 XP 680
A33 VG 460 Synth. Gear Oil 6694
Enersyn EP-XF 460
XP 460
Poli-a-
olefina A34 VG 320
Bel-Ray
Enersyn EP-XF 320
Beslux Gearsint
Synth. Gear Oil 6692 XP 320
(Aceite PAO) Bel-Ray Beslux Gearsint
Enersyn EP-XF 220
XP 220
Enersyn EP-XF 150
XP 150
A37 VG 100 Enersyn EP-XF 100
A41 VG 1000
A42 VG 680
Aceites A43 VG 460

degradables
mente
A45 VG 220
(Aceite BIO)
A46 VG 150
A47 VG 100
A51 VG 1000
A52 VG 680
Aceites A53 VG 460

inofensivos
mente
A55 VG 220
(Aceite PHY)
A56 VG 150
A57 VG 100
BA 7300 SP 01.05

Cifra ISO-VG
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante a 40 °C
(mm2/s)
classic performance
Optigear BM 1000 CEPSA
A11 VG 1000 Alpha SP 1000
Tribol 1100 / 1000 AEROGEAR 1000
Optigear BM 680 CEPSA
A12 VG 680 Alpha SP 680
Tribol 1100 / 680 AEROGEAR 680
Alpha SP 460 Optigear BM 460 CEPSA
A13 VG 460 Alpha MAX 460 Tribol 1100 / 460 AEROGEAR 460
Aceites
Alpha MAX 320 Tribol 1100 / 320 AEROGEAR 320
(Aceite MIN) Alpha SP 220 Optigear BM 220 CEPSA
A15 VG 220 Alpha MAX 220 Tribol 1100 / 220 AEROGEAR 220
Alpha SP 150 Optigear BM 150
A16 VG 150 Alpha MAX 150 Tribol 1100 / 150
A17 VG 100 Alpha MAX 100 Tribol 1100 / 100
A21 VG 1000 Tribol 800 / 1000
A22 VG 680 Tribol 800 / 680
A23 VG 460 Tribol 800 / 460

Poliglicoles
A24 VG 320 Tribol 800 / 320
(Aceite PG)
A25 VG 220 Tribol 800 / 220
A26 VG 150 Tribol 800 / 150
A27 VG 100 Tribol 800 / 100
A31 VG 1000
AEROGEAR
A32 VG 680 Alphasyn EP 680
SYNT 680
Optigear Synth. A 460 Optigear Synth. X 460 AEROGEAR
A33 VG 460 Alphasyn EP 460 Tribol 1710 / 460 SYNT 460
Poli-a-
olefina A34 VG 320
Alphasyn EP 320 Tribol 1710 / 320 SYNT 320
(Aceite PAO) Optigear Synth. A 220 Optigear Synth. X 220 AEROGEAR
A35 VG 220 Alphasyn EP 220 Tribol 1710 / 220 SYNT 220
A36 VG 150 Alphasyn EP 150
A37 VG 100
A41 VG 1000
RIVOLTA
A42 VG 680 S.G.L. 680
Aceites Tribol BioTop
A43 VG 460 1418 / 460
degradables
RIVOLTA Tribol BioTop
mente S.G.L. 320 1418 / 320
A45 VG 220
(Aceite BIO) S.G.L. 220 1418 / 220
Tribol BioTop
A46 VG 150 1418 / 150
RIVOLTA
A47 VG 100 S.G.L. 100
A51 VG 1000
A52 VG 680 Optileb GT 680
Aceites A53 VG 460 Optileb GT 460

inofensivos
fisiológica- A54 VG 320 Optileb GT 320
mente
(Aceite PHY)
BA 7300 SP 01.05

Cifra ISO-VG
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante a 40 °C
(mm2/s)
A11 VG 1000 RENOLIN CLP1000 PLUS
RENOLIN CLP 680

A12 VG 680 SPARTAN EP 680 3)
RENOLIN CLP 680 PLUS
RENOLIN CLP 460
A13 VG 460 EP Industrial G 460 SPARTAN EP 460 3)
Aceites RENOLIN CLP 460 PLUS
minerales A14 VG 320 EP Industrial G 320 SPARTAN EP 320 3) RENOLIN CLP 320
(Aceite MIN) RENOLIN CLP 220
A15 VG 220 EP Industrial G 220 SPARTAN EP 220 3)
RENOLIN CLP 150
RENOLIN CLP 100
A21 VG 1000 Breox SL 1000 RENOLIN PG 1000

Poliglicoles
(Aceite PG)
A27 VG 100 RENOLIN PG 100
A31 VG 1000
A32 VG 680 RENOLIN UNISYN

CLP 680

Poli-a- CLP 460
olefina A34 VG 320 RENOLIN UNISYN
CLP 320
(Aceite PAO) RENOLIN UNISYN
A35 VG 220 CLP 220

CLP 150

CLP 100
A41 VG 1000 PLANTOGEAR

1000 S

680 S
Aceites A43 VG 460 PLANTOGEAR
degradables 460 S
biológica- A44 VG 320 PLANTOGEAR
mente 320 S

(Aceite BIO) 220 S

150 S

100 S
A51 VG 1000 Breox FGL 1000 2)
A52 VG 680 Breox FGL 680 2)
Aceites A53 VG 460 Breox FGL 460 2)

inofensivos
fisiológica- A54 VG 320 Breox FGL 320 2)
mente
(Aceite PHY)
A57 VG 100
2) Aceite PG
3) ESSO garantiza las calidades exigidas por FLENDER sólo para productos procedentes de Europa
BA 7300 SP 01.05

Cifra ISO-VG
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante a 40 °C
(mm2/s)
GEARMASTER
A11 VG 1000 CLP 1000
GEARMASTER Klüberoil
A12 VG 680 CLP 680 GEM 1 - 680 N
A13 VG 460 CLP 460 GEM 1 - 460 N
Aceites
CLP 320 GEM 1 - 320 N
(Aceite MIN) GEARMASTER Klüberoil
A15 VG 220 CLP 220 GEM 1 - 220 N
A16 VG 150 CLP 150 GEM 1 - 150 N
A17 VG 100 CLP 100 GEM 1 - 100 N
GEARMASTER Klübersynth.
A21 VG 1000 PGP 1000
Ucolub BSL-IG 1000
GH 6 - 1000
A22 VG 680 PGP 680
Ucolub BSL-IG 680
GH 6 - 680
A23 VG 460 PGP 460
Ucolub BSL-IG 460
GH 6 - 460
Poliglicoles GEARMASTER Klübersynth.
A24 VG 320 PGP 320
Ucolub BSL-IG 320
GH 6 - 320
(Aceite PG)
A25 VG 220 PGP 220
Ucolub BSL-IG 220
GH 6 - 220
A26 VG 150 PGP 150
Ucolub BSL-IG 150
GH 6 - 150
GEARMASTER
A27 VG 100 PGP 100
Ucolub BSL-IG 100
GEARMASTER
A31 VG 1000 SYN 1000
A32 VG 680 SYN 680 GEM 4 - 680 N
GEARMASTER Galp Transgear Klübersynth.
A33 VG 460 SYN 460
Ucolub N-PA 460
SMP 460 GEM 4 - 460 N
Poli-a-
olefina A34 VG 320
GEARMASTER
Ucolub N-PA 320 Galp Transgear Klübersynth.
SYN 320 SMP 320 GEM 4 - 320 N
(Aceite PAO) GEARMASTER Galp Transgear Klübersynth.
A35 VG 220 SYN 220
Ucolub N-PA 220
SMP 220 GEM 4 - 220 N
A36 VG 150 SYN 150 SMP 150 GEM 4 - 150 N
GEARMASTER
A37 VG 100 SYN 100
GEARMASTER
A41 VG 1000 ECO 1000
GEARMASTER
A42 VG 680 ECO 680
Aceites GEARMASTER
A43 VG 460 ECO 460
degradables
mente ECO 320 GEM 2 - 320
A45 VG 220
(Aceite BIO) ECO 220 GEM 2 - 220
GEARMASTER
A46 VG 150 ECO 150
GEARMASTER
A47 VG 100 ECO 100
A51 VG 1000 Ucolub BSL 1000 4)
Aceites A53 VG 460 Ucolub BSL 460 4)

inofensivos
fisiológica- A54 VG 320 Ucolub BSL 320 4)
mente
(Aceite PHY)
A57 VG 100
4) Aceite PG
BA 7300 SP 01.05

Cifra ISO-VG
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante a 40 °C
(mm2/s)
GEAR COMPOUND
A11 VG 1000 PLUS 1000
609 ALMASOL Vari- GEAR COMPOUND
A12 VG 680 Purpose Gear Lubricant
Mobilgear XMP 680
PLUS 680
Mobilgear XMP 460
PLUS 460
Aceites
minerales A14 VG 320 605 ALMASOL Vari-
Mobilgear XMP 320
GEAR COMPOUND
Purpose Gear Lubricant PLUS 320
(Aceite MIN) 607 ALMASOL Vari- GEAR COMPOUND
Mobilgear XMP 220
PLUS 220
Mobilgear XMP 150
PLUS 150
Mobilgear XMP 100
PLUS 100
A21 VG 1000
A22 VG 680
A23 VG 460
Poliglicoles
A24 VG 320
(Aceite PG)
A25 VG 220
A26 VG 150
A27 VG 100
GEAR SINTEC
A31 VG 1000 Mobil SHC 639
CLP 1000
megol Gearoil Synth GEAR SINTEC
A32 VG 680 680
Mobilgear SHC XMP680
CLP 680
megol Gearoil Synth Mobil SHC 634 GEAR SINTEC
A33 VG 460 460 Mobilgear SHC XMP460 CLP 460
Poli-a-
olefina A34 VG 320
320 Mobilgear SHC XMP320 CLP 320
(Aceite PAO) megol Gearoil Synth Mobil SHC 630 GEAR SINTEC
A35 VG 220 220 Mobilgear SHC XMP220 CLP 220
Mobil SHC 629 GEAR SINTEC
A36 VG 150 Mobilgear SHC XMP150 CLP 150
GEAR SINTEC
A37 VG 100 CLP 100
A41 VG 1000
A42 VG 680
Aceites A43 VG 460

degradables
mente
A45 VG 220
(Aceite BIO)
A46 VG 150
A47 VG 100
A51 VG 1000
A52 VG 680
Aceites A53 VG 460

inofensivos
mente
A55 VG 220
(Aceite PHY)
A56 VG 150
A57 VG 100
BA 7300 SP 01.05

Cifra ISO-VG
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante a 40 °C
(mm2/s)
A11 VG 1000 OMV gear HST 1000 PO Gravis MP 1000
TRANSOL
A12 VG 680 OMV gear HST 680
PREMIUM 680 PO Gravis MP 680
TRANSOL
PREMIUM 460 PO Gravis MP 460
Aceites
minerales A14 VG 320 OMV gear HST 320
TRANSOL
PO Gravis MP 320 Q8 Goya NT 320
PREMIUM 320
(Aceite MIN) TRANSOL
PREMIUM 220 PO Gravis MP 220 Q8 Goya NT 220
A16 VG 150 OMV gear HST 150 PO Gravis MP 150 Q8 Goya NT 150
A17 VG 100 OMV gear HST 100 PO Gravis MP 100
A21 VG 1000
A22 VG 680
A23 VG 460
Poliglicoles
A24 VG 320
(Aceite PG)
A25 VG 220
A26 VG 150
A27 VG 100
TRANSGEAR
A31 VG 1000 PE 1000 PO Gravis SP 1000
TRANSGEAR
A32 VG 680 PE 680 PO Gravis SP 680
TRANSGEAR
A33 VG 460 PE 460 PO Gravis SP 460 Q8 El Greco 460
Poli-a-
olefina A34 VG 320
TRANSGEAR
PO Gravis SP 320 Q8 El Greco 320
PE 320
(Aceite PAO) TRANSGEAR
A35 VG 220 PE 220 PO Gravis SP 220 Q8 El Greco 220
A36 VG 150 Q8 El Greco 150
A37 VG 100
A41 VG 1000
A42 VG 680
Aceites A43 VG 460

degradables
mente
A45 VG 220
(Aceite BIO)
A46 VG 150
A47 VG 100
A51 VG 1000
A52 VG 680
Aceites A53 VG 460

inofensivos
mente
A55 VG 220
(Aceite PHY)
A56 VG 150
A57 VG 100
BA 7300 SP 01.05

Cifra ISO-VG
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante a 40 °C
(mm2/s)
TEXACO
KASSILLA GMP 1000
A11 VG 1000 CARTER EP 1000
KASSILLA GMP 680
A12 VG 680 LoadWay EP 680
CARTER EP 680
Meropa WM 460 KASSILLA GMP 460
A13 VG 460 Shell Omala F 460 LoadWay EP 460
Auriga EP 460 CARTER EP 460
Aceites
minerales A14 VG 320 Shell Omala F 320 LoadWay EP 320 Meropa WM 320 KASSILLA GMP 320
(Aceite MIN) Meropa WM 220 KASSILLA GMP 220
A15 VG 220 Shell Omala F 220 LoadWay EP 220
A16 VG 150 Meropa WM 150

Auriga EP 150
A17 VG 100 Meropa WM 100

Auriga EP 100
Shell Tivela S 1000
A21 VG 1000 Shell Cassida WG 1000
Shell Tivela S 680
Shell Tivela S 460
Poliglicoles Shell Tivela S 320
(Aceite PG)
Shell Tivela S 220
Shell Tivela S 150
A27 VG 100
A31 VG 1000 CARTER SH 1000
A32 VG 680 Shell Omala HD 680 CARTER SH 680
A33 VG 460 Shell Omala HD 460 CARTER SH 460

Poli-a-
olefina A34 VG 320 Shell Omala HD 320 MERETA 320 CARTER SH 320
(Aceite PAO)
A35 VG 220 Shell Omala HD 220 MERETA 220 CARTER SH 220
A36 VG 150 Shell Omala HD 150 MERETA 150 CARTER SH 150
A37 VG 100
A41 VG 1000
A42 VG 680
Aceites A43 VG 460 Shell Omala EPB 460

degradables
biológica- A44 VG 320 Shell Omala EPB 320
mente
A45 VG 220 Shell Omala EPB 220
(Aceite BIO)
Shell Cassida WG 1000

A51 VG 1000 5)

A52 VG 680 5)
Aceites Shell Cassida WG 460 Keystone Nevastane

A53 VG 460 5) SY 460 5)
inofensivos
Shell Cassida WG 320 Keystone Nevastane
5) SY 320 5)
mente
Shell Cassida WG 220 Keystone Nevastane
A55 VG 220 5) SY 220 5)
(Aceite PHY)
A56 VG 150
A57 VG 100
5) Aceite PG
BA 7300 SP 01.05

Cifra ISO-VG
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante a 40 °C
(mm2/s)
VECO MATRANOL
A11 VG 1000 XP 1000
VECO MATRANOL
A12 VG 680 TUNGEAR 680 6) COMPOUND MP 680
XP 680
VECO MATRANOL
Aceites XP 460
minerales A14 VG 320 TUNGEAR 320 6)
VECO MATRANOL
COMPOUND MP 320
XP 320
(Aceite MIN) VECO MATRANOL
XP 220
A16 VG 150 COMPOUND MP 150
A17 VG 100
A21 VG 1000
A22 VG 680
A23 VG 460
Poliglicoles
A24 VG 320
(Aceite PG)
A25 VG 220
A26 VG 150
A27 VG 100
A31 VG 1000
A32 VG 680
A33 VG 460
Poli-a-
olefina A34 VG 320
(Aceite PAO)
A35 VG 220
A36 VG 150
A37 VG 100
A41 VG 1000
A42 VG 680
Aceites A43 VG 460

degradables
mente
A45 VG 220
(Aceite BIO)
A46 VG 150
A47 VG 100
A51 VG 1000
A52 VG 680
Aceites A53 VG 460

inofensivos
mente
A55 VG 220
(Aceite PHY)
A56 VG 150
A57 VG 100
6) TUNGEAR está autorizada para Brasil bajo la designación GEAROIL en las viscosidades VG 220-680. Distribución: Tribotechnica Lubrificantes Sinteticos Sao Paulo.
TUNGEAR está autorizada para la India bajo la designación Mox-Active Gear oil en las viscosidades VG 220,320,460. Distribución:OKS Speciality Lubricants Bombay.
BA 7300 SP 01.05

Tabla B Aceites lubricantes para engranajes de tornillo sinfín FLENDER
Viscosidad
Cifra ISO-VG
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante a 40 °C
(mm2/s)
B11 VG 1000 Energol GR-XP 1000
B12 VG 680 Degol BG 680 Energol GR-XP 680

Aceites
minerales B14 VG 320 Degol BG 320 Energol GR-XP 320
(Aceite MIN)
B21 VG 1000 Degol GS 1000
B22 VG 680 Degol GS 680 GEAR VSG 680 BERUSYNTH Enersyn SG-XP 680
EP 680
EP 460
B24 VG 320 Degol GS 320 GEAR VSG 320
EP 320
Enersyn SG-XP 320
(Aceite PG)
EP 220
EP 150
B27 VG 100 GEAR VSG 100 BERUSYNTH Enersyn SG-XP 100

EP 100
B31 VG 1000
B32 VG 680
B33 VG 460
Poli-a-
olefina B34 VG 320
(Aceite PAO)
B35 VG 220
B36 VG 150
B37 VG 100
B41 VG 1000
B42 VG 680
Aceites B43 VG 460

degradables
biológica- B44 VG 320
mente
B45 VG 220
(Aceite BIO)
B46 VG 150
B47 VG 100
B51 VG 1000
B52 VG 680
Aceites B53 VG 460

inofensivos
fisiológica- B54 VG 320
mente
B55 VG 220
(Aceite PHY)
B56 VG 150
B57 VG 100
BA 7300 SP 01.05

Viscosidad
Cifra ISO-VG
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante a 40 °C
(mm2/s) performance
Optigear BM 1000
B11 VG 1000 Tribol 1100 / 1000
Optigear BM 680
B12 VG 680 SPARTAN EP 680 1)
Tribol 1100 / 680
Optigear BM 460
Aceites Tribol 1100 / 460
minerales B14 VG 320
Optigear BM 320
SPARTAN EP 320 1)
Tribol 1100 / 320
(Aceite MIN) Optigear BM 220
Tribol 1100 / 220
Optigear BM 150
Tribol 1100 / 150
Optigear BM 100
Tribol 1100 / 100
Optiflex A 1000
B21 VG 1000 Tribol 800 / 1000
Breox SL 1000 RENOLIN PG 1000
Optiflex A 680
B22 VG 680 Tribol 800 / 680
Optiflex A 460
B23 VG 460 Tribol 800 / 460
Poliglicoles Optiflex A 320
B24 VG 320 Tribol 800 / 320
(Aceite PG)
Optiflex A 220
B25 VG 220 Tribol 800 / 220
Optiflex A 150
B26 VG 150 Tribol 800 / 150
Optiflex A 100
B27 VG 100 Tribol 800 / 100
RENOLIN PG 100
B31 VG 1000
B32 VG 680
B33 VG 460
Poli-a-
olefina B34 VG 320
(Aceite PAO)
B35 VG 220
B36 VG 150
B37 VG 100
B41 VG 1000
B42 VG 680
Aceites B43 VG 460

degradables
mente
B45 VG 220
(Aceite BIO)
B46 VG 150
B47 VG 100
B51 VG 1000 Breox FGL 1000 2)
Tribol FoodProof
B52 VG 680 Breox FGL 680 2)
1800 / 680 2)
Aceites Tribol FoodProof
inofensivos 1800 / 460 2)
Tribol FoodProof
Breox FGL 320 2)
mente 1800 / 320 2)
Tribol FoodProof
(Aceite PHY) 1800 / 220 2)
B57 VG 100
2) Aceite PG
BA 7300 SP 01.05

Viscosidad
Cifra ISO-VG
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante a 40 °C
(mm2/s)
B11 VG 1000
B12 VG 680 Klüberoil Mobilgear 636

GEM 1 - 680 N Mobilgear XMP 680

Aceites GEM 1 - 460 N Mobilgear XMP 460
minerales B14 VG 320 Klüberoil Mobilgear 632
(Aceite MIN) Klüberoil Mobilgear 630
B15 VG 220 GEM 1 - 220 N Mobilgear XMP 220


GEARMASTER SYNTHESO Shell Tivela S 1000
B21 VG 1000 PGP 1000 D 1000 EP Shell Cassida WG 1000
Poliglicoles GEARMASTER SYNTHESO Shell Tivela S 320
(Aceite PG)
GEARMASTER SYNTHESO
B26 VG 150 PGP 150 D 150 EP
Shell Tivela S 150
GEARMASTER SYNTHESO
B27 VG 100 PGP 100 D 100 EP
B31 VG 1000
B32 VG 680
B33 VG 460
Poli-a-
olefina B34 VG 320
(Aceite PAO)
B35 VG 220
B36 VG 150
B37 VG 100
B41 VG 1000
B42 VG 680
Aceites B43 VG 460

degradables
mente
B45 VG 220
(Aceite BIO)
B46 VG 150
B47 VG 100

B51 VG 1000 3)

B52 VG 680 3)
Aceites Shell Cassida WG 460

B53 VG 460 3)
inofensivos
3)
mente
B55 VG 220 3)
(Aceite PHY)
B56 VG 150
B57 VG 100
3) Aceite PG
BA 7300 SP 01.05

Viscosidad
Cifra ISO-VG
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante a 40 °C
(mm2/s)
B11 VG 1000
B12 VG 680 Ersolan 680

Aceites
minerales B14 VG 320 Ersolan 320
(Aceite MIN)
B21 VG 1000
B22 VG 680
B23 VG 460
Poliglicoles
B24 VG 320
(Aceite PG)
B25 VG 220
B26 VG 150
B27 VG 100
B31 VG 1000
B32 VG 680
B33 VG 460
Poli-a-
olefina B34 VG 320
(Aceite PAO)
B35 VG 220
B36 VG 150
B37 VG 100
B41 VG 1000
B42 VG 680
Aceites B43 VG 460

degradables
mente
B45 VG 220
(Aceite BIO)
B46 VG 150
B47 VG 100
B51 VG 1000
B52 VG 680
Aceites B53 VG 460

inofensivos
mente
B55 VG 220
(Aceite PHY)
B56 VG 150
B57 VG 100
BA 7300 SP 01.05

Tabla C Aceites lubricantes para motores reductores FLENDER
Viscosidad
Cifra ISO-VG
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante a 40 °C
(mm2/s)
C15 VG 220 ECO GEAR 220 M Degol BG 220 1) GEAR RSX 220
Aceites
minerales C16 VG 150
GEAR RSX 150
ECO GEAR 150 M Degol BG 150 1)
(Aceite MIN) Degol BG 100 Plus
C17 VG 100 ECO GEAR 100 M Degol BG 100 1) GEAR RSX 100
C23 VG 460 Degol GS 460 GEAR VSG 460

Poliglicoles
(Aceite PG)

C33 VG 460 ECO GEAR 460 S 5460 XEP Degol PAS 460 EVOGEAR SX 460
Poli-a-
olefina C34 VG 320 ECO GEAR 320 S
4320 XEP
Degol PAS 320
SYNTOGEAR PE 320
(Aceite PAO) 4220 XEP SYNTOGEAR PE 220
C35 VG 220 ECO GEAR 220 S 5220 XEP Degol PAS 220 EVOGEAR SX 220
Aceites C44 VG 320
degradables
biológica- C45 VG 220
mente
C46 VG 150
(Aceite BIO)
Aceites C53 VG 460
inofensivos
fisiológica- C54 VG 320
mente
C55 VG 220
(Aceite PHY)

Viscosidad
Cifra ISO-VG
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante a 40 °C
(mm2/s)
Energol GR-XF 220 Beslux Gear
C15 VG 220 Energol GR-XP 220 XP 220
Aceites
minerales C16 VG 150 Energol GR-XF 150
(Aceite MIN)
C17 VG 100
BERUSYNTH
C23 VG 460 EP 460 Enersyn SG-XP 460 Beslux Sincart W 460
(Aceite PG)
BERUSYNTH

C33 VG 460 Synth. Gear Oil 6694
Enersyn EP-XF 460 XP 460
Poli-a-
olefina C34 VG 320
Bel-Ray
Enersyn EP-XF 320
Beslux Gearsint
Synth. Gear Oil 6692 XP 320
(Aceite PAO) Bel-Ray Beslux Gearsint
C35 VG 220 Synth. Gear Oil 6690
Enersyn EP-XF 220 XP 220
Aceites C44 VG 320
degradables
mente
C46 VG 150
(Aceite BIO)
Aceites C53 VG 460
inofensivos
mente
C55 VG 220
(Aceite PHY)
BA 7300 SP 01.05

Viscosidad
Cifra ISO-VG
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante a 40 °C
(mm2/s) classic performance
C15 VG 220 Alpha MAX 220 Tribol 1100 / 220 AEROGEAR 220
Aceites
Alpha MAX 150 Tribol 1100 / 150
(Aceite MIN) Alpha SP 100 Optigear BM 100
C17 VG 100 Alpha MAX 100 Tribol 1100 / 100
Optiflex A 460
C23 VG 460 Tribol 800 / 460
Poliglicoles Optiflex A 320
C24 VG 320 Tribol 800 / 320
(Aceite PG)
Optiflex A 220
C25 VG 220 Tribol 800 / 220
C33 VG 460 Alphasyn EP 460 Tribol 1710 / 460 SYNT 460
Poli-a-
olefina C34 VG 320
Alphasyn EP 320 Tribol 1710 / 320 SYNT 320
(Aceite PAO) Optigear Synth. A 220 Optigear Synth. X 220 AEROGEAR
C35 VG 220 Alphasyn EP 220 Tribol 1710 / 220 SYNT 220
Aceites RIVOLTA Tribol BioTop
C44 VG 320 S.G.L. 320 1418 / 320
degradables
mente S.G.L. 220 1418 / 220
Tribol BioTop
C46 VG 150
(Aceite BIO) 1418 / 150
Aceites Optileb GT 460
C53 VG 460 FoodProof 1800/460 2)
inofensivos
Optileb GT 320
mente FoodProof 1800/320 2)
Optileb GT 220
C55 VG 220 FoodProof 1800/220 2)
(Aceite PHY)
2) Aceite PG

Viscosidad
Cifra ISO-VG
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante a 40 °C
(mm2/s)
RENOLIN CLP 220
C15 VG 220 EP Industrial G 220 SPARTAN EP 220 3) RENOLIN CLP 220 PLUS
Aceites
minerales C16 VG 150 SPARTAN EP 150 3) RENOLIN CLP 150
(Aceite MIN) RENOLIN CLP 100
C17 VG 100 SPARTAN EP 100 3) RENOLIN CLP 100 PLUS
C23 VG 460 Breox SL 460 RENOLIN PG 460

Poliglicoles
(Aceite PG)
C33 VG 460 RENOLIN UNISYN

Poli-a- CLP 460
olefina C34 VG 320 RENOLIN UNISYN
CLP 320
(Aceite PAO) RENOLIN UNISYN
C35 VG 220 CLP 220
Aceites C44 VG 320 PLANTOGEAR
degradables 320 S
biológica- C45 VG 220 PLANTOGEAR
mente 220 S
C46 VG 150 PLANTOGEAR

(Aceite BIO) 150 S
Aceites C53 VG 460 Breox FGL 460 4)
inofensivos
fisiológica- C54 VG 320 Breox FGL 320 4)
mente
C55 VG 220 Breox FGL 220 4)
(Aceite PHY)
4) Aceite PG
BA 7300 SP 01.05

Viscosidad
Cifra ISO-VG
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante a 40 °C
(mm2/s)
C15 VG 220 CLP 220 GEM 1 - 220 N
Aceites
CLP 150 GEM 1 - 150 N
(Aceite MIN) GEARMASTER Klüberoil
C17 VG 100 CLP 100 GEM 1 - 100 N
GEARMASTER SYNTHESO
C23 VG 460 PGP 460 Ucolub BSL-IG 460
D 460 EP
Poliglicoles GEARMASTER SYNTHESO
D 320 EP
(Aceite PG)
GEARMASTER SYNTHESO
D 220 EP
C33 VG 460 SYN 460 Ucolub N-PA 460
SMP 460 GEM 4 - 460 N
Poli-a-
olefina C34 VG 320
GEARMASTER
Ucolub N-PA 320 Galp Transgear Klübersynth.
SYN 320 SMP 320 GEM 4 - 320 N
(Aceite PAO) GEARMASTER Galp Transgear Klübersynth.
C35 VG 220 SYN 220 Ucolub N-PA 220
SMP 220 GEM 4 - 220 N
Aceites GEARMASTER Klübersynth.
C44 VG 320 ECO 320 GEM 2 - 320
degradables
mente ECO 220 GEM 2 - 220
GEARMASTER
C46 VG 150
(Aceite BIO) ECO 150
Aceites C53 VG 460 Ucolub BSL 460 5)
inofensivos
fisiológica- C54 VG 320 Ucolub BSL 320 5)
mente
C55 VG 220 Ucolub BSL 220 5)
(Aceite PHY)
5) Aceite PG

Viscosidad
Cifra ISO-VG
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante a 40 °C
(mm2/s)
607 ALMASOL Vari- Mobilgear 630 GEAR COMPOUND
C15 VG 220 Purpose Gear Lubricant Mobilgear XMP 220 PLUS 220
Aceites
minerales C16 VG 150 604 ALMASOL Vari- Mobilgear 629 GEAR COMPOUND
Purpose Gear Lubricant Mobilgear XMP 150 PLUS 150
(Aceite MIN) 606 ALMASOL Vari- Mobilgear 627 GEAR COMPOUND
C17 VG 100 Purpose Gear Lubricant Mobilgear XMP 100 PLUS 100
C23 VG 460
Poliglicoles
C24 VG 320
(Aceite PG)
C25 VG 220

C33 VG 460 460 Mobilgear SHC XMP460 CLP 460
Poli-a-
olefina C34 VG 320
320 Mobilgear SHC XMP320 CLP 320
(Aceite PAO) megol Gearoil Synth Mobil SHC 630 GEAR SINTEC
C35 VG 220 220 Mobilgear SHC XMP220 CLP 220
Aceites C44 VG 320
degradables
mente
C46 VG 150
(Aceite BIO)
Aceites C53 VG 460
inofensivos
mente
C55 VG 220
(Aceite PHY)
BA 7300 SP 01.05

Viscosidad
Cifra ISO-VG
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante a 40 °C
(mm2/s)
TRANSOL
C15 VG 220 OMV gear HST 220 PREMIUM 220 PO Gravis MP 220 Q8 Goya NT 220
Aceites
minerales C16 VG 150 OMV gear HST 150 PO Gravis MP 150 Q8 Goya NT 150
(Aceite MIN)
C17 VG 100 OMV gear HST 100 PO Gravis MP 100
C23 VG 460
Poliglicoles
C24 VG 320
(Aceite PG)
C25 VG 220
TRANSGEAR
C33 VG 460 PE 460 PO Gravis SP 460 Q8 El Greco 460
Poli-a-
olefina C34 VG 320
TRANSGEAR
PO Gravis SP 320 Q8 El Greco 320
PE 320
(Aceite PAO) TRANSGEAR
C35 VG 220 PE 220 PO Gravis SP 220 Q8 El Greco 220
Aceites C44 VG 320

degradables
mente
C46 VG 150
(Aceite BIO)
Aceites C53 VG 460
inofensivos
mente
C55 VG 220
(Aceite PHY)

Viscosidad
Cifra ISO-VG
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante a 40 °C
(mm2/s) TEXACO
Shell Omala F 220 Meropa WM 220
C15 VG 220 Shell Omala 220
Ersolan 220 LoadWay EP 220 Auriga EP 220
Aceites
Shell Omala F 150
Ersolan 150
Meropa WM 150
Shell Omala 150 Auriga EP 150
(Aceite MIN) Shell Omala F 100 Meropa WM 100
C17 VG 100 Shell Omala 100
Ersolan 100 Auriga EP 100
Shell Tivela S 460
C23 VG 460 Shell Cassida WG 460
Poliglicoles Shell Tivela S 320
(Aceite PG)
Shell Tivela S 220
C33 VG 460 Shell Omala HD 460

Poli-a-
olefina C34 VG 320 Shell Omala HD 320 MERETA 320
(Aceite PAO)
C35 VG 220 Shell Omala HD 220 MERETA 220
Aceites C44 VG 320 Shell Omala EPB 320

degradables
biológica- C45 VG 220 Shell Omala EPB 220
mente
C46 VG 150 Shell Omala EPB 150
(Aceite BIO)
Aceites Shell Cassida
C53 VG 460 WG 460 6)
inofensivos
Shell Cassida
mente WG 320 6)
Shell Cassida
C55 VG 220 WG 220 6)
(Aceite PHY)
6) Aceite PG
BA 7300 SP 01.05

Viscosidad
Cifra ISO-VG
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante a 40 °C
(mm2/s)
KASSILLA GMP 220 VECO MATRANOL
C15 VG 220 CARTER EP 220
TUNGEAR 220 7) XP 220
COMPOUND MP 220
Aceites
minerales C16 VG 150 COMPOUND MP 150
(Aceite MIN)
C17 VG 100
C23 VG 460
Poliglicoles
C24 VG 320
(Aceite PG)
C25 VG 220
C33 VG 460 CARTER SH 460

Poli-a-
olefina C34 VG 320 CARTER SH 320
(Aceite PAO)
C35 VG 220 CARTER SH 220
Aceites C44 VG 320

degradables
mente
C46 VG 150
(Aceite BIO)
Aceites Kestone Nevastane
C53 VG 460 SY 460 8)
inofensivos
Kestone Nevastane
mente SY 320 8)
Kestone Nevastane
C55 VG 220 SY 220 8)
(Aceite PHY)
7) TUNGEAR está autorizada para Brasil bajo la designación GEAROIL en las viscosidades VG 220. Distribución: Tribotechnica Lubrificantes Sinteticos Sao Paulo.
TUNGEAR está autorizada para la India bajo la designación Mox-Active Gear oil en las viscosidades VG 220. Distribución: OKS Speciality Lubricants Bombay.
6) Aceite PG
BA 7300 SP 01.05

1.2 Grasas lubricantes para reductores y rodamientos
En casos de aplicación especiales de los reductores puede ser necesaria una lubricación con grasa
de las ruedas dentadas y/o los rodamientos.
Nota: Sólo se deben utilizar grasas si ello está prescrito en las Instrucciones de servicio de
los reductores. Los plazos para el reengrase se tienen que cumplir estrictamente.
Las grasas para reductores son aptas para engrasar ruedas dentadas y rodamientos en reductores
cerrados (p.ej. reductores pequeños) y accionamientos abiertos con reducidas velocidades
circunferenciales (p.ej. para coronas dentadas, cremalleras).
Las grasas para rodamientos sirven, además de para la lubricación, para la obturación especiales de
cojinetes, p. ej. en ejes de conexión verticales en reductores o en caso de efectos ambientales
causados por polvo o salpicaduras de agua.
Nota: En engranajes cerrados con lubricación por aceite interna no se debe producir
ninguna mezcla de los aceites para engranajes con grasas para rodamientos.
Tabla D Grasas lubricantes para reductores y rodamientos FLENDER

Consistencia
Cifra
Lubricante índice Clase NLGI
DIN 51818
classic performance
G13 3 Viscogen 1)
Grasas para G14 2

reductores
G15 1
(MIN-GF)
G16 0
Sobre la base de
aceite mineral Tribol 5000
G17 00 Optitemp OG 0
Aralub FDP 00 CLS Grease Longtime PD 00
G18 000 MA Mehrzweckfett 00
Grasas para H12 4
rodamientos
(MIN-WF) Energrease
H13 3 Aralub HL3 LS 3 Spheerol AP 3
Sobre la base de H14 2 Aralub HL2

Energrease Spheerol AP 2 Tribol 4020 / 220-2
aceite mineral LS 2 Spheerol EPL 2 Longtime PD 2
Saponificación a
H15 1 Tribol 3785 2)
base de litio
2) Mezcla de aceite mineral - PAO

Consistencia
Cifra
DIN 51818
G13 3
Grasas para G14 2

reductores
G15 1
(MIN-GF)
G16 0
Sobre la base de
aceite mineral MICROLUBE
G17 00 GB 00
G18 000
Grasas para H12 4

rodamientos
(MIN-WF) Renolit FWA 220
H13 3 Renolit H 443-HD 88
Sobre la base de H14 2 Arcanol L 186 V 3)
Renolit H 443-HD 88 LAGERMEISTER CENTOPLEX
aceite mineral Renolit FWA 160 EP 2 GLP 402
Saponificación a
H15 1
base de litio
3) Saponificación a base de Li, Ca
BA 7300 SP 01.05

Consistencia
Cifra
DIN 51818
TEXACO
G13 3 Glissando FG 30 EP
Grasas para G14 2

reductores
G15 1
(MIN-GF)
G16 0 Mobilux EP 004 Wiolub GFW
Sobre la base de
aceite mineral G17 00 Alvania GL 00 Marfak 00
G18 000
Grasas para H12 4

rodamientos
(MIN-WF) Alvania RL 3
H13 3 Mobilux EP 3
Alvania EP / LF 3
Sobre la base de H14 2 Mobilux EP 2
Alvania RL 2
Wiolub LFK 2
Multifak 2
aceite mineral Alvania EP / LF 2 Multifak 20
Saponificación a
H15 1
base de litio

Consistencia
Cifra
DIN 51818
G13 3
Grasas para G14 2

reductores
G15 1
(MIN-GF)
G16 0 Multis EP 0
Sobre la base de
aceite mineral G17 00 Multis EP 00
G18 000
Grasas para H12 4

rodamientos
(MIN-WF) Multis 3
H13 3 Multis EP 3
Sobre la base de H14 2
Multis 2
aceite mineral Multis EP 2
Saponificación a Multis 1
H15 1
base de litio Multis EP 1
BA 7300 SP 01.05

2. Lubricantes para acoplamientos ZAPEX
Nota: Para acoplamientos FLUDEX se aplican unas recomendaciones de lubricantes

especiales.
Según indicaciones del fabricante, se fabrican o suministran los aceites y grasas citados a
continuación, en todo el mundo, en las calidades exigidas por FLENDER indicadas arriba
(Excepciones: Observe las notas a pie de página en las tablas).
2.1 Calidad necesaria de los aceites y grasas
Para los acoplamientos FLENDER-ZAPEX sólo son admisibles aceites y grasas que contienen aditivos
para el aumento de la protección contra la corrosión y la resistencia al envejecimiento, así como para
la reducción del desgaste en el campo del rozamiento mixto. La carga admisible de gripado de los
aceites en la prueba FZG según DIN 51354-2 tiene que alcanzar, en condiciones de ensayo, A/8,3/90
el nivel de fuerza de deterioro 12 o más de 12.
Además, los aceites y grasas deben presentar los siguientes requisitos de calidad prescritos por
FLENDER:
S Compatibilidad con las juntas de elastómeros de los anillos de obturación del eje
S Compatibilidad con juntas líquidas entre superficies enroscables.
Nota: Un empleo de lubricantes que no corresponden a los requisitos de calidad indicados
arriba, en caso dado puede excluir nuestra obligación de garantía. Indicamos
expresamente que cada fabricante o suministrador de lubricante es responsable de
la calidad de su producto.
Lo determinante para la elección de un lubricante es siempre la clase de viscosidad y/o NLGI indicada
en estas Instrucciones de servicio. En caso de empleo de otra viscosidad o clase NLGI o también de
otro lubricante diferente que el aquí recomendado el usuario asume la responsabilidad de la aptitud
técnica del lubricante. Para reducir al mínimo el riesgo técnico en un caso de esta clase,
recomendamos el empleo de un lubricante de la calidad arriba indicada, la cual se debería hacer
confirmar por el fabricante del lubricante.
¡Se tienen que observar las indicaciones contenidas en las Instrucciones de
Atención! servicio de los acoplamientos!
¡Sólo se admiten desviaciones previa consulta con FLENDER!

2.1.1 Clases de aceite y de grasa
Nota: Los límites superiores e inferiores para las temperaturas de uso (punto de
inflamación, punto de fluidez) de distintos aceites y grasas pueden variar
fuertemente. Estos datos y propiedades de los aceites y grasas, así como otros, se
tomarán siempre de las Hojas de Datos Técnicos del fabricante del lubricante.
Las siguientes duraciones de uso sin alteraciones esenciales de las calidades de aceite y grasa son
indicadas por los fabricantes de lubricantes como valores mínimos:
– en caso de uso hasta 70 °C, aprox. 8 000 horas de funcionamiento, máx. 2 años,
en caso de uso por encima de 70 °C, aprox. 3 000 horas de funcionamiento, máx. 1 año.
2.1.2 Cambio de aceite y de grasa
El grado de limpieza del lubricante influencia la seguridad de funcionamiento y la duración útil del
lubricante y del acoplamiento. Por esta razón, se tiene que prestar siempre atención a que el aceite
o la grasa en el acoplamiento estén limpios. Para el primer cambio de lubricante después de la puesta
en servicio del acoplamiento, así como para los posteriores cambios de lubricante, hay que observar
las especificaciones dadas en las Instrucciones de Empleo del acoplamiento. Con grandes cantidades
de lubricante, se recomienda hacer dependiente una depuración necesaria o un cambio necesario del
resultado del análisis del lubricante.
En caso de cambio con el mismo lubricante, las cantidades residuales en el acoplamiento se tienen
que mantener lo más reducidas posible. En general, pequeñas cantidades residuales no causan
problemas. No se deben mezclar entre sí los lubricantes de diferentes clases y fabricantes. En caso
necesario hay que hacer confirmar por el fabricante del lubricante nuevo, la compatibilidad con los
restos del lubricante antiguo.
Los lubricantes para reductores en ningún caso se deben mezclar con otros
Atención! productos.
BA 7300 SP 01.05

Tabla E Aceite: Aceites y grasas lubricantes para acoplamientos FLENDER ZAPEX
Viscosidad
Cifra in cSt a 40 °C
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante Grasa:
Consistencia
DIN 51818
I11 VG 1000
se ISO
I O
Aceites I12 VG 680
CLP 680 S
Degol BG 680 Plus GEAR RSX 680 Energol GR-XF 680
minerales ECO GEAR 680 M
Clase
CLP 460 S
I13 VG 460 ECO GEAR 460 M Degol BG 460 Plus GEAR RSX 460 Energol GR-XF 460
(Aceite MIN)
C
I14 VG 320
Grasas fluidas J15 1

NLGI
GI
(MIN-FLF) J16 0 Aralub Fließfett AN 0

eN
Clase
Energrease
Sobre J17 00 LS-EP 00
Cl
la base de
aceite mineral J18 000

Viscosidad
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante Grasa:
Consistencia
DIN 51818 classic performance
CEPSA
I11 VG 1000 AEROGEAR 1000
se ISO
I O
Aceites I12 VG 680

Beslux gear
Alpha SP 680
Tribol 1100 / 680 CEPSA
minerales XP 680 Optigear BM 680 AEROGEAR 680
Clase
Beslux gear Alpha SP 460 Tribol 1100 / 460 CEPSA

I13 VG 460 XP 460 Alpha MAX 460 Optigear BM 460 AEROGEAR 460
(Aceite MIN)
C
I14 VG 320

NLGI
GI
(MIN-FLF) J16 0
eN
Clase
Tribol 3020/1000-00
Sobre J17 00 Longtime PD 00
Cl
la base de CLS Grease


Viscosidad
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante Grasa:
Consistencia
DIN 51818
I11 VG 1000
se ISO
I O
Aceites I12 VG 680 SPARTAN EP 680 1)

Renolin EPX 680
minerales Renolin CLP 680 PLUS
Clase
Renolin EPX 460

I13 VG 460 EP Industrial 460 SPARTAN EP 460 1)
(Aceite MIN) Renolin CLP 460 PLUS
C
I14 VG 320

NLGI
GI
(MIN-FLF) J16 0
Cl e N
FLENDER
Clase
Hochleistungsfett RENOLIT
Sobre J17 00 SO-D 6024
la base de
BA 7300 SP 01.05

Viscosidad
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante Grasa:
Consistencia
DIN 51818
I11 VG 1000
se ISO
I O
Aceites I12 VG 680
GEARMASTER STRUCTOVIS 609 ALMASOL Vari- Mobilgear 636
minerales CLP 680 BHD-MF Purpose Gear Lubricant Mobilgear XMP 680
Clase
GEARMASTER 608 ALMASOL Vari- Mobilgear 634
I13 VG 460 CLP 460 Mobilgear XMP 460
(Aceite MIN) Purpose Gear Lubricant
C
I14 VG 320

NLGI
GI
(MIN-FLF) J16 0
eN
GRAFLOSKON
Clase
C-SG 500 Plus

Sobre J17 00 Mobilux EP 004
Cl
la base de

Viscosidad
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante Grasa:
Consistencia
DIN 51818
I11 VG 1000 PO Gravis MP 1000
se ISO
I O
Aceites I12 VG 680 GEAR COMPOUND OMV gear HST 680 PO Gravis MP 680 Shell Omala 680
minerales PLUS 680
Clase
GEAR COMPOUND Shell Omala 460

I13 VG 460 OMV gear HST 460 PO Gravis MP 460 Shell Omala F 460
(Aceite MIN) PLUS 460
C
I14 VG 320 PO Gravis MP 320

e NLGI
N GI
(MIN-FLF) J16 0
Clase
Sobre J17 00 Alvina GL 00

Cl
la base de

Viscosidad
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante Grasa:
Consistencia TEXACO
DIN 51818
VECO MATRANOL
I11 VG 1000 XP 1000
se ISO
I O
Aceites I12 VG 680 TUNGEAR 680 2)

VECO MATRANOL
minerales XP 680
Clase
Meropa WM 460 VECO MATRANOL

I13 VG 460 Auriga EP 460 TUNGEAR 460 2) XP 460
(Aceite MIN)
C
I14 VG 320 LoadWay EP 320

NLGI
GI
(MIN-FLF) J16 0
eN
Clase
Sobre J17 00
Cl
la base de
2)TUNGEAR está autorizada para Brasil bajo la designación GEAROIL en las viscosidades VG 460, 680. Distribución: Tribotechnica Lubrificantes Sinteticos Sao Paulo.
TUNGEAR está autorizada para la India bajo la designación Mox-Active Gear oil en las viscosidades VG 460, 680. Distribución: OKS Speciality Lubricants Bombay.
BA 7300 SP 01.05

Viscosidad
índice DIN 51519
Lubricante Grasa:
Consistencia
DIN 51818
I11 VG 1000
se ISO
I O
Aceites I12 VG 680
minerales
Clase
I13 VG 460
(Aceite MIN)
C
COMPOUND
I14 VG 320 MP 320

NLGI
GI
(MIN-FLF) J16 0
eN
Clase
Sobre J17 00
Cl
la base de
BA 7300 SP 01.05

Bauart OLOO Seite
Ersatzteilliste (EL) Type Page
Spare parts list Größe 7,0 1/1
Size
Übersetzung
ratio
Please quote in correspondence EL 4456539- 001….12 DE/EN
Please refer to DWG No.
Part No. No. off Description Drawings No. Ident no. Weight
E* 0030 1 ST OELK-LUFT 07-3N-4 W 5937 000.000.681.783 46,4
OIL/AIR COOLER 07-3N-4 W 5937
E* 0032 1 ST VENTIL-REGEL 7096G1 1/2 WAHLER 000.000.464.349 0,6
CONTROL VALVE 7096G1 1/2 WAHLER
The parts marked with * belong to a subassembly (G). The subassemblymust be replaced complete.
A. Friedr.Flender AG, D 46393 Bocholt, Datum Date SPIERING, MARCO 1848

Bauart OLOO Seite
Tamaño
Übersetzung
Multiplicación
Véase plano no.
E* 0030 1 ST OELK-LUFT 07-3N-4 W 5937 000.000.681.783 46,4
REFRIGERADOR DE ACEITE POR AIRE
VÁLVULA DE REGULACIÓN
A. Friedr.Flender AG, D 46393 Bocholt, Datum FechaSPIERING, MARCO 1848

Bauart OLOO Seite
Tamaño
Übersetzung
Multiplicación
Véase plano no.
E* 0030 1 ST OELK-LUFT 07-3N-4 W 5937 000.000.681.783 46,4

Bauart OLOO Seite
Tamaño
Übersetzung
Multiplicación
Véase plano no.
E* 0030 1 ST OELK-LUFT 07-3N-4 W 5937 000.000.681.783 46,4

Lista de aparatos Tipo OLOO Página
1 da 1
Tamaño 07
Indiquese en toda correspondencia 4456539- 001….12 GL 1.211.007 SP
N° de la Canti- Fabricante
Descripción Instrucciones de servicio
pieza dad
Funciones de conmutación y vigilancia tras:

Esquema de lubricación Nº de plano 5 475 135
Sistema de alimentación de aceite tipo OLOO, tamaño 07
Plano de montaje 5 475 135
30 1 Refrigerador de aceite por aire FUNKE

Tipo según norma interna Flender: BA FUN.OLK.001 ..
W 5937 / 07-3N-04
Tipo Funke nº:2.7807.2.31...
Motor trifásico
Tipo: B14
Tamaño:80
Velocidad de giro 1500 / 1800 1/min
Potencia 0.75 / 0.86 kW
Tensión 380-420 V con 50 Hz
440-480 V con 60 Hz
Frecuencia 50 / 60 Hz
Clase de material aislante F
Modo de protección: IP 55
32 1 Válvula termorreguladora WAHLER

Tipo nº: 7096.60 BA WAH.REG.000 ..
Conexión G 1 1/2
con inserto de regulación tipo nº: 7038.60
Apertura hacia el refrigerador a 45 °C
Válvula abierta a 60 °C
Lugar de montaje: bypass refrigerador de aceite por aire
A. Friedr. Flender AG, D 46393 Bocholt, Datum Name: GRE/GRE TFAE

Tel. 02871/92-0, Telefax 02871/922596, http://www.flender.com 2003-05-19 Rev.: c) 2007-03-02 BMA
BA FUN.OLK.001 EN 02.06
1/12
Oil-Air Cooling Units

Series OKAN II, OKAN II/Ex, OKAN III
OKAN II
OKAN III
General view Edition 02/2006
Operating Instruction
2/12
List of contents 1.0 General
1.0 General Name and adress of manufacturer:
1.1 User instructions .............................................S.2 FUNKE WÄRMEAUSTAUSCHER APPARATEBAU GmbH

1.2 Intended use....................................................S.3 Zur Dessel 1, D-31028 Gronau/Leine
1.3 Identification/name plate.................................. S.3 Phone: +49 (0) 5182 582-0, Telefax: +49 (0) 5182 582-48
e-Mail: info@funke.de, Internet: www. funke.de
2.0 Safety instructions ......................... S.4 1.1 User instructions
This instruction relates to standard versions of the FUNKE

3.0 Design & functional description oil-air cooling units.
Supplementary operating and servicing instructions may be
3.1 Design, main components, materials,
needed for special versions. Please observe the order-
accessories.....................................................S.5 related specifications in every case!
3.2 Operation, functional desciption.........................S.5

Operation and servicing of FUNKE oil-air cooling units are
allowed only if carried out by professionally trained and
qualified operating and servicing personnel. In particular,
4.0 Functional ranges, operation conditions
please observe national and international specifications on
4.1 Allow. media....................................................S.6 pressure equipment, hazardous fluids, working in hazardous
areas as well as accident prevention and operational safety
4.2 Operating data.................................................S.6
(in Germany: Law on operational safety and pertinent
4.3 Ambient conditions.......................................... S.6 ordinances.)
Text sections, where the working procedure and

5.0 Transportation...............................................S.7 specifications must be strictly adhered to, to avoid
life danger or system damages, are marked with the
warning triangle shown below:
6.0 Installation, initial operation
6.1 Installation....................................................S.7/8
Attention!
6.2 Initial operation................................................S.8
6.3 Operating advice..............................................S.8

Text sections, where working procedures, operating
6.4 Shutting down / dismantling..............................S.8
conditions and maintenance instructions must be strictly
adhered to, to ensure proper functioning of the cooling unit
7.0 Maintenance..................................................S.9 as well as an economical operation, are marked with the
following symbol:
8.0 Causes of faults / removal of faults................S.9

Important!
9.0 Environmental protection / disposal..............S.9

The operator must instruct the staff appropriately before the
initial operation starts.
The operating instruction must be accessible at all times.
Technical data.........................................S.10/11
If work beyond these instructions needs to be carried out on
the oil cooling unit or if instructional texts are not understood,
consult with FUNKE before beginning the work.
3/12
1.2 Intended use
FUNKE oil-air cooling units are intended to cool oils, Written approval must be obtained from FUNKE for design
hydraulic fluids and mixtures of water/glycol by means of changes on the equipment as well as for operating method
ambient air. deviating from these instructions or the order-related product
FUNKE oil-air cooling units are – unless required otherwise specifications, otherwise guarantee and liability claims can
by order specifications - designed for special conditions of be invalidated.
use specified by the customer, concerning temperature,
pressure, volumetric flow and flow media and are fabricated An operation with heavy temperature jumps of the medium to
in conformity with EU-pressure equipment directive be cooled as well as pressure surge can cause mechanical
(PED) 97/23. or material damage and is generally not allowed!
1.3 Identification / name plate
Each oil-air cooling unit is provided with a name-plate Abb. 1

(figure 1). Principal structure of the name-plate
Accessibility and readability must be ensured at any time.
The name plate, containing the following data is fixed laterally 1/1 Standard series:
on the cooler core or fan shroud:
-Type / model
- Serial number (to be mentioned on all enquiries)
- Drawing number
- Year of manufacture
- Max. operating pressure PS
- Min. operating temperature TS min. (if required)
- Max. operating temperature TS max.
- Volume
- Test pressure
- Fluid group (acc. to EU Pressure Equipment Directive (PED)
97/23/EC
1/2 Design according to ATEX directive:

Information:
No CE-symbol is required acc. to EU Pressure Equipment

Directive (PED) 97/23/EC for FUNKE-OKAN II/III series
because of the low pressures and volumes.
Units which are used in hazardous areas must be equipped

with a guard acc. to ATEX-directive 94/9/EC. CE-symbol is
required.
In this case the name-plate contains additional information
as follows:
- CE-symbol
- identification number of the ”notified body“ acc. to PED
- inspection date
-3-
4/12
2.0 Safety instructions
Attention!
FUNKE oil-air cooling units are pressure equipment and Works may be carried out on the oil-air cooling unit only
allowed to be connected, operated and maintained only by - if the fan drive is disconnected from the power supply, if
technically qualified operating and servicing personnel! the hydraulic drive is disconnected from the oil pump
National and international directives for pressure respectively.
equipment and machinery -if the unit is not under pressure, the temperature of the
(Europe: EU Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 97/23/EC, media to be cooled does not exceed 40°C and the system
machinery directive 98/37/EC), is drained!
for hazardous fluids as well as on operating safety and
accident prevention must be observed. In case of fan drive by hydraulic motor the max. allow.
(In Germany: Law on operating safety and pertinent rotational speed of the fan shall not be exceeded!
ordinances.) (More information are on the technical data sheet or
obtainable from our specialised personnel.)
In any case the user has to equip the plant with a control
device for a safe stoppage of the machinery. No operation in case of partial or complete flooding!
Do not operate the oil-air cooling unit without guard screen! Boiling or freezing of the medium to be cooled shall be
avoided in any case (danger of cooler core destruction)!
The operator must check that there is nothing interfering
into the fan. He also must ensure that in case of assembly
near passageways persons without protective clothing
must keep a distance of min. 1,0 m.
Explosion protection / ATEX
Persons staying less than 1,0 m distant from the oil-air
cooling unit have to wear protective clothing. Persons with
long hair have to use a hairnet or appropriate cap! In addition the following applies for use of oil-air cooling
units in hazardous areas:
To remove protective devices is not allowed – with the
exception for maintenance and servicing works – is - No operation of oil-air cooling units without explosion
allowed only by authorised persons. protective equipment!
- Oil-air cooling units explosion protected design are only
If the oil-air cooling unit is installed in areas where a approved for:
leakage of the hose or tube connection can injure persons, ATEX group II, category 3, zone 2 or 22 respectively.
place a spray guard or drip cover! - Oil-air cooling units with ATEX equipment are allowed to
run in hazardous areas only
If in case of assembly near passageways operating within the temperature range of –20 to +40°C.
temperatures are exceeding 60°C, a protection against In every case the allowable temperature range of the motor
accidental contact should be placed or the area should be must be complied with!
blocked!
Be careful in case of thermostat controlled starting of In case of doubt please apply to our experts before putting
ventilators! Possibly place an information sign near into service!
passageways!
-4-
5/12
3.0 Design & functional description
3.1 Design, main components, materials, accessories
1. Cooler core
material: aluminium
(optional: sea air resistant
paint coating )
2. Motor support plate

material: steel, surface-treated
3. Fan shroud
or plastic (in case of
explosion protected design:
galvanised steel)
4. Fan guard
(in case of explosion protected
design: galvanised steel)
5. Fan
material: plastic
(in case of
explosion protected design:
polyamide with electric conductivity)
6. Fan drive
(in case of explosion protected
design: explosion protected motor)
Accessories (optional):
- filter mats with frame
- thermostat
Abb. 2
3.2 Operation, function
The medium to be cooled is – depending on volumetric flow For a most efficient application cooling to 5 – 6 K above the
rate– flowing through the cooler core either in one pass or ambient air temperature is recommended.
multiple passes and is cooled by the ambient air produced To cool down to values below ambient air temperature is not
by the fan. possible.
The regular fan is a suction fan but can also be supplied as
pressure fan if required by the order specification.
To reach a high heat dissipation , oil- and air fins, fan blades
and motor power are optimally synchronised.
-5-
6/12
4.3 Ambient conditions at set-up site

4.0 Functional range,
operation conditions
FUNKE oil-air cooling units are allowed to be used only at
ambient temperatures as follows:
4.1 Allowed media
In non-hazardous areas
- mineral oils, e.g. lubricating oil, cutting oil,
(standard design): min. –25°C - max. +60°C
converter oil
In hazardous areas
- rapidly biodegradable oils, if not attacking aluminium
(OKAN explosion protected acc. to ATEX directives):
min. –25°C - max. +40°C
- hydraulic fluids, e.g. HFA, HFB, HFC and HFD
In every case the allowable temperature range of the motor

- water/glycol mixture, e.g. water/glycol 65:35
must be complied with!
Ambient air:
Important! Unhindered inflow and outflow of ambient air must be
ensured to avoid a reduced heat dissipation (see also 6.1
assembly)
Furthermore, if the cooler core or the guard screen of the fan
Under no circumstances use water without anticorrosive
is partly or completely covered, this may cause excessive
agent! (min 2 %)
vibration of the fan or even failure of the drive.
Closed rooms must be adequately ventilated.
Contaminated oils must be filtered (grade of filtration 0,05
mm) !
In case of low ambient temperatures and as a result
Further media may be used only after written approval by
increased viscosity of the medium to be cooled the function
FUNKE.
of the system must be guaranteed by appropriate measures
(e.g. pressure limiting valve, preheating).
4.2 Operating Data

Attention. Dust and mist may cause a heavy drop in
performance.
Attention! In case of aggressive or very salty air ( e.g. sea air) a special
paint is required.
Allow. operating pressure: max. 16 bar!
Max. operating temperature of the media to be cooled: Attention!
Oil in hazardous areas

Furthermore, in hazardous areas the ignition temperature of
(acc. to EU-ATEX directives): max. 100°C
developed gases must be considered!
FUNKE oil-air cooling units in explosion protected design
Oil in non-hazardous areas: max. 120°C
are approved only for:
ATEX group II, category 3, zone 2 or 22 respectively.
Hydraulic fluids: max. 90°C
No operation allowed in case of flooding (completely or

Water/glycol mixture: max. 90°C
partly)!
Boiling or freezing of the medium to be cooled must be

Special modifications are available.
avoided in any case. Otherwise the cooler core or
connections could be destroyed.
-6-
7/12
5.0 Transportation instruction
Preferably the FUNKE oil-air cooling units are transported –

lying on the cooler core - on wooden pallets, properly
fastened not to slip. (figure 3)
Bigger oil-air cooling units series OKAN II require lifting
devices for transport and assembly.
In case of hanging transport please do not use bright steel
ropes or chains but sheathed suspension ropes! (figure 4)
Suspension ropes to be passed through both frame hoops.
Lift slowly. The centre of gravity is not exactly below hanger
fixtures and the cooling unit is swinging! figure 3 figure 4
6.0 Assembly, putting into service
6.1 Assembly Figure 5
Before assembly of the oil-air cooling unit ensure that all

basic requirements for an unhindered operation of the plant
according to this operating instruction are fulfilled!
Safety instructions of 2.0 must be complied with!
The plant operator has to assemble and start the plant in
strict accordance with the valid rules for pressure equipment
and machinery (Europe: EU pressure equipment directive 97/
23/EC, machinery directive 98/23/EC), hazardous fluids as
well as well as operating safety and accident prevention.
Assembly of the cooling unit, especially preparation of
electrical connections is allowed only by specialists!
Horizontal or vertical assembly of the oil/air cooling unit is

possible. (see figure 5).
In case of horizontal fitting position with the end of the motor
facing upwards, a protective shield must be placed above the
motor in any case.
The oil-air cooling unit must be fixed at 4 points at least on a
flat foundation (figure 6).
Fixing should be strainless and vibration-free (possibly use
vibration isolators)
Connections ( electric and hydraulic ) must also be
strainless and vibration-free.
Before assembly remove protective plugs from fluid
connections!
Unless described otherwise in the technical order

specification, keep a distance to any foreign objects in the
suction range of at least approx. half the height of the cooling
unit!
Figure 6
-7-
8/12
Control devices
In any case the plant must be equipped with a control device 6.3 Operating advice
for a safe stoppage of the machinery!
Take notice of the safety instructions section 2.0
Plants which are approved to operate in hazardous areas

must be grounded using the corresponding earthing boss. Important!
Connection of the motor according to data of the motor

manufacturer (see technical documentation or terminal box). An operation with heavy temperature jumps as well as
Observe the direction of rotation of the motor! pressure surge can cause mechanical or material damage
As standard FUNKE oil-air cooling units are designed for and is generally not allowed!
suction operation. Continuous or intermittent operation of the FUNKE oil-air
cooling unit is possible!
In case of horizontal installation the used air must be drawn When operating the oil-air cooling units with direct-current
off upwards. In any case the technical documentation must motors it must be taken into consideration that service life is
be observed. much shorter compared with three-phase motors.
In case of high heat dissipation which would result in an Frequent startings or continuous operation reduce the life
excessive heating of the air in closed rooms, outdoor time.
installation is advisable (observe type of protection of the In case of fan drive by means of hydraulic motor, it is not
motor!) allowed to exceed the max. allowable rotational speed of the
Outdoors the oil-air cooling unit must be protected (e.g. by fan!
roofing) against weather damage caused by rain, snow or (See technical data sheet or apply to our qualified
windborne sand etc. If outdoor installation is not possible, an personnel.)
air duct should be provided to lead the used air to the Essential operating data like pressure and temperature as
outside. Note: well as tightness of the system must be checked regularly,
Supplementary equipment like air ducts for instance can (once monthly at least) depending on conditions of use.
cause loss of the heat dissipation or affect function of the
plant if not properly fitted!
6.4 Shutting down / dismantling
If the oil-air cooling unit is operating with surface
temperatures exceeding 60°C protection against accidental
Dismantling of the oil-air cooling unit and removal of the
contacts should be placed or the area should be blocked
cooler and motor connections is allowed only by qualified
near passage ways!
personnel.
Follow safety instructions section 2.0!
In case of danger of heavy temperature jumps in the system
into which the oil-air cooling unit shall be installed (caused
Works on the oil-air cooling unit are allowed only if
for instance by control valves or shut-off valves or oscillating
- the fan drive has been disconnected from the electrical
pumps), appropriate measures must be taken to protect the
supply, after the hydraulic drive has been disconnected from
air-oil cooling unit!
the oil pump respectively.
- the unit is not under pressure, the temperature of the
6.2 Start up medium to be cooled does not exceed 40°C and the unit
has been drained!
Comply with safety instructions acc. to item 2.0!

Working steps:
1.
- Switch off main power supply
Check proper installation of all connections.
- Disconnect the motor
2.
- Drain fluid from the system, carefully disconnect the fluid
Check filling of the oil-air cooling unit.
lines, collect the fluid for reprocessing or regular disposal
During, after filling respectively the oil-air cooling unit must be
(see data sheet for the fluid)
completely vented. Any air in the system reduces the capacity
- Unscrew mounting bolts
and may cause steam bubbles for instance.
- Apply protective covers on connecting openings
3.
- Protect oil-air cooling unit against damage
Start the motor. Check correct direction of rotation.
- Possibly choose appropriate transport container
Check that the fan is free from deposits.
-8-
9/12
7.0 Maintenance 8.0 Cause of faults / removal of

faults
In case of normal operation FUNKE oil-air cooling units are
nearly maintenance-free. The cause for a capacity loss can be on the airside and also
Essential operating data like pressure and temperature as inside the oil-air cooling unit.
well as tightness of the system must must be checked 1. Too low mass flow
regularly, (once monthly at least) depending on conditions of check or correct:
use. - rotational speed of pump
- rotational speed of fan
Follow safety instructions section 2.0! - direction of rotation of fan
- electric / hydraulic connection
Works on the oil-air cooling unit are allowed only if - increased pressure drop in the system
- the fan drive has been disconnected from the electrical 2. Increased pressure drop
supply, after the hydraulic drive has Check or correct:
been disconnected from the oil pump respectively. - narrowed flow cross-section due to deposits / foreign
- the unit is not under pressure, the temperature of the matters
medium to be cooled does not exceed - narrowed flow cross-section due to mechanical
40°C and the unit has been drained! effect
3. Too low inlet temperature difference
Cleaning of the oil-air cooling unit Check or correct:
Airside dirt deposit on the suction side of the cooling - increased air inlet temperature
elements can be removed by brushing or vacuum. 4. Deviations between design conditions and conditions of
In case of heavy dirt proceed as follows: use
Check or correct respect:
- dismantle oil-air cooling unit as described under 6.4 - temperature
- remove fan and drive - mass flow
- clean cooler core with compressed air and/or steam jet - physical properties
(cold cleaner can be added) against
the direction of airflow In case of a motor failure the user instructions of the motor
manufacturer must be followed!
Caution!
Do not damage or bend the core fins. This would result in
drop in performance! 9.0 Environmental protection /
Internal cleaning (only partly)of the cooler is depending on
disposal
kind of dirt.
Deposits as a result of insufficiently filtered oils can be FUNKE oil-air cooling units are building a closed system.
removed for instance by filling with degreasing agent. After Provided are proper connection and correct operating mode.
reaction time rinse with clean operating liquid. However, in case of incorrect operating mode or incorrect
connections, or caused by mechanical effects, leaks cannot
be excluded.
By no means cleaning liquids may be used, which are If in case of a leak at set-up site the medium to be cooled is
attacking aluminium! directly reaching the environment (soil or water circuit),
the user has to place an appropriate collecting devices (for
instance a back leakage sump). Furthermore, pertinent
environmental protection regulations and possibly special
Important! regulations concerning handling of the medium to be cooled
must be complied with.
Disposal of the oil-air cooling units must be made in
accordance with the rules for disposal of oil and hydraulic
fluids as well as for electronic components like motors and
switches.
-9-
10/12
Technical Data OKAN II
B T3 T4
ØD1 ****
B2
M1 **** Hebeöse
B1 B3 102 Lifting eye
oeil porte charge
X
H3
H5
H
H1
H2 H4
B4 8 T2 12
SAE-FL ØD2****
T1
T
1)
Größe / type / type 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 14
Stirnfläche / face / surface frontale m² 0,05 0,08 0,1 0,16 0,2 0,25 0,315 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1,0
Inhalt / contents / volume l 1,6 2,7 3 5 5,5 6,2 7 8,8 9,7 11 18 20
Gewicht / weight / poids kg 16,1 22,5 24,6 35,4 38,4 46,4 51,4 67,6 77,6 138 177 189
Geräuschpegel /noise level / *** 750 ---- ---- ---- 57 / 45 58 / 46 62 / 50 66 / 54 68 / 56 71 / 59 73 / 61 77 / 65 77 / 65
1/min
niveau bruit 1000 ---- 59 / 47 59 / 47 64 / 52 65 / 53 70 / 58 72 / 60 77 / 65 79 / 67 81 / 69 85 / 73 86 / 74

(1m/7m) (db(A)) 1500 61 / 49 70 / 58 70 / 58 75 / 63 75 / 63 82 / 70 81 / 69 89 / 77 90 / 78 86 / 74 ---- ----
3000 79 / 67 84 / 72 84 / 72 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
Luftdurchsatz/air flow / debit d’air 750/900 ---- ---- ---- 0,27/0,32 0,28/0,34 0,5/0,6 0,5/0,6 0,9/1,08 1/1,2 1,4/1,68 2,84/3,4 3,7/4,44
1/min
1000/1200 ---- 0,16/0,19 0,2/0,24 0,38/0,46 0,4/0,48 0,7/0,84 0,8/0,96 1,5/1,8 1,7/2,0 2,2/2,64 3,97/4,76 5,3/6,4
(kg/s) 1500/1800 0,14/0,17 0,25/0,3 0,3/0,36 0,65/0,78 0,7/0,84 1,2/1,44 1,3/1,56 2,4/2,9 2,7/3,24 3,3/3,96 ---- ----
3000/3600 0,3/0,36 0,6/0,72 0,7/0,84 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
Motorleistung / motor power * 750/900 ---- ---- ---- 0,25/0,29 0,25/0,29 0,25/0,29 0,25/0,29 0,37/0,43 0,37/0,43 0,75/0,86 2,2/3,3 2,2/3,45
1/min
puissance motouer 1000/1200 ---- 0,25/0,29 0,25/0,29 0,37/0,43 0,37/0,43 0,55/0,63 0,55/0,63 0,75/0,86 0,75/0,86 1,5/2,2 3,0/4,45 4,0/6,3
(kW) 1500/1800 0,18/0,21 0,37/0,43 0,37/0,43 0,55/0,63 0,55/0,63 0,75/0,86 0,75/0,86 1,5/1,75 1,5/1,75 4,0/6,3 ---- ----
3000/3600 0,25/0,29 0,55/0,63 0,55/0,63 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
H 376 438 506 612 712 721 853 853 869 1022 1169 1361
H1 204,5 235,5 269,5 320,5 370,5 370,5 436,5 436,5 436,5 513 592,5 688,5
H2 62 62,5 62,5 66 66 62 62 62 53 53 81 81
H3 285 346 414 509 609 617 749 749 767 920 1023 1215
H4 50 50 50 50 50 55 55 55 55 55 70 70
H5 309 371 439 541 641 631 763 763 763 916 1045 1237
B 293 348 348 454 454 548 548 658 818 818 971 971
B1 20 40 40 45 45 51 51 51 55 55 68 68
B2 224 268 268 322 322 408 408 544 696 696 824 824
B3 155 166 166 200 200 260 260 360 360 360 420 420
B4 213 224 224 258 258 318 318 418 418 440 510 510
T MAX 450 500 500 550 550 600 600 650 650 750 900 900
T1 240 240 240 275 275 319 319 319 319 355 580,5 580,5
T2 108 108 108 148,5 148,5 185 185 185 185 220 215x2 215x2
T3 109 112 112 112 112 115 115 115 115 115 135 135
T4 94 93 93 128 128 156 156 156 156 187 215 215
D1 / M1 **** 9 / M8 9 / M8 9 / M8 9 / M8 9 / M8 11 / M10 11 / M10 11 / M10 11 / M10 11 / M10 13 / M12 13 / M12
D2 **** 9 9 9 9 9 11 11 11 11 11 14 14
X 130 130 130 130 130 130 250 350 350 900 1200 1500
SAE-Flansch/ -flange/ -bride 1 fluß / pass / pass ** ¾“ 1“ 1“ 1¼“ 1¼“ 1½“ 1½“ 1½“ 2“ 2“ S73x73 S73x73
SAE-Flansch/ - flange / -bride 3 fluß / pass / pass ** ¾“ ½“ ½“ ¾“ ¾“ ¾“ ¾“ ¾“ 1“ 1“ ---- ----
Betriebstemp. / working temp. / temp. de travail 120°C
Betriebsdruck / working press. / press. de travail 16 bar
Spannungen / Frequenzen Normspannungen
Voltages / Frequencies Standard voltages 110 – 690 V A.C. / 50 /60 Hz 12 V, 24 V D.C.
Voltages / Frequences Voltages standard
* U.p.m / r.p.m. / r.p.m. 50 Hz / 60 Hz ** bei Größe 02 keine SAE-Flansche / no SAE-flanges on type 02 / pour type 02 pas de connexion SAE
*** bei / at / au 60 Hz + 4 dB(A) **** Befestigungspunkte / Fixing points / Point de fixation
1)
2.78XX.2. ...
Größe / type / type
- 10 -
11/12
Technical Data OKAN III
B1
M14x1,5
B2 64 100 B4
H1
H1
H
Xmin
H3
H2
B3 41 108 12
275
Tmax
Größe / type / type III-1 III-2 III-3 III-4

Stirnfläche / face / surface frontale m² 0,077 0,11 0,15 0,209
Inhalt / contents / volume l 2 2,5 3 4
Gewicht / weight / poids kg 16 21 25 31
Geräuschpegel /noise level / *** 1000 -- 58 / 45 62 / 48 65 / 52
1/min
niveau bruit 1500 63 / 51 68 / 54 72 / 58 76 / 63

(1m/7m) (db(A)) 3000 78 / 66 85 / 70 87 / 74 --
Luftdurchsatz/air flow / debit d’air 1000 -- 0,20 0,28 0,55
1/min
1500 0,19 0,33 0,42 0,80

(kg/s) 3000 0,43 0,55 0,84 --
Motorleistung / motor power * 1000 -- 0,25 0,25 0,37
1/min
puissance motouer 1500 0,18 0,37 0,37 0,55

(kW) 3000 0,25 0,55 0,55 --
H 426 478 548 611
H1 339 394 464 524
H2 44 41 41 44
H3 213 238 273 306
B1 335 378 430 510
B2 309 356 403 481
B3 213 224 224 258
B4 36 50 50 57
Tmax 380 424 424 490
Xmin 200 200 240 240
Betriebstemp. / working temp. / temp. de
120°C
travail
Betriebsdruck / working press. / press. de
16 bar
travail
Spannungen / Frequenzen Normspannungen
Voltages / Frequencies Standard voltages 230 – 400 V A.C. / 50 /60 Hz 12 V, 24 V D.C.
Voltages / Frequences Voltages standard
- 11 -
12/12
Technical changes reserved. FUNKE WÄRMEAUSTAUSCHER APPARATEBAU GmbH

All rights with Postfach 1152; D-31021 Gronau (Leine)
FUNKE WÄRMEAUSTAUSCHER APPARATEBAU GmbH
Reprinting and duplication only with written approval. Fone: +49 (0) 5182 / 582-0; Fax: +49 (0) 5182 / 582-48
Ident-Code: OperatingInstructionOil-Air-Cooler-2004-10-GB e-mail: info@funke.de; Internet: www.funke.de
BA WAH.REG.000 SP
1/1
Gustav Wahler GmbH u. Co. KG

Hindenburgstraße 146
– Regulador termostático de aceite 73730 Esslingen
Alemania
Instrucciones de manejo, edición SP 12.2003

Especificaciones técnicas
7052 Regulador completo con caja 7036 Elemento regulador sin caja
Tipo Rosca de unión ∅ A Elemento

regulador
máx. caudal
7053 R¾ 7036 aprox. 4 m3/h
Longitud de rosca útil
7051 Regulador completo con caja 7038 Elemento regulador sin caja
Tipo Rosca de unión ∅ A Elemento

regulador
máx. caudal
7096 R1½ 7038 aprox. 10 m3/h
Longitud de rosca útil
Mantenimiento de servicio y conservación
Los termostatos de aceite Wahler son libres de manutención y de servicio. No es necesario un

manejo por personas.
Indicación de fallos:
Si aparece una información de fallo en el circuito de refrigeración de aceite (por ejemplo temperatura
excesiva de aceite), es posible, que el termostato de aceite esté defectuoso y tiene que ser
reemplazado. Una reparación no es posible.
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
August 2007
Rosemount 848T Multisensor Transmitter

Temperature Inputs
with FOUNDATION™ Fieldbus
Device Revision 5
U.S. Patent Number 6,574,515
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
August 2007 Rosemount 848T
Rosemount 848T Eight Input

Temperature Transmitter with
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
NOTICE
Read this manual before working with the product. For personal and system safety, and for
optimum product performance, make sure to thoroughly understand the contents before
installing, using, or maintaining this product.
The United States has two toll-free assistance numbers and one international number.
Customer Central
1-800-999-9307 (7:00 a.m. to 7:00 P.M. CST)
National Response Center
1-800-654-7768 (24 hours a day)
Equipment service needs
International
1-(952) 906-8888
The products described in this document are NOT designed for nuclear-qualified
applications.
Using non-nuclear qualified products in applications that require nuclear-qualified hardware
or products may cause inaccurate readings.
For information on Rosemount nuclear-qualified products, contact a Emerson Process
Management Sales Representative.
Rosemount 848T Eight Input Temperature Transmitter with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus may be
protected by one or more U.S. patents pending. Other foreign patents pending.
Cover photo: 848-848C004
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Table of Contents
SECTION 1 Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Introduction Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Service Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Installation Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Mounting to a DIN Rail Without an Enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Mounting to a Panel with a Junction Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Mounting to a 2-Inch Pipe Stand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Surges/Transients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Using Cable Glands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Using Conduit Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Configuration Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Transmitter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Custom Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Configure the Differential Sensor Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Common Configurations for Monitoring Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Interfacing Analog Transmitters to Foundation fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Block Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Resource Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
PlantWeb™ Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Recommended Actions for PlantWeb Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Transducer Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Measurement Transducer Block (MTB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Sensor Transducer Block (STB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Differential Transducer Block (DTB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Rosemount 848T August 2007

Operation and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Maintenance Foundation Fieldbus Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Commissioning (Addressing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Hardware Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Sensor Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Communication/Power Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Resetting the Configuration (RESTART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Foundation Fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Resource Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Measurement Transducer Block Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Sensor Transducer Block Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Differential Transducer Block Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
APPENDIX A Functional Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1

Reference Data Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-3
Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-4
Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-4
Dimensional Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-7
Mounting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-10
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-11
APPENDIX B Hazardous Locations Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1

Product Certificates North American Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
European Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3
Australian Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
Brazilian Approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
Intrinsically Safe and Non-Incendive Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-6
Installation Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-7
APPENDIX C Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1

Foundation™ Fieldbus Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1
Technology Device Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
Block Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
Instrument- Specific Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
Network Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4
Link Active Scheduler (LAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Scheduled Transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Unscheduled Transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-7
Function Block Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-8
APPENDIX D Analog Input (AI) Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-1

Function Blocks Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-3
AI Block Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-8
Multiple Analog Input (MAI) Function Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-9
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-10
MAI Block Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-14
Input Selector Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-15
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-17
ISEL Block Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-20
TOC-2
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Section 1 Introduction
Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1-2
Service Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1-3
SAFETY MESSAGES Instructions and procedures in this section may require special precautions to
ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Information that
potentially raises safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Please
refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation
preceded by this symbol.
Warnings
Failure to follow these installation guidelines could result in death or

serious injury.
• Make sure only qualified personnel perform the installation.
Process leaks could result in death or serious injury.
• Do not remove the thermowell while in operation. Removing while in operation may
cause process fluid leaks.
• Install and tighten thermowells and sensors before applying pressure, or process
leakage may result.
Electrical shock could cause death or serious injury.
• If the senor is installed in a high voltage environment and a fault condition or
installation error occurs, high voltage may be present on transmitter leads and
terminals.
• Use extreme caution when making contact with the leads and terminals.
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
OVERVIEW
Transmitter The Rosemount 848T is optimal for process temperature monitoring because
of its ability to simultaneously measure eight separate and independent
temperature points with one transmitter. Multiple temperature sensor types
may be connected to each 848T transmitter. In addition, the 848T can accept
4-20 mA inputs. The enhanced measurement capability of the 848T allows it
to communicate these variables to any FOUNDATION fieldbus host or
configuration tool.
The new Rosemount 3420 Fieldbus Interface Module will interface the 848T
outputs to systems without fieldbus capability using the standard interface
protocols. Contact a local Emerson Process Management Sales
Representative for more information.
Manual This manual is designed to assist in the installation, operation, and

maintenance of the Rosemount 848T Temperature Transmitter.
Section 1: Introduction
• Overview
• Considerations
• Return of Materials
Section 2: Installation
• Mounting
• Installation
• Wiring
• Power Supply
• Commissioning
Section 3: Configuration
• FOUNDATION fieldbus Technology
• Configuration
• Function Block Configuration
Section 4: Operation and Maintenance
• Hardware Maintenance
• Troubleshooting
1-2
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Appendix A: Specification and Reference Data
• Specifications
• Dimensional Drawings
• Ordering Information
Appendix B: Product Certificates
• Hazardous Locations Certificates
• Intrinsically Safe and Non-Incendive Installations
• Installation Drawings
Appendix C: Foundation™ Fieldbus Technology
• Device Descriptions
• Block Operation
Appendix D: Function Blocks
• Analog Input (AI) Function Block
• Multiple Analog Input (MAI) Function Block
• Input Selector Function Block
SERVICE SUPPORT To expedite the return process in North America, call the Emerson Process
Management National Response Center toll-free at 800-654-7768. This
center, available 24 hours a day, will assist with any needed information or
materials.
The center will ask for the following information:
• Product model
• Serial numbers
• The last process material to which the product was exposed
The center will provide
• A Return Material Authorization (RMA) number
• Instructions and procedures that are necessary to return goods that
were exposed to hazardous substances
For other locations, please contact a Emerson Process Management sales
representative.
NOTE
If a hazardous substance is identified, a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS),
required by law to be available to people exposed to specific hazardous
substances, must be included with the returned materials.
1-3
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
1-4
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Section 2 Installation

Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2-1
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2-4
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2-8
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2-10
Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2-11
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2-12
Warnings

serious injury.
leakage may result.
terminals.
MOUNTING The 848T is always mounted remote from the sensor assembly. There are
three mounting configurations:
• To a DIN rail without an enclosure
• To a panel with an enclosure
• To a 2-in pipe stand with an enclosure using a pipe mounting kit
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Mounting to a DIN Rail To mount the 848T to a DIN rail without an enclosure, follow these steps:
Without an Enclosure 1. Pull up the DIN rail mounting clip located on the top back side of the
transmitter.
2. Hinge the DIN rail into the slots on the bottom of the transmitter.
3. Tilt the 848T and place onto the DIN rail. Release the mounting clip.
The transmitter should be securely fastened to the DIN rail.
Figure 2-1. Mounting the 848T

to a DIN Rail
848T without
installed enclosure
DIN Rail Mounting Clip
DIN Rail
Mounting to a Panel with When inside of a plastic or aluminum junction box, the 848T mounts to a
a Junction Box panel using four 1/4-20 x 1.25-in. screws.
When inside of a stainless steel junction box, the 848T mounts to a panel
using two 1/4-20 x 1/2-in. screws.

junction box to a panel Aluminum/Plastic Stainless Steel
848T with aluminum or plastic box
Cover
Screws (4) 848T with a stainless steel box
Mounting
Screws (2)
Mounting
Screws (4)
Panel
Panel
2-2
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Mounting to a 2-Inch Use the optional mounting bracket (option code B6) to mount the 848T to a
Pipe Stand 2-inch pipe stand when using a junction box.
Aluminum/Plastic Junction Box Stainless Steel Junction Box

(styles JA and JP) (style JS)
Front View Side View Front View Side View
10.2 6.6 (167) 4.5
848_848A52A, B, 53A, B
5.1 (260) fully
(130) (114) 7.5 (190)
assembled fully
assembled
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)

Mounted on a Vertical Pipe Mounted on a Vertical Pipe
848_848A54A, 55A
2-3
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
WIRING If the sensor is installed in a high-voltage environment and a fault condition or

installation error occurs, the sensor leads and transmitter terminals could
carry lethal voltages. Use extreme caution when making contact with the
leads and terminals.
NOTE
Do not apply high voltage (e.g. AC line voltage) to the transmitter terminals.
Abnormally high voltage can damage the unit (bus terminals are rated to 42.4
VDC).
Figure 2-3. 848T Transmitter

Field Wiring
6234 ft (1900 m) max
(depending upon cable
Integrated Power characteristics)
Conditioner
and Filter Terminators
(Trunk)
Power
Supply
(Spur)
(Spur)
FOUNDATION Signal
fieldbus Host or Wiring
848-848_01A
configuration tool
Devices 1 through 16*
* Intrinsically safe installations may allow fewer devices per I.S. barrier
Connections The 848T transmitter is compatible with 2 or 3-wire RTD, thermocouple, Ohm,
and millivolt sensor types. Figure 2-4 shows the correct input connections to
the sensor terminals on the transmitter. The 848T can also accept inputs from
analog devices using the optional analog input connector. Figure 2-5 shows
the correct input connections to the analog input connector when installed on
the transmitter. Tighten the terminal screws to ensure proper connection.
Figure 2-4. Sensor Wiring

Diagram
+ -
848-0000A01A
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
2-wire 3-wire Thermocouples / 2-Wire RTD
RTD and RTD and Ohms and with
Ohms Ohms* Millivolts Compensation
Loop**
The wiring of 3-wire RTDs for this unit is different than some earlier models of
the 848T. Pay careful attention to the wiring diagram on the label especially if
this unit is replacing an older unit.
2-4
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
RTD or Ohm Inputs
Various RTD configurations, including 2-wire and 3-wire are used in industrial
applications. If the transmitter is mounted remotely from a 3-wire RTD, it will
operate within specifications, without recalibration, for lead wire resistances of
up to 60 ohms per lead (equivalent to 6,000 feet of 20 AWG wire). If using a
2-wire RTD, both RTD leads are in series with the sensor element, so errors
can occur if the lead lengths exceed one foot of 20 AWG wire. Compensation
for this error is provided when using 3-wire RTDs.
Thermocouple or Millivolt Inputs
Use appropriate thermocouple extension wire to connect the thermocouple to
the transmitter. Make connections for millivolt inputs using copper wire. Use
shielding for long runs of wire.
Analog Inputs
The analog connector converts the 4–20 mA signal to a 20–100 mV signal.
The 848T transmitter uses a standard mV sensor type to output the scaled 4–
20 mA signal onto the FOUNDATION fieldbus.
Use the following steps when installing the 848T with the analog connector:
1. The 848T, when ordered with option code S002, comes with four analog
connectors. Replace the standard connector with the analog connector
on the desired channels.
2. Wire one or two analog transmitters to the analog connector according to
Figure 2-5. There is space available on the analog connector label for
identification of the analog inputs.
NOTE
Power supply should be rated to support the connected transmitter(s).
3. If the analog transmitters can communicate using HART protocol, the

analog connectors are supplied with the ability to switch in a 250 ohm
resistor for HART communication (see Figure 2-6).
One switch is supplied for each input (top switch for “A” inputs and
bottom switch for “B” inputs). Setting the switch in the “ON” position (to
the right) bypasses the 250 ohm resistor. Terminals are provided for each
analog input to connect a HART communicator for local configuration.
2-5
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Figure 2-5. 848T Analog Input

Wiring Diagram
Analog Input
Connectors
Analog Transmitters
Power Supply
848/848A64A.EPS
Figure 2-6. 848T Analog
Connector 250 ohm resistor in the loop when switched to the left
HART HART
Channel A Channel B
Space available for

identification of inputs
2-6
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Power Supply Connections

The transmitter requires between 9 and 32 VDC to operate and provide
complete functionality. The dc power supply should provide power with less
than 2% ripple. A fieldbus segment requires a power conditioner to isolate the
power supply filter and decouple the segment from other segments attached
to the same power supply.
All power to the transmitter is supplied over the signal wiring. Signal wiring
should be shielded, twisted pair for best results in electrically noisy
environments. Do not use unshielded signal wiring in open trays with power
wiring or near heavy electrical equipment.
Use ordinary copper wire of sufficient size to ensure that the voltage across the
transmitter power terminals does not go below 9 VDC. The power terminals are
polarity insensitive. To power the transmitter:
1. Connect the power leads to the terminals marked “Bus,” as shown in
Figure 2-7.
2. Tighten the terminal screws to ensure adequate contact. No
additional power wiring is necessary.
Figure 2-7. Transmitter Label
NOT USED
SECURITY
SIMULATE ENABLE
848A65A.EPS
Ground
(required with T1 option)
Connect Power Leads Here
Surges/Transients The transmitter will withstand electrical transients encountered through static
discharges or induced switching transients. However, a transient protection
option (option code T1) is available to protect the 848T against high-energy
transients. The device must be properly grounded using the ground terminal
(see Figure 2-7 on page 2-7).
2-7
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
GROUNDING The 848T transmitter provides input/output isolation up to 500 VAC rms.
NOTE
Neither conductor of the fieldbus segment can be grounded. Grounding out
one of the signal wires will shut down the entire fieldbus segment.
Shielded Wire
Each process installation has different requirements for grounding. Use the
grounding options recommended by the facility for the specific sensor type or
begin with grounding option 1 (most common).
Ungrounded Thermocouple, mV, and RTD/Ohm Inputs
Option 1:
1. Connect signal wiring shield to the sensor wiring shield(s).
2. Ensure the shields are tied together and electrically isolated from the
transmitter enclosure.
3. Only ground shield at the power supply end.
4. Ensure that the sensor shield(s) is electrically isolated from the
surrounding grounded fixtures.
Power
848T Supply
Sensor Wires
Shield ground point
Option 2:
1. Connect sensor wiring shield(s) to the transmitter enclosure (only if
the enclosure is grounded).
2. Ensure the sensor shield(s) is electrically isolated from surrounding
fixtures that may be grounded.
3. Ground signal wiring shield at the power supply end.
Power
848T Supply
Sensor Wires
Shield ground points
2-8
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Grounded Thermocouple Inputs
1. Ground sensor wiring shield(s) at the sensor.
2. Ensure that the sensor wiring and signal wiring shields are electrically
isolated from the transmitter enclosure.
3. Do not connect the signal wiring shield to the sensor wiring shield(s).
Power
848T Supply
Sensor Wires
Analog Device Inputs

1. Ground analog signal wire at the power supply of the analog devices.
2. Ensure that the analog signal wire and the fieldbus signal wire shields
are electrically isolated from the transmitter enclosure.
3. Do not connect the analog signal wire shield to the fieldbus signal
wire shield.
4. Ground fieldbus signal wire shield at the power supply end.
Foundation
4-20 mA loop fieldbus bus
Analog Device Power

Analog 848T Supply
Power Supply Device
Transmitter Enclosure (optional)

Ground the transmitter in accordance with local electrical requirements.
2-9
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
SWITCHES
Figure 2-8. Switch Location on
the Rosemount 848T
NOT USED
SECURITY
SIMULATE ENABLE
848A65A.EPS
Security
After configuring the transmitter, the data can be protected from unwarranted
changes. Each 848T is equipped with a security switch that can be positioned
“ON” to prevent the accidental or deliberate change of configuration data.
This switch is located on the front side of the electronics module and
is labeled SECURITY.
See Figure 2-8 on page 2-10 for switch location on the transmitter label.
Simulate Enable
The switch labeled SIMULATE ENABLE is used in conjunction with the
Analog Input (AI) and Multiple Analog Input (MAI) function blocks. This switch
is used to simulate temperature measurement. As a lock-out feature, the
switch must transition from “OFF” to “ON” after power is applied to the
transmitter. This feature prevents the transmitter from being left in simulator
mode.
Not Used
The switch is not functional.
2-10
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
TAGGING Commissioning Tag

The 848T has been supplied with a removable commissioning tag that
contains both the Device ID (the unique code that identifies a particular device
in the absence of a device tag) and a space to record the device tag (the
operational identification for the device as defined by the Piping and
Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID)).
When commissioning more than one device on a fieldbus segment, it can be
difficult to identify which device is at a particular location. The removable tag,
provided with the transmitter, can aid in this process by linking the Device ID
to its physical location. The installer should note the physical location of the
transmitter on both the upper and lower location of the commissioning tag.
The bottom portion should be torn off for each device on the segment and
used for commissioning the segment in the control system.
Figure 2-9. Commissioning Tag
Device ID
Device Tag
to denote
physical
location
Transmitter Tag
Hardware
• tagged in accordance with customer requirements
• permanently attached to the transmitter
Software
• the transmitter can store up to 30 characters
• if no characters are specified, the first 30 characters of the hardware tag
will be used
Sensor Tag
Hardware
• a plastic tag is provided to record identification of eight sensors
• this information can be printed at the factory upon request
• in the field, the tag can be removed, printed onto, and reattached to the
transmitter
Software
• if sensor tagging is requested, the Sensor Transducer Block sensor_sn
parameters will be set at the factory
• the sensor_sn parameters can be updated in the field
2-11
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
INSTALLATION
Using Cable Glands Use the following steps to install the 848T with Cable Glands:
1. Remove the junction box cover by unscrewing the four cover screws.
2. Run the sensor and power/signal wires through the appropriate cable
glands using the pre-installed cable glands (see Figure 2-10).
3. Install the sensor wires into the correct screw terminals (follow the
label on the electronics module).
4. Install the power/signal wires onto the correct screw terminals. Power
is polarity insensitive, allowing the user to connect positive (+) or
negative (–) to either Fieldbus wiring terminal labeled “Bus.”
5. Replace the enclosure cover and securely tighten all cover screws.
Figure 2-10. Installing the 848T Sensor 7

with Cable Glands Enclosure Cover
Screw (4) Sensor 5
Sensor 3
Sensor 1
Power/Signal
848_848A19A
Sensor 8
Cable Gland Sensor 6
Sensor 4
Sensor 2
Using Conduit Entries Use the following steps to install the 848T with Conduit Entries:
2. Remove the five conduit plugs and install five conduit fittings
(supplied by the installer).
3. Run pairs of sensor wires through each conduit fitting.
5. Install the power/signal wires into the correct screw terminals. Power
6. Replace the junction box cover and securely tighten all cover screws.
Figure 2-11. Installing the 848T Sensor 3 and 4 Conduit

with Conduit Entries Sensor 7 and 8 Conduit
Enclosure Sensor
Cover Screw 5 and 6
Sensors Conduit
1 and 2
Conduit Power/Signal
Conduit
848_848A09A
2-12
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
2-13
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
2-14
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Section 3 Configuration

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3-2
Common Configurations for Monitoring Applications . . page 3-4
Block Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3-7
Warnings

serious injury.
leakage may result.
terminals.
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
CONFIGURATION
Standard Each FOUNDATION fieldbus configuration tool or host system has a different
way of displaying and performing configurations. Some will use Device
Descriptions (DDs) and DD Methods to make configuration and displaying of
data consistent across host platforms.
Unless otherwise specified, the 848T will be shipped with the following
configuration (default):
Table 3-1. Standard

Configuration Settings Sensor Type(1) Type J Thermocouple
Damping(1) 5 seconds
Measurement Units(1) °C
Output(1) Linear with Temperature
Line Voltage Filter(1) 60 Hz
Temperature Specific Blocks • Measurement Transducer Block (1)
• Sensor Transducer Block (8)
• Differential Transducer Block (4)
FOUNDATION fieldbus Function Blocks • Analog Input (8)
• Multiple Analog Input (1)
• Input Selector (4)
(1) For all eight sensors
Refer to that systems documentation to perform configuration changes using

a FOUNDATION fieldbus host or configuration tool.
NOTE
To make configuration changes, ensure that the block is OOS by setting the
MODE_BLK.TARGET to OOS.
Transmitter The transmitter is available with the standard configuration setting. The
Configuration configuration settings and block configuration may be changed in the field
with the Emerson Process Management Systems DeltaV®, with AMSinside, or
other FOUNDATION fieldbus host or configuration tool.
Custom Configuration Custom configurations are to be specified when ordering. This configuration
must be the same for all eight sensors.
Methods For FOUNDATION fieldbus hosts or configuration tools that support DD

methods, there are 3 configuration methods available in each Sensor
Transducer block. These methods are included with the device description
(DD) software.
• Sensor Connections
• Sensor Input Trim (user input trim)
• Sensor Trim Factory (factory default trim)
3-2
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Two additional methods are available in the Measurement Transducer Block
to provide an easy mechanism to configure the individual sensor from a single
location. However using these methods will disable all transducer blocks until
the configuration is complete.
• Sensor Configurations
• Response Time Configuration
(used with the S002 option for the analog adaptors)
See the host system documentation for information on running DD methods
from the host system. If the FOUNDATION fieldbus host or configuration tool
does not support DD methods, refer to “Block Configuration” on page 3-7 for
information on how to modify sensor configuration parameters.
Alarms Use the following steps to configure the alarms, which are located in the
Resource Function Block.
1. Set the resource block to OOS.
2. Set WRITE_PRI to the appropriate alarm level (WRITE_PRI has a
selectable range of priorities from 0 to 15, see “Alarm Priority Levels”
on page 3-12. Set the other block alarm parameters at this time.
3. Set CONFIRM_TIME to the time, in 1/32 of a millisecond, that the
device will wait for confirmation of receiving a report before trying
again (the device does not retry if CONFIRM_TIME is 0).
4. Set LIM_NOTIFY to a value between zero and MAX_NOTIFY.
LIM_NOTIFY is the maximum number of alert reports allowed before
the operator needs to acknowledge an alarm condition.
5. Enable the reports bit in FEATURES_SEL.
6. Set the resource block to AUTO.
For modifying alarms on individual function blocks (AI or ISEL blocks), refer to
Appendix D: Function Blocks.
Damping Use the following steps to configure the damping, which is located in the
Sensor Transducer Function Blocks.
1. Place the Sensor Transducer Block(s) in OOS Mode (change
MODE_BLK.TARGET to OOS).
2. Change DAMPING to the desired filter rate (0.0 to 32.0 seconds).
3. Place the Sensor Transducer Block(s) in Auto Mode (change
MODE_BLK.TARGET to Auto).
Configure the Differential Use the following steps to configure the Differential Sensor Blocks.
Sensor Blocks 1. Place the Differential Sensor Transducer Block to OOS.
2. Set Input A and Input B to the sensor values that are to be used in the
differential equation diff = A–B. (NOTE: Unit types must be the same.)
3. Set the DIFFERENTIAL_CALC to either Not Used, Absolute, or
INPUT A minus INPUT B.
4. Place the Differential Sensor Transducer Block in auto mode.
3-3
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
COMMON For the application to work properly, configure the links between the function
CONFIGURATIONS FOR blocks and schedule the order of their execution. The Graphical User
Interface (GUI) provided by the FOUNDATION fieldbus host or configuration tool
MONITORING
will allow easy configuration.
APPLICATIONS
The measurement strategies shown in this section represent some of the
common types of configurations available in the 848T. Although the
appearance of the GUI screens will vary from host to host, the configuration
logic is the same.
NOTE
Please ensure that the host system or configuration tool is properly configured
before downloading the transmitter configuration. If configured improperly, the
FOUNDATION fieldbus host or configuration tool could overwrite the default
transmitter configuration.
Typical Monitoring/Profiling Application

Example: Distillation column temperature profile where all channels have the
same sensor units (°C, °F, etc.).
1. Place the Multiple Analog Input (MAI) function block in OOS mode
Out_1
(set MODE_BLK.TARGET to OOS).
Out_2
Out_3
2. Set CHANNEL= “channels 1 to 8.” Although the CHANNEL_X
parameters remain writable, CHANNEL_X can only be set = X when
Out_4
CHANNEL=1.
Out_5
MAI
3. Set L_TYPE to direct or indirect.
Out_6
Function 4. Set XD_SCALE (transducer measurement scaling) to the appropriate
Block Out_7
upper and lower range values, the appropriate sensor units, and
Out_8
display decimal point.
5. Set OUT_SCALE (MAI output scaling) to the appropriate upper and
lower range values, the appropriate sensor units, and display decimal
point.
6. Place the MAI Function Block in auto mode.
7. Verify that the function blocks are scheduled.
Monitoring Application with a Single Selection Application

Example: Average exhaust temperature of gas and turbine where there is a
single alarm level for all inputs.
1. Link the MAI outputs to the ISEL inputs.
Out_1 IN_1 Out 2. Place the Multiple Analog Input (MAI) function block in OOS mode
Out_2 IN_2 Out_D (set MODE_BLK.TARGET to OOS).
Out_3 IN_3
Out_4 IN_4 parameters remain writable, CHANNEL_X can only be set = X when
Out_5 IN_5 CHANNEL=1.
Out_6 IN_6 4. Set L_TYPE to direct or indirect.
MAI Out_7 IN_7 ISEL
Function Function 5. Set XD_SCALE (transducer measurement scaling) to the appropriate
Block Out_8 IN_8 Block upper and lower range values, the appropriate sensor units, and
3-4
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
point.
7. Place the MAI function block in auto mode.
8. Place the Input Selector (ISEL) function block in OOS mode by
setting MODE_BLK.TARGET to OOS.
9. Set OUT_RANGE to match the OUT_SCALE in the MAI block.
10. Set SELECT_TYPE to the desired function (Maximum Value,
Minimum Value, First Good Value, Midpoint Value, or Average Value).
11. Set the alarm limits and parameters if necessary.
12. Place the ISEL function block in auto mode.
Monitoring Temperature Points Individually
Example: Miscellaneous monitoring of temperature in a “close proximity”
where each channel can have different sensor inputs with different units and
there are independent alarm levels for each input.
Out
1. Place the first Analog Input (AI) function block in OOS mode (set
AI MODE_BLK.TARGET to OOS).
Function
Block 1 Out_D 2. Set CHANNEL to the appropriate channel value. Refer to “Alarm
Priority Levels” on page 3-12 for a listing of channel definitions.
3. Set L_TYPE to direct.
4. Set XD_SCALE (transducer measurement scaling) to the appropriate
Out
AI 5. Set OUT_SCALE (AI output scaling) to the appropriate upper and
Function lower range values, the appropriate sensor units, and display decimal
Block 8 Out_D
point.
7. Place the AI function block in auto mode.
8. Repeat steps 1 through 7 for each AI function block.
3-5
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Interfacing Analog Sensor Transducer Block Configuration

Transmitters to Use the sensor configuration method to set the sensor type to mV – 2-wire for
FOUNDATION fieldbus the applicable transducer block or follow these steps.
Out_1 1. Set the MODE_BLK.TARGET to OOS mode.
Out_2
2. Set the SENSOR_TYPE to mV.
Out_3
3. Set the MODE_BLK.TARGET to AUTO.
Out_4
Out_5 Multiple Analog Input or Analog Input Block Configuration
MAI Out_6
Function Follow these steps to configure the applicable block.
Block Out_7
2. Set CHANNEL to the transducer block configured for the analog
or input.
3. Set XD_SCALE.EU_0 to 20
Out Set XD_SCALE.EU_100 to 100
AI
Function Set XD_SCALE.ENGUNITS to mV
Block 1 Out_D
4. SET OUT_SCALE to match the desired scale and units for the
connected analog transmitter.
Flow Example: 0 – 200 gpm
OUT_SCALE.EU_0 = 0
OUT_SCALE.EU_100 = 200
OUT_SCALE.ENGUNITS = gpm
Out
AI 5. Set L_TYPE to INDIRECT.
Function
Block 8 Out_D 6. Set the MODE_BLK.TARGET to AUTO.
3-6
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
BLOCK
CONFIGURATION
Resource Block The resource block defines the physical resources of the device including
type of measurement, memory, etc. The resource block also defines
functionality, such as shed times, that is common across multiple blocks.
The block has no linkable inputs or outputs and it performs
memory-level diagnostics.
Table 3-2. Resource Block Parameters

Number Parameter Description
00 BLOCK
01 ST_REV
02 TAG_DESC The revision level of the static data associated with the function block.
03 STRATEGY The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of blocks.
04 ALERT_KEY The identification number of the plant unit.
05 MODE_BLK The actual, target, permitted, and normal modes of the block. For further description, see the
Mode parameter formal model in FF-890.
06 BLOCK_ERR This parameter reflects the error status associated with the hardware or software components
associated with a block. Multiple errors may be shown. For a list of enumeration values, see
FF-890, Block_Err formal model.
07 RS_STATE State of the function block application state machine. For a list of enumeration values, see
FF-890.
08 TEST_RW Read/write test parameter - used only for conformance testing.
09 DD_RESOURCE String identifying the tag of the resource which contains the Device Description for the
resource.
10 MANUFAC_ID Manufacturer identification number - used by an interface device to locate the DD file for the
resource.
11 DEV_TYPE Manufacturer's model number associated with the resource - used by interface devices to
locate the DD file for the resource.
12 DEV_REV Manufacturer revision number associated with the resource - used by an interface device to
13 DD_REV Revision of the DD associated with the resource - used by the interface device to locate the
DD file for the resource.
14 GRANT_DENY Options for controlling access of host computer and local control panels to operating, tuning
and alarm parameters of the block.
15 HARD_TYPES The types of hardware available as channel numbers. The supported hardware type is:
SCALAR_INPUT
16 RESTART Allows a manual restart to be initiated.
17 FEATURES Used to show supported resource block options. The supported features are:
SOFT_WRITE_LOCK_SUPPORT, HARD_WRITE_LOCK_SUPPORT, REPORTS, and
UNICODE
18 FEATURE_SEL Used to select resource block options.
19 CYCLE_TYPE Identifies the block execution methods available for this resource. The supported cycle types
are: SCHEDULED, and COMPLETION_OF_BLOCK_EXECUTION
20 CYCLE_SEL Used to select the block execution method for this resource.
21 MIN_CYCLE_T Time duration of the shortest cycle interval of which the resource is capable.
22 MEMORY_SIZE Available configuration memory in the empty resource. To be checked before attempting a
download.
23 NV_CYCLE_T Minimum time interval specified by the manufacturer for writing copies of NV parameters to
non-volatile memory. Zero means it will never be automatically copied. At the end of
NV_CYCLE_T, only those parameters which have changed need to be updated in NVRAM.
24 FREE_SPACE Percent of memory available for further configuration. Zero in preconfigured resource.
25 FREE_TIME Percent of the block processing time that is free to process additional blocks.
26 SHED_RCAS Time duration at which to give up on computer writes to function block RCas locations. Shed
from RCas will never happen when SHED_RCAS = 0.
3-7
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

27 SHED_ROUT Time duration at which to give up on computer writes to function block ROut locations. Shed
from ROut will never happen when SHED_ROUT = 0.
28 FAULT_STATE Condition set by loss of communication to an output block, fault promoted to an output block
or physical contact. When FAIL_SAFE condition is set, then output function blocks will
perform their FAIL_SAFE actions.
29 SET_FSTATE Allows the FAIL_SAFE condition to be manually initiated by selecting Set.
30 CLR_FSTATE Writing a Clear to this parameter will clear the device FAIL_SAFE if the field condition has
cleared.
31 MAX_NOTIFY Maximum number of unconfirmed notify messages possible.
32 LIM_NOTIFY Maximum number of unconfirmed alert notify messages allowed.
33 CONFIRM_TIME The time the resource will wait for confirmation of receipt of a report before trying again. Retry
will not happen when CONFIRM_TIME=0.
34 WRITE_LOCK If set, all writes to static and non-volatile parameters are prohibited, except to clear
WRITE_LOCK. Block inputs will continue to be updated.
35 UPDATE_EVT This alert is generated by any change to the static data.
36 BLOCK_ALM The BLOCK_ALM is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system
problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to
become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported
status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without
clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed.
37 ALARM_SUM The current alert status, unacknowledged states, unreported states, and disabled states of
the alarms associated with the function block.
38 ACK_OPTION Selection of whether alarms oscillated with the block will be automatically acknowledged.
39 WRITE_PRI Priority of the alarm generated by clearing the write lock.
40 WRITE_ALM This alert is generated if the write lock parameter is cleared.
41 ITK_VER Major revision number of the interoperability test case used in certifying this device as
interoperable. The format and range are controlled by the Fieldbus Foundation.
42 DISTRIBUTOR Reserved for use as distributor ID. No Foundation enumerations defined at this time.
43 DEV_STRING This is used to load new licensing into the device. The value can be written but will always
read back with a value of 0.
44 XD_OPTIONS Indicates which transducer block licensing options are enabled.
45 FB_OPTIONS Indicates which function block licensing options are enabled.
46 DIAG_OPTIONS Indicates which diagnostics licensing options are enabled.
47 MISC_OPTIONS Indicates which miscellaneous licensing options are enabled.
48 RB_SFTWR_REV_MAJOR Major revision of software that the resource block was created with.
49 RB_SFTWR_REV_MINOR Minor revision of software that the resource block was created with.
50 RB_SFTWR_REV_BUILD Build of software that the resource block was created with.
51 RB_SFTWR_REV_ALL The string will contains the following fields:
Major rev: 1-3 characters, decimal number 0-255
Minor rev: 1-3 characters, decimal number 0-255
Build rev: 1-5 characters, decimal number 0-255
Time of build: 8 characters, xx:xx:xx, military time
Day of week of build: 3 characters, Sun, Mon, …
Month of build: 3 characters, Jan, Feb.
Day of month of build: 1-2 characters, decimal number 1-31
Year of build: 4 characters, decimal
Builder: 7 characters, login name of builder
52 HARDWARE_REV Hardware revision of that hardware that has the resource block in it.
53 OUTPUT_BOARD_SN Output board serial number.
54 FINAL_ASSY_NUM The same final assembly number placed on the label.
55 DETAILED_STATUS Indicates the state of the transmitter. NOTE: Will be writable when PWA_SIMULATE is On
during simulation mode.
56 SUMMARY_STATUS An enumerated value of repair analysis.
57 MESSAGE_DATE Date associated with the MESSAGE_TEXT parameter
58 MESSAGE_TEXT Used to indicate changes made by the user to the device’s installation, configuration, or
calibration.
3-8
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

59 SELF_TEST Used to self test the device. Tests are device specific.
60 DEFINE_WRITE_LOCK Allows the operator to select how WRITE_LOCK behaves. The initial value is “lock
everything”. If the value is set to “lock only physical device” then the resource and transducer
blocks of the device will be locked but changes to function blocks will be allowed.
61 SAVE_CONFIG_NOW Allows the user to optionally save all non-volatile information immediately.
62 SAVE_CONFIG_BLOCKS Number of EEPROM blocks that have been modified since last burn. This value will count
down to zero when the configuration is saved.
63 START_WITH_DEFAULTS 0 = Uninitialized
1 = do not power-up with NV defaults
2 = power-up with default node address
3 = power-up with default pd_tag and node address
4 = power-up with default data for the entire communications stack (no application data)
64 SIMULATE_IO Status of Simulate jumper/switch
65 SECURITY_IO Status of Security jumper/switch
66 SIMULATE_STATE The state of the simulate jumper
0 = Uninitialized
1 = Jumper/switch off, simulation not allowed
2 = Jumper/switch on, simulation not allowed (need to cycle jumper/switch)
3 = Jumper/switch on, simulation allowed
67 DOWNLOAD_MODE Gives access to the boot block code for over the wire downloads
0 = Uninitialized
1 = Run Mode
2 = Download Mode
68 RECOMMENDED_ACTION Mask of FAILED_ALM. Corresponds bit of bit to FAILED_ACTIVE. A bit on means that the
condition is masked out from alarming.
69 FAILED_PRI Enumerated list of recommended actions displayed with a device alert.
70 FAILED_ENABLE Designates the alarming priority of the FAILED_ALM.
71 FAILED_MASK Enabled FAILED_ALM alarm conditions. Corresponds bit for bit to the FAILED_ACTIVE. A bit
on means that the corresponding alarm condition is enabled and will be detected. A bit off
means the corresponding alarm condition is disabled and will not be detected.
72 FAILED_ACTIVE Enumerated list of failure conditions within a device.
73 FAILED_ALM Alarm indicating a failure within a device which makes the device non-operational.
74 MAINT_PRI Designates the alarming priority of the MAINT_ALM
75 MAINT_ENABLE Enabled MAINT_ALM alarm conditions. Corresponds bit for bit to the MAINT_ACTIVE. A bit
76 MAINT_MASK Mask of MAINT_ALM. Corresponds bit of bit to MAINT_ACTIVE. A bit on means that the
77 MAINT_ACTIVE Enumerated list of maintenance conditions within a device.
78 MAINT_ALM Alarm indicating the device needs maintenance soon. If the condition is ignored, the device
will eventually fail.
79 ADVISE_PRI Designates the alarming priority of the ADVISE_ALM
80 ADVISE_ENABLE Enabled ADVISE_ALM alarm conditions. Corresponds bit for bit to the ADVISE_ACTIVE. A
bit on means that the corresponding alarm condition is enabled and will be detected. A bit off
81 ADVISE_MASK Mask of ADVISE_ALM. Corresponds bit of bit to ADVISE_ACTIVE. A bit on means that the
82 ADVISE_ACTIVE Enumerated list of advisory conditions within a device.
3-9
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

83 ADVISE_ALM Alarm indicating advisory alarms. These conditions do not have a direct impact on the
process or device integrity.
84 HEALTH_INDEX Parameter representing the overall health of the device, 100 being perfect and 1 being
non-functioning. The value will be set based on the active PWA alarms in accordance with the
requirements stated in “Device Alerts and Health Index PlantWeb Implementation Rules”.
Each device may implement its own unique mapping between the PWA parameters and
HEALTH_INDEX although a default mapping will be available based on the following rules.
HEALTH_INDEX will be set based on the highest priority PWA *_ACTIVE bit as follows:
FAILED_ACTIVE: 0 to 31 - HEALTH_INDEX = 10
MAINT_ACTIVE: 27 to 31 - HEALTH_INDEX = 20
ADVISE_ACTIVE: 16 to 31 - HEALTH_INDEX = 80
NONE - HEALTH_INDEX = 100
85 PWA_SIMULATE Allows direct writes to the PlantWeb Alert "ACTIVE" parameters and
RB.DETAILED_STATUS. The simulate jumper must be "ON' and the SIMULATE_STATE
must be "Jumper on, simulation allowed" before PWA_SIMULATE can be active.
3-10
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Block Errors
Table 3-3 lists conditions reported in the BLOCK_ERR parameter. Conditions
in bold are inactive for the Resource block and are given for reference.
Table 3-3. BLOCK_ERR .

Conditions Number Name and Description
0 Other
1 Block Configuration Error: A feature in CYCLE_SEL is set that is not supported by
CYCLE_TYPE.
2 Link Configuration Error: A link used in one of the function blocks is improperly
configured.
3 Simulate Active: This indicates that the simulation jumper is in place. This is not an
indication that the I/O blocks are using simulated data.
4 Local Override
5 Device Fault State Set
6 Device Needs Maintenance Soon
7 Input failure/process variable has bad status
8 Output Failure: The output is bad based primarily upon a bad input.
9 Memory Failure: A memory failure has occurred in FLASH, RAM, or EEPROM
memory.
10 Lost Static Data: Static data that is stored in non-volatile memory
has been lost.
11 Lost NV Data: Non-volatile data that is stored in non-volatile memory
has been lost.
12 Readback Check Failed
13 Device Needs Maintenance Now
14 Power Up: The device was just powered-up.
15 OOS: The actual mode is out of service.
Modes
The resource block supports two modes of operation as defined by the
MODE_BLK parameter:
Automatic (Auto)
The block is processing its normal background memory checks.
Out of Service (OOS)
The block is not processing its tasks. When the resource block is in OOS,
all blocks within the resource (device) are forced into OOS. The
BLOCK_ERR parameter shows Out of Service. In this mode, changes can
be made to all configurable parameters. The target mode of a block may
be restricted to one or more of the supported modes.
3-11
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Alarm Detection
A block alarm will be generated whenever the BLOCK_ERR has an error bit
set. The types of block error for the resource block are defined above. A write
alarm is generated whenever the WRITE_LOCK parameter is cleared. The
priority of the write alarm is set in the following parameter:
• WRITE_PRI
Table 3-4. Alarm Priority Levels

Number Description
0 The priority of an alarm condition changes to 0 after the condition that caused the
alarm is corrected.
1 An alarm condition with a priority of 1 is recognized by the system, but is not
reported to the operator.
2 An alarm condition with a priority of 2 is reported to the operator, but does not
require operator attention (such as diagnostics and system alerts).
3-7 Alarm conditions of priority 3 to 7 are advisory alarms of increasing priority.
8-15 Alarm conditions of priority 8 to 15 are critical alarms of increasing priority.
Status Handling
There are no status parameters associated with the resource block.
PlantWeb™ Alerts The alerts and recommended actions should be used in conjunction with
“Operation and Maintenance” on page 4-1.
The Resource Block will act as a coordinator for PlantWeb alerts. There will
be three alarm parameters (FAILED_ALARM, MAINT_ALARM, and
ADVISE_ALARM) which will contain information regarding some of the device
errors which are detected by the transmitter software. There will be a
RECOMMENDED_ACTION parameter which will be used to display the
recommended action text for the highest priority alarm and a HEALTH_INDEX
parameters (0 - 100) indicating the overall health of the transmitter.
FAILED_ALARM will have the highest priority followed by MAINT_ALARM
and ADVISE_ALARM will be the lowest priority.
FAILED_ALARMS
A failure alarm indicates a failure within a device that will make the device or
some part of the device non-operational. This implies that the device is in
need of repair and must be fixed immediately. There are five parameters
associated with FAILED_ALARMS specifically, they are described below.
FAILED_ENABLED
This parameter contains a list of failures in the device which makes the
device non-operational that will cause an alert to be sent. Below is a list of
the failures with the highest priority first.
1. Electronics
2. NV Memory
3. HW / SW Incompatible
4. Primary Value Failure
5. Secondary Value Failure
FAILED_MASK
This parameter will mask any of the failed conditions listed in
FAILED_ENABLED. A bit on means that the condition is masked out from
alarming and will not be reported.
3-12
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
FAILED_PRI
Designates the alerting priority of the FAILED_ALM, see Table 3-4 on
page 3-12. The default is 0 and the recommended value are between 8
and 15.
FAILED_ACTIVE
This parameter displays which of the alarms is active. Only the alarm with
the highest priority will be displayed. This priority is not the same as the
FAILED_PRI parameter described above. This priority is hard coded within
the device and is not user configurable.
FAILED_ALM
Alarm indicating a failure within a device which makes the device
non-operational.
MAINT_ALARMS
A maintenance alarm indicates the device or some part of the device needs
maintenance soon. If the condition is ignored, the device will eventually fail.
There are five parameters associated with MAINT_ALARMS, they are
described below.
MAINT_ENABLED
The MAINT_ENABLED parameter contains a list of conditions indicating
the device or some part of the device needs maintenance soon.
Below is a list of the conditions:
1. Primary Value Degraded
MAINT_MASK
The MAINT_MASK parameter will mask any of the failed conditions listed
in MAINT_ENABLED. A bit on means that the condition is masked out
from alarming and will not be reported.
MAINT_PRI
MAINT_PRI designates the alarming priority of the MAINT_ALM, Table 3-4
on page 3-12. The default is 0 and the recommended values is 3 to 7.
MAINT_ACTIVE
The MAINT_ACTIVE parameter displays which of the alarms is active.
Only the condition with the highest priority will be displayed. This priority is
not the same as the MAINT_PRI parameter described above. This priority
is hard coded within the device and is not user configurable.
MAINT_ALM
An alarm indicating the device needs maintenance soon. If the condition is
ignored, the device will eventually fail.
3-13
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Advisory Alarms
An advisory alarm indicates informative conditions that do not have a direct
impact on the device's primary functions There are five parameters
associated with ADVISE_ALARMS, they are described below.
ADVISE_ENABLED
The ADVISE_ENABLED parameter contains a list of informative
conditions that do not have a direct impact on the device's primary
functions. Below is a list of the advisories with the highest priority first.
1. NV Writes Deferred
2. Body Temperature Degraded
3. PlantWeb Alert Simulate is Active
ADVISE_MASK
The ADVISE_MASK parameter will mask any of the failed conditions listed
in ADVISE_ENABLED. A bit on means the condition is masked out from
ADVISE_PRI
ADVISE_PRI designates the alarming priority of the ADVISE_ALM, see
Table 3-4 on page 3-12. The default is 0 and the recommended values are
1 or 2.
ADVISE_ACTIVE
The ADVISE_ACTIVE parameter displays which of the advisories is
active. Only the advisory with the highest priority will be displayed. This
priority is not the same as the ADVISE_PRI parameter described above.
This priority is hard coded within the device and is not user configurable.
ADVISE_ALM
ADVISE_ALM is an alarm indicating advisory alarms. These conditions do
not have a direct impact on the process or device integrity.
3-14
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Recommended Actions RECOMMENDED_ACTION

for PlantWeb Alerts The RECOMMENDED_ACTION parameter displays a text string that will give
a recommended course of action to take based on which type and which
specific event of the PlantWeb alerts are active.
Table 3-5.
RB.RECOMMENDED_ACTION Failed/Maint/Advise Recommended Action
Alarm Type Active Event Text String
PlantWeb Alerts
None None No action required
Body Temperature One of the two body temperature sensors has

Advisory
Degraded failed, device remains operational.
Transducer Blocks There are three types of transducer blocks that allow the user to view and
manage the channel information. These blocks are:
• Measurement Transducer Block (MTB) – see “Measurement
Transducer Block (MTB)” on page 3-17.
• Sensor Transducer Block (STB), one for each of the eight sensors
– see “Sensor Transducer Block (STB)” on page 3-21.
• Differential Transducer Block (DTB), one for each sensor pair. The DTB
can be configured to any pairs of sensors with compatible units
– see “Differential Transducer Block (DTB)” on page 3-22.
These Transducer blocks contain specific temperature measurement data,
including:
• Sensor Type
• Engineering Units
• Damping
• Temperature Compensation
• Diagnostics
Figure 3-1. Transducer Block

Structure
Measurement Transducer Block (MTB)
(used for normal operations)
Differential
Sensor Transducer Blocks Transducer Blocks
STB1 STB2 STB3 STB4 STB5 STB6 STB7 STB8 DTB1 DTB2 DTB3 DTB4
Used for Configuration and Calibration
3-15
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Transducer Block Channel Definitions

The 848T supports multiple sensor inputs. Each input has a channel assigned
to it allowing an AI or MAI Function Blocks to be linked to that input. The
channels for the 848T are as follows:
Table 3-6. Channel Definitions

for the 848T Channel Description Channel Description
1 Sensor One (STB 1) 7 Sensor Seven (STB 7)
2 Sensor Two (STB 2) 8 Sensor Eight (STB 8)
3 Sensor Three (STB 3) 9 Differential Sensor 1 (DTB 1)
4 Sensor Four (STB 4) 10 Differential Sensor 2 (DTB 2)
5 Sensor Five (STB 5) 11 Differential Sensor 3 (DTB 3)
6 Sensor Six (STB 6) 12 Differential Sensor 4 (DTB 4)
13 Body Temperature
Transducer Block Errors

The following conditions are reported in the BLOCK_ERR and XD_ERROR
parameters. Conditions in bold are inactive for the transducer block and are
given only for reference.
Table 3-7. Block/Transducer

Error Condition Number, Name, and Description
0 Other(1)
1 Block configuration error
2 Link configuration error
3 Simulate active
4 Local override
5 Device fault state set
6 Device needs maintenance soon
BLOCK_ERR

8 Output failure
9 Memory failure
10 Lost static data
11 Lost NV data
12 Readback check failed
13 Device needs maintenance now
14 Power up: The device was just powered up
15 Out of service: The actual mode is out of service
16 Unspecified error: An unidentified error occurred
17 General error: A genera error that cannot be specified below occurred

18 Calibration error: An error occurred during calibration of the device or a
calibration error was detected during normal operations.
19 Configuration error: An error occurred during configuration of the device or a
configuration error was detected during normal operations.
XD_ERROR
20 Electronics failure: An electrical component failed

21 Mechanical failure: A mechanical component failed
22 I/O failure: An I/O failure occurred
23 Data Integrity Error: Data stored in the device is no longer valid due to a
non-volatile memory checksum failure, a data verify after write failure, etc.
24 Software error: The software has detected an error due to an improper
interrupt service routine, an arithmetic overflow, a watchdog time-out, etc.
25 Algorithm error: The algorithm used in the transducer block produced an error
due to overflow, data reasonableness failure, etc.
(1) If BLOCK_ERR is “other,” then see XD_ERROR.
3-16
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Transducer Block Modes
The transducer block supports two modes of operation as defined by the
MODE_BLK parameter:
Automatic (Auto)
The block outputs reflect the analog input measurement.
The block is not processed. Channel outputs are not updated and the
status is set to Bad: Out of Service for each channel. The BLOCK_ERR
parameter shows Out of Service. In this mode, changes can be made to all
configurable parameters. The target mode of a block may be restricted to
one or more of the supported modes.
Transducer Block Alarm Detection
Alarms are not generated by the transducer block. By correctly handling the
status of the channel values, the down stream block (AI or MAI) will generate
the necessary alarms for the measurement. The error that generated this
alarm can be determined by looking at BLOCK-ERR and XD_ERROR.
Transducer Block Status Handling
Normally, the status of the output channels reflect the status of the
measurement value, the operating condition of the measurement electronics
card, and any active alarm conditions. In a transducer, PV reflects the value
and status quality of the output channels.
Measurement There is one MTB in the 848T, which allows the user to view all channel
Transducer Block (MTB) information. It provides STB and DTB summary information (primary value
and status) and contains the parameters that apply to all STBs and DTBs.
The MTB allows configuration of the sensor types and sensor response times.
Channel
1 S1
Compensation
Units/Ranging
Linearization
Temperature
Channel
A/D Signal 2 S2
Conversion Channel
3 S3
Channel
4 S4
Channel
5 S5
CJC Channel
6 S6
Damping
Channel
Diagnostics 7 S7
Channel
8 S8
Channel
9 DS1
Channel
10 DS2
Channel
11 DS3
Channel
12 DS4
848_A20A
Channel
13 TT
3-17
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Table 3-8. Measurement Transducer Block Parameters

0 BLOCK
1 ST_REV The revision level of the static data associated with the function block.
2 TAG_DESC The user description of the intended application of the block.
5 MODE_BLK The actual, target, permitted, and normal modes of the block. For further description, see
the Mode parameter formal model in FF-890.
6 BLOCK_ERR This parameter reflects the error status associated with the hardware or software
components associated with a block. Multiple errors may be shown. For a list of
enumeration values, see FF-890, Block_Err formal model.
7 XD_ERROR One of the error codes defined in FF-903 XD_ ERROR and Block Alarm Subcodes.
8 PRIMARY_VALUE_1 The measured value and status available from sensor 1.
9 SENSOR_UNIT_1 The Device Description engineering units code index for the calibration values.
10 SENSOR_TAG_1 The user description of the intended application of the block.
32 DIFFERENTIAL_VALUE_1 The measured value and status available to the function block from the Differential TB.
33 DIFFERENTIAL_UNIT_1 The Device Description engineering units code index for the calibration values.
34 DIFFERENTIAL_TAG_1 The user description of the intended application of the block.
44 BODY_TEMP The terminal temperature at the device input terminals.
45 BODY_TEMP_UNIT The engineering units associated with the BODY_TEMP.
46 MODULE_SN The Serial Number of the A2D card
47 MODULE_HARDWARE_REV The hardware revision of the A2D card
48 MODULE_SOFTWARE_REV Software Revision of the A2D card
3-18
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

49 MODULE_STATUS A2D card Status
50 ASIC_REJECTION A configurable power line noise rejection setting
51 TB_COMMAND A2D Specific Commands
52 TB_SUMMARY_STATUS Status indicating A2D specific faults
53 SENSOR_SUMMARY_STATUS Status indicating Sensor specific faults
54 INTERMITTENT_DETECTION_THRE Allows the user to configure the amount of change in a sensor reading that causes it to be
SHOLD temporarily at its last value.
55 RESPONSE_TIME Active: Setting for fast inputs (analog). Accepts reading regardless of the amount of
change from the previous reading.
Deactivate: Sets the input to reject large transients unless confirmed by subsequent
readings (best for temperature measurements).
56 SENSOR_1_CONFIG.SENSOR Sensor Type setting for the corresponding input
56 SENSOR_1_CONFIG.CONNECTION Sensor Connection setting for the corresponding input
Changing the Sensor Configuration in the Main Transducer Block

If the FOUNDATION fieldbus configuration tool or host system does not support
the use of DD methods for device configuration, the following steps illustrate
how to change the sensor configuration in the main transducer block:
1. Set the MODE_BLK.TARGET to OOS.
For each sensor 'n'

2. Set SENSOR_n_CONFIG.SENSOR to appropriate sensor type.
3. Set SENSOR_n_CONFIG.CONNECTION to appropriate value
(2-wire or 3-wire).
4. In the Sensor Transducer Block, set MODE_BLK.TARGET to AUTO.
3-19
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Measurement Transducer Block Diagnostics

In addition to the BLOCK_ERR and XD_ERROR parameters, more detailed
information on the measurement status can be obtained via the
TB_SUMMARY_STATUS parameter in the Measurement Transducer Block.
Table 3-9 lists the potential errors and the possible corrective actions for the
given values. The corrective actions are in the order of increasing system
level compromises.
The first step should always be to reset the transmitter. If the error persists,
move to the next step as indicated in the table below.
Table 3-9. TB_SUMMARY_STA

TUS Descriptions and Value Name and Description Corrective Actions
Corrective Actions 0x01 Serious A/D error 1. Restart the device(1)
0x02 A/D Communication Error 1. Restart the device
0x04 Terminal Temperature Failure 1. Restart the processor
2. Call service center
0x08 Terminal Temperature Degraded (warning) 1. Monitor for terminal temperature
failure
0x10 Sensor/Differential Alert 1. Check wiring for sensor
connection (see “Sensor
Connections” on page 2-5).
2. Check sensor configuration in
transducer block.
3. Replace sensor
(1) Call the service center if the problem reoccurs.
3-20
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Sensor Transducer Block Each temperature input is supported by an STB that provides all the
(STB) parameters and methods necessary to configure and calibrate each individual
sensor. The 848T contains eight identical Sensor Transducer Blocks, one for
each available temperature input.
Table 3-10. Sensor Transducer Block Parameters

0 BLOCK
5 MODE_BLK The actual, target, permitted, and normal modes of the block.For further description, see
7 TRANSDUCER_TYPE Identifies the transducer that follows.
9 PRIMARY_VALUE_TYPE The type of measurement represented by PRIMARY_VALUE.
10 PRIMARY_VALUE The measured value and status available to the function block.
11 SENSOR_RANGE The high and low range limit values, the engineering units code and the number of digits
to the right of the decimal point to be used to display the final value.
12 DAMPING Sampling interval used to smooth output using a 1st order linear filter. A value of 0 will
disable damping.
13 SENSOR_TYPE Reflects the type of sensor connected on PRIMARY_VALUE.
14 SENSOR_CONNECTION The number of wires for the temperature sensor.
15 SENSOR_SN The sensor serial number.
16 SENSOR_STATUS Indicates the fail mode of the sensor connected
17 RTD_2_WIRE_OFFSET User entered value for constant lead-wire resistance correction in 2-wire RTD and Ohm
sensor types.
18 CAL_POINT_HI The highest calibrated value.
19 CAL_POINT_LO The lowest calibrated value.
20 CAL_MIN_SPAN The minimum calibration span value allowed. This minimum span information is
necessary to ensure that when calibration is done, the two calibrated points are not too
close together.
21 CAL_UNIT The Device Description engineering units code index for the calibration values.
22 CAL_PT_HI_LIMIT Calibration Limit High
23 CAL_PT_LO_LIMIT Calibration Limit Low
24 CAL_MODE Allows the device to use an Active Calibrator to simulate sensor inputs (Unused)
25 CAL_METHOD The method of the last calibration.
26 CAL_INFO Notes from last calibration
27 CAL_DATE The date of the last calibration
28 CAL_STATUS Indicates if calibration was successful
Changing the Sensor Configuration in the Sensor Transducer Block

how to change the sensor configuration in a sensor transducer block:
2. Set SENSOR_TYPE to appropriate value.
3. Set SENSOR_CONNECTION to appropriate value (2-wire or 3-wire).
3-21
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Sensor Calibration in the Sensor Transducer Block

how to calibrate the sensor from the sensor transducer block:
2. Set CAL_UNIT to calibration unit.
3. Set CAL_METHOD to User Trim (seeTable 3-6 on page 3-16 for valid
values).
4. Set the input value of the sensor simulator to be within the range
defined by CAL_PT_LO_LIMIT and CAL_PT_HI_LIMIT.
5. Set CAL_POINT_LO (CAL_POINT_HI) to the value set at the sensor
simulator.
6. Read CAL_STATUS and wait until it reads “Trim Complete”
7. Repeat steps 3 to 5 if performing a two-point trim. Note that the
difference in values between CAL_POINT_LO and CAL_POINT_HI
must be greater than CAL_MIN_SPAN.
8. Set MODE_BLK.TARGET to AUTO.
Differential Transducer Each differential temperature measurement is supported by a DTB that

Block (DTB) provides all the parameters necessary to configure the measurement and
select sensors from which the differential measurement is based. The 848T
contains four identical Differential Transducer Blocks, one for each available
pair of temperature inputs.
Table 3-11. Differential Transducer Block Parameters

0 BLOCK
5 MODE_BLK The actual, target, permitted, and normal modes of the block. For further description,
see the Mode parameter formal model in FF-890.
9 DIFFERENTIAL_VALUE The measured value and status available to the function block.
10 DIFFERENTIAL_RANGE The high and low range limit values, the engineering units code and the number of digits
11 INPUT_1 Sensor Value to be used in differential calculation
12 INPUT_2 Sensor Value to be used in differential calculation.
13 DIFFERENTIAL_STATUS Indicates the fail mode of the differential measurement based on the sensors connected
14 DIFFERENTIAL_CALC Allows the Differential measurement to be absolute, input1 - input2, or None
3-22
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Section 4 Operation and Maintenance

Foundation Fieldbus Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4-1
Hardware Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4-3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4-4
Warnings

serious injury.
leakage may result.
terminals.
FOUNDATION FIELDBUS FOUNDATION fieldbus is an all-digital, serial, two-way, multidrop

INFORMATION communication protocol that interconnects devices such as transmitters and
valve controllers. It is a local area network (LAN) for instruments that enables
basic control and I/O to be moved to the field devices. The Model 848T uses
FOUNDATION fieldbus technology developed and supported by Emerson
Process Management and the other members of the independent Fieldbus
Foundation.
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Table 4-1. Block Diagram for the

Model 848T
Function Blocks
• AI, MAI, and ISEL Measurement
Transducer Block
• sensor and differential
temp
• terminal temp.
FOUNDATION Resource • sensor configuration
Fieldbus Block
Communications • physical
Stack device
information
Analog-to-Digital Differential
Signal Sensor Transducer Transducer Blocks
Conversion Blocks • diff temp
• sensor temp • configuration
• configuration
(8 sensors) Cold Junction • calibration
• diagnostics
Input-to-Output
Isolation
Commissioning To be able to setup, configure, and have it communicate with other devices on
(Addressing) a segment, a device must be assigned a permanent address. Unless
requested otherwise, it is assigned a temporary address when shipped from
the factory.
If there are two or more devices on a segment with the same address, the first
device to start up will use the assigned address (ex. Address 20). Each of the
other devices will be given one of the four available temporary addresses. If a
temporary address is not available, the device will be unavailable until a
temporary address becomes available.
Use the host system documentation to commission a device and assign a
permanent address.
4-2
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
HARDWARE The 848T has no moving parts and requires a minimal amount of scheduled
MAINTENANCE maintenance. If a malfunction is suspected, check for an external cause
before performing the diagnostics presented below.
Sensor Check To determine whether the sensor is causing the malfunction, connect a sensor
calibrator or simulator locally at the transmitter. Consult an Emerson Process
Management representative for additional temperature sensor and accessory
assistance.
Communication/Power If the transmitter does not communicate or provides an erratic output, check
Check for adequate voltage to the transmitter. The transmitter requires between 9.0
and 32.0 VDC at the terminals to operate with complete functionality. Check
for wire shorts, open circuits, and multiple grounds.
Resetting the There are two types of restarts available in the Resource Block. The following
Configuration section outlines the usage for each of these. For further information, see
RESTART in Table 3-2 on page 3-6.
(RESTART)
Restart Processor (cycling)
Performing a Restart Processor has the same effect as removing power from
the device and reapplying power.
Restart with Defaults
Performing a Restart with Defaults resets the static parameters for all of the
blocks to their initial state. This is commonly used to change the configuration
and/or control strategy of the device, including any custom configurations
done at the Rosemount factory.
4-3
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
TROUBLESHOOTING
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Symptom Possible Cause Corrective Action
Device does not show Network configuration parameters Set the network parameters of the LAS (host system) according to the FF
up in the live list are incorrect Communications Profile
ST: 8
MRD: 10
DLPDU PhLO: 4
MID: 7
TSC: 4 (1 ms)
T1: 1920000 (60 s)
T2: 5760000 (180 s)
T3: 480000 (15 s)
Network address is not in polled Set first Unpolled Node and Number of UnPolled Nodes so that the device
range address is within range
Power to the device is below the Increase the power to at least 9V
9 VDC minimum
Noise on the power / Verify terminators and power conditioners are within specification
communication is too high Verify that the shield is properly terminated and not grounded at both ends. It is
best to ground the shield at the power conditioner
Device that is acting as LAS Scheduler was not Ensure that all of the devices that are intended to be a Backup LAS are
a LAS does not send downloaded to the Backup LAS marked to receive the LAS schedule
out CD device
All devices go off live Live list must be reconstructed by Current link setting and configured links settings are different. Set the current
list and then return Backup LAS device link setting equal to the configured settings.
Resource Block
Symptom Possible Causes Corrective Action
Mode will not leave Target mode not set Set target mode to something other than OOS.
OOS
Memory Failure BLOCK_ERR will show the lost NV Data or Lost Static Data bit set. Restart the
device by setting RESTART to Processor. If the block error does not clear, call
the factory.
Block Alarms Will not Features FEATURES_SEL does not have Alerts enabled. Enable the report bit.
work
Notification LIM_NOTIFY is not high enough. Set equal to MAX_NOTIFY.
4-4
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Measurement Transducer Block Troubleshooting

Mode will not leave Target mode not set Set target mode to AUTO
OOS A/D board check sum error The A/D board has a a serious error. See “Measurement Transducer Block
Diagnostics” on page 3-14
Resource block The actual mode of the Resource block in OOS. See Resource Block
Diagnostics for corrective action
One or more of the Measurement See “Measurement Transducer Block Diagnostics” on page 3-14
primary values or
differential value
statuses are BAD
Sensor Transducer Block Troubleshooting

OOS A/D board check sum error The A/D board has a checksum error. See Measurement Transducer Block
“Measurement Transducer Block Diagnostics” on page 3-14
Resource block The actual mode of the Resource block is in OOS. See Resource Block
Diagnostics for corrective action.
Measurement Transducer Block The actual mode of the Measurement Transducer Block is OOS.
The primary value is Measurement Look at the SENSOR_STATUS parameter (See Table 3-9 on page 3-15).
BAD See “Measurement Transducer Block Diagnostics” on page 3-14
Differential Transducer Block Troubleshooting

OOS A/D board check sum error The A/D board has a checksum error. See “Measurement Transducer Block
The differential value Measurement Component Sensor is OOS
status is BAD Look at the DIFFERENTIAL_STATUS parameter (See
DIFFERENTIAL_STATUS in Table 3-10 on page 3-17).
See “Measurement Transducer Block Diagnostics” on page 3-14
4-5
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
4-6
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Appendix A Reference Data
Functional Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page A-1

Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page A-3
Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page A-4
Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page A-4
Dimensional Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page A-7
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page A-11
FUNCTIONAL Inputs
SPECIFICATIONS Eight independently configurable channels including combinations of 2- and
3-wire RTDs, thermocouples, mV, and Ω inputs.
4-20 mA inputs using optional connector(s).
All sensor terminals are rated to 42.4 VDC.
Outputs
Manchester-encoded digital signal that conforms to IEC 1158-2 and
ISA 50.02.
Status
If self-diagnostics detect a sensor burnout or a transmitter failure, the status of
the measurement will be updated accordingly.
Ambient Temperature Limits

–40 to 185 °F (–40 to 85 °C)
Isolation
Input/output isolation is tested to 500 VAC rms (707 VDC). Input/input
isolation between each sensor input connector is tested to 500 VAC rms (707
VDC). Input/input isolation between sensors on the same input connector is 3
VAC at 50 – 60 Hz, 1.5 VDC.
Power Supply
Powered over FOUNDATION fieldbus with standard fieldbus power supplies.
The transmitter operates between 9.0 and 32.0 V dc, 22 mA maximum.
(Transmitter power terminals are rated to 42.4 V dc.)
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Transient Protection
The transient protector (option code T1) helps to prevent damage to the
transmitter from transients induced on the loop wiring by lightening, welding,
heavy electrical equipment, or switch gears. This option is installed at the
factory for the Rosemount 848T and is not intended for field installation.
ASME B 16.5 (ANSI)/IEEE C62.41-1991
(IEEE 587), Location Categories A2, B3.
6 kV / 3 kA peak (1.2 x 50 μS Wave 8 x 20 μS Combination Wave)
6 kV / 0.5 kA peak (100 kHz Ring Wave)
4 kV peak EFT (5 x 50 nS Electrical Fast Transient)
Update Time
Approximately 1.5 seconds to read all eight inputs.
Humidity Limits
0–100% non-condensing relative humidity
Turn-on Time
Performance within specifications is achieved in less than 50 seconds after
power is applied to the transmitter.
Alarms
The AI and ISEL function blocks allow the user to configure the alarms to
HI-HI, HI, LO, or LO-LO with a variety of priority levels and hysteresis settings.
Backup Link Active Scheduler (LAS)

The transmitter is classified as a device link master, which means it can
function as a Link Active Scheduler (LAS) if the current link master device fails
or is removed from the segment.
The host or other configuration tool is used to download the schedule for the
application to the link master device. In the absence of a primary link master,
the transmitter will claim the LAS and provide permanent control for the H1
segment.
FOUNDATION Fieldbus Parameters

Schedule Entries 25
Links 30
Virtual Communications Relationships (VCR) 20
A-2
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Mounting
The Rosemount 848T can be mounted directly onto a DIN rail or it can be
ordered with an optional junction box. When using the optional junction box,
the transmitter can be mounted onto a panel or to a 2-in. pipe stand (with
option code B6).
Entries for Optional Junction Box

No entry
• Used for custom fittings
Cable Gland
• 9 x M20 nickel-plated brass glands for 7.5–11.9 mm unarmored cable
Conduit
• 5 plugged 0.86-in. diameter holes suitable for installing 1/2-in. NPT fittings.
Materials of Construction for Optional Junction Box

Junction Box Type Paint
Aluminum Epoxy Resin
Plastic NA
Stainless Steel NA
Weight
Assembly Weight
oz lb kg
Rosemount 848T only 9.60 0.60 0.27
Aluminum(1) 78.2 4.89 2.22
Plastic (1) 58.1 3.68 1.65
Stainless Steel (1) 77.0 4.81 2.18
(1) Add 35.2 oz (2.2 lb, 0.998 kg) for nickel-plated brass glands
Environmental Ratings
NEMA 4X, CSA Enclosure Type 4X, and IP66 with optional junction box.
A-3
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
FUNCTION BLOCKS
Analog Input (AI)
• Processes the measurement and makes it available on the
fieldbus segment.
• Allows filtering, alarming, and engineering unit changes.
Input Selector (ISEL)
• Used to select between inputs and generate an output using specific
selection strategies such as minimum, maximum, midpoint, or average
temperature.
• Since the temperature value always contains the measurement status, this
block allows the selection to be restricted to the first “good” measurement.
Multiple Analog Input Block (MAI)
• The MAI block allows the eight AI blocks to be multiplexed together so
they serve as one function block on the H1 segment, resulting in greater
network efficiency.
PERFORMANCE The transmitter maintains a specification conformance of at least ±3.

SPECIFICATIONS
Stability
• ±0.1% of reading or 0.1 °C (0.18 °F), whichever is greater, for 2 years
for RTDs.
• ±0.1% of reading or 0.1 °C (0.18 °F), whichever is greater, for 1 year for
thermocouples.
Self Calibration
The transmitter’s analog-to-digital circuitry automatically self-calibrates for
each temperature update by comparing the dynamic measurement to
extremely stable and accurate internal reference elements.
Vibration Effect
Transmitters are tested to the following vibration conditions with no effect
on performance:
Frequency Acceleration
10 - 60 Hz 0.21 mm peak displacement
60 - 2000 Hz 3g
A-4
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
CE Electromagnetic Compatibility Compliance Testing
Meets the criteria under IEC 61326 Amendment 1, 2000:
Emissions
• 30–230 MHz, 30 dB (uV/m) at 10 m
• 230–1000 MHz, 37 dB (uV/m) at 10 m
Susceptibility
• ESD • 4 kV contact discharge
• 8 kV air discharge
• Radiated • 80 – 1000 MHz at 10 V/m AM
• Burst • 1 kV
• Surge • 1 kV line–to-ground
• Conducted • 150 kHz to 80 MHz at 3V
• Magnetic • 50 Hz at 30 A/m
Accuracy
TABLE 1. Input Options/Accuracy

Input Ranges Accuracy Over Range(s)
Sensor Option Sensor Reference °C °F °C °F
2- and 3-Wire RTDs
Pt 100 ( = 0.00385) IEC 751; = 0.00385, 1995 –200 to 850 –328 to 1562 ± 0.30 ± 0.54
Pt 100 ( = 0.003916) JIS 1604, 1981 –200 to 645 –328 to 1193 ± 0.30 ± 0.54
Pt 200 IEC 751; = 0.00385, 1995 –200 to 850 –328 to 1562 ± 0.54 ± 0.98
Pt 500 IEC 751; = 0.00385, 1995 –200 to 850 –328 to 1562 ± 0.38 ± 0.68
Pt 1000 IEC 751; = 0.00385, 1995 –200 to 300 –328 to 572 ± 0.40 ± 0.72
Ni 120 Edison Curve No. 7 –70 to 300 –94 to 572 ± 0.30 ± 0.54
Cu 10 Edison Copper Winding No. 15 –50 to 250 –58 to 482 ± 3.20 ± 5.76
Thermocouples—Cold Junction Adds + 0.5 °C to Listed Accuracy
NIST Type B (Accuracy varies NIST Monograph 175 100 to 300 212 to 572 ± 6.00 ± 10.80
according to input range) 301 to 1820 573 to 3308 ± 1.54 ± 2.78
NIST Type E NIST Monograph 175 –50 to 1000 –58 to 1832 ± 0.40 ± 0.72
NIST Type J NIST Monograph 175 –180 to 760 –292 to 1400 ± 0.70 ± 1.26
NIST Type K NIST Monograph 175 –180 to 1372 –292 to 2502 ± 1.00 ± 1.80
NIST Type N NIST Monograph 175 –200 to 1300 –328 to 2372 ± 1.00 ± 1.80
NIST Type R NIST Monograph 175 0 to 1768 32 to 3214 ± 1.50 ± 2.70
NIST Type S NIST Monograph 175 0 to 1768 32 to 3214 ± 1.40 ± 2.52
NIST Type T NIST Monograph 175 –200 to 400 –328 to 752 ± 0.70 ± 1.26
DIN L DIN 43710 –200 to 900 –328 to 1652 ± 0.70 ± 1.26
DIN U DIN 43710 –200 to 600 –328 to 1112 ± 1.70 ± 1.26
w5Re26 ASTME 988-96 0 to 2000 32 to 3632 ± 1.60 ± 2.88
Millivolt Input(1)—Not approved for use with CSA Option Code I6 –10 to 100 mV ± 0.05 mV
2- and 3-Wire Ohm Input 0 to 2000 ohms ± 0.90 ohm
Multipoint Sensors(2)
(1) 4–20 mA inputs are scaled to 20 – 100 mV.
(2) Multipoint (up to 8 points) thermocouples and RTDs are available for purchase with the Rosemount 848T. Input ranges and accuracy for these sensors will
depend on the specific multipoint sensor chosen. For more information, contact your local Rosemount representative.
Accuracy Notes
Differential capability exists between any two sensor types:
For all differential configurations, the input range is X to +Y where
X = Sensor 1 minimum - Sensor 2 max.
Y = Sensor 1 maximum - Sensor 2 min.
A-5
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Accuracy for differential configurations:

If sensor types are similar (for example, both RTDs or both thermocouples),
the accuracy = 1.5 times worst case accuracy of either sensor type. If sensor
types are dissimilar (for example, one RTD and one thermocouple), the
accuracy = Sensor 1 Accuracy + Sensor 2 Accuracy.
Ambient Temperature Effect

Transmitters may be installed in locations where the ambient temperature is
between –40 and 85 °C (–40 and 185 °F).
TABLE 2. Ambient Temperature Effects

Accuracy per 1.0 °C (1.8 °F) Change in Ambient
NIST Type Temperature(1)C Temperature Range (°C)
RTD
Pt 100 (α = 0.00385) • 0.003 °C (0.0054 °F) NA
Pt 100 (α = 0.003916) • 0.003 °C (0.0054 °F) NA
Pt 500, Pt 1000, Ni 120 • 0.003 °C (0.0054 °F) NA
Pt 200 • 0.004 °C (0.0072 °F) NA
Cu 10 • 0.03 °C (0.054 °F) NA
Thermocouple (R = the value of the reading) NA
Type B • 0.014 °C • R ≥ 1000
• 0.032 °C - (0.0025% of (R - 300)) • 300 ≤ R < 1000
• 0.054 °C - (0.011% of (R - 100)) • 100 ≤ R < 300
Type E • 0.005 °C + (0.00043% of R) • All
Type J, DIN Type L • 0.0054 °C + (0.00029% of R) • R≥0
• 0.0054 °C + (0.0025% of |R|) • R<0
Type K • 0.0061 °C + (0.00054% of R) • R≥0
• 0.0061 °C + (0.0025% of |R|) • R<0
Type N • 0.0068 °C + (0.00036% of R) • All
Type R, Type S • 0.016 °C • R ≥ 200
• 0.023 °C - (0.0036% of R) • R < 200
Type T, DIN Type U • 0.0064 °C • R≥0
• 0.0064 °C - (0.0043% of |R|) • R<0
Millivolt 0.0005 mV NA
2- and 3-wire Ohm 0.0084 ohms NA
(1) Change in ambient is in reference to the calibration temperature of the transmitter (20 °C (68 °F) typical from the factory).
A-6
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Ambient Temperature Notes
Examples:
When using a Pt 100 (a = 0.00385) sensor input and the transmitter is at 40
°C ambient temperature, temperature effects would be:
0.003 °C x (40 - 20) = 0.06 °C.
Worst case error would be:
Sensor Accuracy + Temperature Effects = 0.30 °C + 0.06 = 0.36°C.
Total Probable Error =
0.30 2 + 0.06 2 = °C
Analog to Fieldbus Performance

4– 20 mA inputs are scaled to 20 – 100 mV.
Accuracy(1):0.0625% of span
Temperature Effect: [0.002% of reading + 0.000625%
of span] per 1.0 °C change in Ambient Temperature.
(1) To obtain accuracy, the mV input must be calibrated while
using the optional analog connector.
DIMENSIONAL Junction Boxes with no entries (option codes JP1, JA1, and JS1)– external
DRAWINGS dimensions are the same as those outlined for the other junction box
materials in this section.
Rosemount 848T
Top View 3-D View Side View

1.7
848_848A66A, 00848-4010_1, 00848-4014_2.EPS

Security Switch Simulation Switch (43)
6.7
(170)
3.7
(93)
Removable Wiring
Connection
A-7
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Aluminum/Plastic Junction Box—Cable Gland (option codes JA2 and JP2)
Top View 3-D View

10.24 (260)
Ground Screw
Side View
Front View
848_848A48A
2.44 (62) 7.84 (199.2)
1.57 (40)
1.73 (44) 6.30 (160)
4.41 (112)
2.28 (58)
3.78 (96)
1.10 (28)
Stainless Steel Junction Box—Cable Gland (option code JS2)
Top View 3-D View

9.91 (231)
7.7 (196)
Ground Screw
848_848A49A
Front View Side View

1.8 (46) 9.14 (232.2)
1.1 (28) 7.72 (196)
1.73 (44)
6.61 (168)
4.0 (102)
2.4 (62)
1.8 (47)
1.2 (30)
A-8
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Aluminum/Plastic Junction Box—Conduit Entry (option codes JA3 and JP3)
Top View 3-D View

10.2 (260)

157 (40)
2.44 (62)
10.2 (260)
848_848A50A
3.5 (89)
1.7 (42)
Five Plugged 0.86-in. diameter

holes suitable for installing 1/2-in.
NPT fittings
Stainless Steel Junction Box—Conduit Entry (option code JS3)
Top View 3-D View

9.1 (231)
7.7 (196)
Ground Screw
Front View
1.4 (35) Side View
1.1 (27) 2.8 (70) 1.2 (30) 848_848A51A
4.0 (102)
2.4 (62)
1.6 (42) 1.8 (4.7)
0.06 (1.5)
Five Plugged 0.86-in. diameter holes suitable for installing 1/2-in. NPT fittings
A-9
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Mounting Options
10.2 4.5
848_848A52A, B, 53A, B
5.1 (260) 6.6 (167) fully
(130) assembled (114)
7.5 (190) fully

assembled

848_848A54A, 55A
A-10
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
ORDERING
INFORMATION
Model Product Description
848T Eight Input Temperature Transmitter
Code Communications Protocol
F FOUNDATION™ fieldbus digital signal (includes 8 AI and 4 ISEL function blocks, and Backup Link Active Scheduler)
Rosemount Junction
Code Product Certifications(1) Box required?
I5 FM Intrinsic Safety and Non-Incendive No
IE FM FISCO (Fieldbus Intrinsically Safe Concept) and Non-incendive Class I, Division 2 No
N5 FM Class I, Division 2 Dust Ignition Proof Yes
I6 CSA Intrinsic Safety and Non-Incendive No
IF CSA FISCO (Fieldbus Intrinsically Safe Concept) and Suitable for Class I, Division 2 No
I1 ATEX Intrinsic Safety No
IA ATEX FISCO (Fieldbus Intrinsically Safe Concept) No
N1 ATEX Type n Yes
NC ATEX Type n Component No(2)
ND ATEX Dust Ignition Proof Yes
I7 IEXEx Intrinsic Safety (Consult Factory) No
N7 IEXEx Type n (Consult Factory) No(3)
IG IECEx FISCO (Fieldbus Intrinsically Safe Concept) No
I2 CEPEL Intrinsic Safety No
NA No Approval No
Code Input Types
S001 RTDs and Thermocouples
S002(4) RTDs, Thermocouples, and 4–20 mA
Code Options
T1 Transient Protection
Mounting Kit Options
B6 Universal Mounting Bracket for 2-in. pipe mounting and for panel mounting – SST bracket and bolts
Non Explosion-Proof Junction Box
Plastic Junction Box
JP1 No Entries
JP2 Cable Glands (9 x M20 nickel-plated brass glands for 7.5–11.9 mm unarmored cable)
JP3 Conduit Entries (5 plugged holes, suitable for installing 1/2-in. NPT fittings)
Aluminum Junction Box
JA1 No Entries
JA2 Cable Glands (9 x M20 nickel-plated brass glands for 7.5–11.9 mm unarmored cable)
JA3 Conduit Entries (5 plugged holes, suitable for installing 1/2-in. NPT fittings)
Stainless Steel Junction Box
JS1 No Entries
JS2 Cable Glands (9 x M20 nickel-plated brass glands for 7.5–11.9 mm unarmored cable)
JS3 Conduit Entries (5 plugged holes, suitable for installing 1/2-in. NPT fittings)
A-11
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

Custom Software Configuration Request
C1 Factory configuration of date, descriptor, and message fields (CDS required)
Configuration(5) Options
F5 50 Hz Line Voltage Filter
Special Temperature Test
LT Test to -60°F (-51.1°C)
Typical Model Number: 848T F I5 S001 T1 B6 JA2
(1) Consult factory for availability.
(2) The Rosemount 848T ordered with option code NC is not approved as a stand-alone unit. Additional system certification is required.
(3) The Rosemount 848T must be installed so it is protected to at least the requirements of IP54; All listed Junction Boxes fulfill this requirement.
(4) Not available with product certifications.
(5) Configuration is the same for all eight inputs.
A-12
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Appendix B Product Certificates
Hazardous Locations Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page B-1

Intrinsically Safe and Non-Incendive Installations . . . . . page B-6
Installation Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page B-7
HAZARDOUS
LOCATIONS
CERTIFICATES
North American Factory Mutual (FM) Approvals

Approvals I5 Intrinsically Safety and Non-Incendive
Intrinsically Safe for use in Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B,C, D; when
installed per Rosemount drawing 00848-4402.
Temperature Code:
T4(Tamb = – 40 to 60 °C)
Non-incendive for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D (suitable
for use with non-incendive field wiring) when installed in accordance with
Rosemount Drawing 00848-4402.
Temperature Code:
T4A (Tamb = –40 to 85 °C)
T5 (Tamb = –40 to 70 °C)
Table B-1. FM Approved Entity Parameters

Power/Bus Sensor
Ui = 30 V Uo = 12.02 V
Ii = 300 mA Io = 13.6 mA
Pi = 1.3 W Po = 0.04 W
Ci = 2.1nF Ca = 1.36 μF
Li = 0 La = 160 mH
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
IE FISCO (Fieldbus Intrinsically Safe Concept) Intrinsic Safety

Intrinsically safe for use in Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B,C, D; when
installed in accordance with Rosemount Drawing 00848-4402.
Temperature Code:
T4(Tamb = – 40 to 60 °C)
for use with non-incendive field wiring); when installed in accordance
with Rosemount Drawing 00848-4402.
Temperature Code:
T4A (Tamb = –40 to 85 °C)
T5 (Tamb = –40 to 70 °C)
Table B-2. Entity Parameters

Power/Bus Sensor
Ui = 17.5 V Uo = 12.02 V
Ii = 380 mA Io = 13.6 mA
Pi = 5.32 W Po = 0.04W
Ci = 2.1nF Ca = 1.36 μF
Li = 0 La = 160 mH
N5 Dust Ignition-Proof Dust Ignition Proof

For use in Class II, III, Division 1, Groups E, F, G. Class I, Division 2,
Groups A, B, C, D; when installed in accordance with Rosemount
Drawing 00848-4402.
Temperature Code:
T4A (Tamb = –40 to 85 °C)
T5 (Tamb = –40 to 70 °C)
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Approvals

I6 Intrinsic Safety and Non-Incendive
For use in Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D; when installed per
Rosemount drawing 00848-4403.
Temperature Code:
T3C (Tamb = –50 to 60 °C)
Suitable for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D. Rated 42.4 VDC max.
Table B-3. CSA Approved Entity Parameters

Power/Bus Sensor
Ui = 30 V Uo = 12.02 V
Ii = 300 mA Io = 11.8 mA
Ci = 2.1nF Ca = 1.36 μF
Li = 0 La = 225 mH
B-2
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
IF FISCO (Fieldbus Intrinsically Safe Concept) Intrinsic Safety
Temperature Code:
T3C (Tamb = –50 to 60 °C)
Suitable for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D.Rated 42.4 VDC max.

Power/Bus Sensor
Ui = 17.5 V Uo = 12.02 V
Ii = 380 mA Io = 11.8 mA
Ci = 2.1nF Ca = 1.36 μF
Li = 0 La = 225 mH
European Approvals CENELEC Approvals

I1 Intrinsic Safety
Certification Number: Baseefa02ATEX0010X
ATEX Marking II 1 G
EEx ia IIC T4 (Tamb = –50 to 60 °C)
1180
Table B-5. CENELEC Approved Entity Parameters

Power/Bus Sensor
Ui = 30 V Uo = 12.5 V
Ii = 300 mA Io = 66 mA
Pi = 1.3 W Po = 40 mW
Ci = 0 Ci = 0
Li = 0 Li = 0
Special Conditions for Safe Use (x):

This apparatus must be installed in an enclosure which affords it a degree of
protection of at least IP20. Non-metallic enclosures must have a surface
resistance of less than 1G ohm, light alloy or zirconium enclosures must be
protected from impact and friction when installed.
The apparatus will not meet the 500V rms isolation test required by Clause
6.4.12 on EN50 020:1994 when the optional transient protection (FISCO)
board is fitted and this must be taken into account when installing the
apparatus.
IA FISCO (Fieldbus Intrinsically Safe Concept) Intrinsic Safety
ATEX Marking II 1 G
1180

Power/Bus Sensor
Ui = 17.5 V Uo = 12.5 V
Ii = 380 mA Io = 66 mA
Pi = 5.32 W Po = 40 mW
Ci = 0 Ci = 0
Li = 0 Li = 0
B-3
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

apparatus.
N1 CENELEC Type n
Certification Number: BAS01ATEX3199X
ATEX Marking II 3 G
EEx nL IIC T5 (Tamb = –40 to 65 °C)
Power/Bus Sensor
Ui = 42.4 V Uo = 5 V
Ci = 0 Io = 2.5 mA
Li = 0 Co = 1000 μF
Lo = 1000 mH

1. Provisions shall be made, external to the apparatus, to prevent the rated
voltage (42.4 V dc) being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than
40%.
2. The ambient temperature range of use shall be the most restrictive of the
apparatus, cable gland, or blanking plug.
NC CENELEC Type n Component
Certification Number: BAS01ATEX3198U
ATEX Marking II 3 G
1. The component must be housed in a suitably certified enclosure.
2. Provision shall be made, external to the component, to prevent the rated
voltage (42.4V d.c.) being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than
40%.TBD
ND CENELEC Dust Ignition Proof
ATEX Marking II 1 D
T90C (Tamb = – 40 to 65 °C) IP66
B-4
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
1. The user must ensure that the maximum rated voltage and current (42.2
volts, 22 mA, DC) are not exceeded. All connections to other apparatus or
associated apparatus shall have control over this voltage and current
equivalent to a category “ib” circuit according to EN50020.
2. Component approved EEx e cable entries must be used which maintain the
ingress protection of the enclosure to at least IP66.
3. Any unused cable entry holes must be filled with component approved EEx
e blanking plugs.
Australian Approvals
Standard Australia Quality Assurance Service (SAA)

NOTE
Consult factory for SAA availability.
I7 Intrinsic Safety
Ex ia IIC
N7 Type n
Ex n IIC
Brazilian Approval
Centro de Pesquisas de Energia Eletrica (CEPEL) Approval
NOTE
Consult factory for CEPEL availability.
I2 Intrinsic Safety
BR-Ex ia IIC T4
B-5
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
INTRINSICALLY SAFE AND NON-INCENDIVE INSTALLATIONS
Zone 2 Zone 1 Zone 0

(category 3) (category 2) (category 1)
Approval Safe Area Division 2 Division 1

GAS INSTALLATIONS
I5, I6, I1, Approved I.S. or

I7, IE, IA FISCO barrier
848T without
enclosure
Non-approved
N1, N7 power supply
848T with enclosure
N5 Non-approved
power supply
848T with enclosure
Approved
I5, I6, IE non-incendive
power supply
or barrier
848T without enclosure
DUST INSTALLATIONS
N5, ND Non-approved
power supply
848T with enclosure
Standard cable
Division 2 wiring
B-6
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
INSTALLATION The installation guidelines presented by the drawings must be followed in

DRAWINGS order to maintain certified ratings for installed transmitters.
Rosemount Drawing 00848-4402, 3 Sheets
Factory Mutual Intrinsic Safety/ FISCO Installation Drawing
Canadian Standards Association Intrinsic Safety/FISCO Installation Drawing
B-7
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Figure B-1. FM Intrinsic Safety/ FISCO
B-8
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
B-9
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
B-10
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Figure B-2. CSA Intrinsic Safety/ FISCO
B-11
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
B-12
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
B-13
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
B-14
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Appendix C FOUNDATION™ Fieldbus

Technology
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page C-1
Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page C-1
Device Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page C-3
Block Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page C-3
Network Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page C-4
OVERVIEW FOUNDATION fieldbus is an all-digital, serial, two-way, multidrop

communication protocol that interconnects devices such as transmitters,
sensors, actuators, and valve controllers. Fieldbus is a Local Area Network
(LAN) for instruments that are used in both process and manufacturing
automation, having the built-in capability to distribute the control applications
across the network. The fieldbus environment is the base level group of digital
networks and the hierarchy of plant networks.
The fieldbus retains the desirable features of the 4–20 mA analog system,
including standardized physical interface to the wire, bus-powered devices on
a single pair of wires, and intrinsic safety options. It also enables the following
capabilities:
• Increased capabilities due to full digital communication.
• Reduced wiring and wire terminations due to multiple devices on one
pair of wires.
• Increased supplier selection due to interoperability
• Reduced loading on control room equipment due to the distribution of
some control and input/output functions to field devices.
Fieldbus devices work together to provide I/O and control for automated
processes and operations. The Fieldbus Foundation provides a framework for
describing these systems as a collection of physical devices interconnected
by a fieldbus network. One of the ways that the physical devices are used is to
perform their portion of the total system operation by implementing one or
more function blocks.
FUNCTION BLOCKS Function blocks perform process control functions, such as analog input (AI)
and analog output (AO) functions as well as proportional-integral-derivative
(PID) functions. The standard function blocks provide a common structure for
defining function block inputs, outputs, control parameters, events, alarms,
and modes, and combining them into a process that can be implemented
within a single device or over the fieldbus network. This simplifies the
identification of characteristics that are common to function blocks.
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
The Fieldbus Foundation has established the function blocks by defining a

small set of parameters used in all function blocks called universal
parameters. The Foundation has also defined a standard set of function block
classes, such as input, output, control, and calculation blocks. Each of these
classes has a small set of parameters established for it. They have also
published definitions for transducer blocks commonly used with standard
function blocks. Examples include temperature, pressure, level, and flow
transducer blocks.
The Foundation specifications and definitions allow vendors to add their own
parameters by importing and subclassing specified classes. This approach
permits extending function block definitions as new requirements are
discovered and as technology advances.
Figure C-1 illustrates the internal structure of a function block. When
execution begins, input parameter values from other blocks are snapped-in by
the block. The input snap process ensures that these values do not change
during the block execution. New values received for these parameters do not
affect the snapped values and will not be used by the function block during
the current execution.
Figure C-1. Function

Block Internal Structure
Input Events Execution Output Events
Control
Input Processing Output Output

Input
Snap Algorithm Snap Parameter
Parameter
FIELDBUS_0012
Linkages Linkages
Status Status
Once the inputs are snapped, the algorithm operates on them, generating
outputs as it progresses. Algorithm executions are controlled through the
setting of contained parameters. Contained parameters are internal to
function blocks and do not appear as normal input and output parameters.
However, they may be accessed and modified remotely, as specified by the
function block.
Input events may affect the operation of the algorithm. An execution control
function regulates the receipt of input events and the generation of output
events during execution of the algorithm. Upon completion of the algorithm,
the data internal to the block is saved for use in the next execution, and the
output data is snapped, releasing it for use by other function blocks.
A block is a tagged logical processing unit. The tag is the name of the block.
System management services locate a block by its tag. Thus the service
personnel need only know the tag of the block to access or change the
appropriate block parameters.
Function blocks are also capable of performing short-term data collection and
storage for reviewing their behavior.
C-2
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS Device Descriptions (DD) are specified tool definitions that are associated
with the Resource and Transducer Blocks. Device descriptions provide the
definition and description of the function blocks and their parameters.
To promote consistency of definition and understanding, descriptive
information, such as data type and length, is maintained in the device
description. Device Descriptions are written using an open language called
the Device Description Language (DDL). Parameter transfers between
function blocks can be easily verified because all parameters are described
using the same language. Once written, the device description can be stored
on an external medium, such as a CD-ROM or diskette. Users can then read
the device description from the external medium. The use of an open
language in the device description permits interoperability of function blocks
within devices from various vendors. Additionally, human interface devices,
such as operator consoles and computers, do not have to be programmed
specifically for each type of device on the bus. Instead their displays and
interactions with devices are driven from the device descriptions.
Device descriptions may also include a set of processing routines called
methods. Methods provide a procedure for accessing and manipulating
parameters within a device.
BLOCK OPERATION In addition to function blocks, fieldbus devices contain two other block types
to support the function blocks. These are the resource block and the
transducer block.
Instrument- Specific Resource Blocks

Function Blocks Resource blocks contain the hardware–specific characteristics associated
with a device; they have no input or output parameters. The algorithm within a
resource block monitors and controls the general operation of the physical
device hardware. The execution of this algorithm is dependent on the
characteristics of the physical device, as defined by the manufacturer. As a
result, the algorithm may cause the generation of events. There is only one
resource block defined for a device. For example, when the mode of a
resource block is “Out of Service (OOS),” it impacts all of the other blocks.
Transducer Blocks
Transducer blocks connect function blocks to local input/output functions.
They read sensor hardware and write to effector (actuator) hardware. This
permits the transducer block to execute as frequently as necessary to obtain
good data from sensors and ensure proper writes to the actuator without
burdening the function blocks that use the data. The transducer block also
isolates the function block from the vendor–specific characteristics of the
physical I/O.
Alerts When an alert occurs, execution control sends an event notification and waits
a specified period of time for an acknowledgment to be received. This occurs
even if the condition that caused the alert no longer exists. If the
acknowledgment is not received within the pre-specified time-out period, the
event notification is retransmitted, assuring that alert messages are not lost.
C-3
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Two types of alerts are defined for the block, events and alarms. Events are
used to report a status change when a block leaves a particular state, such as
when a parameter crosses a threshold. Alarms not only report a status
change when a block leaves a particular state, but also report when it returns
back to that state.
NETWORK Figure C-2 illustrates a simple fieldbus network consisting

COMMUNICATION of a single segment (link).
Figure C-2. Simple, Single-Link

Fieldbus Network Fieldbus Link
FIELDBUS_0013
LAS
Link Master
Basic Devices and/or link master devices
Link Active Scheduler All links have one Link Active Scheduler (LAS). The LAS operates as the bus
(LAS) arbiter for the link. The LAS does the following:
• recognizes and adds new devices to the link.
• removes non-responsive devices from the link.
• distributes Data Link Time (DL) and Link Scheduling Time (LS) on the
link. DL is a network-wide time periodically distributed by the LAS to
synchronize all device clocks on the bus. LS time is a link-specific time
represented as an offset from DL. It is used to indicate when the LAS
on each link begins and repeats its schedule. It is used by system
management to synchronize function block execution with the data
transfers scheduled by the LAS.
• polls devices for process loop data at scheduled transmission times.
• distributes a priority-driven token to devices between
scheduled transmissions.
Any device on the link may become the LAS. The devices that are capable of
becoming the LAS are called Link Master devices (LM). All other devices are
referred to as basic devices. When a segment first starts up, or upon failure of
the existing LAS, the link master devices on the segment bid to become the
LAS. The link master that wins the bid begins operating as the LAS
immediately upon completion of the bidding process. Link masters that do not
become the LAS act as basic devices. However, the link masters can act as
LAS backups by monitoring the link for failure of the LAS and then bidding to
become the LAS when a LAS failure is detected.
Only one device can communicate at a time. Permission to communicate on
the bus is controlled by a centralized token passed between devices by the
LAS. Only the device with the token can communicate. The LAS maintains a
list of all devices that need access to the bus. This list is called the “Live List.”
Two types of tokens are used by the LAS. A time-critical token, Compel Data
(CD), is sent by the LAS according to a schedule. A non-time critical token,
pass token (PT), is sent by the LAS to each device in ascending numerical
order according to address.
C-4
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
There may be many LM devices on a segment but only the LAS is actively
controlling communication traffic. The remaining LM devices on the segment
are in a stand-by state, ready to take over if the primary LAS fails. This is
achieved by constantly monitoring the communication traffic on the bus and
determining if activity is not present. Since there can be multiple LM devices
on the segment when the primary LAS fails, the device with the lowest node
address will become the primary LAS and take control of the bus. Using this
strategy, multiple LAS failures can be handled with no loss of the LAS
capability of the communications bus.
LAS Parameters
There are many bus communication parameters but only a few are used. For
standard RS-232 communications, the configuration parameters are baud
rate, start / stop bits, and parity. The key parameters for H1 Fieldbus are as
follows.
• Slot Time (ST) – Used during the bus master election process. It is the
maximum amount of time permitted for device A to send a message to
device B. Slot time is a parameter which defines a worst case delay
which includes internal delay in the sending device and the receiving
device. Increasing the value of ST slows down bus traffic because a
LAS device must wait longer prior to determining that the LM is down.
• Minimum Inter-PDU Delay (MID) – The minimum gap between two
messages on the fieldbus segment or it is the amount of time between
the last byte of one message and the first byte of the next message.
The units of the MID are octets. An octet is 256 μs, hence the units for
MID are approximately 1/4 ms. This would mean an MID of 16 would
specify approximately a minimum of 4 ms between messages on the
Fieldbus. Increasing the value of MID slows down bus traffic because a
larger “gap” between messages occurs.
• Maximum Response (MRD) – Defines the maximum amount of time
permitted to respond to an immediate response request, e.g. CD, PT.
When a published value is requested using the CD command, the MRD
defines how long before the device publishes the data. Increasing this
parameter will slow down the bus traffic by decreasing how fast CDs
can be put onto the network. The MRD is measured in units of ST.
• Time Synchronization Class (TSC) – A variable that defines how long
the device can estimate its time before drifting out of specific limits. The
LM will periodically send out a time update messages to synchronize
devices on the segment. Decreasing the parameter number increases
the number of times that time distribution messages must be published,
increasing bus traffic and overhead for the LM device. See Figure C-3.
Figure C-3. LAS Parameter

diagram
C MID
FB 1 D Data MID FB 2
MID x ST
C-5
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Backup LAS
A LM device is one that has the ability to control the communications on the
bus. The LAS is the LM capable device that is currently in control of the bus.
While there can be many LM devices acting as backups, there can only be
one LAS. The LAS is typically a host system but for stand-alone applications,
a device may be providing the role of primary LAS.
Addressing To setup, configure, and communicate with other devices on a segment, a

device must be assigned a permanent address. Unless requested otherwise,
it is assigned a temporary address when shipped from the factory.
Fieldbus uses addresses between 0 and 255. Addresses 0 through 15 are
reserved for group addressing and for use by the data link layer.
device to start up will use the assigned address. Each of the other devices will
be given one of the four temporary addresses. If a temporary address is not
available, the device will be unavailable until a temporary address is available.
permanent address.
Scheduled Transfers Information is transferred between devices over the fieldbus using three
different types of reporting.
Publisher/Subscriber
This type of reporting is used to transfer critical process loop data, such as the
process variable. The data producers (publishers) post the data in a buffer
that is transmitted to the subscriber, when the publisher receives the Compel
Data (CD). The buffer contains only one copy of the data. New data
completely overwrites previous data. Updates to published data are
transferred simultaneously to all subscribers in a single broadcast. Transfers
of this type can be scheduled on a precisely periodic basis.
Report Distribution
This type of reporting is used to broadcast and multicast event and trend
reports. The destination address may be predefined so that all reports are
sent to the same address, or it may be provided separately with each report.
Transfers of this type are queued. They are delivered to the receivers in the
order transmitted, although there may be gaps due to corrupted transfers.
These transfers are unscheduled and occur between scheduled transfers at a
given priority.
Client/Server
This type of reporting is used for request/response exchanges between pairs
of devices. Like Report Distribution reporting, the transfers are queued,
unscheduled, and prioritized. Queued means the messages are sent and
received in the order submitted for transmission, according to their priority,
without overwriting previous messages. However, unlike Report Distribution,
these transfers are flow controlled and employ a retransmission procedure to
recover from corrupted transfers.
C-6
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Figure C-4 diagrams the method of scheduled data transfer. Scheduled data
transfers are typically used for the regular cyclic transfer of process loop data
between devices on the fieldbus. Scheduled transfers use publisher/
subscriber type of reporting for data transfer. The LAS maintains a list of
transmit times for all publishers in all devices that need to be cyclically
transmitted. When it is time for a device to publish data, the LAS issues a CD
message to the device. Upon receipt of the CD, the device broadcasts or
“publishes” the data to all devices on the fieldbus. Any device that is
configured to receive the data is called a “subscriber.”
Figure C-4. Scheduled Data

Transfer
LAS
Schedule
X, Y, Z DT(A)
FIELDBUS_0013
A B C A D A
CD(X,A)
P S P S P S
Device X Device Y Device Z

LAS = Link Active Scheduler
P = Publisher
S = Subscriber
CD = Compel Data
DT = Data Transfer Packet
Unscheduled Transfers Figure C-5 diagrams an unscheduled transfer. Unscheduled transfers are
used for things like user-initiated changes, including set point changes, mode
changes, tuning changes, and upload/download. Unscheduled transfers use
either report distribution or client/server type of reporting for transferring data.
All of the devices on the fieldbus are given a chance to send unscheduled
messages between transmissions of scheduled data. The LAS grants
permission to a device to use the fieldbus by issuing a pass token (PT)
message to the device. When the device receives the PT, it is allowed to send
messages until it has finished or until the “maximum token hold time” has
expired, whichever is the shorter time. The message may be sent to a single
destination or to multiple destinations.
Figure C-5. Unscheduled Data

Transfer
LAS
PT(Z)
Schedule
X, Y, Z DT(M)
FIELDBUS_0015A
A B C A D A
M M
P S P S P S

P = Publisher S = Subscriber PT = Pass Token M = Message
C-7
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Function Block Figure C-6 shows an example of a link schedule. A single iteration of the
Scheduling link-wide schedule is called the macrocycle. When the system is configured
and the function blocks are linked, a master link-wide schedule is created for
the LAS. Each device maintains its portion of the link-wide schedule, known
as the Function Block Schedule. The Function Block Schedule indicates when
the function blocks for the device are to be executed. The scheduled
execution time for each function block is represented as an offset from the
beginning of the macrocycle start time.
Figure C-6. Example Link

Schedule Showing Scheduled
and Unscheduled Macrocycle Start Time Sequence
Communication Offset from macrocycle Repeats
start time = 0 for AI
Execution
Device 1
AI AI
Offset from macrocycle start
Scheduled time = 20 for AI Communication
Communication
Unscheduled
Communication
time = 30 for PID Execution
Device 2 PID AO PID AO

time = 50 for AO Execution
FIELDBUS_0016
Macrocycle
To support synchronization of schedules, periodically Link Scheduling (LS)

time is distributed. The beginning of the macrocycle represents a common
starting time for all Function Block schedules on a link and for the LAS
link-wide schedule. This permits function block executions and their
corresponding data transfers to be synchronized in time.
C-8
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Appendix D Function Blocks
Analog Input (AI) Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page D-1

Multiple Analog Input (MAI) Function Block . . . . . . . . . . page D-9
Input Selector Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page D-15
ANALOG INPUT (AI) The Analog Input (AI) function block processes field device measurements
FUNCTION BLOCK and makes them available to other function blocks. The output value from the
AI block is in engineering units and contains a status indicating the quality of
the measurement. The measuring device may have several measurements or
derived values available in different channels. Use the channel number to
OUT_D
define the variable that the AI block processes.
AI OUT The AI block supports alarming, signal scaling, signal filtering, signal status
calculation, mode control, and simulation. In Automatic mode, the block’s
output parameter (OUT) reflects the process variable (PV) value and status.
In Manual mode, OUT may be set manually. The Manual mode is reflected on
Out = The block output value and status the output status. A discrete output (OUT_D) is provided to indicate whether a
Out_D = Discrete output that signals a selected alarm condition is active. Alarm detection is based on the OUT value
selected alarm condition and user specified alarm limits.
Table D-1. Analog Input Function Block Parameters

Number Parameter Units Description
01 ST_REV None The revision level of the static data associated with the function block. The
revision value will be incremented each time a static parameter value in the block is
changed.
02 TAG_DESC None The user description of the intended application of the block.
03 STRATEGY None The strategy field can be used to identify a grouping of blocks. This data is not
checked or processed by the block.
04 ALERT_KEY None The identification number of the plant unit. This information may be used in the host
for sorting alarms, etc.
05 MODE_BLK None The actual, target, permitted, and normal modes of the block.
Actual: The mode the “block is currently in”
Target: The mode to “go to”
Permitted: Allowed modes that target may take on
Normal: Most common mode for target
06 BLOCK_ERR None This parameter reflects the error status associated with the hardware or software
components associated with a block. It is a bit string, so that multiple errors may be
shown.
07 PV EU of XD_SCALE The process variable used in block execution.
08 OUT EU of OUT_SCALE The block output value and status.
or XD_SCALE if in
direct L_TYPE
09 SIMULATE None A group of data that contains the current transducer value and status, the simulated
transducer value and status, and the enable/disable bit.
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

10 XD_SCALE None The high and low scale values, engineering units code, and number of digits to
the right of the decimal point associated with the channel input value. The
XD_SCALE units code must match the units code of the measurement channel in
the transducer block. If the units do not match, the block will not transition to MAN
or AUTO.
11 OUT_SCALE None The high and low scale values, engineering units code, and number of digits to the
right of the decimal point associated with OUT when L_TYPE is not direct.
12 GRANT_DENY None Options for controlling access of host computers and local control panels to
operating, tuning, and alarm parameters of the block. Not used by device.
13 IO_OPTS None Allows the selection of input/output options used to alter the PV. Low cutoff enabled
is the only selectable option.
14 STATUS_OPTS None Allows the user to select options for status handling and processing. The options
supported in the AI block are the following:
Propagate fault forward
Uncertain if limited
Bad if limited
Uncertain if Manual mode.
15 CHANNEL None The CHANNEL value is used to select the measurement value. Configure the
CHANNEL parameter before configuring the XD_SCALE parameter. Refer to Table
3-5 on page 3-11.
16 L_TYPE None Linearization type. Determines whether the field value is used directly (Direct), is
converted linearly (Indirect), or is converted with the square root (Indirect Square
Root).
17 LOW_CUT % If percentage value of transducer input fails below this, PV = 0.
18 PV_FTIME Seconds The time constant of the first-order PV filter. It is the time required for a 63% change
in the PV or OUT value.
19 FIELD_VAL Percent The value and status from the transducer block or from the simulated input when
simulation is enabled.
20 UPDATE_EVT None This alert is generated by any change to the static data.
21 BLOCK_ALM None The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system
problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first
alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status parameter. As soon as
the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may
be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed.
22 ALARM_SUM None The summary alarm is used for all process alarms in the block. The cause of the
alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the
Active status in the Status parameter. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared
by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the
Active status, if the subcode has changed.
23 ACK_OPTION None Used to set auto acknowledgment of alarms.
24 ALARM_HYS Percent The amount the alarm value must return within the alarm limit before the associated
active alarm condition clears.
25 HI_HI_PRI None The priority of the HI HI alarm.
26 HI_HI_LIM EU of PV_SCALE The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the HI HI alarm condition.
27 HI_PRI None The priority of the HI alarm.
28 HI_LIM EU of PV_SCALE The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the HI alarm condition.
29 LO_PRI None The priority of the LO alarm.
30 LO_LIM EU of PV_SCALE The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the LO alarm condition.
31 LO_LO_PRI None The priority of the LO LO alarm.
32 LO_LO_LIM EU of PV_SCALE The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the LO LO alarm condition.
33 HI_HI_ALM None The HI HI alarm data, which includes a value of the alarm, a timestamp of
occurrence and the state of the alarm.
34 HI_ALM None The HI alarm data, which includes a value of the alarm, a timestamp of occurrence
and the state of the alarm.
35 LO_ALM None The LO alarm data, which includes a value of the alarm, a timestamp of occurrence
D-2
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

36 LO_LO_ALM None The LO LO alarm data, which includes a value of the alarm, a timestamp of
37 OUT_D None Discrete output to indicate a selected alarm condition.
38 ALM_SEL None Used to select the process alarm conditions that will cause the OUT_D parameter to
be set.
39 STDDEV % of OUT Range Standard deviation of the measurement for 100 macrocycles.
40 CAP_STDDEV % of OUT Range Capability standard deviation, the best deviation that can be achieved.
Functionality Simulation
To support testing, either change the mode of the block to manual and adjust
the output value, or enable simulation through the configuration tool and
manually enter a value for the measurement value and its status. In
simulation, the ENABLE jumper must be set on the field device.
NOTE
All fieldbus instruments have a simulation jumper. As a safety measure, the
jumper has to be reset every time there is a power interruption. This measure
is to prevent devices that went through simulation in the staging process from
being installed with simulation enabled.
With simulation enabled, the actual measurement value has no impact on the
value or the status.
Figure D-1. Analog Input

Function Block Timing Diagram
OUT (mode in man)
OUT (mode in auto)
PV
63% of Change
FIELD_VAL FIELDBUS-FBUS_03A
Time (seconds)
PV_FTIME
D-3
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

Function Block Schematic
Analog
Measurement
ALM_SEL
Access
Analog HI_HI_LIM
Meas. HI_LIM Alarm
OUT_D
LO_LO_LIM Detection
LO_LIM
CHANNEL
ALARM_HYS
LOW_CUT
OUT
Cutoff Filter PV Status

Convert Calc.
SIMULATE
FIELDBUS-FBUS_02A
L_TYPE PV_FTIME MODE
FIELD_VAL IO_OPTS
STATUS_OPTS
OUT_SCALE
XD_SCALE
OUT = Block output value and status
OUT_D = Discrete output that signals a selected alarm condition
Filtering
The filtering feature changes the response time of the device to smooth
variations in output readings caused by rapid changes in input. Adjust the
filter time constant (in seconds) using the PV_FTIME parameter. Set the filter
time constant to zero to disable the filter feature.
Signal Conversion
Set the signal conversion type with the Linearization Type (L_TYPE)
parameter. View the converted signal (in percent of XD_SCALE) through the
FIELD_VAL parameter.
100 × ( Channel Value – EU*@0% )
FIELD_VAL = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
( – ) * XD_SCALE values
Choose from direct, indirect, or indirect square root signal conversion with the
L_TYPE parameter.
Direct
Direct signal conversion allows the signal to pass through the accessed
channel input value (or the simulated value when simulation is enabled).
PV Channel Value
Indirect
Indirect signal conversion converts the signal linearly to the accessed channel
input value (or the simulated value when simulation is enabled) from its
specified range (XD_SCALE) to the range and units of the PV and OUT
parameters (OUT_SCALE).
PV = ⎛
FIELD_VAL⎞
× ( EU**@100% EU**@0% ) + EU**@0%
⎝ 100 ⎠
** OUT_SCALE values
D-4
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Indirect Square Root
Indirect Square Root signal conversion takes the square root of the value
computed with the indirect signal conversion and scales it to the range and
units of the PV and OUT parameters.
PV ⎛ FIELD_VAL⎞ × ( EU**@100% EU**@0% ) EU**@0%

⎝ 100 ⎠
When the converted input value is below the limit specified by the LOW_CUT
parameter, and the Low Cutoff I/O option (IO_OPTS) is enabled (True), a
value of zero is used for the converted value (PV). This option eliminates false
readings when the differential pressure measurement is close to zero and it
may be useful with zero-based measurement devices such as flowmeters.
NOTE
Low Cutoff is the only I/O option supported by the AI block. Set the I/O option
when the block is OOS.
Block Errors
Table D-2 lists conditions reported in the BLOCK_ERR parameter. Conditions
in bold are inactive for the AI block and are given here for reference.
Table D-2. BLOCK_ERR

0 Other
1 Block Configuration Error: the selected channel carries a measurement that is
incompatible with the engineering units selected in XD_SCALE, the L_TYPE
parameter is not configured, or CHANNEL = zero.
2 Link Configuration Error
3 Simulate Active: Simulation is enabled and the block is using a simulated value in
its execution.
4 Local Override
7 Input Failure/Process Variable has Bad Status: The hardware is bad, or a bad
status is being simulated.
9 Memory Failure
10 Lost Static Data
11 Lost NV Data
14 Power Up
15 Out of Service: The actual mode is out of service.
D-5
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Modes
The AI Function Block supports three modes of operation as defined by the
MODE_BLK parameter:
Manual (Man)
The value of the block output (OUT) may be set manually
Automatic (Auto)
OUT reflects the analog input measurement or the simulated value when
The block is not processed. FIELD_VAL and PV are not updated and the
OUT status is set to Bad: Out of Service. The BLOCK_ERR parameter
shows Out of Service. In this mode, changes can be made to all
configurable parameters.
Alarm Detection
set. The types of block error for the AI block are defined above.
Process Alarm detection is based on the OUT value. Configure the alarm
limits of the following standard alarms:
• High (HI_LIM)
• High high (HI_HI_LIM)
• Low (LO_LIM)
• Low low (LO_LO_LIM)
To avoid alarm chatter when the variable is oscillating around the alarm limit,
an alarm hysteresis in percent of the PV span can be set using the
ALARM_HYS parameter. The priority of each alarm is set in the following
parameters:
• HI_PRI
• HI_HI_PRI
• LO_PRI
• LO_LO_PRI
Table D-3. Alarm Priority Levels

Number Description
alarm is corrected.
D-6
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Status Handling
Normally, the status of the PV reflects the status of the measurement value,
the operating condition of the I/O card, and any active alarm condition. In Auto
mode, OUT reflects the value and status quality of the PV. In Man mode, the
OUT status constant limit is set to indicate that the value is a constant and the
OUT status is Good.
If the sensor limit exceeds the high or low range, PV status is set high or low
and EU range status is set to uncertain.
In the STATUS_OPTS parameter, select from the following options to control
the status handling:
BAD if Limited
Sets the OUT status quality to Bad when the value is higher or lower than
the sensor limits.
Uncertain if Limited
Sets the OUT status quality to Uncertain when the value is higher or lower
than the sensor limits.
Uncertain if in Manual mode
The status of the Output is set to Uncertain when the mode is set to
Manual
NOTES
1. The instrument must be in OOS mode to set the status option.
2. The AI block only supports the BAD if Limited option, uncertain if limited,
and uncertain if manual.
Advanced Features
The AI function block provided with Rosemount fieldbus devices provides
added capability through the addition of the following parameters:
ALARM_TYPE
Allows one or more of the process alarm conditions detected by the AI
function block to be used in setting its OUT_D parameter.
OUT_D
Discrete output of the AI function block based on the detection of process
alarm condition(s). This parameter may be linked to other function blocks
that require a discrete input based on the detected alarm condition.
STD_DEV and CAP_STDDEV
Diagnostic parameters that can be used to determine the variability of the
process.
D-7
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Application Information
The configuration of the AI function block and its associated output channels
depends on the specific application. A typical configuration for the AI block
involves the following parameters:
CHANNEL
The device supports more than one measurement, so verify that the
selected channel contains the appropriate measurement or derived value.
Refer to Table 3-5 on page 3-11 for a listing of available channels on the
848T.
L_TYPE
Select Direct when the measurement is in the desired engineering units
for the block output. Select Indirect when converting the measured
variable into another, for example, pressure into level or flow into energy.
SCALING
provides the range and units of the measurement and
provides the range and engineering units of the output.
OUT_SCALE is only used when in indirect or indirect square root.
AI Block
Troubleshooting
Mode will not leave OOS Target mode not set. Set target mode to something other than OOS.
Configuration error BLOCK_ERR will show the configuration error bit set. The following are parameters that
must be set before the block is allowed out of OOS:
• CHANNEL must be set to a valid value and cannot be left at initial value of 0.
• XD_SCALE.UNITS_INDEX must match the units in the transducer block
channel value. Setting the units in the AI block automatically sets them in the
XD_BLOCK.
• L_TYPE must be set to Direct, Indirect, or Indirect Square Root and cannot be left at
initial value of 0.
Resource block The actual mode of the Resource block is OOS. See Resource Block Diagnostics for
corrective action.
Schedule Block is not scheduled and therefore cannot execute to go to Target Mode. Typically,
BLOCK_ERR will show “Power-Up” for all blocks that are not scheduled. Schedule the
block to execute.
Process and/or block Features FEATURES_SEL does not have Alerts enabled. Enable the Alerts bit.
alarms will not work. Notification LIM_NOTIFY is not high enough. Set equal to MAX_NOTIFY. Alarm not linked to host.
Status Options STATUS_OPTS has Propagate Fault Forward bit set. This should be cleared to cause an
alarm to occur.
Value of output does not Linearization Type L_TYPE must be set to Direct, Indirect, or Indirect Square Root and cannot be left at
make sense initial value of 0.
Scaling Scaling parameters are set incorrectly:
• XD_SCALE.EU0 and EU100 should match that of the transducer block
channel value.
• OUT_SCALE.EU0 and EU100 are not set properly.
• Both STB on each asic used must by in auto.
Cannot set HI_LIMIT, Scaling Limit values are outside the OUT_SCALE.EU0 and OUT_SCALE.EU100 values.
HI_HI_LIMIT, LO_LIMIT, Change OUT_SCALE or set values within range.
or LO_LO_LIMIT Values
D-8
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
MULTIPLE ANALOG The Multiple Analog Input (MAI) function block has the ability to process up to
INPUT (MAI) FUNCTION eight field device measurements and make them available to other function
blocks. The output values from the MAI block are in engineering units and
BLOCK
contain a status indicating the quality of the measurement. The measuring
device may have several measurements or derived values available in
OUT_1
different channels. Use the channel numbers to define the variables that the
OUT_2 MAI block processes.
OUT_3
MAI OUT_4
1A The MAI block supports signal scaling, signal filtering, signal status
OUT_5 output parameters (OUT_1 to OUT_8) reflects the process variable (PV)
OUT_6 values and status. In Manual mode, OUT may be set manually. The Manual
OUT_7 mode is reflected on the output status. Table lists the MAI block parameters
OUT_8 and their units of measure, descriptions, and index numbers.
Out1 = The block output value and status

for the first channel.
Table D-4. Multiple Analog Input Function Block Parameters

1 ST_REV None The revision level of the static data associated with the input selector block. The
changed.
3 STRATEGY None The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of blocks. This data is not
shown.
7 CHANNEL None Allows for custom channel setting. Valid values include:
0: Unitialized
1: Channels 1 to 8 (index values 27 to 34 can only be set to their corresponding
channel number, i.e. CHANNEL_X=X)
2: Custom settings (index values 27 to 34 can be configured for any valid channel
as defined by the DD)
8, 9, 10, 11, OUT (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, EU of OUT_SCALE The block output value and status
12, 13, 14, 6, 7, 8)
15
16 UPDATE_EVT None This alert is generated by any change to the static data
17 BLOCK_ALM None The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware connection feature, or
system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field.
The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status parameter. As
soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block
may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed.
18 SIMULATE None A group of data that contains the current sensor transducer value and status, and
the enable/disable bit.
D-9
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

19 XD_SCALE None The high and low scale values, engineering units code and number of digits to the
right of the decimal point associated with the channel input value. The XD_SCALE
units code must match the units code of the measurement channel in the
transducer block. If the units do not match, the block will not transition to MAN or
AUTO. It will automatically change units in the STB block to the last one written.
Multiple blocks reading the same channel may conflict (only one unit type per
channel).
20 OUT_SCALE None The high and low scale values, engineering unit code and number of digits to the
right of the decimal point associated with OUT.
21 GRANT_DENY None Options for controlling access of host computers and local control panels for
supported in the MAI block are the following:
• Propagate fault forward
• Uncertain if limited
• Bad if limited
• Uncertain if manual mode
24 L_TYPE None Linearization type. Determines whether the field value is uses directly (Direct), is
Root)
25 LOW_CUT % If percentage value of the sensor transducer input falls below this, PV = 0
in the IN value.
27, 28, 29, CHANNEL_(1, 2, None The CHANNEL (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8) value is used to select the measurement
30, 31, 32, 3,4 5, 6, 7, 8) value. See Table D-4 on page D-6 for available channels. Configure the CHANNEL
33, 34 parameters to custom (2) before configuring the CHANNEL parameters.
35, 36, 37, STDDEV_(1, 2, 3, % of OUT Range Standard deviation of the corresponding measurement.
38, 39, 40, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8)
41, 42
43, 44, 45, CAP_STDDEV_(1 % of OUT Range Capability standard deviation, the best deviation that can be achieved.
46, 47, 48, , 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8)
49, 50
the output value or enable simulation through the configuration tool and
manually enter a value for the measurement value and its status (this single
value will apply to all outputs). In both cases, first set the ENABLE jumper on
the field device.
NOTE
OUT value or the status. The OUT values will all have the same value as
determined by the simulate value.
D-10
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Figure D-3. Multiple Analog
Input Function Block Timing
Diagram
OUT (mode in man)
OUT (mode in auto)
PV
63% of Change
FIELDBUS-FBUS_03A
FIELD_VAL
Time (seconds)
PV_FTIME

Input Function Block Schematic OUT_1
XD_SCALE OUT_SCALE
OUT_2
Ch 1
Ch 2 Mode Logic OUT_3
Ch 3
Simulate
FIELDBUS-FBUS_54A
Ch 4 OUT_4
Ch 5 L_TYPE OUT_5
Ch 6 & Filter
Ch 7 OUT_6
Ch 8 OUT_7
OUT_8
Filtering
filter time constant (in seconds) using the PV_FTIME parameter (same value
applied to eight channels). Set the filter time constant to zero to disable the
filter feature.
Signal Conversion
parameter. Choose from direct, indirect, or indirect square root signal
conversion with the L_TYPE parameter.
Direct
PV Channel Value
Indirect
Indirect signal conversion converts the signal linearly to the accessed
channel input value (or the simulated value when simulation is enabled)
from its specified range (XD_SCALE) to the range and units of the PV and
OUT parameters (OUT_SCALE).
D-11
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
PV ⎛ Channel Value⎞ × ( EU**@100% EU**@0% ) EU**@0%

⎝ 100 ⎠


⎝ 100 ⎠
value of zero is used for the converted value (PV). This option is useful to
eliminate false readings when the differential temperature measurement is
close to zero, and it may also be useful with zero-based measurement
devices such as flowmeters.
NOTE
is the only I/O option supported by the MAI block. Set the I/O
option in Manual or Out of Service mode only.
Block Errors
in bold are inactive for the MAI block and are given for reference.

0 Other
parameter is not configured, or WRITE_CHECK = zero.
its execution.
4 Local Override
9 Memory Failure
10 Lost Static Data
11 Lost NV Data
14 Power Up
D-12
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Modes
The MAI Function Block supports three modes of operation as defined by the
MODE_BLK parameter:
Manual (Man)
The block output (OUT) may be set manually
Automatic (Auto)
OUT_1 to OUT_8 reflects the analog input measurement or the simulated
value when simulation is enabled.
The block is not processed. PV is not updated and the OUT status is set to
Bad: Out of Service. The BLOCK_ERR parameter shows Out of Service.
In this mode, changes can be made to all configurable parameters. The
target mode of a block may be restricted to one or more of the supported
modes.
Status Handling
OUT status is Good.
If the sensor limit exceeds the high or low side range, PV status is set high or
low and EU range status is set to uncertain.
BAD if Limited
the sensor limits.
sets the OUT status quality to Uncertain when the value is higher or lower
Manual
NOTES
1. The instrument must be OOS to set the status option.
2. The MAI block only supports the BAD if Limited option.
D-13
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
The intended use for this type of function block is for applications where the
sensor types and functionality of each channel (i.e. the simulate, scaling,
filtering, alarms type, and options) are the same.
The configuration of the MAI function block and its associated output
channels depends on the specific application. A typical configuration for the
MAI block involves the following parameters:
CHANNEL
If the device supports more than one measurement, verify that the
Refer to Table D-4 on page D-6 for a listing of available channels on the
848T.
L_TYPE
Select when the measurement is already in the desired engineering
units for the block output. Select when converting the measured
Select Indirect Square Root when the block I/O parameter value
represents a flow measurement made using differential pressure, and
when square root extraction is not performed by the transducer.
SCALING
MAI Block
Troubleshooting
Configuration error BLOCK_ERR will show the configuration error bit set. The following are
parameters that must be set before the block is allowed out of OOS:
• Initial value is 1.
• XD_SCALE.UNITS_INDEX must match the units in all the corresponding
sensor transducer blocks.
• L_TYPE must be set to Direct, Indirect, or Indirect Square Root and cannot be
left at initial value of 0.
Resource block The actual mode of the Resource block is OOS. See Resource Block Diagnostics
for corrective action.
Schedule Block is not scheduled and therefore cannot execute to go to Target Mode.
Typically, BLOCK_ERR will show “Power-Up” for all blocks that are not scheduled.
Schedule the block to execute.
alarms will not work. Notification LIM_NOTIFY is not high enough. Set equal to MAX_NOTIFY.
Status Options STATUS_OPTS has Propagate Fault Forward bit set. This should be cleared to
cause an alarm to occur.
Value of output does not Linearization Type L_TYPE must be set to Direct, Indirect, or Indirect Square Root and cannot be left
make sense at initial value of 0.
• XD_SCALE.EU0 and EU100 should match that of the corresponding sensor
transducer block.
• Both STBs in an ASIC must be set to auto. Best in 1, 2, 7, 8, ASICs in Auto for
thermocouples
D-14
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
INPUT SELECTOR The Input Selector (ISEL) function block can be used to select the first good,
FUNCTION BLOCK Hot Backup, maximum, minimum, or average of as many as eight input
values and place it at the output. The block supports signal status
propagation. There is process alarm detection in the Input Selector function
IN_1
IN_2
block. Table D-6 lists the ISEL block parameters and their descriptions, units
IN_3 of measure, and index numbers.
IN_4 OUT
IN_5
IN_6
IN_7 OUT_D
IN_8
DISABLE_1
DISABLE_2 SELECTED
DISABLE_3
DISABLE_4
6A
DISABLE_5
DISABLE_6
DISABLE_7
DISABLE_8 ISEL
OP_SELECT
IN (1-8) = Input
DISABLE (1-8) = Discrete input used to
disable the associated input channel
SELECTED = The selected
channel number
OUT = The block output and status
OUT_D = Discrete output that signals a
selected alarm condition
Table D-6. Input Selector Function Block Parameters

revision value will be incremented each time a static parameter value in the block
is changed.
3 STRATEGY None The strategy field can be used to identify groupings of blocks. This data is not checked
or processed by the block.
4 ALERT_KEY None The identification number of the plant unit. This information may be used in the host for
sorting alarms, etc.
components associated with a block. It is a bit string, so that multiple errors may
be shown.
7 OUT OUT_RANGE The primary analog value calculated as a result of executing the function block.
8 OUT_RANGE EU of OUT The engineering units code to be used in displaying the OUT parameter and
parameters which have the same scaling as OUT.
9 GRANT_DENY None Options for controlling access of host computers and local control panels to operating,
tuning, and alarm parameters of the block. Not used by device.
10 STATUS_OPTS None Allows the user to select options for status handling and processing.
11,1 2, 13, IN_(1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Determined by A connection input from another block
14, 25, 26, 6, 7, 8) source
27, 28
D-15
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

15, 16, 17, DISABLE_(1, 2, None A connection from another block that disables the associated input from the selection.
18, 29, 30, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8)
31, 32
19 SELECT_TYPE None Specifies input selection method. Methods available include: First Good, Minimum,
Maximum, Middle, Average, or Hot Backup.
20 MIN_GOOD None The minimum number of good inputs.
21 SELECTED None The selected input number (1 to 8) or the number of input used for the average output.
22 OP_SELECT None Overrides the algorithm to select 1 of the 8 inputs regardless of the selection type.
24 BLOCK_ALM None The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure, or system
alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status parameter. As soon as the
Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block may be reported
without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed.
33 AVG_USE None Number of parameters to use in the averaging calculation. For example, if AVG_USE is
4 and the number of connected inputs is 6, then the highest and lowest values would
be dropped prior to calculating the average. If AVG_USE is 2 and the number of
connected inputs is 7, then the two highest and lowest values would be dropped prior
to calculating the average and the average would be based on the middle three inputs.
34 ALARM_SUM None The current alert status, unacknowledged states, and disabled states of the alarms
associated with the function block.
35 ACK_OPTION None Used to set automatic acknowledgement of alarms.
active alarm condition clears
37 HI_HI-PRI None The priority of the HI HI alarm
38 HI_HI_LIM Percent The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the HI HI alarm condition.
39 HI_PRI None The priority of the HI alarm
40 HI_LIM EU of IN The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the HI alarm condition
41 LO_PRI None The priority of the LO alarm
42 LO_LIM EU of IN The setting of the alarm limit used to detect the LO alarm condition
43 LO_LO_PRI None The priority of the LO LO alarm
44 LO_LO_LIM EU of IN The setting for the alarm limit sued to detect the LO LO alarm condition
45 HI_HI_ALM None The HI HI alarm data, which includes a value of the alarm, a timestamp of occurrence
and the state of the alarm
46 HI_ALM None The HI alarm data, which includes a value of the alarm, a timestamp of occurrence and
the state of the alarm
48 LO_LO_ALM None The LO LO alarm data, which includes a value of the alarm, a timestamp of occurrence
49 OUT_D None Discrete output to indicate a selected alarm value
be set.
D-16
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Functionality
Figure D-5. Input Selector

Function Block Schematic OUT
IN_n
Mode Logic
DISABLE_n SELECTED
OP_SELECT OUT_D
Alarm
Selection
Logic
SELECT_TYPE
STATUS_OPTS
MIN_GOOD
FBUS_57A
Block Errors
in bold are inactive for the ISEL block and are given for reference.

0 Other: The output has a quality of uncertain.
1 Block Configuration Error: Select type is not configured
3 Simulate Active
4 Local Override
7 Input Failure/Process Variable has Bad Status: One of the inputs is Bad.
8 Output Failure
9 Memory Failure
10 Lost Static Data
11 Lost NV Data
D-17
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Modes
The ISEL function block supports three modes of operation as defined by the
MODE_BLK parameter:
Manual (Man)
The block output (OUT) may be set manually.
Automatic (Auto)
OUT reflects the selected value.
The block is not processed. The BLOCK_ERR parameter shows Out of
Service. The target mode of a block may be restricted to one or more of
the supported modes. In this mode, changes can be made to all
Alarm Detection
set. The type of block errors for the ISEL block are defined above.
Process Alarm detection is based on the OUT value. The alarm limits of the
following standard alarms can be configured:
• High (HI_LIM)
• Lo (LO_LIM)
• Lo low (LO_LO_LIM)
In order to avoid alarm chattering when the variable is oscillating around the
alarm limit, an alarm hysteresis in percent of the PV span can be set using the
parameters:
• HI_PRI
• HI_HI_PRI
• LO_PRI
• LO_LO_PRI

Number Description
alarm is corrected.
D-18
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Block Execution
The ISEL function block reads the values and status of up to eight inputs. To
specify which of the six available methods (algorithms) is used to select the
output, configure the selector type parameter (SELECT_TYPE) as follows:
• Max selects the maximum value of the inputs.
• Min selects the minimum value of the inputs.
• Avg calculates the average value of the inputs.
• Mid calculates the update for eight sensors.
• 1st Good selects the first available good input.
If the DISABLE_N is active, the associated input is not used in the
selection algorithm.
If an input is not connected, it is also not used in the algorithm.
If the OP_SELECT is set to a value between 1 and 8, the selection type logic
is overridden and the output value and status is set to the value and status of
the input selected by .
SELECTED will have the number of selected input unless the SELECT_TYPE
is mid, in which case it will take the average of the two middle values. Then
SELECTED will be set to “0” if there is an even number of inputs.
Status Handling
In Auto mode, reflects the value and status quality of the selected input.
If the number of inputs with Good status is less than MIN_GOOD, the output
status will be Bad.
In Man mode, the OUT status high and low limits are set to indicate that the
value is a constant and the OUT status is always Good.
Use Uncertain as Good
Sets the OUT status quality to Good when the selected input status is
Uncertain.
manual.
NOTE
The instrument must be to OOS to set the status option.
Use the ISEL function block to:
• Select the maximum temperature input from eight inputs and send it to
another function block (see Figure D-6)
• Calculate the average temperature of the eight inputs (see Figure D-7)
• Use only six of the eight inputs to calculate the average temperature.
D-19
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

Function Block Application IN1 = 126 °F Input Selector
Example (SEL_TYPE = max) (ISEL) Function
IN2 = 118 °F Block
IN3 = 104 °F
OUT = 140 °F To Another
IN4 = 107 °F Function Block
IN5 = 112 °F
IN6 = 115 °F
FBUS_58A
IN7 = 130 °F
IN8 = 140 °F SEL_TYPE = max

Function Block Application
Example (SEL_TYPE = IN1 = 126 °F Input Selector
average) AVG_USE = 6 (ISEL) Function
IN2 = 118 °F Block
IN3 = 104 °F
IN5 = 112 °F
IN6 = 115 °F
FBUS_58A
IN7 = 130 °F AVG_USE = 6
IN8 = 140 °F SEL_TYPE = avg
To determine OUT for a 6-input reading, read all eight, sort in numerical order, drop the
highest and lowest values, and calculate the average.
107 112 115 118 126 130

118°F
6
ISEL Block
Troubleshooting
Configuration error BLOCK_ERR will show the configuration error bit set. SELECT_TYPE must be set to
a valid value and cannot be left at 0.
corrective action.
block to execute.
Status of output is BAD Inputs All inputs have Bad status
OP selected OP_SELECT is not set to 0 (or it is linked to an input that is not 0), and it points to an
input that is Bad.
Min good The number of Good inputs is less than MIN_GOOD.
Block is in OOS mode Change mode to Auto
Block alarms will not work. Features FEATURES_SEL in the resource block does not have Alerts enabled. Enable the
Alerts bit.
Notification LIM_NOTIFY in the resource block is not high enough. Set equal to MAX_NOTIFY.
Status Options STATUS_OPTS has Propagate Fault Forward bit set. This should be cleared to cause
an alarm to occur.
LO_LO_LIMIT
D-20
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
8/14/07 Rosemount 848T
Index
Numerics C Switch Location . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-Inch Pipe Stand Cable Glands Drawings
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 848T Analog Connector . . . . . . 2-6
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Analog Input Wiring . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
A
Conduit Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Block Internal Structure . . . . . . .C-2
Alarms
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Cable Gland Installation . . . . . 2-12
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Commissioning Tag . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Analog Input
Analog Transmitters . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Conduit Entries Installation . . . 2-12
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Analog Input Block . . . . . . . 3-6 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-7
Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Multiple Analog Input Block . 3-6 Sensor Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Analog Input Function Block . . . . . D-1
Sensor Transducer Block . . 3-6 Transducer Block Structure . . . 3-15
Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . D-7
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Transmitter Label . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Alarm Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Transmitter Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Application Information . . . . . . . D-8
Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Block Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Differential Sensor Blocks . . . . . 3-3 F
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Foundation Fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Monitoring Applications . . . . . . . 3-4 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Individual Points . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Block Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Single Selection . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
Indirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Instrument- Specific Blocks .C-3
Indirect Square Root . . . . . . . . D-5
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Restart Processor . . . . . . . . 4-3 Device Descriptions . . . . . . . . .C-3
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Restart with Defaults . . . . . . 4-3 Function Block Scheduling . . . .C-8
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Resource Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1
Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Link Active Scheduler . . . . . . . .C-4
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Network Communication . . . . . .C-4
Signal Conversion . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Scheduled Transfers . . . . . . . . .C-6
Status Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Millivolt Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Ohm Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Unscheduled Transfers . . . . . . .C-7
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1
RTD Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-1
B Thermocouple Inputs . . . . . . . . 2-5 Input Selector Function Block .D-15
Block Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Multiple Analog Input . . . . . . . .D-9
Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
D Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-8
Instrument Specific Blocks . . . . C-3
Damping
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 G
Device Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Differential Sensor Blocks Analog Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Grounded Thermocouple . . . . . 2-9
Differential Transducer Block Shielded Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Transmitter Enclosure . . . . . . . . 2-9
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Ungrounded mV . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
DIN Rail Ungrounded RTD/Ohm . . . . . . . 2-8
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Ungrounded Thermocouple . . . 2-8
Drawing
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Rosemount 848T 8/14/07
H Panel with a Junction Box . . . . . 2-2 R

Hardware Multiple Analog Input Resource Block
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Alarm Detection . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Communication Check . . . . 4-3 Multiple Analog Input Block Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Power Check . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . D-14 Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Reset Configuration . . . . . . 4-3 Multiple Analog Input Function Block . Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Sensor Check . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 D-9 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Application Information . . . . . . D-14 Out of Service (OOS) . . . . 3-11
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
I
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12 PlantWeb Alerts
Input Selector Function Block . . . D-15
Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11 Recommended Actions . . . 3-15
Alarm Detection . . . . . . . . . . . D-18
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10 PlantWeb™ Alerts . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Application Information . . . . . . D-19
Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13 advisory alarms . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Block Execution . . . . . . . . . . . D-19
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13 failed_alarms . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13 maint_alarms . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17
Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . D-13 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18 S
Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . D-18 Scheduled Transfers . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Indirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15 Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Indirect Square Root . . . . . D-12
Status Handling . . . . . . . . . . . D-19 Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . D-20 Report Distribution . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Intrinsically Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 Subscriber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Non-Incendive . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 Security Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Using Cable Glands . . . . . . . . 2-12 N Senor
Using Conduit Entries . . . . . . . 2-12 Network Communication . . . . . . . . C-4 Connection Check . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6 Sensor
Function Block Scheduling . . . . C-8 Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
J
Link Active Scheduler . . . . . . . . C-4 Sensor Transducer Block
Junction Box
Scheduled Transfer . . . . . . . . . C-6 Change Sensor Configuration . 3-21
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Unscheduled Transfer . . . . . . . C-7 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
L O Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Link Active Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . C-4 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Backup LAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6 Sensor Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Foundation Fieldbus . . . . . . . . . C-1
LAS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5 Shield Wire
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
M Simulate Enable Switch . . . . . . . . 2-10
Maintenance Specifications
P performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-4
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Performance specifications . . . . . . A-4 Surges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Communication Check . . . . 4-3
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Power Check . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Reset Configuration . . . . . . 4-3
Sensor Check . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Simulate Enable . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Measurement Transducer Block . 3-17
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Monitoring Applications
Common Configurations . . . . . . 3-4
Individual Points . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Single Selection . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-Inch Pipe Stand . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
DIN Rail Without an Enclosure . 2-2
Index-2
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
T
Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Transducer Block
Alarm Detection . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Channel Definitions . . . . . . . . 3-16
Differential Transducer Block . 3-22
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Measurement Transducer Block . . .
3-17
Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Sensor Transducer Block . . . . 3-21
Status Handling . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Structure Diagram . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Transients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Transmitter
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Transmitter Wiring Diagram . . . . . 2-4
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Analog Input Function Block . . . D-8
Differential Transducer Block . . 4-5
Foundation Fieldbus . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Input Selector Function Block . D-20
Measurement Transducer Block 4-5
Multiple Analog Input Block . . D-14
Resource Block . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Sensor Transducer Block . . . . . 4-5
U
Unscheduled Transfers . . . . . . . . . C-7
W
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Communication Check . . . . . . . 4-3
Power Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Index-3
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Index-4
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
August 2007
Rosemount and the Rosemount logotype are registered trademarks of Rosemount Inc.
PlantWeb is a registered trademark of one of the Emerson Process Management group of companies.
All other marks are the property of their respective owners.
Emerson Process Management

Rosemount Inc. Rosemount Temperature GmbH Emerson Process Management Asia
8200 Market Boulevard Frankenstrasse 21 Pacific Private Limited
Chanhassen, MN 55317 USA 63791 Karlstein 1 Pandan Crescent
T (U.S.) 1-800-999-9307 Germany Singapore 128461
T (International) (952) 906-8888 T 49 (6188) 992 0 T (65) 6777 8211
F (952) 949-7001 F 49 (6188) 992 112 F (65) 6777 0947
AP.RMT-Specialist@emersonprocess.com
www.rosemount.com
¢00809-0100-4697F¤
© 2007 Rosemount Inc. All rights reserved.
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
August 2007
Rosemount 848T Multisensor Transmitter

Temperature Inputs
with FOUNDATION™ Fieldbus
Device Revision 5
U.S. Patent Number 6,574,515
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Rosemount 848T Eight Input

Temperature Transmitter with
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
NOTICE
Read this manual before working with the product. For personal and system safety, and for
optimum product performance, make sure to thoroughly understand the contents before
installing, using, or maintaining this product.
The United States has two toll-free assistance numbers and one international number.
Customer Central
1-800-999-9307 (7:00 a.m. to 7:00 P.M. CST)
National Response Center
1-800-654-7768 (24 hours a day)
Equipment service needs
International
1-(952) 906-8888
The products described in this document are NOT designed for nuclear-qualified
applications.
Using non-nuclear qualified products in applications that require nuclear-qualified hardware
or products may cause inaccurate readings.
For information on Rosemount nuclear-qualified products, contact a Emerson Process
Management Sales Representative.
Rosemount 848T Eight Input Temperature Transmitter with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus may be
protected by one or more U.S. patents pending. Other foreign patents pending.
Cover photo: 848-848C004
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Table of Contents
Introduction Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Service Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Installation Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Mounting to a DIN Rail Without an Enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Mounting to a Panel with a Junction Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Mounting to a 2-Inch Pipe Stand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Surges/Transients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Using Cable Glands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Using Conduit Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Configuration Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Transmitter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Custom Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Configure the Differential Sensor Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Common Configurations for Monitoring Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Interfacing Analog Transmitters to Foundation fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Block Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Resource Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
PlantWeb™ Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Recommended Actions for PlantWeb Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Transducer Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Measurement Transducer Block (MTB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Sensor Transducer Block (STB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Differential Transducer Block (DTB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

Operation and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Maintenance Foundation Fieldbus Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Commissioning (Addressing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Hardware Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Sensor Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Communication/Power Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Resetting the Configuration (RESTART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Foundation Fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Resource Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Measurement Transducer Block Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Sensor Transducer Block Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Differential Transducer Block Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
APPENDIX A Functional Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1

Reference Data Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-3
Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-4
Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-4
Dimensional Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-7
Mounting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-10
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-11
APPENDIX B Hazardous Locations Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1

Product Certificates North American Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
European Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3
Australian Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
Brazilian Approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
Intrinsically Safe and Non-Incendive Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-6
Installation Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-7
APPENDIX C Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1

Foundation™ Fieldbus Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1
Technology Device Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
Block Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
Instrument- Specific Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
Network Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4
Link Active Scheduler (LAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Scheduled Transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Unscheduled Transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-7
Function Block Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-8
APPENDIX D Analog Input (AI) Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-1

Function Blocks Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-3
AI Block Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-8
Multiple Analog Input (MAI) Function Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-9
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-10
MAI Block Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-14
Input Selector Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-15
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-17
ISEL Block Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-20
TOC-2
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Section 1 Introduction

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1-2
Service Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1-3
Warnings

serious injury.
leakage may result.
terminals.
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
OVERVIEW
Transmitter The Rosemount 848T is optimal for process temperature monitoring because
of its ability to simultaneously measure eight separate and independent
temperature points with one transmitter. Multiple temperature sensor types
may be connected to each 848T transmitter. In addition, the 848T can accept
4-20 mA inputs. The enhanced measurement capability of the 848T allows it
to communicate these variables to any FOUNDATION fieldbus host or
configuration tool.
The new Rosemount 3420 Fieldbus Interface Module will interface the 848T
outputs to systems without fieldbus capability using the standard interface
protocols. Contact a local Emerson Process Management Sales
Representative for more information.
Manual This manual is designed to assist in the installation, operation, and

maintenance of the Rosemount 848T Temperature Transmitter.
Section 1: Introduction
• Overview
• Considerations
• Return of Materials
Section 2: Installation
• Mounting
• Installation
• Wiring
• Power Supply
• Commissioning
Section 3: Configuration
• FOUNDATION fieldbus Technology
• Configuration
• Function Block Configuration
Section 4: Operation and Maintenance
• Hardware Maintenance
• Troubleshooting
1-2
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Appendix A: Specification and Reference Data
• Specifications
• Dimensional Drawings
• Ordering Information
Appendix B: Product Certificates
• Hazardous Locations Certificates
• Intrinsically Safe and Non-Incendive Installations
• Installation Drawings
Appendix C: Foundation™ Fieldbus Technology
• Device Descriptions
• Block Operation
Appendix D: Function Blocks
• Analog Input (AI) Function Block
• Multiple Analog Input (MAI) Function Block
• Input Selector Function Block
SERVICE SUPPORT To expedite the return process in North America, call the Emerson Process
Management National Response Center toll-free at 800-654-7768. This
center, available 24 hours a day, will assist with any needed information or
materials.
The center will ask for the following information:
• Product model
• Serial numbers
• The last process material to which the product was exposed
The center will provide
• A Return Material Authorization (RMA) number
• Instructions and procedures that are necessary to return goods that
were exposed to hazardous substances
For other locations, please contact a Emerson Process Management sales
representative.
NOTE
If a hazardous substance is identified, a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS),
required by law to be available to people exposed to specific hazardous
substances, must be included with the returned materials.
1-3
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
1-4
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Section 2 Installation

Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2-1
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2-4
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2-8
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2-10
Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2-11
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2-12
Warnings

serious injury.
leakage may result.
terminals.
MOUNTING The 848T is always mounted remote from the sensor assembly. There are
three mounting configurations:
• To a DIN rail without an enclosure
• To a panel with an enclosure
• To a 2-in pipe stand with an enclosure using a pipe mounting kit
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Mounting to a DIN Rail To mount the 848T to a DIN rail without an enclosure, follow these steps:
Without an Enclosure 1. Pull up the DIN rail mounting clip located on the top back side of the
transmitter.
2. Hinge the DIN rail into the slots on the bottom of the transmitter.
3. Tilt the 848T and place onto the DIN rail. Release the mounting clip.
The transmitter should be securely fastened to the DIN rail.

to a DIN Rail
848T without
installed enclosure
DIN Rail Mounting Clip
DIN Rail
Mounting to a Panel with When inside of a plastic or aluminum junction box, the 848T mounts to a
a Junction Box panel using four 1/4-20 x 1.25-in. screws.
When inside of a stainless steel junction box, the 848T mounts to a panel
using two 1/4-20 x 1/2-in. screws.

junction box to a panel Aluminum/Plastic Stainless Steel
848T with aluminum or plastic box
Cover
Screws (4) 848T with a stainless steel box
Mounting
Screws (2)
Mounting
Screws (4)
Panel
Panel
2-2
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Mounting to a 2-Inch Use the optional mounting bracket (option code B6) to mount the 848T to a
Pipe Stand 2-inch pipe stand when using a junction box.

10.2 6.6 (167) 4.5
848_848A52A, B, 53A, B
5.1 (260) fully
(130) (114) 7.5 (190)
assembled fully
assembled

848_848A54A, 55A
2-3
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
WIRING If the sensor is installed in a high-voltage environment and a fault condition or

installation error occurs, the sensor leads and transmitter terminals could
carry lethal voltages. Use extreme caution when making contact with the
leads and terminals.
NOTE
Do not apply high voltage (e.g. AC line voltage) to the transmitter terminals.
Abnormally high voltage can damage the unit (bus terminals are rated to 42.4
VDC).
Figure 2-3. 848T Transmitter

Field Wiring
6234 ft (1900 m) max
(depending upon cable
Integrated Power characteristics)
Conditioner
and Filter Terminators
(Trunk)
Power
Supply
(Spur)
(Spur)
FOUNDATION Signal
fieldbus Host or Wiring
848-848_01A
configuration tool
Devices 1 through 16*
* Intrinsically safe installations may allow fewer devices per I.S. barrier
Connections The 848T transmitter is compatible with 2 or 3-wire RTD, thermocouple, Ohm,
and millivolt sensor types. Figure 2-4 shows the correct input connections to
the sensor terminals on the transmitter. The 848T can also accept inputs from
analog devices using the optional analog input connector. Figure 2-5 shows
the correct input connections to the analog input connector when installed on
the transmitter. Tighten the terminal screws to ensure proper connection.
Figure 2-4. Sensor Wiring

Diagram
+ -
848-0000A01A
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
2-wire 3-wire Thermocouples / 2-Wire RTD
RTD and RTD and Ohms and with
Ohms Ohms* Millivolts Compensation
Loop**
The wiring of 3-wire RTDs for this unit is different than some earlier models of
the 848T. Pay careful attention to the wiring diagram on the label especially if
this unit is replacing an older unit.
2-4
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
RTD or Ohm Inputs
Various RTD configurations, including 2-wire and 3-wire are used in industrial
applications. If the transmitter is mounted remotely from a 3-wire RTD, it will
operate within specifications, without recalibration, for lead wire resistances of
up to 60 ohms per lead (equivalent to 6,000 feet of 20 AWG wire). If using a
2-wire RTD, both RTD leads are in series with the sensor element, so errors
can occur if the lead lengths exceed one foot of 20 AWG wire. Compensation
for this error is provided when using 3-wire RTDs.
Thermocouple or Millivolt Inputs
Use appropriate thermocouple extension wire to connect the thermocouple to
the transmitter. Make connections for millivolt inputs using copper wire. Use
shielding for long runs of wire.
Analog Inputs
The analog connector converts the 4–20 mA signal to a 20–100 mV signal.
The 848T transmitter uses a standard mV sensor type to output the scaled 4–
20 mA signal onto the FOUNDATION fieldbus.
Use the following steps when installing the 848T with the analog connector:
1. The 848T, when ordered with option code S002, comes with four analog
connectors. Replace the standard connector with the analog connector
on the desired channels.
2. Wire one or two analog transmitters to the analog connector according to
Figure 2-5. There is space available on the analog connector label for
identification of the analog inputs.
NOTE
Power supply should be rated to support the connected transmitter(s).
3. If the analog transmitters can communicate using HART protocol, the

analog connectors are supplied with the ability to switch in a 250 ohm
resistor for HART communication (see Figure 2-6).
One switch is supplied for each input (top switch for “A” inputs and
bottom switch for “B” inputs). Setting the switch in the “ON” position (to
the right) bypasses the 250 ohm resistor. Terminals are provided for each
analog input to connect a HART communicator for local configuration.
2-5
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Figure 2-5. 848T Analog Input

Wiring Diagram
Analog Input
Connectors
Analog Transmitters
Power Supply
848/848A64A.EPS
Figure 2-6. 848T Analog
Connector 250 ohm resistor in the loop when switched to the left
HART HART
Channel A Channel B
Space available for

identification of inputs
2-6
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Power Supply Connections

The transmitter requires between 9 and 32 VDC to operate and provide
complete functionality. The dc power supply should provide power with less
than 2% ripple. A fieldbus segment requires a power conditioner to isolate the
power supply filter and decouple the segment from other segments attached
to the same power supply.
All power to the transmitter is supplied over the signal wiring. Signal wiring
should be shielded, twisted pair for best results in electrically noisy
environments. Do not use unshielded signal wiring in open trays with power
wiring or near heavy electrical equipment.
Use ordinary copper wire of sufficient size to ensure that the voltage across the
transmitter power terminals does not go below 9 VDC. The power terminals are
polarity insensitive. To power the transmitter:
1. Connect the power leads to the terminals marked “Bus,” as shown in
Figure 2-7.
2. Tighten the terminal screws to ensure adequate contact. No
additional power wiring is necessary.
Figure 2-7. Transmitter Label
NOT USED
SECURITY
SIMULATE ENABLE
848A65A.EPS
Ground
(required with T1 option)
Connect Power Leads Here
Surges/Transients The transmitter will withstand electrical transients encountered through static
discharges or induced switching transients. However, a transient protection
option (option code T1) is available to protect the 848T against high-energy
transients. The device must be properly grounded using the ground terminal
(see Figure 2-7 on page 2-7).
2-7
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
GROUNDING The 848T transmitter provides input/output isolation up to 500 VAC rms.
NOTE
Neither conductor of the fieldbus segment can be grounded. Grounding out
one of the signal wires will shut down the entire fieldbus segment.
Shielded Wire
Each process installation has different requirements for grounding. Use the
grounding options recommended by the facility for the specific sensor type or
begin with grounding option 1 (most common).
Ungrounded Thermocouple, mV, and RTD/Ohm Inputs
Option 1:
1. Connect signal wiring shield to the sensor wiring shield(s).
2. Ensure the shields are tied together and electrically isolated from the
transmitter enclosure.
3. Only ground shield at the power supply end.
4. Ensure that the sensor shield(s) is electrically isolated from the
surrounding grounded fixtures.
Power
848T Supply
Sensor Wires
Shield ground point
Option 2:
1. Connect sensor wiring shield(s) to the transmitter enclosure (only if
the enclosure is grounded).
2. Ensure the sensor shield(s) is electrically isolated from surrounding
fixtures that may be grounded.
Power
848T Supply
Sensor Wires
2-8
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Grounded Thermocouple Inputs
1. Ground sensor wiring shield(s) at the sensor.
2. Ensure that the sensor wiring and signal wiring shields are electrically
isolated from the transmitter enclosure.
3. Do not connect the signal wiring shield to the sensor wiring shield(s).
Power
848T Supply
Sensor Wires
Analog Device Inputs

1. Ground analog signal wire at the power supply of the analog devices.
2. Ensure that the analog signal wire and the fieldbus signal wire shields
are electrically isolated from the transmitter enclosure.
3. Do not connect the analog signal wire shield to the fieldbus signal
wire shield.
4. Ground fieldbus signal wire shield at the power supply end.
Foundation
4-20 mA loop fieldbus bus
Analog Device Power

Analog 848T Supply
Power Supply Device
Transmitter Enclosure (optional)

Ground the transmitter in accordance with local electrical requirements.
2-9
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
SWITCHES
Figure 2-8. Switch Location on
the Rosemount 848T
NOT USED
SECURITY
SIMULATE ENABLE
848A65A.EPS
Security
After configuring the transmitter, the data can be protected from unwarranted
changes. Each 848T is equipped with a security switch that can be positioned
“ON” to prevent the accidental or deliberate change of configuration data.
This switch is located on the front side of the electronics module and
is labeled SECURITY.
See Figure 2-8 on page 2-10 for switch location on the transmitter label.
Simulate Enable
The switch labeled SIMULATE ENABLE is used in conjunction with the
Analog Input (AI) and Multiple Analog Input (MAI) function blocks. This switch
is used to simulate temperature measurement. As a lock-out feature, the
switch must transition from “OFF” to “ON” after power is applied to the
transmitter. This feature prevents the transmitter from being left in simulator
mode.
Not Used
The switch is not functional.
2-10
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
TAGGING Commissioning Tag

The 848T has been supplied with a removable commissioning tag that
contains both the Device ID (the unique code that identifies a particular device
in the absence of a device tag) and a space to record the device tag (the
operational identification for the device as defined by the Piping and
Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID)).
When commissioning more than one device on a fieldbus segment, it can be
difficult to identify which device is at a particular location. The removable tag,
provided with the transmitter, can aid in this process by linking the Device ID
to its physical location. The installer should note the physical location of the
transmitter on both the upper and lower location of the commissioning tag.
The bottom portion should be torn off for each device on the segment and
used for commissioning the segment in the control system.
Figure 2-9. Commissioning Tag
Device ID
Device Tag
to denote
physical
location
Transmitter Tag
Hardware
• tagged in accordance with customer requirements
• permanently attached to the transmitter
Software
• the transmitter can store up to 30 characters
• if no characters are specified, the first 30 characters of the hardware tag
will be used
Sensor Tag
Hardware
• a plastic tag is provided to record identification of eight sensors
• this information can be printed at the factory upon request
• in the field, the tag can be removed, printed onto, and reattached to the
transmitter
Software
• if sensor tagging is requested, the Sensor Transducer Block sensor_sn
parameters will be set at the factory
• the sensor_sn parameters can be updated in the field
2-11
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
INSTALLATION
Using Cable Glands Use the following steps to install the 848T with Cable Glands:
2. Run the sensor and power/signal wires through the appropriate cable
glands using the pre-installed cable glands (see Figure 2-10).
4. Install the power/signal wires onto the correct screw terminals. Power
5. Replace the enclosure cover and securely tighten all cover screws.
Figure 2-10. Installing the 848T Sensor 7

with Cable Glands Enclosure Cover
Screw (4) Sensor 5
Sensor 3
Sensor 1
Power/Signal
848_848A19A
Sensor 8
Cable Gland Sensor 6
Sensor 4
Sensor 2
Using Conduit Entries Use the following steps to install the 848T with Conduit Entries:
2. Remove the five conduit plugs and install five conduit fittings
(supplied by the installer).
3. Run pairs of sensor wires through each conduit fitting.
5. Install the power/signal wires into the correct screw terminals. Power
6. Replace the junction box cover and securely tighten all cover screws.
Figure 2-11. Installing the 848T Sensor 3 and 4 Conduit

with Conduit Entries Sensor 7 and 8 Conduit
Enclosure Sensor
Cover Screw 5 and 6
Sensors Conduit
1 and 2
Conduit Power/Signal
Conduit
848_848A09A
2-12
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
2-13
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
2-14
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Section 3 Configuration

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3-2
Common Configurations for Monitoring Applications . . page 3-4
Block Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3-7
Warnings

serious injury.
leakage may result.
terminals.
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
CONFIGURATION
Standard Each FOUNDATION fieldbus configuration tool or host system has a different
way of displaying and performing configurations. Some will use Device
Descriptions (DDs) and DD Methods to make configuration and displaying of
data consistent across host platforms.
Unless otherwise specified, the 848T will be shipped with the following
configuration (default):
Table 3-1. Standard

Configuration Settings Sensor Type(1) Type J Thermocouple
Damping(1) 5 seconds
Measurement Units(1) °C
Output(1) Linear with Temperature
Line Voltage Filter(1) 60 Hz
Temperature Specific Blocks • Measurement Transducer Block (1)
• Sensor Transducer Block (8)
• Differential Transducer Block (4)
FOUNDATION fieldbus Function Blocks • Analog Input (8)
• Multiple Analog Input (1)
• Input Selector (4)
(1) For all eight sensors
Refer to that systems documentation to perform configuration changes using

a FOUNDATION fieldbus host or configuration tool.
NOTE
To make configuration changes, ensure that the block is OOS by setting the
MODE_BLK.TARGET to OOS.
Transmitter The transmitter is available with the standard configuration setting. The
Configuration configuration settings and block configuration may be changed in the field
with the Emerson Process Management Systems DeltaV®, with AMSinside, or
other FOUNDATION fieldbus host or configuration tool.
Custom Configuration Custom configurations are to be specified when ordering. This configuration
must be the same for all eight sensors.
Methods For FOUNDATION fieldbus hosts or configuration tools that support DD

methods, there are 3 configuration methods available in each Sensor
Transducer block. These methods are included with the device description
(DD) software.
• Sensor Connections
• Sensor Input Trim (user input trim)
• Sensor Trim Factory (factory default trim)
3-2
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Two additional methods are available in the Measurement Transducer Block
to provide an easy mechanism to configure the individual sensor from a single
location. However using these methods will disable all transducer blocks until
the configuration is complete.
• Sensor Configurations
• Response Time Configuration
(used with the S002 option for the analog adaptors)
See the host system documentation for information on running DD methods
from the host system. If the FOUNDATION fieldbus host or configuration tool
does not support DD methods, refer to “Block Configuration” on page 3-7 for
information on how to modify sensor configuration parameters.
Alarms Use the following steps to configure the alarms, which are located in the
Resource Function Block.
1. Set the resource block to OOS.
2. Set WRITE_PRI to the appropriate alarm level (WRITE_PRI has a
selectable range of priorities from 0 to 15, see “Alarm Priority Levels”
on page 3-12. Set the other block alarm parameters at this time.
3. Set CONFIRM_TIME to the time, in 1/32 of a millisecond, that the
device will wait for confirmation of receiving a report before trying
again (the device does not retry if CONFIRM_TIME is 0).
4. Set LIM_NOTIFY to a value between zero and MAX_NOTIFY.
LIM_NOTIFY is the maximum number of alert reports allowed before
the operator needs to acknowledge an alarm condition.
5. Enable the reports bit in FEATURES_SEL.
6. Set the resource block to AUTO.
For modifying alarms on individual function blocks (AI or ISEL blocks), refer to
Appendix D: Function Blocks.
Damping Use the following steps to configure the damping, which is located in the
Sensor Transducer Function Blocks.
1. Place the Sensor Transducer Block(s) in OOS Mode (change
MODE_BLK.TARGET to OOS).
2. Change DAMPING to the desired filter rate (0.0 to 32.0 seconds).
3. Place the Sensor Transducer Block(s) in Auto Mode (change
MODE_BLK.TARGET to Auto).
Configure the Differential Use the following steps to configure the Differential Sensor Blocks.
Sensor Blocks 1. Place the Differential Sensor Transducer Block to OOS.
2. Set Input A and Input B to the sensor values that are to be used in the
differential equation diff = A–B. (NOTE: Unit types must be the same.)
3. Set the DIFFERENTIAL_CALC to either Not Used, Absolute, or
INPUT A minus INPUT B.
4. Place the Differential Sensor Transducer Block in auto mode.
3-3
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
COMMON For the application to work properly, configure the links between the function
CONFIGURATIONS FOR blocks and schedule the order of their execution. The Graphical User
Interface (GUI) provided by the FOUNDATION fieldbus host or configuration tool
MONITORING
will allow easy configuration.
APPLICATIONS
The measurement strategies shown in this section represent some of the
common types of configurations available in the 848T. Although the
appearance of the GUI screens will vary from host to host, the configuration
logic is the same.
NOTE
Please ensure that the host system or configuration tool is properly configured
before downloading the transmitter configuration. If configured improperly, the
FOUNDATION fieldbus host or configuration tool could overwrite the default
transmitter configuration.
Typical Monitoring/Profiling Application

Example: Distillation column temperature profile where all channels have the
same sensor units (°C, °F, etc.).
1. Place the Multiple Analog Input (MAI) function block in OOS mode
Out_1
(set MODE_BLK.TARGET to OOS).
Out_2
Out_3
parameters remain writable, CHANNEL_X can only be set = X when
Out_4
CHANNEL=1.
Out_5
MAI
3. Set L_TYPE to direct or indirect.
Out_6
Function 4. Set XD_SCALE (transducer measurement scaling) to the appropriate
Block Out_7
Out_8
point.
6. Place the MAI Function Block in auto mode.
Monitoring Application with a Single Selection Application

Example: Average exhaust temperature of gas and turbine where there is a
single alarm level for all inputs.
1. Link the MAI outputs to the ISEL inputs.
Out_1 IN_1 Out 2. Place the Multiple Analog Input (MAI) function block in OOS mode
Out_2 IN_2 Out_D (set MODE_BLK.TARGET to OOS).
Out_3 IN_3
Out_4 IN_4 parameters remain writable, CHANNEL_X can only be set = X when
Out_5 IN_5 CHANNEL=1.
Out_6 IN_6 4. Set L_TYPE to direct or indirect.
MAI Out_7 IN_7 ISEL
Function Function 5. Set XD_SCALE (transducer measurement scaling) to the appropriate
Block Out_8 IN_8 Block upper and lower range values, the appropriate sensor units, and
3-4
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
point.
7. Place the MAI function block in auto mode.
8. Place the Input Selector (ISEL) function block in OOS mode by
setting MODE_BLK.TARGET to OOS.
9. Set OUT_RANGE to match the OUT_SCALE in the MAI block.
10. Set SELECT_TYPE to the desired function (Maximum Value,
Minimum Value, First Good Value, Midpoint Value, or Average Value).
12. Place the ISEL function block in auto mode.
Monitoring Temperature Points Individually
Example: Miscellaneous monitoring of temperature in a “close proximity”
where each channel can have different sensor inputs with different units and
there are independent alarm levels for each input.
Out
1. Place the first Analog Input (AI) function block in OOS mode (set
AI MODE_BLK.TARGET to OOS).
Function
Block 1 Out_D 2. Set CHANNEL to the appropriate channel value. Refer to “Alarm
Priority Levels” on page 3-12 for a listing of channel definitions.
3. Set L_TYPE to direct.
4. Set XD_SCALE (transducer measurement scaling) to the appropriate
Out
AI 5. Set OUT_SCALE (AI output scaling) to the appropriate upper and
Function lower range values, the appropriate sensor units, and display decimal
Block 8 Out_D
point.
7. Place the AI function block in auto mode.
8. Repeat steps 1 through 7 for each AI function block.
3-5
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Interfacing Analog Sensor Transducer Block Configuration

Transmitters to Use the sensor configuration method to set the sensor type to mV – 2-wire for
FOUNDATION fieldbus the applicable transducer block or follow these steps.
Out_2
2. Set the SENSOR_TYPE to mV.
Out_3
3. Set the MODE_BLK.TARGET to AUTO.
Out_4
Out_5 Multiple Analog Input or Analog Input Block Configuration
MAI Out_6
Function Follow these steps to configure the applicable block.
Block Out_7
2. Set CHANNEL to the transducer block configured for the analog
or input.
3. Set XD_SCALE.EU_0 to 20
Out Set XD_SCALE.EU_100 to 100
AI
Function Set XD_SCALE.ENGUNITS to mV
Block 1 Out_D
4. SET OUT_SCALE to match the desired scale and units for the
connected analog transmitter.
Flow Example: 0 – 200 gpm
OUT_SCALE.EU_0 = 0
OUT_SCALE.EU_100 = 200
OUT_SCALE.ENGUNITS = gpm
Out
AI 5. Set L_TYPE to INDIRECT.
Function
Block 8 Out_D 6. Set the MODE_BLK.TARGET to AUTO.
3-6
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
BLOCK
CONFIGURATION
Resource Block The resource block defines the physical resources of the device including
type of measurement, memory, etc. The resource block also defines
functionality, such as shed times, that is common across multiple blocks.
The block has no linkable inputs or outputs and it performs
memory-level diagnostics.

00 BLOCK
01 ST_REV
02 TAG_DESC The revision level of the static data associated with the function block.
05 MODE_BLK The actual, target, permitted, and normal modes of the block. For further description, see the
Mode parameter formal model in FF-890.
06 BLOCK_ERR This parameter reflects the error status associated with the hardware or software components
associated with a block. Multiple errors may be shown. For a list of enumeration values, see
FF-890, Block_Err formal model.
07 RS_STATE State of the function block application state machine. For a list of enumeration values, see
FF-890.
08 TEST_RW Read/write test parameter - used only for conformance testing.
09 DD_RESOURCE String identifying the tag of the resource which contains the Device Description for the
resource.
10 MANUFAC_ID Manufacturer identification number - used by an interface device to locate the DD file for the
resource.
11 DEV_TYPE Manufacturer's model number associated with the resource - used by interface devices to
12 DEV_REV Manufacturer revision number associated with the resource - used by an interface device to
13 DD_REV Revision of the DD associated with the resource - used by the interface device to locate the
DD file for the resource.
14 GRANT_DENY Options for controlling access of host computer and local control panels to operating, tuning
and alarm parameters of the block.
15 HARD_TYPES The types of hardware available as channel numbers. The supported hardware type is:
SCALAR_INPUT
16 RESTART Allows a manual restart to be initiated.
17 FEATURES Used to show supported resource block options. The supported features are:
SOFT_WRITE_LOCK_SUPPORT, HARD_WRITE_LOCK_SUPPORT, REPORTS, and
UNICODE
18 FEATURE_SEL Used to select resource block options.
19 CYCLE_TYPE Identifies the block execution methods available for this resource. The supported cycle types
are: SCHEDULED, and COMPLETION_OF_BLOCK_EXECUTION
20 CYCLE_SEL Used to select the block execution method for this resource.
21 MIN_CYCLE_T Time duration of the shortest cycle interval of which the resource is capable.
22 MEMORY_SIZE Available configuration memory in the empty resource. To be checked before attempting a
download.
23 NV_CYCLE_T Minimum time interval specified by the manufacturer for writing copies of NV parameters to
non-volatile memory. Zero means it will never be automatically copied. At the end of
NV_CYCLE_T, only those parameters which have changed need to be updated in NVRAM.
24 FREE_SPACE Percent of memory available for further configuration. Zero in preconfigured resource.
25 FREE_TIME Percent of the block processing time that is free to process additional blocks.
26 SHED_RCAS Time duration at which to give up on computer writes to function block RCas locations. Shed
from RCas will never happen when SHED_RCAS = 0.
3-7
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

27 SHED_ROUT Time duration at which to give up on computer writes to function block ROut locations. Shed
from ROut will never happen when SHED_ROUT = 0.
28 FAULT_STATE Condition set by loss of communication to an output block, fault promoted to an output block
or physical contact. When FAIL_SAFE condition is set, then output function blocks will
perform their FAIL_SAFE actions.
29 SET_FSTATE Allows the FAIL_SAFE condition to be manually initiated by selecting Set.
30 CLR_FSTATE Writing a Clear to this parameter will clear the device FAIL_SAFE if the field condition has
cleared.
31 MAX_NOTIFY Maximum number of unconfirmed notify messages possible.
32 LIM_NOTIFY Maximum number of unconfirmed alert notify messages allowed.
33 CONFIRM_TIME The time the resource will wait for confirmation of receipt of a report before trying again. Retry
will not happen when CONFIRM_TIME=0.
34 WRITE_LOCK If set, all writes to static and non-volatile parameters are prohibited, except to clear
WRITE_LOCK. Block inputs will continue to be updated.
35 UPDATE_EVT This alert is generated by any change to the static data.
36 BLOCK_ALM The BLOCK_ALM is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system
problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to
become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported
status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without
clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed.
37 ALARM_SUM The current alert status, unacknowledged states, unreported states, and disabled states of
the alarms associated with the function block.
38 ACK_OPTION Selection of whether alarms oscillated with the block will be automatically acknowledged.
39 WRITE_PRI Priority of the alarm generated by clearing the write lock.
40 WRITE_ALM This alert is generated if the write lock parameter is cleared.
41 ITK_VER Major revision number of the interoperability test case used in certifying this device as
interoperable. The format and range are controlled by the Fieldbus Foundation.
42 DISTRIBUTOR Reserved for use as distributor ID. No Foundation enumerations defined at this time.
43 DEV_STRING This is used to load new licensing into the device. The value can be written but will always
read back with a value of 0.
44 XD_OPTIONS Indicates which transducer block licensing options are enabled.
45 FB_OPTIONS Indicates which function block licensing options are enabled.
46 DIAG_OPTIONS Indicates which diagnostics licensing options are enabled.
47 MISC_OPTIONS Indicates which miscellaneous licensing options are enabled.
48 RB_SFTWR_REV_MAJOR Major revision of software that the resource block was created with.
49 RB_SFTWR_REV_MINOR Minor revision of software that the resource block was created with.
50 RB_SFTWR_REV_BUILD Build of software that the resource block was created with.
51 RB_SFTWR_REV_ALL The string will contains the following fields:
Major rev: 1-3 characters, decimal number 0-255
Minor rev: 1-3 characters, decimal number 0-255
Build rev: 1-5 characters, decimal number 0-255
Time of build: 8 characters, xx:xx:xx, military time
Day of week of build: 3 characters, Sun, Mon, …
Month of build: 3 characters, Jan, Feb.
Day of month of build: 1-2 characters, decimal number 1-31
Year of build: 4 characters, decimal
Builder: 7 characters, login name of builder
52 HARDWARE_REV Hardware revision of that hardware that has the resource block in it.
53 OUTPUT_BOARD_SN Output board serial number.
54 FINAL_ASSY_NUM The same final assembly number placed on the label.
55 DETAILED_STATUS Indicates the state of the transmitter. NOTE: Will be writable when PWA_SIMULATE is On
during simulation mode.
56 SUMMARY_STATUS An enumerated value of repair analysis.
57 MESSAGE_DATE Date associated with the MESSAGE_TEXT parameter
58 MESSAGE_TEXT Used to indicate changes made by the user to the device’s installation, configuration, or
calibration.
3-8
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

59 SELF_TEST Used to self test the device. Tests are device specific.
60 DEFINE_WRITE_LOCK Allows the operator to select how WRITE_LOCK behaves. The initial value is “lock
everything”. If the value is set to “lock only physical device” then the resource and transducer
blocks of the device will be locked but changes to function blocks will be allowed.
61 SAVE_CONFIG_NOW Allows the user to optionally save all non-volatile information immediately.
62 SAVE_CONFIG_BLOCKS Number of EEPROM blocks that have been modified since last burn. This value will count
down to zero when the configuration is saved.
63 START_WITH_DEFAULTS 0 = Uninitialized
1 = do not power-up with NV defaults
2 = power-up with default node address
3 = power-up with default pd_tag and node address
4 = power-up with default data for the entire communications stack (no application data)
64 SIMULATE_IO Status of Simulate jumper/switch
65 SECURITY_IO Status of Security jumper/switch
66 SIMULATE_STATE The state of the simulate jumper
0 = Uninitialized
1 = Jumper/switch off, simulation not allowed
2 = Jumper/switch on, simulation not allowed (need to cycle jumper/switch)
3 = Jumper/switch on, simulation allowed
67 DOWNLOAD_MODE Gives access to the boot block code for over the wire downloads
0 = Uninitialized
1 = Run Mode
2 = Download Mode
68 RECOMMENDED_ACTION Mask of FAILED_ALM. Corresponds bit of bit to FAILED_ACTIVE. A bit on means that the
69 FAILED_PRI Enumerated list of recommended actions displayed with a device alert.
70 FAILED_ENABLE Designates the alarming priority of the FAILED_ALM.
71 FAILED_MASK Enabled FAILED_ALM alarm conditions. Corresponds bit for bit to the FAILED_ACTIVE. A bit
72 FAILED_ACTIVE Enumerated list of failure conditions within a device.
73 FAILED_ALM Alarm indicating a failure within a device which makes the device non-operational.
74 MAINT_PRI Designates the alarming priority of the MAINT_ALM
75 MAINT_ENABLE Enabled MAINT_ALM alarm conditions. Corresponds bit for bit to the MAINT_ACTIVE. A bit
76 MAINT_MASK Mask of MAINT_ALM. Corresponds bit of bit to MAINT_ACTIVE. A bit on means that the
77 MAINT_ACTIVE Enumerated list of maintenance conditions within a device.
78 MAINT_ALM Alarm indicating the device needs maintenance soon. If the condition is ignored, the device
will eventually fail.
79 ADVISE_PRI Designates the alarming priority of the ADVISE_ALM
80 ADVISE_ENABLE Enabled ADVISE_ALM alarm conditions. Corresponds bit for bit to the ADVISE_ACTIVE. A
bit on means that the corresponding alarm condition is enabled and will be detected. A bit off
81 ADVISE_MASK Mask of ADVISE_ALM. Corresponds bit of bit to ADVISE_ACTIVE. A bit on means that the
82 ADVISE_ACTIVE Enumerated list of advisory conditions within a device.
3-9
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

83 ADVISE_ALM Alarm indicating advisory alarms. These conditions do not have a direct impact on the
process or device integrity.
84 HEALTH_INDEX Parameter representing the overall health of the device, 100 being perfect and 1 being
non-functioning. The value will be set based on the active PWA alarms in accordance with the
requirements stated in “Device Alerts and Health Index PlantWeb Implementation Rules”.
Each device may implement its own unique mapping between the PWA parameters and
HEALTH_INDEX although a default mapping will be available based on the following rules.
HEALTH_INDEX will be set based on the highest priority PWA *_ACTIVE bit as follows:
FAILED_ACTIVE: 0 to 31 - HEALTH_INDEX = 10
NONE - HEALTH_INDEX = 100
85 PWA_SIMULATE Allows direct writes to the PlantWeb Alert "ACTIVE" parameters and
RB.DETAILED_STATUS. The simulate jumper must be "ON' and the SIMULATE_STATE
must be "Jumper on, simulation allowed" before PWA_SIMULATE can be active.
3-10
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Block Errors
Table 3-3 lists conditions reported in the BLOCK_ERR parameter. Conditions
in bold are inactive for the Resource block and are given for reference.
Table 3-3. BLOCK_ERR .

0 Other
1 Block Configuration Error: A feature in CYCLE_SEL is set that is not supported by
CYCLE_TYPE.
2 Link Configuration Error: A link used in one of the function blocks is improperly
configured.
3 Simulate Active: This indicates that the simulation jumper is in place. This is not an
indication that the I/O blocks are using simulated data.
4 Local Override
9 Memory Failure: A memory failure has occurred in FLASH, RAM, or EEPROM
memory.
10 Lost Static Data: Static data that is stored in non-volatile memory
has been lost.
11 Lost NV Data: Non-volatile data that is stored in non-volatile memory
has been lost.
15 OOS: The actual mode is out of service.
Modes
The resource block supports two modes of operation as defined by the
MODE_BLK parameter:
Automatic (Auto)
The block is processing its normal background memory checks.
The block is not processing its tasks. When the resource block is in OOS,
all blocks within the resource (device) are forced into OOS. The
BLOCK_ERR parameter shows Out of Service. In this mode, changes can
be made to all configurable parameters. The target mode of a block may
be restricted to one or more of the supported modes.
3-11
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Alarm Detection
set. The types of block error for the resource block are defined above. A write
alarm is generated whenever the WRITE_LOCK parameter is cleared. The
priority of the write alarm is set in the following parameter:
• WRITE_PRI
Table 3-4. Alarm Priority Levels

Number Description
alarm is corrected.
Status Handling
There are no status parameters associated with the resource block.
PlantWeb™ Alerts The alerts and recommended actions should be used in conjunction with
“Operation and Maintenance” on page 4-1.
The Resource Block will act as a coordinator for PlantWeb alerts. There will
be three alarm parameters (FAILED_ALARM, MAINT_ALARM, and
ADVISE_ALARM) which will contain information regarding some of the device
errors which are detected by the transmitter software. There will be a
RECOMMENDED_ACTION parameter which will be used to display the
recommended action text for the highest priority alarm and a HEALTH_INDEX
parameters (0 - 100) indicating the overall health of the transmitter.
FAILED_ALARM will have the highest priority followed by MAINT_ALARM
and ADVISE_ALARM will be the lowest priority.
FAILED_ALARMS
A failure alarm indicates a failure within a device that will make the device or
some part of the device non-operational. This implies that the device is in
need of repair and must be fixed immediately. There are five parameters
associated with FAILED_ALARMS specifically, they are described below.
FAILED_ENABLED
This parameter contains a list of failures in the device which makes the
device non-operational that will cause an alert to be sent. Below is a list of
the failures with the highest priority first.
1. Electronics
2. NV Memory
3. HW / SW Incompatible
4. Primary Value Failure
5. Secondary Value Failure
FAILED_MASK
This parameter will mask any of the failed conditions listed in
FAILED_ENABLED. A bit on means that the condition is masked out from
3-12
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
FAILED_PRI
Designates the alerting priority of the FAILED_ALM, see Table 3-4 on
page 3-12. The default is 0 and the recommended value are between 8
and 15.
FAILED_ACTIVE
This parameter displays which of the alarms is active. Only the alarm with
the highest priority will be displayed. This priority is not the same as the
FAILED_PRI parameter described above. This priority is hard coded within
the device and is not user configurable.
FAILED_ALM
Alarm indicating a failure within a device which makes the device
non-operational.
MAINT_ALARMS
A maintenance alarm indicates the device or some part of the device needs
maintenance soon. If the condition is ignored, the device will eventually fail.
There are five parameters associated with MAINT_ALARMS, they are
described below.
MAINT_ENABLED
The MAINT_ENABLED parameter contains a list of conditions indicating
the device or some part of the device needs maintenance soon.
Below is a list of the conditions:
1. Primary Value Degraded
MAINT_MASK
The MAINT_MASK parameter will mask any of the failed conditions listed
in MAINT_ENABLED. A bit on means that the condition is masked out
from alarming and will not be reported.
MAINT_PRI
MAINT_PRI designates the alarming priority of the MAINT_ALM, Table 3-4
on page 3-12. The default is 0 and the recommended values is 3 to 7.
MAINT_ACTIVE
The MAINT_ACTIVE parameter displays which of the alarms is active.
Only the condition with the highest priority will be displayed. This priority is
not the same as the MAINT_PRI parameter described above. This priority
is hard coded within the device and is not user configurable.
MAINT_ALM
An alarm indicating the device needs maintenance soon. If the condition is
ignored, the device will eventually fail.
3-13
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Advisory Alarms
An advisory alarm indicates informative conditions that do not have a direct
impact on the device's primary functions There are five parameters
associated with ADVISE_ALARMS, they are described below.
ADVISE_ENABLED
The ADVISE_ENABLED parameter contains a list of informative
conditions that do not have a direct impact on the device's primary
functions. Below is a list of the advisories with the highest priority first.
1. NV Writes Deferred
2. Body Temperature Degraded
3. PlantWeb Alert Simulate is Active
ADVISE_MASK
The ADVISE_MASK parameter will mask any of the failed conditions listed
in ADVISE_ENABLED. A bit on means the condition is masked out from
ADVISE_PRI
ADVISE_PRI designates the alarming priority of the ADVISE_ALM, see
Table 3-4 on page 3-12. The default is 0 and the recommended values are
1 or 2.
ADVISE_ACTIVE
The ADVISE_ACTIVE parameter displays which of the advisories is
active. Only the advisory with the highest priority will be displayed. This
priority is not the same as the ADVISE_PRI parameter described above.
This priority is hard coded within the device and is not user configurable.
ADVISE_ALM
ADVISE_ALM is an alarm indicating advisory alarms. These conditions do
not have a direct impact on the process or device integrity.
3-14
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Recommended Actions RECOMMENDED_ACTION

for PlantWeb Alerts The RECOMMENDED_ACTION parameter displays a text string that will give
a recommended course of action to take based on which type and which
specific event of the PlantWeb alerts are active.
Table 3-5.
RB.RECOMMENDED_ACTION Failed/Maint/Advise Recommended Action
Alarm Type Active Event Text String
PlantWeb Alerts
None None No action required
Body Temperature One of the two body temperature sensors has

Advisory
Degraded failed, device remains operational.
Transducer Blocks There are three types of transducer blocks that allow the user to view and
manage the channel information. These blocks are:
• Measurement Transducer Block (MTB) – see “Measurement
Transducer Block (MTB)” on page 3-17.
• Sensor Transducer Block (STB), one for each of the eight sensors
– see “Sensor Transducer Block (STB)” on page 3-21.
• Differential Transducer Block (DTB), one for each sensor pair. The DTB
can be configured to any pairs of sensors with compatible units
– see “Differential Transducer Block (DTB)” on page 3-22.
These Transducer blocks contain specific temperature measurement data,
including:
• Sensor Type
• Engineering Units
• Damping
• Temperature Compensation
• Diagnostics
Figure 3-1. Transducer Block

Structure
Measurement Transducer Block (MTB)
(used for normal operations)
Differential
Sensor Transducer Blocks Transducer Blocks
STB1 STB2 STB3 STB4 STB5 STB6 STB7 STB8 DTB1 DTB2 DTB3 DTB4
Used for Configuration and Calibration
3-15
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Transducer Block Channel Definitions

The 848T supports multiple sensor inputs. Each input has a channel assigned
to it allowing an AI or MAI Function Blocks to be linked to that input. The
channels for the 848T are as follows:
Table 3-6. Channel Definitions

for the 848T Channel Description Channel Description
1 Sensor One (STB 1) 7 Sensor Seven (STB 7)
2 Sensor Two (STB 2) 8 Sensor Eight (STB 8)
3 Sensor Three (STB 3) 9 Differential Sensor 1 (DTB 1)
4 Sensor Four (STB 4) 10 Differential Sensor 2 (DTB 2)
5 Sensor Five (STB 5) 11 Differential Sensor 3 (DTB 3)
6 Sensor Six (STB 6) 12 Differential Sensor 4 (DTB 4)
13 Body Temperature
Transducer Block Errors

The following conditions are reported in the BLOCK_ERR and XD_ERROR
parameters. Conditions in bold are inactive for the transducer block and are
given only for reference.
Table 3-7. Block/Transducer

Error Condition Number, Name, and Description
0 Other(1)
1 Block configuration error
2 Link configuration error
3 Simulate active
4 Local override
5 Device fault state set
6 Device needs maintenance soon
BLOCK_ERR

8 Output failure
9 Memory failure
10 Lost static data
11 Lost NV data
12 Readback check failed
13 Device needs maintenance now
14 Power up: The device was just powered up
15 Out of service: The actual mode is out of service
16 Unspecified error: An unidentified error occurred
17 General error: A genera error that cannot be specified below occurred

18 Calibration error: An error occurred during calibration of the device or a
calibration error was detected during normal operations.
19 Configuration error: An error occurred during configuration of the device or a
configuration error was detected during normal operations.
XD_ERROR
20 Electronics failure: An electrical component failed

21 Mechanical failure: A mechanical component failed
22 I/O failure: An I/O failure occurred
23 Data Integrity Error: Data stored in the device is no longer valid due to a
non-volatile memory checksum failure, a data verify after write failure, etc.
24 Software error: The software has detected an error due to an improper
interrupt service routine, an arithmetic overflow, a watchdog time-out, etc.
25 Algorithm error: The algorithm used in the transducer block produced an error
due to overflow, data reasonableness failure, etc.
(1) If BLOCK_ERR is “other,” then see XD_ERROR.
3-16
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Transducer Block Modes
The transducer block supports two modes of operation as defined by the
MODE_BLK parameter:
Automatic (Auto)
The block outputs reflect the analog input measurement.
The block is not processed. Channel outputs are not updated and the
status is set to Bad: Out of Service for each channel. The BLOCK_ERR
parameter shows Out of Service. In this mode, changes can be made to all
configurable parameters. The target mode of a block may be restricted to
one or more of the supported modes.
Transducer Block Alarm Detection
Alarms are not generated by the transducer block. By correctly handling the
status of the channel values, the down stream block (AI or MAI) will generate
the necessary alarms for the measurement. The error that generated this
alarm can be determined by looking at BLOCK-ERR and XD_ERROR.
Transducer Block Status Handling
Normally, the status of the output channels reflect the status of the
measurement value, the operating condition of the measurement electronics
card, and any active alarm conditions. In a transducer, PV reflects the value
and status quality of the output channels.
Measurement There is one MTB in the 848T, which allows the user to view all channel
Transducer Block (MTB) information. It provides STB and DTB summary information (primary value
and status) and contains the parameters that apply to all STBs and DTBs.
The MTB allows configuration of the sensor types and sensor response times.
Channel
1 S1
Compensation
Units/Ranging
Linearization
Temperature
Channel
A/D Signal 2 S2
Conversion Channel
3 S3
Channel
4 S4
Channel
5 S5
CJC Channel
6 S6
Damping
Channel
Diagnostics 7 S7
Channel
8 S8
Channel
9 DS1
Channel
10 DS2
Channel
11 DS3
Channel
12 DS4
848_A20A
Channel
13 TT
3-17
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

0 BLOCK
5 MODE_BLK The actual, target, permitted, and normal modes of the block. For further description, see
44 BODY_TEMP The terminal temperature at the device input terminals.
45 BODY_TEMP_UNIT The engineering units associated with the BODY_TEMP.
46 MODULE_SN The Serial Number of the A2D card
47 MODULE_HARDWARE_REV The hardware revision of the A2D card
48 MODULE_SOFTWARE_REV Software Revision of the A2D card
3-18
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

49 MODULE_STATUS A2D card Status
50 ASIC_REJECTION A configurable power line noise rejection setting
51 TB_COMMAND A2D Specific Commands
52 TB_SUMMARY_STATUS Status indicating A2D specific faults
53 SENSOR_SUMMARY_STATUS Status indicating Sensor specific faults
54 INTERMITTENT_DETECTION_THRE Allows the user to configure the amount of change in a sensor reading that causes it to be
SHOLD temporarily at its last value.
55 RESPONSE_TIME Active: Setting for fast inputs (analog). Accepts reading regardless of the amount of
change from the previous reading.
Deactivate: Sets the input to reject large transients unless confirmed by subsequent
readings (best for temperature measurements).
Changing the Sensor Configuration in the Main Transducer Block

how to change the sensor configuration in the main transducer block:
For each sensor 'n'

2. Set SENSOR_n_CONFIG.SENSOR to appropriate sensor type.
3. Set SENSOR_n_CONFIG.CONNECTION to appropriate value
(2-wire or 3-wire).
3-19
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Measurement Transducer Block Diagnostics

In addition to the BLOCK_ERR and XD_ERROR parameters, more detailed
information on the measurement status can be obtained via the
TB_SUMMARY_STATUS parameter in the Measurement Transducer Block.
Table 3-9 lists the potential errors and the possible corrective actions for the
given values. The corrective actions are in the order of increasing system
level compromises.
The first step should always be to reset the transmitter. If the error persists,
move to the next step as indicated in the table below.
Table 3-9. TB_SUMMARY_STA

TUS Descriptions and Value Name and Description Corrective Actions
Corrective Actions 0x01 Serious A/D error 1. Restart the device(1)
0x02 A/D Communication Error 1. Restart the device
0x04 Terminal Temperature Failure 1. Restart the processor
2. Call service center
0x08 Terminal Temperature Degraded (warning) 1. Monitor for terminal temperature
failure
0x10 Sensor/Differential Alert 1. Check wiring for sensor
connection (see “Sensor
Connections” on page 2-5).
2. Check sensor configuration in
transducer block.
3. Replace sensor
(1) Call the service center if the problem reoccurs.
3-20
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Sensor Transducer Block Each temperature input is supported by an STB that provides all the
(STB) parameters and methods necessary to configure and calibrate each individual
sensor. The 848T contains eight identical Sensor Transducer Blocks, one for
each available temperature input.
Table 3-10. Sensor Transducer Block Parameters

0 BLOCK
5 MODE_BLK The actual, target, permitted, and normal modes of the block.For further description, see
9 PRIMARY_VALUE_TYPE The type of measurement represented by PRIMARY_VALUE.
10 PRIMARY_VALUE The measured value and status available to the function block.
11 SENSOR_RANGE The high and low range limit values, the engineering units code and the number of digits
12 DAMPING Sampling interval used to smooth output using a 1st order linear filter. A value of 0 will
disable damping.
13 SENSOR_TYPE Reflects the type of sensor connected on PRIMARY_VALUE.
14 SENSOR_CONNECTION The number of wires for the temperature sensor.
15 SENSOR_SN The sensor serial number.
16 SENSOR_STATUS Indicates the fail mode of the sensor connected
17 RTD_2_WIRE_OFFSET User entered value for constant lead-wire resistance correction in 2-wire RTD and Ohm
sensor types.
18 CAL_POINT_HI The highest calibrated value.
19 CAL_POINT_LO The lowest calibrated value.
20 CAL_MIN_SPAN The minimum calibration span value allowed. This minimum span information is
necessary to ensure that when calibration is done, the two calibrated points are not too
close together.
21 CAL_UNIT The Device Description engineering units code index for the calibration values.
22 CAL_PT_HI_LIMIT Calibration Limit High
23 CAL_PT_LO_LIMIT Calibration Limit Low
24 CAL_MODE Allows the device to use an Active Calibrator to simulate sensor inputs (Unused)
25 CAL_METHOD The method of the last calibration.
26 CAL_INFO Notes from last calibration
27 CAL_DATE The date of the last calibration
28 CAL_STATUS Indicates if calibration was successful
Changing the Sensor Configuration in the Sensor Transducer Block

how to change the sensor configuration in a sensor transducer block:
2. Set SENSOR_TYPE to appropriate value.
3. Set SENSOR_CONNECTION to appropriate value (2-wire or 3-wire).
3-21
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Sensor Calibration in the Sensor Transducer Block

how to calibrate the sensor from the sensor transducer block:
2. Set CAL_UNIT to calibration unit.
3. Set CAL_METHOD to User Trim (seeTable 3-6 on page 3-16 for valid
values).
4. Set the input value of the sensor simulator to be within the range
defined by CAL_PT_LO_LIMIT and CAL_PT_HI_LIMIT.
5. Set CAL_POINT_LO (CAL_POINT_HI) to the value set at the sensor
simulator.
6. Read CAL_STATUS and wait until it reads “Trim Complete”
7. Repeat steps 3 to 5 if performing a two-point trim. Note that the
difference in values between CAL_POINT_LO and CAL_POINT_HI
must be greater than CAL_MIN_SPAN.
8. Set MODE_BLK.TARGET to AUTO.
Differential Transducer Each differential temperature measurement is supported by a DTB that

Block (DTB) provides all the parameters necessary to configure the measurement and
select sensors from which the differential measurement is based. The 848T
contains four identical Differential Transducer Blocks, one for each available
pair of temperature inputs.
Table 3-11. Differential Transducer Block Parameters

0 BLOCK
5 MODE_BLK The actual, target, permitted, and normal modes of the block. For further description,
see the Mode parameter formal model in FF-890.
9 DIFFERENTIAL_VALUE The measured value and status available to the function block.
10 DIFFERENTIAL_RANGE The high and low range limit values, the engineering units code and the number of digits
11 INPUT_1 Sensor Value to be used in differential calculation
12 INPUT_2 Sensor Value to be used in differential calculation.
13 DIFFERENTIAL_STATUS Indicates the fail mode of the differential measurement based on the sensors connected
14 DIFFERENTIAL_CALC Allows the Differential measurement to be absolute, input1 - input2, or None
3-22
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Section 4 Operation and Maintenance

Foundation Fieldbus Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4-1
Hardware Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4-3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4-4
Warnings

serious injury.
leakage may result.
terminals.
FOUNDATION FIELDBUS FOUNDATION fieldbus is an all-digital, serial, two-way, multidrop

INFORMATION communication protocol that interconnects devices such as transmitters and
valve controllers. It is a local area network (LAN) for instruments that enables
basic control and I/O to be moved to the field devices. The Model 848T uses
FOUNDATION fieldbus technology developed and supported by Emerson
Process Management and the other members of the independent Fieldbus
Foundation.
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Table 4-1. Block Diagram for the

Model 848T
Function Blocks
• AI, MAI, and ISEL Measurement
Transducer Block
• sensor and differential
temp
• terminal temp.
FOUNDATION Resource • sensor configuration
Fieldbus Block
Communications • physical
Stack device
information
Analog-to-Digital Differential
Signal Sensor Transducer Transducer Blocks
Conversion Blocks • diff temp
• sensor temp • configuration
• configuration
(8 sensors) Cold Junction • calibration
• diagnostics
Input-to-Output
Isolation
Commissioning To be able to setup, configure, and have it communicate with other devices on
(Addressing) a segment, a device must be assigned a permanent address. Unless
requested otherwise, it is assigned a temporary address when shipped from
the factory.
device to start up will use the assigned address (ex. Address 20). Each of the
other devices will be given one of the four available temporary addresses. If a
temporary address is not available, the device will be unavailable until a
temporary address becomes available.
permanent address.
4-2
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
HARDWARE The 848T has no moving parts and requires a minimal amount of scheduled
MAINTENANCE maintenance. If a malfunction is suspected, check for an external cause
before performing the diagnostics presented below.
Sensor Check To determine whether the sensor is causing the malfunction, connect a sensor
calibrator or simulator locally at the transmitter. Consult an Emerson Process
Management representative for additional temperature sensor and accessory
assistance.
Communication/Power If the transmitter does not communicate or provides an erratic output, check
Check for adequate voltage to the transmitter. The transmitter requires between 9.0
and 32.0 VDC at the terminals to operate with complete functionality. Check
for wire shorts, open circuits, and multiple grounds.
Resetting the There are two types of restarts available in the Resource Block. The following
Configuration section outlines the usage for each of these. For further information, see
RESTART in Table 3-2 on page 3-6.
(RESTART)
Restart Processor (cycling)
Performing a Restart Processor has the same effect as removing power from
the device and reapplying power.
Restart with Defaults
Performing a Restart with Defaults resets the static parameters for all of the
blocks to their initial state. This is commonly used to change the configuration
and/or control strategy of the device, including any custom configurations
done at the Rosemount factory.
4-3
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
TROUBLESHOOTING
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Symptom Possible Cause Corrective Action
Device does not show Network configuration parameters Set the network parameters of the LAS (host system) according to the FF
up in the live list are incorrect Communications Profile
ST: 8
MRD: 10
DLPDU PhLO: 4
MID: 7
TSC: 4 (1 ms)
T1: 1920000 (60 s)
T2: 5760000 (180 s)
T3: 480000 (15 s)
Network address is not in polled Set first Unpolled Node and Number of UnPolled Nodes so that the device
range address is within range
Power to the device is below the Increase the power to at least 9V
9 VDC minimum
Noise on the power / Verify terminators and power conditioners are within specification
communication is too high Verify that the shield is properly terminated and not grounded at both ends. It is
best to ground the shield at the power conditioner
Device that is acting as LAS Scheduler was not Ensure that all of the devices that are intended to be a Backup LAS are
a LAS does not send downloaded to the Backup LAS marked to receive the LAS schedule
out CD device
All devices go off live Live list must be reconstructed by Current link setting and configured links settings are different. Set the current
list and then return Backup LAS device link setting equal to the configured settings.
Resource Block
OOS
Memory Failure BLOCK_ERR will show the lost NV Data or Lost Static Data bit set. Restart the
device by setting RESTART to Processor. If the block error does not clear, call
the factory.
Block Alarms Will not Features FEATURES_SEL does not have Alerts enabled. Enable the report bit.
work
Notification LIM_NOTIFY is not high enough. Set equal to MAX_NOTIFY.
4-4
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Measurement Transducer Block Troubleshooting

Mode will not leave Target mode not set Set target mode to AUTO
OOS A/D board check sum error The A/D board has a a serious error. See “Measurement Transducer Block
Diagnostics for corrective action
One or more of the Measurement See “Measurement Transducer Block Diagnostics” on page 3-14
primary values or
differential value
statuses are BAD
Sensor Transducer Block Troubleshooting

OOS A/D board check sum error The A/D board has a checksum error. See Measurement Transducer Block
“Measurement Transducer Block Diagnostics” on page 3-14
Resource block The actual mode of the Resource block is in OOS. See Resource Block
The primary value is Measurement Look at the SENSOR_STATUS parameter (See Table 3-9 on page 3-15).
BAD See “Measurement Transducer Block Diagnostics” on page 3-14
Differential Transducer Block Troubleshooting

OOS A/D board check sum error The A/D board has a checksum error. See “Measurement Transducer Block
The differential value Measurement Component Sensor is OOS
status is BAD Look at the DIFFERENTIAL_STATUS parameter (See
DIFFERENTIAL_STATUS in Table 3-10 on page 3-17).
See “Measurement Transducer Block Diagnostics” on page 3-14
4-5
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
4-6
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Appendix A Reference Data
Functional Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page A-1

Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page A-3
Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page A-4
Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page A-4
Dimensional Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page A-7
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page A-11
FUNCTIONAL Inputs
SPECIFICATIONS Eight independently configurable channels including combinations of 2- and
3-wire RTDs, thermocouples, mV, and Ω inputs.
4-20 mA inputs using optional connector(s).
All sensor terminals are rated to 42.4 VDC.
Outputs
Manchester-encoded digital signal that conforms to IEC 1158-2 and
ISA 50.02.
Status
If self-diagnostics detect a sensor burnout or a transmitter failure, the status of
the measurement will be updated accordingly.
Ambient Temperature Limits

–40 to 185 °F (–40 to 85 °C)
Isolation
Input/output isolation is tested to 500 VAC rms (707 VDC). Input/input
isolation between each sensor input connector is tested to 500 VAC rms (707
VDC). Input/input isolation between sensors on the same input connector is 3
VAC at 50 – 60 Hz, 1.5 VDC.
Power Supply
Powered over FOUNDATION fieldbus with standard fieldbus power supplies.
The transmitter operates between 9.0 and 32.0 V dc, 22 mA maximum.
(Transmitter power terminals are rated to 42.4 V dc.)
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
The transient protector (option code T1) helps to prevent damage to the
transmitter from transients induced on the loop wiring by lightening, welding,
heavy electrical equipment, or switch gears. This option is installed at the
factory for the Rosemount 848T and is not intended for field installation.
ASME B 16.5 (ANSI)/IEEE C62.41-1991
(IEEE 587), Location Categories A2, B3.
6 kV / 3 kA peak (1.2 x 50 μS Wave 8 x 20 μS Combination Wave)
6 kV / 0.5 kA peak (100 kHz Ring Wave)
4 kV peak EFT (5 x 50 nS Electrical Fast Transient)
Update Time
Approximately 1.5 seconds to read all eight inputs.
Humidity Limits
0–100% non-condensing relative humidity
Turn-on Time
Performance within specifications is achieved in less than 50 seconds after
power is applied to the transmitter.
Alarms
The AI and ISEL function blocks allow the user to configure the alarms to
HI-HI, HI, LO, or LO-LO with a variety of priority levels and hysteresis settings.
Backup Link Active Scheduler (LAS)

The transmitter is classified as a device link master, which means it can
function as a Link Active Scheduler (LAS) if the current link master device fails
or is removed from the segment.
The host or other configuration tool is used to download the schedule for the
application to the link master device. In the absence of a primary link master,
the transmitter will claim the LAS and provide permanent control for the H1
segment.
FOUNDATION Fieldbus Parameters

Schedule Entries 25
Links 30
Virtual Communications Relationships (VCR) 20
A-2
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Mounting
The Rosemount 848T can be mounted directly onto a DIN rail or it can be
ordered with an optional junction box. When using the optional junction box,
the transmitter can be mounted onto a panel or to a 2-in. pipe stand (with
option code B6).
Entries for Optional Junction Box

No entry
• Used for custom fittings
Cable Gland
• 9 x M20 nickel-plated brass glands for 7.5–11.9 mm unarmored cable
Conduit
• 5 plugged 0.86-in. diameter holes suitable for installing 1/2-in. NPT fittings.
Materials of Construction for Optional Junction Box

Junction Box Type Paint
Aluminum Epoxy Resin
Plastic NA
Stainless Steel NA
Weight
Assembly Weight
oz lb kg
Rosemount 848T only 9.60 0.60 0.27
Aluminum(1) 78.2 4.89 2.22
Plastic (1) 58.1 3.68 1.65
Stainless Steel (1) 77.0 4.81 2.18
(1) Add 35.2 oz (2.2 lb, 0.998 kg) for nickel-plated brass glands
Environmental Ratings
NEMA 4X, CSA Enclosure Type 4X, and IP66 with optional junction box.
A-3
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
FUNCTION BLOCKS
Analog Input (AI)
• Processes the measurement and makes it available on the
fieldbus segment.
• Allows filtering, alarming, and engineering unit changes.
Input Selector (ISEL)
• Used to select between inputs and generate an output using specific
selection strategies such as minimum, maximum, midpoint, or average
temperature.
• Since the temperature value always contains the measurement status, this
block allows the selection to be restricted to the first “good” measurement.
Multiple Analog Input Block (MAI)
• The MAI block allows the eight AI blocks to be multiplexed together so
they serve as one function block on the H1 segment, resulting in greater
network efficiency.
PERFORMANCE The transmitter maintains a specification conformance of at least ±3.

SPECIFICATIONS
Stability
• ±0.1% of reading or 0.1 °C (0.18 °F), whichever is greater, for 2 years
for RTDs.
• ±0.1% of reading or 0.1 °C (0.18 °F), whichever is greater, for 1 year for
thermocouples.
Self Calibration
The transmitter’s analog-to-digital circuitry automatically self-calibrates for
each temperature update by comparing the dynamic measurement to
extremely stable and accurate internal reference elements.
Vibration Effect
Transmitters are tested to the following vibration conditions with no effect
on performance:
Frequency Acceleration
10 - 60 Hz 0.21 mm peak displacement
60 - 2000 Hz 3g
A-4
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
CE Electromagnetic Compatibility Compliance Testing
Meets the criteria under IEC 61326 Amendment 1, 2000:
Emissions
• 30–230 MHz, 30 dB (uV/m) at 10 m
• 230–1000 MHz, 37 dB (uV/m) at 10 m
Susceptibility
• ESD • 4 kV contact discharge
• 8 kV air discharge
• Radiated • 80 – 1000 MHz at 10 V/m AM
• Burst • 1 kV
• Surge • 1 kV line–to-ground
• Conducted • 150 kHz to 80 MHz at 3V
• Magnetic • 50 Hz at 30 A/m
Accuracy
TABLE 1. Input Options/Accuracy

Input Ranges Accuracy Over Range(s)
Sensor Option Sensor Reference °C °F °C °F
2- and 3-Wire RTDs
Pt 100 ( = 0.00385) IEC 751; = 0.00385, 1995 –200 to 850 –328 to 1562 ± 0.30 ± 0.54
Pt 100 ( = 0.003916) JIS 1604, 1981 –200 to 645 –328 to 1193 ± 0.30 ± 0.54
Pt 200 IEC 751; = 0.00385, 1995 –200 to 850 –328 to 1562 ± 0.54 ± 0.98
Pt 500 IEC 751; = 0.00385, 1995 –200 to 850 –328 to 1562 ± 0.38 ± 0.68
Pt 1000 IEC 751; = 0.00385, 1995 –200 to 300 –328 to 572 ± 0.40 ± 0.72
Ni 120 Edison Curve No. 7 –70 to 300 –94 to 572 ± 0.30 ± 0.54
Cu 10 Edison Copper Winding No. 15 –50 to 250 –58 to 482 ± 3.20 ± 5.76
Thermocouples—Cold Junction Adds + 0.5 °C to Listed Accuracy
NIST Type B (Accuracy varies NIST Monograph 175 100 to 300 212 to 572 ± 6.00 ± 10.80
according to input range) 301 to 1820 573 to 3308 ± 1.54 ± 2.78
NIST Type E NIST Monograph 175 –50 to 1000 –58 to 1832 ± 0.40 ± 0.72
NIST Type J NIST Monograph 175 –180 to 760 –292 to 1400 ± 0.70 ± 1.26
NIST Type K NIST Monograph 175 –180 to 1372 –292 to 2502 ± 1.00 ± 1.80
NIST Type N NIST Monograph 175 –200 to 1300 –328 to 2372 ± 1.00 ± 1.80
NIST Type R NIST Monograph 175 0 to 1768 32 to 3214 ± 1.50 ± 2.70
NIST Type S NIST Monograph 175 0 to 1768 32 to 3214 ± 1.40 ± 2.52
NIST Type T NIST Monograph 175 –200 to 400 –328 to 752 ± 0.70 ± 1.26
DIN L DIN 43710 –200 to 900 –328 to 1652 ± 0.70 ± 1.26
DIN U DIN 43710 –200 to 600 –328 to 1112 ± 1.70 ± 1.26
w5Re26 ASTME 988-96 0 to 2000 32 to 3632 ± 1.60 ± 2.88
Millivolt Input(1)—Not approved for use with CSA Option Code I6 –10 to 100 mV ± 0.05 mV
2- and 3-Wire Ohm Input 0 to 2000 ohms ± 0.90 ohm
Multipoint Sensors(2)
(1) 4–20 mA inputs are scaled to 20 – 100 mV.
(2) Multipoint (up to 8 points) thermocouples and RTDs are available for purchase with the Rosemount 848T. Input ranges and accuracy for these sensors will
depend on the specific multipoint sensor chosen. For more information, contact your local Rosemount representative.
Accuracy Notes
Differential capability exists between any two sensor types:
For all differential configurations, the input range is X to +Y where
X = Sensor 1 minimum - Sensor 2 max.
Y = Sensor 1 maximum - Sensor 2 min.
A-5
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Accuracy for differential configurations:

If sensor types are similar (for example, both RTDs or both thermocouples),
the accuracy = 1.5 times worst case accuracy of either sensor type. If sensor
types are dissimilar (for example, one RTD and one thermocouple), the
accuracy = Sensor 1 Accuracy + Sensor 2 Accuracy.
Ambient Temperature Effect

Transmitters may be installed in locations where the ambient temperature is
between –40 and 85 °C (–40 and 185 °F).
TABLE 2. Ambient Temperature Effects

Accuracy per 1.0 °C (1.8 °F) Change in Ambient
NIST Type Temperature(1)C Temperature Range (°C)
RTD
Pt 100 (α = 0.00385) • 0.003 °C (0.0054 °F) NA
Pt 100 (α = 0.003916) • 0.003 °C (0.0054 °F) NA
Pt 500, Pt 1000, Ni 120 • 0.003 °C (0.0054 °F) NA
Pt 200 • 0.004 °C (0.0072 °F) NA
Cu 10 • 0.03 °C (0.054 °F) NA
Thermocouple (R = the value of the reading) NA
Type B • 0.014 °C • R ≥ 1000
• 0.032 °C - (0.0025% of (R - 300)) • 300 ≤ R < 1000
• 0.054 °C - (0.011% of (R - 100)) • 100 ≤ R < 300
Type E • 0.005 °C + (0.00043% of R) • All
Type J, DIN Type L • 0.0054 °C + (0.00029% of R) • R≥0
• 0.0054 °C + (0.0025% of |R|) • R<0
Type K • 0.0061 °C + (0.00054% of R) • R≥0
• 0.0061 °C + (0.0025% of |R|) • R<0
Type N • 0.0068 °C + (0.00036% of R) • All
Type R, Type S • 0.016 °C • R ≥ 200
• 0.023 °C - (0.0036% of R) • R < 200
Type T, DIN Type U • 0.0064 °C • R≥0
• 0.0064 °C - (0.0043% of |R|) • R<0
Millivolt 0.0005 mV NA
2- and 3-wire Ohm 0.0084 ohms NA
(1) Change in ambient is in reference to the calibration temperature of the transmitter (20 °C (68 °F) typical from the factory).
A-6
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Ambient Temperature Notes
Examples:
When using a Pt 100 (a = 0.00385) sensor input and the transmitter is at 40
°C ambient temperature, temperature effects would be:
0.003 °C x (40 - 20) = 0.06 °C.
Worst case error would be:
Sensor Accuracy + Temperature Effects = 0.30 °C + 0.06 = 0.36°C.
Total Probable Error =
0.30 2 + 0.06 2 = °C
Analog to Fieldbus Performance

4– 20 mA inputs are scaled to 20 – 100 mV.
Accuracy(1):0.0625% of span
Temperature Effect: [0.002% of reading + 0.000625%
of span] per 1.0 °C change in Ambient Temperature.
(1) To obtain accuracy, the mV input must be calibrated while
using the optional analog connector.
DIMENSIONAL Junction Boxes with no entries (option codes JP1, JA1, and JS1)– external
DRAWINGS dimensions are the same as those outlined for the other junction box
materials in this section.
Rosemount 848T
Top View 3-D View Side View

1.7
848_848A66A, 00848-4010_1, 00848-4014_2.EPS

Security Switch Simulation Switch (43)
6.7
(170)
3.7
(93)
Removable Wiring
Connection
A-7
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Aluminum/Plastic Junction Box—Cable Gland (option codes JA2 and JP2)
Top View 3-D View

10.24 (260)
Ground Screw
Side View
Front View
848_848A48A
2.44 (62) 7.84 (199.2)
1.57 (40)
1.73 (44) 6.30 (160)
4.41 (112)
2.28 (58)
3.78 (96)
1.10 (28)
Stainless Steel Junction Box—Cable Gland (option code JS2)
Top View 3-D View

9.91 (231)
7.7 (196)
Ground Screw
848_848A49A

1.8 (46) 9.14 (232.2)
1.1 (28) 7.72 (196)
1.73 (44)
6.61 (168)
4.0 (102)
2.4 (62)
1.8 (47)
1.2 (30)
A-8
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Aluminum/Plastic Junction Box—Conduit Entry (option codes JA3 and JP3)
Top View 3-D View

10.2 (260)

157 (40)
2.44 (62)
10.2 (260)
848_848A50A
3.5 (89)
1.7 (42)
Five Plugged 0.86-in. diameter

holes suitable for installing 1/2-in.
NPT fittings
Stainless Steel Junction Box—Conduit Entry (option code JS3)
Top View 3-D View

9.1 (231)
7.7 (196)
Ground Screw
Front View
1.4 (35) Side View
1.1 (27) 2.8 (70) 1.2 (30) 848_848A51A
4.0 (102)
2.4 (62)
1.6 (42) 1.8 (4.7)
0.06 (1.5)
Five Plugged 0.86-in. diameter holes suitable for installing 1/2-in. NPT fittings
A-9
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Mounting Options
10.2 4.5
848_848A52A, B, 53A, B
5.1 (260) 6.6 (167) fully
(130) assembled (114)
7.5 (190) fully

assembled

848_848A54A, 55A
A-10
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
ORDERING
INFORMATION
848T Eight Input Temperature Transmitter
Code Communications Protocol
F FOUNDATION™ fieldbus digital signal (includes 8 AI and 4 ISEL function blocks, and Backup Link Active Scheduler)
Rosemount Junction
Code Product Certifications(1) Box required?
I5 FM Intrinsic Safety and Non-Incendive No
IE FM FISCO (Fieldbus Intrinsically Safe Concept) and Non-incendive Class I, Division 2 No
N5 FM Class I, Division 2 Dust Ignition Proof Yes
I6 CSA Intrinsic Safety and Non-Incendive No
IF CSA FISCO (Fieldbus Intrinsically Safe Concept) and Suitable for Class I, Division 2 No
I1 ATEX Intrinsic Safety No
IA ATEX FISCO (Fieldbus Intrinsically Safe Concept) No
N1 ATEX Type n Yes
NC ATEX Type n Component No(2)
ND ATEX Dust Ignition Proof Yes
I7 IEXEx Intrinsic Safety (Consult Factory) No
N7 IEXEx Type n (Consult Factory) No(3)
IG IECEx FISCO (Fieldbus Intrinsically Safe Concept) No
I2 CEPEL Intrinsic Safety No
NA No Approval No
Code Input Types
S001 RTDs and Thermocouples
S002(4) RTDs, Thermocouples, and 4–20 mA
Code Options
T1 Transient Protection
Mounting Kit Options
B6 Universal Mounting Bracket for 2-in. pipe mounting and for panel mounting – SST bracket and bolts
Non Explosion-Proof Junction Box
Plastic Junction Box
JP1 No Entries
JP2 Cable Glands (9 x M20 nickel-plated brass glands for 7.5–11.9 mm unarmored cable)
JP3 Conduit Entries (5 plugged holes, suitable for installing 1/2-in. NPT fittings)
Aluminum Junction Box
JA1 No Entries
JA2 Cable Glands (9 x M20 nickel-plated brass glands for 7.5–11.9 mm unarmored cable)
JA3 Conduit Entries (5 plugged holes, suitable for installing 1/2-in. NPT fittings)
Stainless Steel Junction Box
JS1 No Entries
JS2 Cable Glands (9 x M20 nickel-plated brass glands for 7.5–11.9 mm unarmored cable)
JS3 Conduit Entries (5 plugged holes, suitable for installing 1/2-in. NPT fittings)
A-11
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

Custom Software Configuration Request
C1 Factory configuration of date, descriptor, and message fields (CDS required)
Configuration(5) Options
F5 50 Hz Line Voltage Filter
Special Temperature Test
LT Test to -60°F (-51.1°C)
Typical Model Number: 848T F I5 S001 T1 B6 JA2
(1) Consult factory for availability.
(2) The Rosemount 848T ordered with option code NC is not approved as a stand-alone unit. Additional system certification is required.
(3) The Rosemount 848T must be installed so it is protected to at least the requirements of IP54; All listed Junction Boxes fulfill this requirement.
(4) Not available with product certifications.
(5) Configuration is the same for all eight inputs.
A-12
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Appendix B Product Certificates
Hazardous Locations Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page B-1

Intrinsically Safe and Non-Incendive Installations . . . . . page B-6
Installation Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page B-7
HAZARDOUS
LOCATIONS
CERTIFICATES
North American Factory Mutual (FM) Approvals

Approvals I5 Intrinsically Safety and Non-Incendive
Intrinsically Safe for use in Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B,C, D; when
installed per Rosemount drawing 00848-4402.
Temperature Code:
T4(Tamb = – 40 to 60 °C)
for use with non-incendive field wiring) when installed in accordance with
Rosemount Drawing 00848-4402.
Temperature Code:
T4A (Tamb = –40 to 85 °C)
T5 (Tamb = –40 to 70 °C)
Table B-1. FM Approved Entity Parameters

Power/Bus Sensor
Ui = 30 V Uo = 12.02 V
Ii = 300 mA Io = 13.6 mA
Pi = 1.3 W Po = 0.04 W
Ci = 2.1nF Ca = 1.36 μF
Li = 0 La = 160 mH
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
IE FISCO (Fieldbus Intrinsically Safe Concept) Intrinsic Safety

Intrinsically safe for use in Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B,C, D; when
installed in accordance with Rosemount Drawing 00848-4402.
Temperature Code:
T4(Tamb = – 40 to 60 °C)
for use with non-incendive field wiring); when installed in accordance
with Rosemount Drawing 00848-4402.
Temperature Code:
T4A (Tamb = –40 to 85 °C)
T5 (Tamb = –40 to 70 °C)

Power/Bus Sensor
Ui = 17.5 V Uo = 12.02 V
Ii = 380 mA Io = 13.6 mA
Pi = 5.32 W Po = 0.04W
Ci = 2.1nF Ca = 1.36 μF
Li = 0 La = 160 mH
N5 Dust Ignition-Proof Dust Ignition Proof

For use in Class II, III, Division 1, Groups E, F, G. Class I, Division 2,
Groups A, B, C, D; when installed in accordance with Rosemount
Drawing 00848-4402.
Temperature Code:
T4A (Tamb = –40 to 85 °C)
T5 (Tamb = –40 to 70 °C)
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Approvals

I6 Intrinsic Safety and Non-Incendive
Temperature Code:
T3C (Tamb = –50 to 60 °C)
Suitable for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D. Rated 42.4 VDC max.

Power/Bus Sensor
Ui = 30 V Uo = 12.02 V
Ii = 300 mA Io = 11.8 mA
Ci = 2.1nF Ca = 1.36 μF
Li = 0 La = 225 mH
B-2
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
IF FISCO (Fieldbus Intrinsically Safe Concept) Intrinsic Safety
Temperature Code:
T3C (Tamb = –50 to 60 °C)
Suitable for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D.Rated 42.4 VDC max.

Power/Bus Sensor
Ui = 17.5 V Uo = 12.02 V
Ii = 380 mA Io = 11.8 mA
Ci = 2.1nF Ca = 1.36 μF
Li = 0 La = 225 mH
European Approvals CENELEC Approvals

I1 Intrinsic Safety
ATEX Marking II 1 G
1180

Power/Bus Sensor
Ui = 30 V Uo = 12.5 V
Ii = 300 mA Io = 66 mA
Pi = 1.3 W Po = 40 mW
Ci = 0 Ci = 0
Li = 0 Li = 0

apparatus.
IA FISCO (Fieldbus Intrinsically Safe Concept) Intrinsic Safety
ATEX Marking II 1 G
1180

Power/Bus Sensor
Ui = 17.5 V Uo = 12.5 V
Ii = 380 mA Io = 66 mA
Pi = 5.32 W Po = 40 mW
Ci = 0 Ci = 0
Li = 0 Li = 0
B-3
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

apparatus.
N1 CENELEC Type n
ATEX Marking II 3 G
Power/Bus Sensor
Ui = 42.4 V Uo = 5 V
Ci = 0 Io = 2.5 mA
Li = 0 Co = 1000 μF
Lo = 1000 mH

1. Provisions shall be made, external to the apparatus, to prevent the rated
voltage (42.4 V dc) being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than
40%.
NC CENELEC Type n Component
Certification Number: BAS01ATEX3198U
ATEX Marking II 3 G
1. The component must be housed in a suitably certified enclosure.
2. Provision shall be made, external to the component, to prevent the rated
voltage (42.4V d.c.) being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than
40%.TBD
ND CENELEC Dust Ignition Proof
ATEX Marking II 1 D
T90C (Tamb = – 40 to 65 °C) IP66
B-4
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
1. The user must ensure that the maximum rated voltage and current (42.2
volts, 22 mA, DC) are not exceeded. All connections to other apparatus or
associated apparatus shall have control over this voltage and current
equivalent to a category “ib” circuit according to EN50020.
2. Component approved EEx e cable entries must be used which maintain the
ingress protection of the enclosure to at least IP66.
3. Any unused cable entry holes must be filled with component approved EEx
e blanking plugs.
Australian Approvals
Standard Australia Quality Assurance Service (SAA)

NOTE
Consult factory for SAA availability.
I7 Intrinsic Safety
Ex ia IIC
N7 Type n
Ex n IIC
Brazilian Approval
Centro de Pesquisas de Energia Eletrica (CEPEL) Approval
NOTE
Consult factory for CEPEL availability.
I2 Intrinsic Safety
BR-Ex ia IIC T4
B-5
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
INTRINSICALLY SAFE AND NON-INCENDIVE INSTALLATIONS
Zone 2 Zone 1 Zone 0

(category 3) (category 2) (category 1)
Approval Safe Area Division 2 Division 1

GAS INSTALLATIONS
I5, I6, I1, Approved I.S. or

I7, IE, IA FISCO barrier
848T without
enclosure
Non-approved
N1, N7 power supply
848T with enclosure
N5 Non-approved
power supply
848T with enclosure
Approved
I5, I6, IE non-incendive
power supply
or barrier
848T without enclosure
DUST INSTALLATIONS
N5, ND Non-approved
power supply
848T with enclosure
Standard cable
Division 2 wiring
B-6
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
INSTALLATION The installation guidelines presented by the drawings must be followed in

DRAWINGS order to maintain certified ratings for installed transmitters.
Factory Mutual Intrinsic Safety/ FISCO Installation Drawing
Canadian Standards Association Intrinsic Safety/FISCO Installation Drawing
B-7
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Figure B-1. FM Intrinsic Safety/ FISCO
B-8
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
B-9
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
B-10
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Figure B-2. CSA Intrinsic Safety/ FISCO
B-11
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
B-12
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
B-13
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
B-14
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Appendix C FOUNDATION™ Fieldbus

Technology
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page C-1
Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page C-1
Device Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page C-3
Block Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page C-3
Network Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page C-4
OVERVIEW FOUNDATION fieldbus is an all-digital, serial, two-way, multidrop

communication protocol that interconnects devices such as transmitters,
sensors, actuators, and valve controllers. Fieldbus is a Local Area Network
(LAN) for instruments that are used in both process and manufacturing
automation, having the built-in capability to distribute the control applications
across the network. The fieldbus environment is the base level group of digital
networks and the hierarchy of plant networks.
The fieldbus retains the desirable features of the 4–20 mA analog system,
including standardized physical interface to the wire, bus-powered devices on
a single pair of wires, and intrinsic safety options. It also enables the following
capabilities:
• Increased capabilities due to full digital communication.
• Reduced wiring and wire terminations due to multiple devices on one
pair of wires.
• Increased supplier selection due to interoperability
• Reduced loading on control room equipment due to the distribution of
some control and input/output functions to field devices.
Fieldbus devices work together to provide I/O and control for automated
processes and operations. The Fieldbus Foundation provides a framework for
describing these systems as a collection of physical devices interconnected
by a fieldbus network. One of the ways that the physical devices are used is to
perform their portion of the total system operation by implementing one or
more function blocks.
FUNCTION BLOCKS Function blocks perform process control functions, such as analog input (AI)
and analog output (AO) functions as well as proportional-integral-derivative
(PID) functions. The standard function blocks provide a common structure for
defining function block inputs, outputs, control parameters, events, alarms,
and modes, and combining them into a process that can be implemented
within a single device or over the fieldbus network. This simplifies the
identification of characteristics that are common to function blocks.
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
The Fieldbus Foundation has established the function blocks by defining a

small set of parameters used in all function blocks called universal
parameters. The Foundation has also defined a standard set of function block
classes, such as input, output, control, and calculation blocks. Each of these
classes has a small set of parameters established for it. They have also
published definitions for transducer blocks commonly used with standard
function blocks. Examples include temperature, pressure, level, and flow
transducer blocks.
The Foundation specifications and definitions allow vendors to add their own
parameters by importing and subclassing specified classes. This approach
permits extending function block definitions as new requirements are
discovered and as technology advances.
Figure C-1 illustrates the internal structure of a function block. When
execution begins, input parameter values from other blocks are snapped-in by
the block. The input snap process ensures that these values do not change
during the block execution. New values received for these parameters do not
affect the snapped values and will not be used by the function block during
the current execution.
Figure C-1. Function

Block Internal Structure
Input Events Execution Output Events
Control
Input Processing Output Output

Input
Snap Algorithm Snap Parameter
Parameter
FIELDBUS_0012
Linkages Linkages
Status Status
Once the inputs are snapped, the algorithm operates on them, generating
outputs as it progresses. Algorithm executions are controlled through the
setting of contained parameters. Contained parameters are internal to
function blocks and do not appear as normal input and output parameters.
However, they may be accessed and modified remotely, as specified by the
function block.
Input events may affect the operation of the algorithm. An execution control
function regulates the receipt of input events and the generation of output
events during execution of the algorithm. Upon completion of the algorithm,
the data internal to the block is saved for use in the next execution, and the
output data is snapped, releasing it for use by other function blocks.
A block is a tagged logical processing unit. The tag is the name of the block.
System management services locate a block by its tag. Thus the service
personnel need only know the tag of the block to access or change the
appropriate block parameters.
Function blocks are also capable of performing short-term data collection and
storage for reviewing their behavior.
C-2
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS Device Descriptions (DD) are specified tool definitions that are associated
with the Resource and Transducer Blocks. Device descriptions provide the
definition and description of the function blocks and their parameters.
To promote consistency of definition and understanding, descriptive
information, such as data type and length, is maintained in the device
description. Device Descriptions are written using an open language called
the Device Description Language (DDL). Parameter transfers between
function blocks can be easily verified because all parameters are described
using the same language. Once written, the device description can be stored
on an external medium, such as a CD-ROM or diskette. Users can then read
the device description from the external medium. The use of an open
language in the device description permits interoperability of function blocks
within devices from various vendors. Additionally, human interface devices,
such as operator consoles and computers, do not have to be programmed
specifically for each type of device on the bus. Instead their displays and
interactions with devices are driven from the device descriptions.
Device descriptions may also include a set of processing routines called
methods. Methods provide a procedure for accessing and manipulating
parameters within a device.
BLOCK OPERATION In addition to function blocks, fieldbus devices contain two other block types
to support the function blocks. These are the resource block and the
transducer block.
Instrument- Specific Resource Blocks

Function Blocks Resource blocks contain the hardware–specific characteristics associated
with a device; they have no input or output parameters. The algorithm within a
resource block monitors and controls the general operation of the physical
device hardware. The execution of this algorithm is dependent on the
characteristics of the physical device, as defined by the manufacturer. As a
result, the algorithm may cause the generation of events. There is only one
resource block defined for a device. For example, when the mode of a
resource block is “Out of Service (OOS),” it impacts all of the other blocks.
Transducer Blocks
Transducer blocks connect function blocks to local input/output functions.
They read sensor hardware and write to effector (actuator) hardware. This
permits the transducer block to execute as frequently as necessary to obtain
good data from sensors and ensure proper writes to the actuator without
burdening the function blocks that use the data. The transducer block also
isolates the function block from the vendor–specific characteristics of the
physical I/O.
Alerts When an alert occurs, execution control sends an event notification and waits
a specified period of time for an acknowledgment to be received. This occurs
even if the condition that caused the alert no longer exists. If the
acknowledgment is not received within the pre-specified time-out period, the
event notification is retransmitted, assuring that alert messages are not lost.
C-3
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Two types of alerts are defined for the block, events and alarms. Events are
used to report a status change when a block leaves a particular state, such as
when a parameter crosses a threshold. Alarms not only report a status
change when a block leaves a particular state, but also report when it returns
back to that state.
NETWORK Figure C-2 illustrates a simple fieldbus network consisting

COMMUNICATION of a single segment (link).
Figure C-2. Simple, Single-Link

Fieldbus Network Fieldbus Link
FIELDBUS_0013
LAS
Link Master
Basic Devices and/or link master devices
Link Active Scheduler All links have one Link Active Scheduler (LAS). The LAS operates as the bus
(LAS) arbiter for the link. The LAS does the following:
• recognizes and adds new devices to the link.
• removes non-responsive devices from the link.
• distributes Data Link Time (DL) and Link Scheduling Time (LS) on the
link. DL is a network-wide time periodically distributed by the LAS to
synchronize all device clocks on the bus. LS time is a link-specific time
represented as an offset from DL. It is used to indicate when the LAS
on each link begins and repeats its schedule. It is used by system
management to synchronize function block execution with the data
transfers scheduled by the LAS.
• polls devices for process loop data at scheduled transmission times.
• distributes a priority-driven token to devices between
scheduled transmissions.
Any device on the link may become the LAS. The devices that are capable of
becoming the LAS are called Link Master devices (LM). All other devices are
referred to as basic devices. When a segment first starts up, or upon failure of
the existing LAS, the link master devices on the segment bid to become the
LAS. The link master that wins the bid begins operating as the LAS
immediately upon completion of the bidding process. Link masters that do not
become the LAS act as basic devices. However, the link masters can act as
LAS backups by monitoring the link for failure of the LAS and then bidding to
become the LAS when a LAS failure is detected.
Only one device can communicate at a time. Permission to communicate on
the bus is controlled by a centralized token passed between devices by the
LAS. Only the device with the token can communicate. The LAS maintains a
list of all devices that need access to the bus. This list is called the “Live List.”
Two types of tokens are used by the LAS. A time-critical token, Compel Data
(CD), is sent by the LAS according to a schedule. A non-time critical token,
pass token (PT), is sent by the LAS to each device in ascending numerical
order according to address.
C-4
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
There may be many LM devices on a segment but only the LAS is actively
controlling communication traffic. The remaining LM devices on the segment
are in a stand-by state, ready to take over if the primary LAS fails. This is
achieved by constantly monitoring the communication traffic on the bus and
determining if activity is not present. Since there can be multiple LM devices
on the segment when the primary LAS fails, the device with the lowest node
address will become the primary LAS and take control of the bus. Using this
strategy, multiple LAS failures can be handled with no loss of the LAS
capability of the communications bus.
LAS Parameters
There are many bus communication parameters but only a few are used. For
standard RS-232 communications, the configuration parameters are baud
rate, start / stop bits, and parity. The key parameters for H1 Fieldbus are as
follows.
• Slot Time (ST) – Used during the bus master election process. It is the
maximum amount of time permitted for device A to send a message to
device B. Slot time is a parameter which defines a worst case delay
which includes internal delay in the sending device and the receiving
device. Increasing the value of ST slows down bus traffic because a
LAS device must wait longer prior to determining that the LM is down.
• Minimum Inter-PDU Delay (MID) – The minimum gap between two
messages on the fieldbus segment or it is the amount of time between
the last byte of one message and the first byte of the next message.
The units of the MID are octets. An octet is 256 μs, hence the units for
MID are approximately 1/4 ms. This would mean an MID of 16 would
specify approximately a minimum of 4 ms between messages on the
Fieldbus. Increasing the value of MID slows down bus traffic because a
larger “gap” between messages occurs.
• Maximum Response (MRD) – Defines the maximum amount of time
permitted to respond to an immediate response request, e.g. CD, PT.
When a published value is requested using the CD command, the MRD
defines how long before the device publishes the data. Increasing this
parameter will slow down the bus traffic by decreasing how fast CDs
can be put onto the network. The MRD is measured in units of ST.
• Time Synchronization Class (TSC) – A variable that defines how long
the device can estimate its time before drifting out of specific limits. The
LM will periodically send out a time update messages to synchronize
devices on the segment. Decreasing the parameter number increases
the number of times that time distribution messages must be published,
increasing bus traffic and overhead for the LM device. See Figure C-3.
Figure C-3. LAS Parameter

diagram
C MID
FB 1 D Data MID FB 2
MID x ST
C-5
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Backup LAS
A LM device is one that has the ability to control the communications on the
bus. The LAS is the LM capable device that is currently in control of the bus.
While there can be many LM devices acting as backups, there can only be
one LAS. The LAS is typically a host system but for stand-alone applications,
a device may be providing the role of primary LAS.
Addressing To setup, configure, and communicate with other devices on a segment, a

device must be assigned a permanent address. Unless requested otherwise,
it is assigned a temporary address when shipped from the factory.
Fieldbus uses addresses between 0 and 255. Addresses 0 through 15 are
reserved for group addressing and for use by the data link layer.
device to start up will use the assigned address. Each of the other devices will
be given one of the four temporary addresses. If a temporary address is not
available, the device will be unavailable until a temporary address is available.
permanent address.
Scheduled Transfers Information is transferred between devices over the fieldbus using three
different types of reporting.
Publisher/Subscriber
This type of reporting is used to transfer critical process loop data, such as the
process variable. The data producers (publishers) post the data in a buffer
that is transmitted to the subscriber, when the publisher receives the Compel
Data (CD). The buffer contains only one copy of the data. New data
completely overwrites previous data. Updates to published data are
transferred simultaneously to all subscribers in a single broadcast. Transfers
of this type can be scheduled on a precisely periodic basis.
Report Distribution
This type of reporting is used to broadcast and multicast event and trend
reports. The destination address may be predefined so that all reports are
sent to the same address, or it may be provided separately with each report.
Transfers of this type are queued. They are delivered to the receivers in the
order transmitted, although there may be gaps due to corrupted transfers.
These transfers are unscheduled and occur between scheduled transfers at a
given priority.
Client/Server
This type of reporting is used for request/response exchanges between pairs
of devices. Like Report Distribution reporting, the transfers are queued,
unscheduled, and prioritized. Queued means the messages are sent and
received in the order submitted for transmission, according to their priority,
without overwriting previous messages. However, unlike Report Distribution,
these transfers are flow controlled and employ a retransmission procedure to
recover from corrupted transfers.
C-6
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Figure C-4 diagrams the method of scheduled data transfer. Scheduled data
transfers are typically used for the regular cyclic transfer of process loop data
between devices on the fieldbus. Scheduled transfers use publisher/
subscriber type of reporting for data transfer. The LAS maintains a list of
transmit times for all publishers in all devices that need to be cyclically
transmitted. When it is time for a device to publish data, the LAS issues a CD
message to the device. Upon receipt of the CD, the device broadcasts or
“publishes” the data to all devices on the fieldbus. Any device that is
configured to receive the data is called a “subscriber.”
Figure C-4. Scheduled Data

Transfer
LAS
Schedule
X, Y, Z DT(A)
FIELDBUS_0013
A B C A D A
CD(X,A)
P S P S P S

LAS = Link Active Scheduler
P = Publisher
S = Subscriber
CD = Compel Data
DT = Data Transfer Packet
Unscheduled Transfers Figure C-5 diagrams an unscheduled transfer. Unscheduled transfers are
used for things like user-initiated changes, including set point changes, mode
changes, tuning changes, and upload/download. Unscheduled transfers use
either report distribution or client/server type of reporting for transferring data.
All of the devices on the fieldbus are given a chance to send unscheduled
messages between transmissions of scheduled data. The LAS grants
permission to a device to use the fieldbus by issuing a pass token (PT)
message to the device. When the device receives the PT, it is allowed to send
messages until it has finished or until the “maximum token hold time” has
expired, whichever is the shorter time. The message may be sent to a single
destination or to multiple destinations.
Figure C-5. Unscheduled Data

Transfer
LAS
PT(Z)
Schedule
X, Y, Z DT(M)
FIELDBUS_0015A
A B C A D A
M M
P S P S P S

P = Publisher S = Subscriber PT = Pass Token M = Message
C-7
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Function Block Figure C-6 shows an example of a link schedule. A single iteration of the
Scheduling link-wide schedule is called the macrocycle. When the system is configured
and the function blocks are linked, a master link-wide schedule is created for
the LAS. Each device maintains its portion of the link-wide schedule, known
as the Function Block Schedule. The Function Block Schedule indicates when
the function blocks for the device are to be executed. The scheduled
execution time for each function block is represented as an offset from the
beginning of the macrocycle start time.
Figure C-6. Example Link

Schedule Showing Scheduled
and Unscheduled Macrocycle Start Time Sequence
Communication Offset from macrocycle Repeats
start time = 0 for AI
Execution
Device 1
AI AI
Scheduled time = 20 for AI Communication
Communication
Unscheduled
Communication
time = 30 for PID Execution
Device 2 PID AO PID AO

time = 50 for AO Execution
FIELDBUS_0016
Macrocycle
To support synchronization of schedules, periodically Link Scheduling (LS)

time is distributed. The beginning of the macrocycle represents a common
starting time for all Function Block schedules on a link and for the LAS
link-wide schedule. This permits function block executions and their
corresponding data transfers to be synchronized in time.
C-8
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Appendix D Function Blocks
Analog Input (AI) Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page D-1

Multiple Analog Input (MAI) Function Block . . . . . . . . . . page D-9
Input Selector Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page D-15
ANALOG INPUT (AI) The Analog Input (AI) function block processes field device measurements
FUNCTION BLOCK and makes them available to other function blocks. The output value from the
AI block is in engineering units and contains a status indicating the quality of
the measurement. The measuring device may have several measurements or
derived values available in different channels. Use the channel number to
OUT_D
define the variable that the AI block processes.
AI OUT The AI block supports alarming, signal scaling, signal filtering, signal status
output parameter (OUT) reflects the process variable (PV) value and status.
In Manual mode, OUT may be set manually. The Manual mode is reflected on
Out = The block output value and status the output status. A discrete output (OUT_D) is provided to indicate whether a
Out_D = Discrete output that signals a selected alarm condition is active. Alarm detection is based on the OUT value
selected alarm condition and user specified alarm limits.

01 ST_REV None The revision level of the static data associated with the function block. The
changed.
03 STRATEGY None The strategy field can be used to identify a grouping of blocks. This data is not
shown.
07 PV EU of XD_SCALE The process variable used in block execution.
08 OUT EU of OUT_SCALE The block output value and status.
or XD_SCALE if in
direct L_TYPE
09 SIMULATE None A group of data that contains the current transducer value and status, the simulated
transducer value and status, and the enable/disable bit.
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

10 XD_SCALE None The high and low scale values, engineering units code, and number of digits to
the right of the decimal point associated with the channel input value. The
XD_SCALE units code must match the units code of the measurement channel in
the transducer block. If the units do not match, the block will not transition to MAN
or AUTO.
11 OUT_SCALE None The high and low scale values, engineering units code, and number of digits to the
right of the decimal point associated with OUT when L_TYPE is not direct.
12 GRANT_DENY None Options for controlling access of host computers and local control panels to
supported in the AI block are the following:
Propagate fault forward
Uncertain if limited
Bad if limited
Uncertain if Manual mode.
15 CHANNEL None The CHANNEL value is used to select the measurement value. Configure the
CHANNEL parameter before configuring the XD_SCALE parameter. Refer to Table
3-5 on page 3-11.
16 L_TYPE None Linearization type. Determines whether the field value is used directly (Direct), is
Root).
17 LOW_CUT % If percentage value of transducer input fails below this, PV = 0.
in the PV or OUT value.
19 FIELD_VAL Percent The value and status from the transducer block or from the simulated input when
20 UPDATE_EVT None This alert is generated by any change to the static data.
21 BLOCK_ALM None The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system
alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status parameter. As soon as
the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may
be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed.
22 ALARM_SUM None The summary alarm is used for all process alarms in the block. The cause of the
alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the
Active status in the Status parameter. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared
by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the
Active status, if the subcode has changed.
23 ACK_OPTION None Used to set auto acknowledgment of alarms.
active alarm condition clears.
25 HI_HI_PRI None The priority of the HI HI alarm.
26 HI_HI_LIM EU of PV_SCALE The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the HI HI alarm condition.
27 HI_PRI None The priority of the HI alarm.
28 HI_LIM EU of PV_SCALE The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the HI alarm condition.
29 LO_PRI None The priority of the LO alarm.
30 LO_LIM EU of PV_SCALE The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the LO alarm condition.
31 LO_LO_PRI None The priority of the LO LO alarm.
32 LO_LO_LIM EU of PV_SCALE The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the LO LO alarm condition.
33 HI_HI_ALM None The HI HI alarm data, which includes a value of the alarm, a timestamp of
34 HI_ALM None The HI alarm data, which includes a value of the alarm, a timestamp of occurrence
D-2
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

36 LO_LO_ALM None The LO LO alarm data, which includes a value of the alarm, a timestamp of
37 OUT_D None Discrete output to indicate a selected alarm condition.
be set.
39 STDDEV % of OUT Range Standard deviation of the measurement for 100 macrocycles.
40 CAP_STDDEV % of OUT Range Capability standard deviation, the best deviation that can be achieved.
the output value, or enable simulation through the configuration tool and
manually enter a value for the measurement value and its status. In
simulation, the ENABLE jumper must be set on the field device.
NOTE
value or the status.

Function Block Timing Diagram
OUT (mode in man)
OUT (mode in auto)
PV
63% of Change
FIELD_VAL FIELDBUS-FBUS_03A
Time (seconds)
PV_FTIME
D-3
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

Function Block Schematic
Analog
Measurement
ALM_SEL
Access
Analog HI_HI_LIM
Meas. HI_LIM Alarm
OUT_D
LO_LO_LIM Detection
LO_LIM
CHANNEL
ALARM_HYS
LOW_CUT
OUT
Cutoff Filter PV Status

Convert Calc.
SIMULATE
FIELDBUS-FBUS_02A
L_TYPE PV_FTIME MODE
FIELD_VAL IO_OPTS
STATUS_OPTS
OUT_SCALE
XD_SCALE
OUT = Block output value and status
OUT_D = Discrete output that signals a selected alarm condition
Filtering
filter time constant (in seconds) using the PV_FTIME parameter. Set the filter
time constant to zero to disable the filter feature.
Signal Conversion
parameter. View the converted signal (in percent of XD_SCALE) through the
FIELD_VAL parameter.
100 × ( Channel Value – EU*@0% )
FIELD_VAL = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
( – ) * XD_SCALE values
Choose from direct, indirect, or indirect square root signal conversion with the
L_TYPE parameter.
Direct
PV Channel Value
Indirect
Indirect signal conversion converts the signal linearly to the accessed channel
input value (or the simulated value when simulation is enabled) from its
specified range (XD_SCALE) to the range and units of the PV and OUT
parameters (OUT_SCALE).
PV = ⎛
FIELD_VAL⎞
× ( EU**@100% EU**@0% ) + EU**@0%
⎝ 100 ⎠
** OUT_SCALE values
D-4
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
PV ⎛ FIELD_VAL⎞ × ( EU**@100% EU**@0% ) EU**@0%

⎝ 100 ⎠
value of zero is used for the converted value (PV). This option eliminates false
readings when the differential pressure measurement is close to zero and it
may be useful with zero-based measurement devices such as flowmeters.
NOTE
Low Cutoff is the only I/O option supported by the AI block. Set the I/O option
when the block is OOS.
Block Errors
in bold are inactive for the AI block and are given here for reference.

0 Other
parameter is not configured, or CHANNEL = zero.
its execution.
4 Local Override
9 Memory Failure
10 Lost Static Data
11 Lost NV Data
14 Power Up
D-5
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Modes
The AI Function Block supports three modes of operation as defined by the
MODE_BLK parameter:
Manual (Man)
The value of the block output (OUT) may be set manually
Automatic (Auto)
OUT reflects the analog input measurement or the simulated value when
The block is not processed. FIELD_VAL and PV are not updated and the
OUT status is set to Bad: Out of Service. The BLOCK_ERR parameter
shows Out of Service. In this mode, changes can be made to all
Alarm Detection
set. The types of block error for the AI block are defined above.
Process Alarm detection is based on the OUT value. Configure the alarm
limits of the following standard alarms:
• High (HI_LIM)
• Low (LO_LIM)
• Low low (LO_LO_LIM)
To avoid alarm chatter when the variable is oscillating around the alarm limit,
an alarm hysteresis in percent of the PV span can be set using the
parameters:
• HI_PRI
• HI_HI_PRI
• LO_PRI
• LO_LO_PRI

Number Description
alarm is corrected.
D-6
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Status Handling
OUT status is Good.
If the sensor limit exceeds the high or low range, PV status is set high or low
and EU range status is set to uncertain.
BAD if Limited
the sensor limits.
Sets the OUT status quality to Uncertain when the value is higher or lower
Manual
NOTES
1. The instrument must be in OOS mode to set the status option.
2. The AI block only supports the BAD if Limited option, uncertain if limited,
and uncertain if manual.
Advanced Features
The AI function block provided with Rosemount fieldbus devices provides
added capability through the addition of the following parameters:
ALARM_TYPE
Allows one or more of the process alarm conditions detected by the AI
function block to be used in setting its OUT_D parameter.
OUT_D
Discrete output of the AI function block based on the detection of process
alarm condition(s). This parameter may be linked to other function blocks
that require a discrete input based on the detected alarm condition.
STD_DEV and CAP_STDDEV
Diagnostic parameters that can be used to determine the variability of the
process.
D-7
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
The configuration of the AI function block and its associated output channels
depends on the specific application. A typical configuration for the AI block
involves the following parameters:
CHANNEL
The device supports more than one measurement, so verify that the
Refer to Table 3-5 on page 3-11 for a listing of available channels on the
848T.
L_TYPE
Select Direct when the measurement is in the desired engineering units
for the block output. Select Indirect when converting the measured
SCALING
OUT_SCALE is only used when in indirect or indirect square root.
AI Block
Troubleshooting
Configuration error BLOCK_ERR will show the configuration error bit set. The following are parameters that
must be set before the block is allowed out of OOS:
• CHANNEL must be set to a valid value and cannot be left at initial value of 0.
• XD_SCALE.UNITS_INDEX must match the units in the transducer block
channel value. Setting the units in the AI block automatically sets them in the
XD_BLOCK.
• L_TYPE must be set to Direct, Indirect, or Indirect Square Root and cannot be left at
initial value of 0.
corrective action.
block to execute.
alarms will not work. Notification LIM_NOTIFY is not high enough. Set equal to MAX_NOTIFY. Alarm not linked to host.
Status Options STATUS_OPTS has Propagate Fault Forward bit set. This should be cleared to cause an
alarm to occur.
Value of output does not Linearization Type L_TYPE must be set to Direct, Indirect, or Indirect Square Root and cannot be left at
make sense initial value of 0.
• XD_SCALE.EU0 and EU100 should match that of the transducer block
channel value.
• Both STB on each asic used must by in auto.
or LO_LO_LIMIT Values
D-8
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
MULTIPLE ANALOG The Multiple Analog Input (MAI) function block has the ability to process up to
INPUT (MAI) FUNCTION eight field device measurements and make them available to other function
blocks. The output values from the MAI block are in engineering units and
BLOCK
contain a status indicating the quality of the measurement. The measuring
device may have several measurements or derived values available in
OUT_1
different channels. Use the channel numbers to define the variables that the
OUT_2 MAI block processes.
OUT_3
MAI OUT_4
1A The MAI block supports signal scaling, signal filtering, signal status
OUT_5 output parameters (OUT_1 to OUT_8) reflects the process variable (PV)
OUT_6 values and status. In Manual mode, OUT may be set manually. The Manual
OUT_7 mode is reflected on the output status. Table lists the MAI block parameters
OUT_8 and their units of measure, descriptions, and index numbers.
Out1 = The block output value and status

for the first channel.

changed.
3 STRATEGY None The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of blocks. This data is not
shown.
7 CHANNEL None Allows for custom channel setting. Valid values include:
0: Unitialized
1: Channels 1 to 8 (index values 27 to 34 can only be set to their corresponding
channel number, i.e. CHANNEL_X=X)
2: Custom settings (index values 27 to 34 can be configured for any valid channel
as defined by the DD)
8, 9, 10, 11, OUT (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, EU of OUT_SCALE The block output value and status
12, 13, 14, 6, 7, 8)
15
17 BLOCK_ALM None The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware connection feature, or
system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field.
The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status parameter. As
soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block
may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed.
18 SIMULATE None A group of data that contains the current sensor transducer value and status, and
the enable/disable bit.
D-9
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

19 XD_SCALE None The high and low scale values, engineering units code and number of digits to the
right of the decimal point associated with the channel input value. The XD_SCALE
units code must match the units code of the measurement channel in the
transducer block. If the units do not match, the block will not transition to MAN or
AUTO. It will automatically change units in the STB block to the last one written.
Multiple blocks reading the same channel may conflict (only one unit type per
channel).
20 OUT_SCALE None The high and low scale values, engineering unit code and number of digits to the
right of the decimal point associated with OUT.
21 GRANT_DENY None Options for controlling access of host computers and local control panels for
supported in the MAI block are the following:
• Propagate fault forward
• Uncertain if limited
• Bad if limited
• Uncertain if manual mode
24 L_TYPE None Linearization type. Determines whether the field value is uses directly (Direct), is
Root)
25 LOW_CUT % If percentage value of the sensor transducer input falls below this, PV = 0
in the IN value.
27, 28, 29, CHANNEL_(1, 2, None The CHANNEL (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8) value is used to select the measurement
30, 31, 32, 3,4 5, 6, 7, 8) value. See Table D-4 on page D-6 for available channels. Configure the CHANNEL
33, 34 parameters to custom (2) before configuring the CHANNEL parameters.
35, 36, 37, STDDEV_(1, 2, 3, % of OUT Range Standard deviation of the corresponding measurement.
38, 39, 40, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8)
41, 42
43, 44, 45, CAP_STDDEV_(1 % of OUT Range Capability standard deviation, the best deviation that can be achieved.
46, 47, 48, , 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8)
49, 50
the output value or enable simulation through the configuration tool and
manually enter a value for the measurement value and its status (this single
value will apply to all outputs). In both cases, first set the ENABLE jumper on
the field device.
NOTE
OUT value or the status. The OUT values will all have the same value as
determined by the simulate value.
D-10
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Input Function Block Timing
Diagram
OUT (mode in man)
OUT (mode in auto)
PV
63% of Change
FIELDBUS-FBUS_03A
FIELD_VAL
Time (seconds)
PV_FTIME

Input Function Block Schematic OUT_1
XD_SCALE OUT_SCALE
OUT_2
Ch 1
Ch 2 Mode Logic OUT_3
Ch 3
Simulate
FIELDBUS-FBUS_54A
Ch 4 OUT_4
Ch 5 L_TYPE OUT_5
Ch 6 & Filter
Ch 7 OUT_6
Ch 8 OUT_7
OUT_8
Filtering
filter time constant (in seconds) using the PV_FTIME parameter (same value
applied to eight channels). Set the filter time constant to zero to disable the
filter feature.
Signal Conversion
parameter. Choose from direct, indirect, or indirect square root signal
conversion with the L_TYPE parameter.
Direct
PV Channel Value
Indirect
Indirect signal conversion converts the signal linearly to the accessed
channel input value (or the simulated value when simulation is enabled)
from its specified range (XD_SCALE) to the range and units of the PV and
OUT parameters (OUT_SCALE).
D-11
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

⎝ 100 ⎠


⎝ 100 ⎠
value of zero is used for the converted value (PV). This option is useful to
eliminate false readings when the differential temperature measurement is
close to zero, and it may also be useful with zero-based measurement
devices such as flowmeters.
NOTE
is the only I/O option supported by the MAI block. Set the I/O
option in Manual or Out of Service mode only.
Block Errors
in bold are inactive for the MAI block and are given for reference.

0 Other
parameter is not configured, or WRITE_CHECK = zero.
its execution.
4 Local Override
9 Memory Failure
10 Lost Static Data
11 Lost NV Data
14 Power Up
D-12
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Modes
The MAI Function Block supports three modes of operation as defined by the
MODE_BLK parameter:
Manual (Man)
The block output (OUT) may be set manually
Automatic (Auto)
OUT_1 to OUT_8 reflects the analog input measurement or the simulated
value when simulation is enabled.
The block is not processed. PV is not updated and the OUT status is set to
Bad: Out of Service. The BLOCK_ERR parameter shows Out of Service.
In this mode, changes can be made to all configurable parameters. The
target mode of a block may be restricted to one or more of the supported
modes.
Status Handling
OUT status is Good.
If the sensor limit exceeds the high or low side range, PV status is set high or
low and EU range status is set to uncertain.
BAD if Limited
the sensor limits.
sets the OUT status quality to Uncertain when the value is higher or lower
Manual
NOTES
1. The instrument must be OOS to set the status option.
2. The MAI block only supports the BAD if Limited option.
D-13
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
The intended use for this type of function block is for applications where the
sensor types and functionality of each channel (i.e. the simulate, scaling,
filtering, alarms type, and options) are the same.
The configuration of the MAI function block and its associated output
channels depends on the specific application. A typical configuration for the
MAI block involves the following parameters:
CHANNEL
If the device supports more than one measurement, verify that the
Refer to Table D-4 on page D-6 for a listing of available channels on the
848T.
L_TYPE
Select when the measurement is already in the desired engineering
units for the block output. Select when converting the measured
Select Indirect Square Root when the block I/O parameter value
represents a flow measurement made using differential pressure, and
when square root extraction is not performed by the transducer.
SCALING
MAI Block
Troubleshooting
Configuration error BLOCK_ERR will show the configuration error bit set. The following are
parameters that must be set before the block is allowed out of OOS:
• Initial value is 1.
• XD_SCALE.UNITS_INDEX must match the units in all the corresponding
sensor transducer blocks.
• L_TYPE must be set to Direct, Indirect, or Indirect Square Root and cannot be
left at initial value of 0.
Resource block The actual mode of the Resource block is OOS. See Resource Block Diagnostics
for corrective action.
Schedule Block is not scheduled and therefore cannot execute to go to Target Mode.
Typically, BLOCK_ERR will show “Power-Up” for all blocks that are not scheduled.
Schedule the block to execute.
alarms will not work. Notification LIM_NOTIFY is not high enough. Set equal to MAX_NOTIFY.
Status Options STATUS_OPTS has Propagate Fault Forward bit set. This should be cleared to
cause an alarm to occur.
Value of output does not Linearization Type L_TYPE must be set to Direct, Indirect, or Indirect Square Root and cannot be left
make sense at initial value of 0.
• XD_SCALE.EU0 and EU100 should match that of the corresponding sensor
transducer block.
• Both STBs in an ASIC must be set to auto. Best in 1, 2, 7, 8, ASICs in Auto for
thermocouples
D-14
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
INPUT SELECTOR The Input Selector (ISEL) function block can be used to select the first good,
FUNCTION BLOCK Hot Backup, maximum, minimum, or average of as many as eight input
values and place it at the output. The block supports signal status
propagation. There is process alarm detection in the Input Selector function
IN_1
IN_2
block. Table D-6 lists the ISEL block parameters and their descriptions, units
IN_3 of measure, and index numbers.
IN_4 OUT
IN_5
IN_6
IN_7 OUT_D
IN_8
DISABLE_1
DISABLE_2 SELECTED
DISABLE_3
DISABLE_4
6A
DISABLE_5
DISABLE_6
DISABLE_7
DISABLE_8 ISEL
OP_SELECT
IN (1-8) = Input
DISABLE (1-8) = Discrete input used to
disable the associated input channel
SELECTED = The selected
channel number
OUT = The block output and status
OUT_D = Discrete output that signals a
selected alarm condition

revision value will be incremented each time a static parameter value in the block
is changed.
3 STRATEGY None The strategy field can be used to identify groupings of blocks. This data is not checked
or processed by the block.
4 ALERT_KEY None The identification number of the plant unit. This information may be used in the host for
sorting alarms, etc.
components associated with a block. It is a bit string, so that multiple errors may
be shown.
7 OUT OUT_RANGE The primary analog value calculated as a result of executing the function block.
8 OUT_RANGE EU of OUT The engineering units code to be used in displaying the OUT parameter and
parameters which have the same scaling as OUT.
9 GRANT_DENY None Options for controlling access of host computers and local control panels to operating,
tuning, and alarm parameters of the block. Not used by device.
10 STATUS_OPTS None Allows the user to select options for status handling and processing.
11,1 2, 13, IN_(1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Determined by A connection input from another block
14, 25, 26, 6, 7, 8) source
27, 28
D-15
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

15, 16, 17, DISABLE_(1, 2, None A connection from another block that disables the associated input from the selection.
18, 29, 30, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8)
31, 32
19 SELECT_TYPE None Specifies input selection method. Methods available include: First Good, Minimum,
Maximum, Middle, Average, or Hot Backup.
20 MIN_GOOD None The minimum number of good inputs.
21 SELECTED None The selected input number (1 to 8) or the number of input used for the average output.
22 OP_SELECT None Overrides the algorithm to select 1 of the 8 inputs regardless of the selection type.
24 BLOCK_ALM None The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure, or system
alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status parameter. As soon as the
Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block may be reported
without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed.
33 AVG_USE None Number of parameters to use in the averaging calculation. For example, if AVG_USE is
4 and the number of connected inputs is 6, then the highest and lowest values would
be dropped prior to calculating the average. If AVG_USE is 2 and the number of
connected inputs is 7, then the two highest and lowest values would be dropped prior
to calculating the average and the average would be based on the middle three inputs.
34 ALARM_SUM None The current alert status, unacknowledged states, and disabled states of the alarms
associated with the function block.
35 ACK_OPTION None Used to set automatic acknowledgement of alarms.
active alarm condition clears
37 HI_HI-PRI None The priority of the HI HI alarm
38 HI_HI_LIM Percent The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the HI HI alarm condition.
39 HI_PRI None The priority of the HI alarm
40 HI_LIM EU of IN The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the HI alarm condition
41 LO_PRI None The priority of the LO alarm
42 LO_LIM EU of IN The setting of the alarm limit used to detect the LO alarm condition
43 LO_LO_PRI None The priority of the LO LO alarm
44 LO_LO_LIM EU of IN The setting for the alarm limit sued to detect the LO LO alarm condition
45 HI_HI_ALM None The HI HI alarm data, which includes a value of the alarm, a timestamp of occurrence
46 HI_ALM None The HI alarm data, which includes a value of the alarm, a timestamp of occurrence and
the state of the alarm
48 LO_LO_ALM None The LO LO alarm data, which includes a value of the alarm, a timestamp of occurrence
49 OUT_D None Discrete output to indicate a selected alarm value
be set.
D-16
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Functionality

Function Block Schematic OUT
IN_n
Mode Logic
DISABLE_n SELECTED
OP_SELECT OUT_D
Alarm
Selection
Logic
SELECT_TYPE
STATUS_OPTS
MIN_GOOD
FBUS_57A
Block Errors
in bold are inactive for the ISEL block and are given for reference.

0 Other: The output has a quality of uncertain.
1 Block Configuration Error: Select type is not configured
3 Simulate Active
4 Local Override
7 Input Failure/Process Variable has Bad Status: One of the inputs is Bad.
8 Output Failure
9 Memory Failure
10 Lost Static Data
11 Lost NV Data
D-17
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Modes
The ISEL function block supports three modes of operation as defined by the
MODE_BLK parameter:
Manual (Man)
The block output (OUT) may be set manually.
Automatic (Auto)
OUT reflects the selected value.
The block is not processed. The BLOCK_ERR parameter shows Out of
Service. The target mode of a block may be restricted to one or more of
the supported modes. In this mode, changes can be made to all
Alarm Detection
set. The type of block errors for the ISEL block are defined above.
Process Alarm detection is based on the OUT value. The alarm limits of the
following standard alarms can be configured:
• High (HI_LIM)
• Lo (LO_LIM)
• Lo low (LO_LO_LIM)
In order to avoid alarm chattering when the variable is oscillating around the
alarm limit, an alarm hysteresis in percent of the PV span can be set using the
parameters:
• HI_PRI
• HI_HI_PRI
• LO_PRI
• LO_LO_PRI

Number Description
alarm is corrected.
D-18
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Block Execution
The ISEL function block reads the values and status of up to eight inputs. To
specify which of the six available methods (algorithms) is used to select the
output, configure the selector type parameter (SELECT_TYPE) as follows:
• Max selects the maximum value of the inputs.
• Min selects the minimum value of the inputs.
• Avg calculates the average value of the inputs.
• Mid calculates the update for eight sensors.
• 1st Good selects the first available good input.
If the DISABLE_N is active, the associated input is not used in the
selection algorithm.
If an input is not connected, it is also not used in the algorithm.
If the OP_SELECT is set to a value between 1 and 8, the selection type logic
is overridden and the output value and status is set to the value and status of
the input selected by .
SELECTED will have the number of selected input unless the SELECT_TYPE
is mid, in which case it will take the average of the two middle values. Then
SELECTED will be set to “0” if there is an even number of inputs.
Status Handling
In Auto mode, reflects the value and status quality of the selected input.
If the number of inputs with Good status is less than MIN_GOOD, the output
status will be Bad.
In Man mode, the OUT status high and low limits are set to indicate that the
value is a constant and the OUT status is always Good.
Use Uncertain as Good
Sets the OUT status quality to Good when the selected input status is
Uncertain.
manual.
NOTE
The instrument must be to OOS to set the status option.
Use the ISEL function block to:
• Select the maximum temperature input from eight inputs and send it to
another function block (see Figure D-6)
• Calculate the average temperature of the eight inputs (see Figure D-7)
• Use only six of the eight inputs to calculate the average temperature.
D-19
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB

Function Block Application IN1 = 126 °F Input Selector
Example (SEL_TYPE = max) (ISEL) Function
IN2 = 118 °F Block
IN3 = 104 °F
IN5 = 112 °F
IN6 = 115 °F
FBUS_58A
IN7 = 130 °F
IN8 = 140 °F SEL_TYPE = max

Function Block Application
Example (SEL_TYPE = IN1 = 126 °F Input Selector
average) AVG_USE = 6 (ISEL) Function
IN2 = 118 °F Block
IN3 = 104 °F
IN5 = 112 °F
IN6 = 115 °F
FBUS_58A
IN7 = 130 °F AVG_USE = 6
IN8 = 140 °F SEL_TYPE = avg
To determine OUT for a 6-input reading, read all eight, sort in numerical order, drop the
highest and lowest values, and calculate the average.
107 112 115 118 126 130

118°F
6
ISEL Block
Troubleshooting
Configuration error BLOCK_ERR will show the configuration error bit set. SELECT_TYPE must be set to
a valid value and cannot be left at 0.
corrective action.
block to execute.
Status of output is BAD Inputs All inputs have Bad status
OP selected OP_SELECT is not set to 0 (or it is linked to an input that is not 0), and it points to an
input that is Bad.
Min good The number of Good inputs is less than MIN_GOOD.
Block is in OOS mode Change mode to Auto
Block alarms will not work. Features FEATURES_SEL in the resource block does not have Alerts enabled. Enable the
Alerts bit.
Notification LIM_NOTIFY in the resource block is not high enough. Set equal to MAX_NOTIFY.
Status Options STATUS_OPTS has Propagate Fault Forward bit set. This should be cleared to cause
an alarm to occur.
LO_LO_LIMIT
D-20
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Index
Numerics C Switch Location . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-Inch Pipe Stand Cable Glands Drawings
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 848T Analog Connector . . . . . . 2-6
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Analog Input Wiring . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
A
Conduit Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Block Internal Structure . . . . . . .C-2
Alarms
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Cable Gland Installation . . . . . 2-12
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Commissioning Tag . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Analog Input
Analog Transmitters . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Conduit Entries Installation . . . 2-12
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Analog Input Block . . . . . . . 3-6 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-7
Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Multiple Analog Input Block . 3-6 Sensor Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Analog Input Function Block . . . . . D-1
Sensor Transducer Block . . 3-6 Transducer Block Structure . . . 3-15
Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . D-7
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Transmitter Label . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Alarm Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Transmitter Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Application Information . . . . . . . D-8
Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Block Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Differential Sensor Blocks . . . . . 3-3 F
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Foundation Fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Monitoring Applications . . . . . . . 3-4 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Individual Points . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Block Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Single Selection . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
Indirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Instrument- Specific Blocks .C-3
Indirect Square Root . . . . . . . . D-5
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Restart Processor . . . . . . . . 4-3 Device Descriptions . . . . . . . . .C-3
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Restart with Defaults . . . . . . 4-3 Function Block Scheduling . . . .C-8
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Resource Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1
Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Link Active Scheduler . . . . . . . .C-4
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Network Communication . . . . . .C-4
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Scheduled Transfers . . . . . . . . .C-6
Millivolt Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Ohm Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Unscheduled Transfers . . . . . . .C-7
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1
RTD Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-1
B Thermocouple Inputs . . . . . . . . 2-5 Input Selector Function Block .D-15
Block Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Multiple Analog Input . . . . . . . .D-9
Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
D Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-8
Instrument Specific Blocks . . . . C-3
Damping
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 G
Device Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Differential Sensor Blocks Analog Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Grounded Thermocouple . . . . . 2-9
Differential Transducer Block Shielded Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Transmitter Enclosure . . . . . . . . 2-9
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Ungrounded mV . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
DIN Rail Ungrounded RTD/Ohm . . . . . . . 2-8
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Ungrounded Thermocouple . . . 2-8
Drawing
www.rosemount.com
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
H Panel with a Junction Box . . . . . 2-2 R

Hardware Multiple Analog Input Resource Block
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Alarm Detection . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Communication Check . . . . 4-3 Multiple Analog Input Block Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Power Check . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . D-14 Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Reset Configuration . . . . . . 4-3 Multiple Analog Input Function Block . Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Sensor Check . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 D-9 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Application Information . . . . . . D-14 Out of Service (OOS) . . . . 3-11
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
I
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12 PlantWeb Alerts
Input Selector Function Block . . . D-15
Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11 Recommended Actions . . . 3-15
Alarm Detection . . . . . . . . . . . D-18
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10 PlantWeb™ Alerts . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Application Information . . . . . . D-19
Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13 advisory alarms . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Block Execution . . . . . . . . . . . D-19
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13 failed_alarms . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13 maint_alarms . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17
Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . D-13 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18 S
Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . D-18 Scheduled Transfers . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Indirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15 Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Indirect Square Root . . . . . D-12
Status Handling . . . . . . . . . . . D-19 Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . D-20 Report Distribution . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Intrinsically Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 Subscriber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Non-Incendive . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 Security Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Using Cable Glands . . . . . . . . 2-12 N Senor
Using Conduit Entries . . . . . . . 2-12 Network Communication . . . . . . . . C-4 Connection Check . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6 Sensor
Function Block Scheduling . . . . C-8 Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
J
Link Active Scheduler . . . . . . . . C-4 Sensor Transducer Block
Junction Box
Scheduled Transfer . . . . . . . . . C-6 Change Sensor Configuration . 3-21
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Unscheduled Transfer . . . . . . . C-7 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
L O Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Link Active Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . C-4 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Backup LAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6 Sensor Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Foundation Fieldbus . . . . . . . . . C-1
LAS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5 Shield Wire
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
M Simulate Enable Switch . . . . . . . . 2-10
Maintenance Specifications
P performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-4
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Performance specifications . . . . . . A-4 Surges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Communication Check . . . . 4-3
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Power Check . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Reset Configuration . . . . . . 4-3
Sensor Check . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Simulate Enable . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Measurement Transducer Block . 3-17
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Monitoring Applications
Common Configurations . . . . . . 3-4
Individual Points . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Single Selection . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-Inch Pipe Stand . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
DIN Rail Without an Enclosure . 2-2
Index-2
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
T
Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Transducer Block
Alarm Detection . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Channel Definitions . . . . . . . . 3-16
Differential Transducer Block . 3-22
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Measurement Transducer Block . . .
3-17
Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Sensor Transducer Block . . . . 3-21
Status Handling . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Structure Diagram . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Transients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Transmitter
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Transmitter Wiring Diagram . . . . . 2-4
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Analog Input Function Block . . . D-8
Differential Transducer Block . . 4-5
Foundation Fieldbus . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Input Selector Function Block . D-20
Measurement Transducer Block 4-5
Multiple Analog Input Block . . D-14
Resource Block . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Sensor Transducer Block . . . . . 4-5
U
Unscheduled Transfers . . . . . . . . . C-7
W
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Communication Check . . . . . . . 4-3
Power Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Index-3
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
Index-4
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4697, Rev CB
August 2007
Rosemount and the Rosemount logotype are registered trademarks of Rosemount Inc.
PlantWeb is a registered trademark of one of the Emerson Process Management group of companies.
All other marks are the property of their respective owners.
Emerson Process Management

Rosemount Inc. Rosemount Temperature GmbH Emerson Process Management Asia
8200 Market Boulevard Frankenstrasse 21 Pacific Private Limited
Chanhassen, MN 55317 USA 63791 Karlstein 1 Pandan Crescent
T (U.S.) 1-800-999-9307 Germany Singapore 128461
T (International) (952) 906-8888 T 49 (6188) 992 0 T (65) 6777 8211
F (952) 949-7001 F 49 (6188) 992 112 F (65) 6777 0947
AP.RMT-Specialist@emersonprocess.com
www.rosemount.com
¢00809-0100-4697F¤
© 2007 Rosemount Inc. All rights reserved.
Rev. 12 G-F5100
FINAL MECHANICAL CHECK LIST
1-2006 12342
MCN2006-0001 1
DRIVE SERIAL NUMBER: 12342
Sign off by initialing and dating each check made. When the drive final mechanical check is
completed, both the FLSmidth Minerals S.A. serviceman and the installer/erector must sign and
date this check list, and return one copy of this check list for each WEMCO® drive unit furnished to
the FLSmmidth Minerals S.A. Project Management Department to ensure warranty coverage.
DORR-OLIVER EIMCO
CHECK REFERENCE INSTALLER SIGN OFF SERVICEMAN SIGN
OFF
Check drive to superstructure fasteners General Erection drawing,
are secure. (superstructure not by parts list, and the Drive
FLSmidth Minerals) Installation instructions in
the Erection And
Installation section of the
FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
instruction manual
Check drive motor for specified direction Maintenance instructions in
of rotation the FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
instruction manual and
Motor Drive Package
drawing
Check drive unit for specified direction of Maintenance instructions,
rotation WARNING: Tank must be Motor Drive Package and
cleared of debris, and drive, rake shaft, General Arrangement
rake arms and other moving parts free of drawings in the FLSmidth
obstructions before rotating the drive. Minerals S.A. instruction
Observe from outside the tank. manual
Check drive for maximum out-of-level Drive Final Leveling

tolerance of .005 inch [0.127 mm] in 12 instructions in the Erection
inches [304.8 mm] distance, using one And Installation section of
rake arm the FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
instruction manual
Check specified shims were used to final Drive Final Leveling
level the drive unit instructions in the Erection
And Installation section of
the FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
instruction manual
Check drive jackscrews are not Drive Final Leveling

supporting the drive instructions in the Erection
instruction manual
Check drive unit has been filled with oil to Drive Assembly drawing
specified level (marked on sight glass) and Drive Lubrication
instructions in the FLmidth
Minerals S.A.
instruction manual
Check drive unit has been filled with Drive Lubrication

specified oil type/viscosity instructions in the FlSmidth
Minerals S.A. instruction
manual
Check drive reducer has been filled with Manufacturer's instructions
specified quantity of oil or filled with oil to in the Accessory Equipment
specified level section of the FLSmidth
manual
Rev. 12 G-F5100
1-2006 12342
MCN2006-0001 2
DORR-OLIVER EIMCO
OFF
Check drive reducer oil type/viscosity Manufacturer's
instructions in the
Accessory Equipment
section of the FLSmidth
manual
Check drive motor bearing grease Manufacturer's
lubrication instructions in the
Accessory Equipment
manual
Check drive chain lubrication Drive Lubrication
instructions in the
instruction manual
Check LDM lifting device jackscrew Manufacturer's
assembly for specified type and quantity instructions in the
of lubricant Accessory Equipment
manual
Check LDM lifting device lift screw for Manufacturer's
specified type and quantity of lubricant instructions in the
Accessory Equipment
manual
LDM Lifting Device
Check LDM lifting device bearing
Lubrication instructions in
assembly for specified type and quantity
the FLSmidth Minerals
of lubricant
S.A. instruction manual
Check LDM lifting device gearmotor for Manufacturer's
specified type and quantity of lubricant instructions in the
Accessory Equipment
manual
WARNING page in the
general instruction
Check drive unit and drive reducer oil for
penetration of grit due to sandblasting
manual
WARNING page in the
general instruction
Check LDM lifting device and gearmotor
for penetration of grit due to sandblasting
manual
Check drive and driven sprockets for Installation and
specified alignment Maintenance instructions
in the FLSmidth Minerals
Check drive chain for proper tension

Maintenance instructions
in the FLsmidth Minerals
Check LDM lifting device torque coupling Manufacturer's
is properly aligned and secure instructions in the
Accessory Equipment
section
Rev. 12 G-F5100
1-2006 12342
MCN2006-0001 3
DORR-OLIVER EIMCO
OFF
Check drive motor wiring Manufacturer's
instructions in the
Accessory Equipment
manual, FLSmidth
Minerals S.A. Wiring
Diagrams and/or Control
Panel Schematics, if
furnished, in the
instruction manual. All
interconnecting wiring
must meet local electrical
codes
Check drive motor is wired so an Wiring Installation
automatic restarting of the motor cannot instructions in the
occur after a drive control shutdown, Erection And Installation
following a torque load instruction section of the
instruction manual
Check lift gearmotor wiring Manufacturer's

instructions Wiring
Diagrams and/or Control
Panel Schematics,liver
Eimco instruction manual.
All interconnecting wiring
must meet local electrical
codes
Check drive control wiring

Wiring Diagrams in the
instruction manual
Check wiring connection to the drive Wiring Installation
control to be sure it includes an instructions in the
appropriate fitting and drain (not by Erection And Installation
FLSmidth Minerals S.A.) to eliminate instruction section of the
water condensate FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
instruction manual
Check drive control for operation (Does Maintenance instructions

alarm work? Does lifting device actuate? in FLSmidth Minerals S.A
Does pointer move freely and return to instruction manual
zero torque?)
Check drive control cover is properly

Maintenance instructions
installed and secure
in FLSmidth Minerals S.A
instruction manual
Check LDM lifting device limit switches Lifting device limit switch
are properly set and secured setting in the Erection
And Installation
instructions section of the
FLSmidth Minerals S.A
instruction manual
Rev. 12 G-F5100
1-2006 12342
MCN2006-0001 4
DORR-OLIVER EIMCO
OFF
Check adapter shaft rake (center) shaft General Erection drawing,
connection for specified fasteners parts list, and the Center
Shaft Installation
Check labrynth seal installation. instructions in the Erection
instruction manual
Check rake (center) shaft for alignment Rake (Center) shaft

installation instructions in
the Erection And
instruction manual
Check adapter shaft to rake (center) Rake (Center) shaft

shaft connection fasteners are secure installation instructions in
the Erection And
instruction manual
Check LDM lifting device clevis to lift LDM lifting device

screw connection is secure installation in the Erection
And Installation instructions
manual
Check rake arms for final level Rake Arm Final Leveling
instructions in the Erection
instruction manual
Check chain guard is properly installed Motor Drive Package

and secure drawing in the FLSmidth
manual
Check LDM lifting device coupling guard LDM Lifting Device Motor
is properly installed and secure Drive Assembly drawing in
instruction manual
Drive Maintenance Warning

Check WARNING and CAUTION signs instructions and Motor
are properly installed and clearly visible Drive Package drawing in
and readable the FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
instruction manual
Check Lubrication Plate and Lubricant Drive Lubrication
Plate are properly installed and clearly instructions, Drive
visible and readable Assembly drawing and
Motor Drive Package
drawing in the FLSmidth
manual
Rev. 12 G-F5100
1-2006 12342
MCN2006-0001 5
DORR-OLIVER EIMCO
INSTALLER SIGN
CHECK REFERENCE SERVICEMAN SIGN
OFF
OFF
Storage Precautions in the
Check drive and LDM lifting device for GENERAL instruction section
specified final painting. Inspect painted of the FLSmidth Minerals S.A.
surfaces for deterioration of paint instruction manual
Check drive seals for paint contamination
Check all protective coverings applied for
sandblasting and/or painting have been
removed from the drive, drive motor and
reducer
Check all necessary reducer breathers Manufacturer's instructions in
are correctly installed the Accessory Equipment
manual
Check all protective coverings applied for
sandblasting and/or painting have been
removed from the LDM lifting device,
jackscrew assembly and gearmotor
Check labrynth seal installed properly
and is filled.
NOTES AND COMMENTS:
(Installer/Erector) (FLSmidth Minerals S.A

(Date) Representative)
(Date)

Manual Celdas 257

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Celdas 257

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Celdas 257

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Rev.

GENERAL INFORMATION Page No.

A. FLOTATION CELL INSTALLATION....................................................................................................9

MAINTENANCE Page No.

A. WEMCO SMARTCELL FLOTATION MACHINES .......................................................................46

MECHANICAL WARRANTY ......................................................................................................................60

DATA SHEET …………………………………………………………………………………………………..61

12342ME01DG001 (rev D) General Arrangement

Motor: Reliance ..................................................................................................................... TAB 1

Reducer: Flender .................................................................................................................. TAB 2

Actuator: SMC Pneumatics................................................................................................... TAB 3

Filter Regulator: Fisher Controls ........................................................................................... TAB 4

Ultra-Sonic Sensor: Endress & Hauser ................................................................................ TAB 5

Endress & Hauser Sensor Technical Information

FINAL MECHANICAL CHECKLIST

1. Receiving and Inspection

Notify FLSmidth Minerals S.A. within 7 days (maximum) in case of shortages or

2. Packing Boxes and Covers

3. Shipping Braces and Bars

4. Maintenance and Start-up Services

Experienced FLSmidth Minerals S.A. Engineers and service personnel are

They can instruct on proper operating and maintenance, advice on trouble

5. Parts and Repair Orders

b. Customer SO number: This is found on the Parts List Index and

When the equipment is not to be installed immediately, proper storage is

a. Store motors, if shipped separately, in a dry, ventilated building if

c. A suitable corrosion inhibitive agent should be applied to all surfaces

d. Check for the formation of rust, especially on bright or unpainted steel

e. Refer to Storage Of Rubber Products below.

7. Storage of Rubber Products

Rubber products in storage can be adversely affected by the following:

c. Rubber products should not be stored under conditions of high or low

d. The ideal storage temperature for rubber products is 50 to 70qF (10 to

e. To protect against the adverse effects of ozone, rubber products should

f. Whenever feasible, rubber products should be stored in their original

g. Since certain rodents and insects thrive on rubber products, adequate

8. Field Painting and Welding

If a protective coating (paint, rubber, etc.) is to be field applied to the mechanism,

Refer to "Safety Procedures" on a following page.

No personnel, authorized or unauthorized, should depend wholly on safety devices to prevent

WARNING: If the safety procedures given in this manual are compromised or

PERSONNEL SAFETY WARNINGS

REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS AND SUPPLIES (not by FLSmidth Minerals S.A.)

FLOTATION CELL INSTALLATION

b. The foundation tank must be level within ±3 mm (±1/8") overall. A level

2. Tank and Component Lifting

WARNING: Use extreme care when lifting structural components, to prevent

WARNING: STAND CLEAR AS THE EQUIPMENT IS LIFTED

CAUTION: All rigging and lifting must be done by experienced personnel

a. The tank cells, internal components, feed box, connection boxes,

c. Before each component or assembly is removed from the carrier, check to

WARNING: Do not remove the internal blocking, bracing or any other

d. Use multiple point lifting whenever possible.

e. When lifting structural members of this equipment, avoid twisting or

h. Do not bounce the equipment or move it in jerks and never allow it to

3. Cell Tank Field Assembly

a. Referring to the above lifting procedures, position the tank bottom

1 - Radial launder 3 – Weir 5 – Level